002547 04_DOMAIN_System_Command_Reference_Jun87 04 DOMAIN System Command Reference Jun87
002547-04_DOMAIN_System_Command_Reference_Jun87 002547-04_DOMAIN_System_Command_Reference_Jun87
User Manual: 002547-04_DOMAIN_System_Command_Reference_Jun87
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 522
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
(J
DOMAIN System
Command Reference
Order No. 002547
Revision 04
o
o
o
Apollo Computer Inc.
330 Billerica Road
Chelmsford, MA 01824
o
Oopyright
© 1987 Apollo Oomputer Inc.
All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
First Printing:
Latest Printing:
Updated:
May, 1983
December, 1986
June, 1987
This document was produced using the SORIBE document preparation system.
registered trademark of Unilogic, Ltd.)
(SORIBE is a
APOLLO and Domain are registered trademarks of Apollo Oomputer Inc.
3DGR, Aegis, D3M, DGR, Domain/Access, Domain/Ada, Domain/Bridge, Domain/O,
Domain/OomOontroller, Domain/OommonLISP, Domain/CORE, Domain/Debug, Domain/DFL,
Domain/Dialogue, Domain/DQC, Domain/IX, Domain/Laser-26, Domain/LISP, Domain/PAK,
Domain/POC, Domain/POO-Remote, Domain/POI, Domain/SNA, Domain/X.25, DPSS/MAIL,
DSEE, FPX, GMR, GPR, GSR, Network Oomputing Kernel, NOK, Network Oomputing System,
NOS, Open Network Toolkit, Open System Toolkit, OST, Personal Workstation, and Series 3000
are trademarks of Apollo Computer Inc ..
('\
\.__ /
Ada is a registered trademark of the U.S. Government (Ada Joint Program Office). PostScript is
a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
~)
Apollo Oomputer Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information
contained in this publication without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult
Apollo Oomputer Inc. to determine whether any such changes have been made.
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. HARDWARE
PRODUCTS AND THE LICENSING OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. SOFTWARE CONSIST SOLELY OF THOSE
SET FORTH IN THE WRITTEN CONTRACTS BETWEEN APOLLO COMPUTER INC. AND ITS CUSTOMERS. NO
REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION,
BUT
NOT
LIMITED
TO
STATEMENTS
REGARDING
INC~UDING
CAP ACITY, RESPONSE-TIME PERFORMANCE,
SUITABILITY FOR USE OR PERFORMANCE OF PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A
WARRANTY BY APOLLO COMPUTER INC. FOR ANY PURPOSE, OR GIVE RISE TO ANY LIABILITY BY
APOLLO COMPUTER INC. WHATSOEVER.
IN NO EVENT SHALL APOLLO COMPUTER INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF APOLLO
COMPUTER INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED, KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
THE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND
PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. OR ITS LICENSORS.
.. /
Update Package 1 to the
DOMAIN System
Command Reference
Order No. 009496
Revision 00
o
o
o
Apollo Computer Inc.
330 Billerica Road
Chelmsford, MA 01824
o
Copyright
© 1987 Apollo Computer Inc.
/
All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
First Printing:
June, 1987
This document was produced using the SCRIBE document preparation system.
registered trademark of Unilogic, Ltd.)
(SCRIBE is a
APOLLO and Domain are registered trademarks of Apollo Computer Inc.
3DGR, Aegis, D3M, DGR, Domain/Access, Domain/Ada, Domain/Bridge, Domain/C,
Domain/ComController, Domain/CommonLISP, Domain/CORE, Domain/Debug, Domain/DFL,
Domain/Dialogue, Domain/DQC, Domain/IX, Domain/Laser-26, Domain/LISP, Domain/PAK,
Domain/PCC, Domain/PCC-Remote, Domain/PCI, Domain/SNA, Domain/X.25, DPSS/MAIL,
DSEE, FPX, GMR, GPR, GSR, Network Computing Kernel, NCK, Network Computing System,
NCS, Open Network Toolkit, Open System Toolkit, OST, Personal Workstation, and Series 3000
are trademarks of Apollo Computer Inc.
Ada is a registered trademark of the U.S. Government (Ada Joint Program Office). PostScript is
a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apollo Computer Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information
contained in this publication without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult
Apollo Computer Inc. to determine whether any such changes have been made.
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. HARDWARE
PRODUCTS AND THE LICENSING OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. SOFTWARE CONSIST SOLELY OF THOSE
SET FORTH IN THE WRITTEN CONTRACTS BETWEEN APOLLO COMPUTER INC. AND ITS CUSTOMERS. NO
REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION, INCLUDING
BUT
NOT
LIMITED
TO
STATEMENTS REGARDING
CAPACITY,
RESPONSE-TIME PERFORMANCE,
SUITABILITY FOR USE OR PERFORMANCE OF PRODUCTS DESCRIBED HEREIN SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A
WARRANTY BY APOLLO COMPUTER INC. FOR ANY PURPOSE, OR GIVE RISE TO ANY LIABILITY BY
APOLLO COMPUTER INC. WHATSOEVER.
IN NO EVENT SHALL APOLLO COMPUTER INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING
OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF APOLLO
COMPUTER INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED, KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
THE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND
PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF APOLLO COMPUTER INC. OR ITS LICENSORS.
\, ___ -/
o
Updating Instructions
The information in this package supersedes the contents of the DOMAIN System Command
Reference, Revision 04. To update your manual, remove the old pages and insert the new pages
as listed below. Insert this instruction sheet behind the title page as a record of the changes.
Remove
Insert
Title/Notice
Title/Notice
Preface
Preface
2-14.1
o
2-50.1
4-39/4-40
4-39/4-39.1 through 4-40
4-171/4-172 through 4-174
4-171/4-172 through 4-174
4-249/4-250
4-249/4-250
4-263.1/4-263.2
o
o
4-277/4-278
4-277/4-278
4-315/4-316
4-315/4-316 through 4-316.1
4-319/4-320 through 4-330
4-319/4-320 through 4-330
Index-l through Index-9
Index-l through Index-8
Reader's Response/
Business Reply
Reader's Response/
Business Reply
('
\
C)
(,
\,
--,/'
o
Preface
This document updates the SR9.5 version of the DOMAIN System Command Reference for
software features included in the SR9.6 release. The DOMAIN System Command Reference is
the third volume in the three-volume introduction to the DOMAIN computing system. The first
volume, Getting Started With Your DOMAIN System (Order Number 002348), provides a
tutorial approach to getting started on your node. The second volume, DOMAIN System User's
Guide (Order Number 005488), constitutes a handbook that takes you beyond the introductory
stage into practical applications of Display Manager (DM) and Shell operations. This third
document provides complete reference information on all of the DM and Shell commands that are
available to you. We assume that you are familiar with the material in the first two books before
you attempt to use this reference manual. Fundamental concepts like file structure and usage are
taken for granted here. We tell you how to use the commands; not why you might want to use
them.
o
For information on creating, protecting, and maintaining the network environment, see
Administering Your DOMAIN System (Order number 001746). For information on creating,
protecting, and maintaining the DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet environment, see Administering
Your DOMAIN/BRIDGE Internet (Order number 005694).
Problems, Questions, and Suggestions
o
We appreciate comments from the people who use our system. In order to make it easy for you
to communicate with us, we provide the User Change Request (UCR) system for software-related
comments, and the Reader's Response form for documentation comments. By using these formal
channels you make it easy for us to respond to your comments.
You can get more information about how to submit a UCR by consulting the description of the
Shell command CRUCR {CREATE_USER_CHANGE_REQUEST}. You can also get more information
by typing:
$ HELP CRUCR
For your comments on documentation, a Reader's Response form is located at the back of this
Guide.
o
v
Preface
Documentation Conventions
Unless otherwise noted in the text, this manual uses the following symbolic conventions.
UPPERCASE
Uppercase words or characters in formats and command descriptions represent
commands or keywords that you must use literally.
lowercase
Lowercase words or characters in formats and command descriptions represent
values that you must supply.
Square brackets enclose optional items in formats and command descriptions.
In sample Pascal statements, square brackets assume their Pascal meanings.
{
}
Braces enclose a list from which you must choose an item in formats and
command descriptions. In sample Pascal statements, braces assume their
Pascal meanings.
A vertical bar separates items in a list of choices.
<
>
CTRL/Z
Angle brackets enclose the name of a key on the keyboard.
The notation CTRL/ followed by the name of a key indicates a control
character sequence. You should hold down the < CTRL > key while typing the
character.
Horizontal ellipsis points indicate that the preceding item may be repeated one
or more times.
Vertical ellipsis points mean that irrelevant parts of a figure or example have
been omitted.
~
\'-.... •.. /
Pre/ace
vi
Summary of Technical Changes
o
The Display Manager
The following new features are available in the SR9.6 DM.
New Commands and Features
• CDM (CHANGE_DISPLAY _MANAGER_MODE): Change the display manager mode.
• LOM (LOAD_COLOR_MAP): Load a color map.
The Shell
The following new features are available in the SR9.6 shell.
o
New Commands and Features
• SCRCH (SHOW _SCREEN_ CHARACTERISTICS): Show screen characteristics.
• SH8 (INVOKE_8-BIT _SHELL): Invoke 8-bit shell.
Changes to Existing Commands
o
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CPSCR: New -APPEND and -GPR[_BITMAP] options.
LCNET: New -C option.
RTSTAT: New -DESC[RIPTION] option.
VCTL: New -SUSP, -EOL, -[NO]RAW, -[NO]ENABLE_SIGS options.
VSIZE: New -STD option.
VT100: Support for PASTE and F8 keys.
WBAK: New -PDTU option.
NOTE:
A vertical bar in the margin indicates a substantive technical change from Revision 04
of the DOMAIN System Command Reference.
o
vii
Pre/ace
- - - - ------- ..- - - _ . - - - - -
o
Summary of Technical Changes from SRD.2
Display Manager
The following new features are available in the SR9.5 Display Manager.
New Commands
• BL (BALANCE): Balance delimiters.
• CURS (CURSOR_LOCK): Control cursor positioning.
• MONO (MONOCHROME): Set color monitor to black and white.
Changes to Existing Commands
o
o
•
•
•
•
CP: -N no longer must be the last token on the command line.
CPO: New option, -W, to create process in wait mode.
CPS: New option, -W, to create process in wait mode.
DQ: New argument, WINDOW _NAME, which allows you to send a fault to a
specific process in a named window.
• WC: New argument, WINDOW _NAME, which allows you to close a specific named
window.
Shell
The following new features are available in the SR9.5 Shell.
New Commands
• SHUTSPM: Shut down the Server Process Manager on a node.
• UMASK: Set DOMAIN/IX file-creation mode mask.
Changes to Existing Commands
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
o
•
•
•
BIND: -SET _ VERSION nn.mm option is no longer valid.
CPF: New option, -NSUBS; -SUBS is the default.
CPT: New option, -NSUBS; -SUBS is the default.
CRP: New option, -QUIET, to suppress connection messages.
CRTYOBJ: New option, -PRE_SR9.5, to generate object modules in pre-SR9.5
format.
DEBUG: New options, -NSRC to suppress source file display, and -GLOB to enable
DEBUG to enter routines in global address space.
EDACL: New options, -SETPERS, -SETPROJ, -SETORG, -DYNAMIC, for
DOMAIN/DC compatibility.
EDFONT: font pathname and initial editing character may now be passed to the
program as command line arguments.
EDNS: New interactive command, UPDATE, to update the NS _HELPER database
on a remote node.
FPPMASK: Several new floating-point error mask conditions may now be reported.
HPC: Several new options: -TO name, -FROM name, -PROC name, -LIMIT n, -MAP,
-NHDR.
ITEST: Command renamed to lOS TEST.
3
Preface
• LD: Severl new options: -SC; -SR, -W, -CRB, -CRA, -USB, -USA, -MOB, -MOA. LD
also now automatically sizes its output to the width of the transcript pad's window.
• LUSR: New option, -IDLE, to include idle nodes in report listing.
• OLD _EDFONT: Obsolete command; no longer supported.
• PRF: Several new options: -COL, -POST, -LPI, -PAPER_SIZE, -ORIENT, -C, -NC,
-D, -ND.
• RTCHK: -DEVICE option replaces -IIC.
• SET: Default startup file pathname is now USER _DATAjSHjSTARTUP in the login
home directory.
• SH: Default startup file pathname is now USER_DATAjSHjSTARTUP in the login
home directory.
• SIORF: -OBJ is obsolete and no longer supported. The command now handles binary
objects automatically.
• SIOTF: -OBJ is obsolete and no longer supported. The command now handles binary
objects automatically.
• TB: Complete overhaul; now performs cross-process traces.
NOTE: A vertical bar in the margin indicates a substantive technical change from Revision 03.
Preface
4
I
"
./
Summary of Technical Changes
o
The Shell
The following new features are available in the SR9.2 Shell.
New Commands and Features
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CRTY (CREATE_TYPE): Create a new type.
CRTYOBJ (CREATE_ TYPE_ OBJECT): Create a type object module for binding.
DLTY (DELETE_TYPE): Delete a type.
EDIP (EDIT _IP _HELPER): Invoke editor for IP _HELPER.
INTM (INSTALL_ TYPE_MANAGER): Install a type manager.
INTY (INSTALL_TYPE): Install a new type.
ITEST (lOS _ TEST): Test lOS _ $calls.
SETVAR (SET _ VARIABLE): Set the value of a variable.
Changes to Existing Commands
• KBD: New keyboard type added.
• LTY: Change in command syntax for -N option.
o
NOTE:
A vertical bar in the margin indicates a substantive technical change from Revision 03
of the DOMAIN System Command Reference.
o
o
v
Preface
c'
- - - - - - - - _ . _ . _ - ._--_.__
...
_ - - - - _ ..... .
- - - _ _ . _ - - - -.._-_._.__ ......
------
Summary of Technical Changes
o
Display Manager
The following new features are available in the SR9.0 Display Manager.
New Commands
• ENV (ENVffiONMENT): Set or display an environment variable.
• TNI (TO _NEXT _ICON): Move cursor to next icon.
Changes 12 Existing Commands
o
• LO [-ONI-OFF]: Enable/disable logoff capability.
• SQ (SEARCH_QUIT): Now identical to ABRT.
• WP (WINDOW _POP): Now works with named windows and window groups.
Shell
The following new features are available in the SR9.0 Shell.
New Commands and Features
o
o
• Active functions: You may now use the construct .. II command II to assign the value
returned by 'command' to a Shell variable. See the DOMAIN System User's Guide
for details.
• DSPST (DISPLAY _PROCESS_STATUS): Display process status graphically.
• EDNS (EDIT _NAMING_SERVER): Invoke naming server editor.
• EXPORT: Change a Shell variable into an Environment variable.
• FOR: Execute a FOR statement.
• HLPVER (HELP _VERSION): Provide HELP support for Shell scripts.
• LTY (LIST_TYPES): List installed types.
• NOT: Negate a Boolean value.
• OLD _EDFONT: Former version of EDFONT with function key interface.
• PRF (PRINT _FILE): Now supports Imagen 8/300 and Imagen LBP-I0 laser printers
connected via SIO lines or the Multibus.
• PRFD (PRF _DISPLAY): Invoke menu-based PRF.
• SELECT: Execute a SELECT statement.
• SEND _ ALARM: Send messages to alarm servers.
• SET: Set current Shell conditions.
• SOURCE: Execute a Shell script at the current Shell level.
• VSIZE (VT100_SIZE): Set or display VT100 window settings.
Changes to Existing Commands
• ARGS -ERROUT: Now writes output to error output if desired.
• BIND: Several new options: -ALLRESOLVED, -BDIR, -LOCALSEARCH,
-MULTIRES,
-NOMULTIRES,
-MAKERS,
-NUND,
-NOLOCALSEARCH,
-SET _ VERSION, -SYSTYPE.
• CPBOOT: Now supports cartridge tapes.
v
Preface
---
._.__ ._._---
•
•
•
•
•
CPF -DU: Now deletes currently locked files once they are unlocked.
CPT -F: Force tree deletion is you have P rights.
CRP: New option: -:ME; new functionality in -LOGIN; -MBX no longer available.
CRUCR: New corporate address for UCR submissions.
CTNODE: Several new options: -FROM, -ON, -MS, -MD, -IDUPL, -LC, -ROOT, plus
three new paragraphs in the description explaining "confusion resolution ".
• DEBUG: New information on macros and variables, new option, -PROC, for
cross-process debugging
• EDACL: New option, -UNIX, plus new directory rights "S" (search) and "E"
(expunge).
• EDFONT: New version with a pointing device-driven interface.
• EDMTDESC: Now supports cartridge tapes.
• EWIASP: No lohger standard software. Documentation is now provided with the
RJE product.
• EXISTF: Wildcarding in pathname arguments is now supported.
• EXIT: Now works for FOR and SELECT as well as WHILE.
• FPAT: New options: -RM, -RMF, -LM.
• HASPSVR: No longer standard software. Documentation is now provided with the
RJE product.
• INLIB: Now supports multiple pathnames and wildcarding.
• INVOL: Default paging size (option 8) is now 352 pages instead of 256. A new option
10 allows you to set or display the sector interleave factor for a volume. (See
Appendix D.)
• LAS: New options: -ALL, -FROM, -TO, -PROCESS.
• LCNODE: New options: -C, -ID.
• LD -ROOT: Supports new naming server.
• NETSVC -S: Controls network server availability on a node.
• NEXT: Now works for FOR and SELECT as well as WHILE.
• PRF: Completely overhauled for SR9.
• PROBENET: New options: -D, -SENS. Deleted option: -Q. Comment character
changed from '(blank)' to '#'. Reported statistics also changed.
• PRSVR -N: Assign a name to the print server process.
• RBAK: Now supports cartridge tapes with the options -DEV CT, -RETEN,
-NRETEN, -REWIND. Limited floppy disk support.
• READ: New option, -ERRIN, for reading from error input; new -TYPE choices: ANY
and ENV.
• READC: New option, -ERRIN, for reading from error input.
• READLN: New option, -ERRIN, for reading from error input.
• RETURN -OK: Same as -TRUE.
• RWMT: Now supports cartridge tapes with the options -DEV CT, -RETEN,
-NRETEN. Limited floppy disk support.
• SALVOL: Now allows controller unit number specification for use when two or more
of the same storage device are attached to one node.
• SH: Completely overhauled for SR9.
• TCTL: Several new options: -[NO]RTS_ENABLE, -FORCE, -NO[RAW].
• WBAK: Now supports cartridge tapes with the options -DEV CT, -RETEN,
-NRETEN, -SYSBOOT, -NO _EOT. Limited floppy disk support.
NOTE: A vertical bar in the margin indicates a substantive technical change from Revision 02.
Preface
vi
c:
o
0
(J
Contents
Chapter 1 Display Manager Basics
1-1
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
1.4.
1.5.
Defining Points and Regions
Defining Window Boundaries
Defining a Range of Text
Using Regular Expressions
Key Naming Conventions
1.5.1. Standard Key Names
1.5.2. Controlling Keys from Within a Program
1.6. Special Characters in DM Scripts and Key Definitions
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-8
1-8
1-11
1-11
Chapter 2 Display Manager Commands
2-1
Chapter 3 Shell Basics
3-1
3.1. Command Format
3.1.1. Arguments
3.1.2. Separators
3.1.3. Node Specifications
3.2. Using Special Characters
3.3. The Command Line Parser
3.3.1. Standard Command Options
3.3.2. Command Line Parser Options
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-6
Chapter 4 Shell Commands
o
Index
4-1
Index-l
o
Oontents
Illustrations
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
3-1.
The Low-Profile Model II Keyboard Map
The Low-Profile Model I Keyboard Map
The Mouse Key Map
The 880 Keyboard Map
Typical Shell Command Format
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
3-1
Tables
Table 3-1.
Command Shell Special Characters
3-4
ii
Illustrations
o
Chapter 1
Display Manager Basics
This chapter summarizes the basic concepts that apply to the DM commands described
individually in the following chapter. For a more indepth discussion of these concepts, please
refer to the DOMAIN System User's Guide.
1.1. Defining Points and Regions
o
Unless otherwise noted, all DM commands must be preceded by a pointing operation. This
generally involves moving the cursor to the spot where the command is to be executed (for
example, pointing to the window that you want to scroll), or specifying a specific screen or line
location as a command argument. If you don't specify some pointing function, the Display
Manager executes. the command at the current cursor position.
To point, simply move the cursor to the desired location. For example, to point to a window,
place the cursor anywhere inside the window. The command reads the cursor position to
determine which window you mean. (Please note that when you use the block cursor to designate
a point on the screen, the designated point is actually at the lower left corner of the block cursor.)
You can also define a point in any of the following ways:
line-number
Line numbers begin at 1 and range upward to the last line in the pad. Pads
may contain up to 262,143 lines. You may use the symbol II $11 to refer to the
last line in the pad. Remember that the edit pad window legend contains the
line number of the top line in the window for reference. You may also display
the line number (plus the column number and X and Y coordinates) of the
current cursor position by using the DM command 11=11.
+/- line-number
o
The 11+/- line-number II format denotes the nth line before or after the current
cursor position in a pad.
[[line-number], [column-number]]
This format indicates the point by line and column number in the pad. The
Display Manager assumes the current line if the first portion is omitted, and
column one if the second portion is omitted. Line n~mbers range from 1 to the
last line in the pad (262,143 max.). Column numbers range from 1 to 256.
l¥hen you specify a point in this format, you must use the outer set of
square brackets to enclose the numbers. This is how the Display Manager
distinguishes between line/column positions in a pad and X/Y coordinates on
the screen (below). Note that the use of 11$" to denote the last line in the pad
does not work within square brackets.
o
1-1
Display Manager Basics
Examples:
[127.14]
Line 127. column 14
[53]
Line 53. column 1. Brackets are
optional in this case: see above.
[.12]
Column 12 of the current line
([x-coordinate], [y-coordinate])
Screen coordinates specify bit positions on the display. The origin (0,0) is at
the extreme upper left corner of the screen. Maximum values for x and y
coordinates depend on the size of the screen in use. The current x or y
coordinate of the cursor is used if you omit it from the coordinate pair. When
you specify a point in this format, you must use the outer set of parentheses to
enclose the numbers. This is how the Display Manager distinguishes between
line/column positions in a pad (above) and X/Y coordinates on the screen.
Examples:
(200.450)
Bit position with the given coordinates
(135)
Bit position whose X coordinate is 135
and whose Y coordinate is the same as
the current cursor position.
(.730)
Bit position whose X coordinate is the
same as the current cursor position
and whose Y coordinate is 730.
/ regular-expression/ or \regular-expression \
A regular expression specifies a string in the pad that begins or ends the region
of interest. Regular expressions are described in section 1.4.
Now that we can identify points, let's turn to regions. A region is simply the area between two
points. To define a region, you need to use the DM command DR (DEFINE_REGION). The region
definition operation has the following format:
[point] DR; [point]
The first point marks one corner of the region. The second point marks the opposite corner of
the region. Remember that the points may be defined by cursor positions or specified explicitly
in one of the alternate formats mentioned above.
For convenience, the predefined key, , invokes the DR command. Point the cursor at
the start of the range, MARK it, "then point at the end of the range. That's all there is to it.
For those DM commands that require you to specify a region in which to operate, you can declare
it either by MARKing it, or by explicitly specifying the region with one of the techniques
described above. If a DM command does require you to define a region, the command is specified
in the following format:
[region] command
The symbol [region] indicates where you must define the region. (The definition of a range for
text editing operations -- cut, paste, substitute,etc.-- is slightly different. Refer to section 1.3 for
more information.)
Display Manager Basics
1-2
i-'\
I
"'----_/
------------------------------------
o
------------------------------------------------
1.2. Defining Window Boundaries
When a window's size or position on the screen is changed in any way, the DM determines the
new boundaries of the window using calculations based on a pair of points (a .. point pair") on the
screen. Usually, the first point in the pair has been defined with the DR command and the
second point is the current cursor position, although you may provide absolute point coordinates
as described in section 1.1.
Each point may specify either a new or existing edge of a window, or a new or existing corner of
a window. The new window, then, is created based on the relationship between the X and Y
coordinates of the two points. When either of the points specifies a new upper edge or right edge
for a window, the position is adjusted to account for the size of the displayed block cursor,
because the actual coordinates of the cursor are determined by its lower left corner. This
adjustment is made only when the coordinate source is the block cursor, and not when the point
comes from the touchpad or mouse, or from explicitly entered coordinates.
o
The relationship between the two points in the point pair affects the actions of the
window-related commands CP, CE, CV, CC, WG, WM, and WDF in the following ways:
1. Horizontal movement only (y coordinates of the two points are equal):
Creation - Create a window bounded by the given x coordinates, the top of the screen,
and just above the normal DM command window (i.e., a full vertical window).
o
WG/WM - Select the unobscured vertical edge nearest to the first point, and change
the x coordinate of that edge to be that of the second point. The y coordinate of the
first point must be within the unobscured range of y coordinates of the selected edge.
2. Vertical movement only (x coordinates of the two points are equal):
Analogous to horizontal movement, except that for creation, the full horizontal width
of the screen is used.
3. No movement (two points are equal):
o
Creation - create a 512 by 512 window centered as nearly as possible (subject to screen
boundaries) on the given cursor position.
WG - treated as in 4 below.
WM - Select the unobscured corner nearest the given point, and move the corner to
that point.
4. Two points differ in both x and y:
Creation - The given four coordinate values form opposing corners of the window.
WG/WM - The first point selects the nearest unobscured corner (the corner itself
must be visible) and that corner is repositioned at the second point.
o
If only one point is given (i.e., the DR command is not issued), grow is illegal and move behaves
as in step 3 above. The DM uses one of its five default window regions, or a default determined
by the last window creation or deletion (WC) command, as follows:
1-3
Display Manager Basics
• If the last such command was window deletion (i.e., WC), the default region
same as that of the deleted window.
IS
the
("\
I
I
\" .. _//
• If the last such command was a successful window creation command, the default
region is the next third of the screen following the created window.
• If the last such command was an unsuccessful window creation command, the default
region is the same as specified in that command.
To define the five default window regions, use the DM command WDF.
1.3. Defining a Range of Text
The text editing commands that perform cut, paste, and substitute functions operate on a range
of text. That range is declared just as you would mark any other region in a pad; i.e., you place
the cursor at the start of the range, press <:MARK>, then move the cursor to the end of the
range and issue the command in question.
The region of text you define for a cut, paste, or search operation is highlighted in reverse video
when you use the key. This is because that key invokes the DR;ECHO command
sequence. You can still use the DR command alone to place a mark, but the highlighting feature
is not invoked without ECHO. You can cancel the defined ranged with the ABRT command
(invoked with CTRL/X). Refer to the descriptions of the DR, ECHO, and ABRT commands for
more information.
Please note that the character under the cursor at the end of the range is NOT included within
the range. Note also that you may NOT declare a range explicitly as an argument to the editing
commands, since those commands do not, in general, accept arguments. You must use the
MARK key or the DR command sequence.
The default range is different for these editing operations, too. While the general DM default
range is the current cursor position, cut, paste, and substitute commands apply to all characters
from the current cursor position up to the end of the line (including the NEWLINE character) if
no other range has been marked immediately prior to invoking the command.
c
~,
~ .. - /
..
('
"'-.._./
1.4. Using Regular Expressions
Special "regular expression II notation is used to specify patterns for search and substitute strings
in the Display Manager editor. This notation is also used in the Shell commands ED (EDIT),
EDSTR (EDIT_STREAM), FPAT (FIND_PATTERN), FPATB (FIND_PATTERN_BLOCK), and CHPAT
(CHANGE_PATTERN).
Regular expressions permit you to concisely describe textual patterns
without necessarily knowing their exact contents or format. You can create expressions to
describe patterns in particular positions on a line, patterns that always contain certain characters
and sometimes include others, or patterns that match text of indefinite length.
Regular expressions are constructed as follows:
1. Any standard ASCII character (except those discussed below) is a regular expression
and matches one and only one occurrence of that character. (For multiple occurrence
Display Manager Basics
1-4
o
matches, see II * II below.) The case of the characters in the expression IS not
significant by default.
Use the DM command SO (SET_CASE) to control case
significance.
SAM
All valid expressions.
fred12
Joe (acltb)
2. A percent sign (%) at the beginning of a regular expression matches the empty string
at the beginning of a line. If a II % II is not the first character in the expression, then
it simply matches the percent character. Use this special feature to mark the start of
a line in a regular expression.
II%Print ll matches the string in line a but not line b, because in line b Print is not at
the beginning of the line.
o
(a)
(b)
Print this file.
This Print file.
3. A dollar sign ($) at the end of a regular expression matches the null character at the
end of a line. If II $11 is not the last character in the expression, then it simply
matches the dollar sign character. Use this special feature to mark the end of a line in
a regular expression.
o
II file$1I matches the string in line a but not line b, because
followed by an end-of-line marker.
(a)
(b)
III
line b file
IS
not
Print this file
This file is permanent
4. A question mark (?) matches any single character except a NEWLINE character. The
only exception to this is if the II?II appears inside a character class (see below), in
which case it represents the question mark character itself.
o
II?OLD???II matches a and b, but not c, because in line c the letters II OLD II are alone
on the line.
(a)
(b)
(c)
HOLDING
FOLDERS
OLD
5. Whereas the above expression (?) matches only a single occurrence of a pattern, an
asterisk (*) following a regular expression causes it to match zero or more occurrences
of that expression. The only exception to this is if the II * II appears inside a character
class (see below), in which case it represents the asterisk character itself. Matching
zero or more occurrences of some pattern is called a closure. An expression used in a
closure will never match NEWLINE.
o
a*b
Match b, ab, aab, etc.
%a?*b
Match any string that begins with a and ends with b, and that is
also the first string in the line. Any number of other characters can
come between a and b.
1-5
Display Manager Basics
[A-Z] [A-Z] [A-Z] * Match any uppercase word; i.e., any string containing at least two
(and possibly more) uppercase characters (see character classes,
below). Strings like IIMaryll would not match, since IIMaryll does
not begin with two uppercase characters.
6. A string of characters enclosed in square brackets II [string] II is called a character class.
This pattern matches anyone character in the string but no others. If, however, the
first character of the string is a tilde (~), the regular expression matches anyone
character except the characters in the string. If.-..J is not the first character in the
string, then it simply matches the tilde character. Note also that the other special
characters % $ ? * lose their special meaning inside square brackets, and simply
represent themselves.
[sam]
Match the single characters s, a, or m. (If you want to match the
word II sam II, don't use the square brackets.)
.
[,.......,sam]
Match any single character except s, a, or m.
7. Within a character class, you can specify anyone of a range of letters or digits by
indicating the beginning and ending characters in the range separated by a hyphen.
That is, 0 through 9 matches any single digit; a through z or A through Z matches
any single letter, lowercase or uppercase respectively. (Remember, though, that the
actual matching search ignores case unless you have used the DM command sa to
enable case sensitivity.) The range can be a subset of the digits or letters (i.e., a
through n or 3 through 8). The first and last characters of the range, however, must
be of the same type: digit, lowercase letter, or uppercase letter. II [A-9] II is illegal.
C':
Note that the II_II character has a special meaning inside square brackets. If you want
to include the literal hyphen character in the class for matching, it must either be the
first or last character in the class (so that it does not appear to separate two
range-marking characters) or be escaped (see below).
The II] II character is also special to character classes -- it closes the class descriptor
list. If you want to include the right bracket character in the class, it also must be
escaped (see below).
In summary, the following characters have special meaning inside square brackets:
-]
[a-d]
Match any single occurrence of a, b, c, or d.
%[A-Z]
Match any capital letter that is also the first character on the line
(%).
1-[1-9][0-9] *
Match any of the page numbers in this chapter.
[OA-Z]
Match any string containing a zero or a capital letter.
Match any uppercase letter or punctuation mark (i.e., no lowercase
letter or number).
8. The at sign (@) is an escape character. Characters preceded by the II@II character
have special meaning in regular expressions, as indicated below.
Display Manager Basics
1-6
('
\
'".,,,.,..../
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - _ ... _---._--_._---------_. --------
o
@n
Match NEWLINE character.
@t
Match a tab character. Note, however, that the keyboard TAB key
does not insert a literal tab; rather it moves the cursor to the
display's next tab position. In a regular expression, @t matches
only tab characters that have been inserted with @t.
@f
Match a form feed character.
In addition, the escape character may be used inside a character class definition ([]) to
specify literal occurrences of characters like "_" and "] ", which have special functions
inside square brackets. You may also use it whenever you need a literal occurrence of
some special character in a normal expression (like ?, *, or @ itself).
o
[A-Z@-@]]
Match any capital letter, a hyphen, or a right bracket.
@?@*
Match a question mark followed by an asterisk, rather than zero or
more occurrences of any character (1*).
9. You can concatenate regular expressions to form a more complex regular expression.
The resulting regular expression matches the concatenation of the strings that the
component regular expressions match.
All of the examples above concatenate
expressions (single characters of some sort) into longer strings for matching.
o
10. You can Iitag" parts of a regular expression to help rearrange pieces of a matched
string. A text pattern surrounded by braces II {pattern} II is remembered and can be
referred to by "@n", where n is a single digit referring to the string remembered by
the nth pair of braces.
s/ {???}{?*} /@2@1/
8 is the DM command for string substitution. The example will
move a three-character sequence from the beginning of a line to the
end of the line. II ??? II matches the first three characters of the line,
and "?* II matches the rest of the line.
o
sol {?}{?} /@2@1/ 80 is also a DM command for string substitution, but it only
substitutes the first occurrence of the first pattern on a line. The
example will transpose two characters beginning with the one under
the cursor. This can be a handy key definition if you often type
"ei" for "ie", etc.
o
1-7
Display .\Ianager Basics
Summary of Features
c
%
$
?
*
[.
[-
.. ]
... ]
[cl-c2]
@c
{expr}
Literal character
Beginning of line (if first character only)
End of line (if last character only)
Any single character except NEWLINE
Closure (zero or more occurrences of previous
pattern)
Character class (anyone of these characters)
Negated character class (all characters except
those in brackets or NEWLINE)
Anyone of a range of characters from cl through c2 (must be same type)
Escaped character (e.g .. @%. @[. @*. etc.)
Tagged expression for use later in command line
CAUTION: Remember that the special characters described above apply only to regular
expression operations. Some of these characters also have meanings (often radically
different) in Shell commands and other software products. If you are using a regular
expression as a part of one of those Shell commands or products, be sure to enclose
the expression in quotation marks so that it will not be misinterpreted.
1.5. Key Naming Conventions
Every key on your keyboard (and mouse) has a name; in fact, almost every key has a set of three
or four names. One set is the normal one, and is invoked when the key is pressed down. The
second set is invoked when the key is released; these names are the up-transition names. The
third set is invoked when the key is pressed simultaneously with the SHIFT key; these are the
shifted names. Finally, many keys have special functions when they are pressed simultaneously
with the CTRL key; these are the control shifted names.
1.5.1. Standard Key Names
The definable keys (see Figures 1-1, 1-2, and 1-4) have the following names:
Letters and numbers
These are named by their own single character. The capital
letters are distinct from the lowercase letters: merely refer to A
instead of worrying about II a shifted II. When you refer to these
keys in a key definition, enter them within single quotation
marks.
ASCII Control
These are the standard intraline and interline control keys.
CR
BS
TAB
TABS
-TAB
ESC
DEL
Display Manager Basics
Carriage Return
Back Space
Tab
Shifted Tab
Control Shifted Tab
Escape (low-profile only).
Same as .-[. (hex lB).
Delete (low-profile only).
Same as '-1' (hex 7F) .
1-8
\,.
o
Alphabetic Control
These are named AX, where x is some other valid key name (i.e.,
Ay for CTRL/Y and AN for CTRL/N). There are also six
non-alphabetic control characters. Their names must appear in
single quotation marks. The names and the hexadecimal values
of ,the keys are: ,A [' (hex lB), 'A\' (hex lC), 'A]' (hex lD), 'A,....,,'
(hex IE), 'A1' (hex IF), and 'AI' (hex 7F).
DM Function
These keys perform special Display Manager functions. Those on
the left side of the keyboard are named Ll through L9 and LA
through LF. (Note that the low-profile keyboards have an extra
row of keys below Ll through L3. These keys are named LIA,
L2A, and L3A.) Their up-transition names are LIU through L9U
and LAU though LFU. Their shifted names are LIS through L9S
and LAS through LFS. The DM Function keys on the right side
of the keyboard are named Rl through R6. Their up-transition
and shifted names are formed in the same way that the left-side
keys are.
o
NOTE:
Due to internal hardware restrictions, the 880 keyboard
does not execute shifted definitions for these keys. The
DM will not object if you define shifted operations for
them, but nothing will happen when you try to use the
shifted definitions.
Program Function
These keys are specially reserved for user program control. They
appear at the top of the keyboard and are named Fl through F8,
as labeled. Their up-transition names are FlU through F8U.
Their shifted names are FlS through F8S. Their control shifted
names are AFI through AF8. (Note that the low-profile Model II
keyboard has two additional program function keys, FO and F9.
Their shifted and control shifted names are derived as described
above.)
Numeric Keypad
These keys are only available on the low-profile Model II
keyboard. The keypad's numeric keys are named NPO through
NP9. The keypad symbols are named NP+, NP-, and NP.
respectively. The nEntern key is named NPE. Keys 0 through 9,
plus (+), and minus (-) can have shifted names (for example,
NP+S).
Mouse
These are the keys located on the optional mouse pointing device
Their names are Ml, M2, and M3.
Their
(Figure 1-3).
up-transition names are MlU, M2U, and M3U. There are no
shifted or control shifted names.
o
o
Names containing special characters and all ordinary graphic characters must be in single quotes.
For example, to define the lowercase x key so that it acts just like the uppercase X key, you
would use the following command line:
kd 'x' es 'X' ke
o
Consequently, however, you may find it ,difficult to redefine the x key, because the Display
Manager enters an X when you press the x key. This is true for all the alphanumeric and special
1-9
Display Manager Basics
Figure 1-1.
The Low-Profile Model II Keyboard Map
Figure 1-2.
The Low-Profile Model I Keyboard Map
Figure 1-3.
The Mouse Key Map
character keys. Although it is possible to change the definitions of these keys, that capability is
intended mainly for use in programs. When a program defines a key, the definition applies only
while the program is running and only in pads the program controls.
Display Manager Basics
1-10
(",
\',--,,/)
o
r
~
~~[lgJJ
~~~
~[ill~
~[ill~
~~~
~~~~~~~~~~
mmmrnmrnmrnmm~~rnm~
~m~[[ilJIIiIIl!!ll~l@J~I!iIJ~m~
r-"
r
m~~m~~~m[!JJrnmmRET
ma:r1~[!ijm~[!J][!JJ~mmrn[l#!l]~
ij[(B
BJ]~
R21111R 3 1111 R-4 II II Rsil
~
..)
o
o
o
Figure 1-4.
The 880 Keyboard Map
1.5.2. Controlling Keys from Within a Program
Because of the great flexibility provided by our displays and keyboards, many applications
programs assume control of these and redefine various capabilities. When this happens, the
default DM key definitions are overridden by the applications program. The default definitions
are restored once the applications program ends. For your own applications, you may control
key definitions through program calls to the PAD _$DEF _PFK and PAD $DM CMD routines as
described in the DOMAIN System Call Reference.
Because the normal functions of the Display Manager keys are often useful (even when they have
been redefined by applications programs), the and keys have been
defined to provide a temporary override function. Pressing while in an applications
program will restore the keyboard to its log in DM definitions. Pressing again will
re-enable the application-defined keys.
You may not change this feature of the and keys, which is functional
only when the keyboard is under applications program control. This capability is independent of
the default Display Manager definitions of WH (WINDOW _HOLD).
1.6. Special Characters in DM Scripts and Key Definitions
Several rules governing the use of literal and special characters affect the proper interpretation of
commands within the Display Manager environment. The following characters have special
meanings when they appear in a DM command line or script.
@
o
The escape character II @II always nullifies any special meaning that the
following character might have. As a part of command parsing, the Display
Manager strips off the II@II character itself. If you can't remember whether a
character has some special meaning to the Display Manager, it is always safe to
escape the character -- if it is not special, the Display Manager still removes the
II @ II, so the character appears as it should. The need for character escaping is
generally confined to search and substitute operations, commands requiring
quoted stings, and key definitions.
1-11
Display Manager Basics
The use of II@II can be confusing in key definitions because the text in key
definitions is actually processed twice - once when the definition is made, and
once when the key is depressed and the definition is used. If a character needs
to be escaped both times, it must be preceded by three II@II signs. For
example, "@@@#" becomes "@#" in the key definition, which then becomes
II # II when the definition is used. Only the characters listed in this section are
special within key definitions.
When read from a DM script, (via the CMDF comamnd), the "#" character
causes the remainder of the line to be treated as a comment and skipped.
#
Semicolon is the normal command delimiter.
(generated by /t
TB
/!
TWB {-L, -R, -T, -B} none
to
to
to
to
to
to
start of next line
beginning of line
end of line
top line in window
bottom line in window
window border
AD
Predefined Key
880 Keyboard
+-+
(LA)
(LC)
+-+
(LA)
(LC)
t
!
(L8)
t
!
(L8)
(LE)
(LE)
none
none
AS x Y
CTRL/K
(L7)
(L9)
(LOS)
(LFS)
I+-+1
(L4)
(L6)
none
none
none
Tab left
Tab right
Set tabs
THL
TH
TS [nl n2 ... ] [-R]
CTRL/
none
CTRL/
none
Move to OM Input Pad
Move to next window on screen
Move to previous window
Move to next window in which
input is enabled
Move cursor to next unobscured
icon on the display
Control window availability
for cursor placement
TOM
TN
TLW
TI
(L5)
(LB)
CTRL/L
none
CTRL/L
none
TNI
none
none
CURS [-aNI-OFF]
none
none
(L5)
(LB)
Creating a Process
Task
OM Command
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Create new process,
transcript pad, and
windows
CP pathname
Create new process without
transcript pad or windows
CPO pathname
none
none
Create server process (valid
only in OM startup file)
CPS pathname
none
none
(L5S)
(R2)
o
1-13
Display Manager Basics
Controlling a Process
Task
OM Command
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Quit, stop, or blast a process
DQ [name] [-SI-BI-c nn]
CTRL/Q
CTRL/Q
Suspend execution of a process
DS
none
none
Resume execution of suspended
process
DC
none
none
Creating a Window
Read and Edit Pads
Task
OM Command
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Create edit pad and window
in which to view it
CE pathname
(R4)
(R4)
create view window (read-only
pad)
CV pathname
(RS)
(RS)
Create copy of existing
window
CC
none
none
(~"
~_../ '
c'
Display Manager Basics
1-14
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---------
---------------------
Managing Windows
o
o
o
OM Command
Task
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Grow or shrink a window
using rubberbanding
Move a window
using rubberbanding
Push or pop a window on stack
WGE
(LSA)
CTRL/G
WME
(LSAS)
CTRL/W
WP
(RI)
CTRL/P
close (delete) a window
close window, pad; update file
close window, pad; no update
WC [name] [-Q
PW;WC -Q
WC -Q
none
(R5)
(R5S)
none
CTRL/Y
CTRL/N
set scroll mode
set autohold mode
Toggle scroll and autohold modes
set hold mode
set insert mode
(see "Editing a Pad")
WS [-ON
WA [-ON
WA;WS
WH [-ON
Define position of default
window n
WDF [n]
none
none
View latest output in Shell's
process transcript pad
Copy text to Shell's process
input pad
copy text to DM input pad for
use with
AU;AU;PB;TI
CTRL/V
CTRL/V
I
-F]
CTRL/S
none
CTRL/A
-OFF]
-OFF]
-OFF]
DR;TR;XC;TL;TI;TB;
TR;XP;TR
DR;
/[-a-zO-9$@/@-o_']/
XC CV_FILE;TDM;
ES 'CV ';X? CV_FILE;
TR;EN
(R6)
CTRL/S
none
CTRL/A
(R5)
(R2)
/
(RSS)
none
Moving a Pad Under a Window
0
Move top of
Move cursor
in pad
Move bottom
Move cursor
in pad
pad into window
to first character
PT
PT;TT;TL
none
CTRL/T
none
CTRL/T
of pad into window
to last character
PB
PB;TB;TR
none
CTRL/B
none
CTRL/B
PP [-]n
~
t
(LD, LF)
~
(LD
F2,
Move pad n pages
0
Predefined Key
880 Keyboard
Low-Profile
OM Command
Task
Move pad n lines
PV [-]n
/t /~
(LES)
(LBS)
Move pad n characters
PH [-]n
/~
(LAS)
Save pad in pathname
none
PN pathname
1-15
/-+
(LCS)
t
t
LF)
FS
~
-+
(L7, L9)
none
Display Manager Basics
Editing a Pad
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
OM Command
Task
Set read/write mode
Set insert/overstrike mode
RO [-ON
EI [-ON
CTRL/M
-OFF]
-OFF]
(L1S)
CTRL/M
,--,
'\
(Ll)
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
string
NEWLINE character
new line after current line
raw (noecho) character
end-of-file mark
ES 'string'
EN
TR;EN;TL
ER nn
EEF
[Default DM operation]
none
none
CTRL/Z
CTRL/Z
Delete
Delete
Delete
Delete
Delete
character at cursor
character before cursor
word of text
from cursor to end of line
entire line
ED
EE
DR;/[-A-ZO-9$_]/XD
ES , ';EE;DR;TR;XD;TL;TR
CMS;TL;XD
(L3)
(L2)
(L3)
(L2)
Copy text to paste buffer
Cut (delete) text and write it
to paste buffer
Paste (write) text in paste
buffer into pad
Copy a portion of the screen
into a GMF file
XC [-F pathname
XD [-F pathname
name]
name]
CTRL/C
CTRL/E
XP [-F pathname
name]
(L2A)
CTRL/O
XI [pathname]
none
none
Search forward for string
Repeat last forward search
Search backward for string
Repeat last backward search
Abort search
Set case comparison for search
/string/
ABRT (or) SQ
SC [-ON I -OFF]
none
CTRL/R
none
CTRL/U
CTRL/X
none
none
CTRL/R
none
CTRL/U
CTRL/X
none
S/stringl/string2/
none
none
SO/stringl/string2/
none
none
substitute string2 for all
occurrences of stringl in
defined range
substitute string2 for first
occurrence of stringl in each
line of defined range
//
\string\
\\
(L1A)
(L1AS)
~,
I
""
f"""
Check and/or balance delimiting
characters
none
/--',
(
\
undo previous command(s)
UNDO
(L2AS)
none
Update edit file without
closing edit pad
PW
(R4S)
none
Display Manager Basics
~/
1-16
'--'
Using Window Groups and Icons
u
o
OM Command
Task
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Add a window or group to a
new or existing group
of windows
WGRA group_name [entry_name]
none
none
Remove a window or group
from a group of windows
WGRR group_name [entry_name]
none
none
control window visibility
WI [entry_name] [-I I -W]
none
none
Change a window into an icon
or an icon into a window
ICON [entry_name] [-I I -W]
[-C 'char']
none
none
set icon position and
offset vector
IDF
none
none
Display a list of the
windows in a group
CPB
none
none
Managing the Display Environment
Task
o
o
o
OM Command
Predefined Key
Low-Profile
880 Keyboard
Request help
none
Log in
Log off
shut down system
L id [proj [org]] [-P] [-H] none
LO [-F] [-ON I-OFF]
none
SHUT [-F]
none
place a mark
Go to a mark
Clear mark stack
DR
GM
CMS
none
none
Display cursor coordinates
(line, column; x/y coord.)
(R6S)
none
none
none
none
(Ll)
none
none
none
none
Acknowledge DM alarm
Acknowledge alarm and pop window
AA
AP
none
none
none
none
Set or display an environment
variable
ENV var [value]
none
none
Set background color
Set window color
Set color monitor to black & white
BGC [-ON I -OFF]
INV [-ON I -OFF]
MONO [-ON I -OFF]
none
none
none
none
none
none
Refresh entire screen
Refresh window
RS
RW [-R]
CTRL/F
none
CTRL/F
none
Load font for use in pads
FL pathname
none
none
Declare keyboard type
Set or display key definition
Request input to command line
KBD [type]
KD name [[def.] KE]
&'prompt'
none
none
none
none
none
none
Execute DM script
CMDF pathname
none
none
1-17
(Rl)
Display Manager Basics
'\.,--,/
c
c'
o
Chapter 2
Display Manager COIDInands
o
o
o
o
2-1
Display Manager Commands
AA (ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM)
AA (ACKNOWLEDGE_ALARM) -- Acknowledge Display Manager Alarms
FORMAT
AA
The AA command acknowledges a Display Manager alarm. This command turns off the
current alarm and enables further alarms, which may already be waiting. AA requires no
arguments or options.
c
c'
Display Manager Commands
2-2
ABRT (ABORT)
o
ABRT (ABORT) -- Abort text search; cancel any action involving ECHO
FORMAT
ABRT (CTRL/X)
The ABRT command aborts a text search, and cancels any action involving the ECHO
command.
When you use ABRT to abort the current search, the Display Manager returns the
message IISearch aborted. II It does not move the window. Note that you cannot type
this command during a search.
o
When you use ABRT to abort the ECHO command, ABRT cancels a move window with
rubberbanding or grow window with rubberbanding operation; or, it cancels highlighting
for a defined range of text, depending on how ECHO was used.
CTRLjX issues this command by default.
o
o
o
2-3
Display Manager Commands
AD (ARROW _DOWN)
AD (ARROW _DOWN) -- Move cursor down one line.
FORMAT
AD
The AD command moves the cursor down one line from its current position. By default,
the down arrow key (LE) on the left hand key pad executes this command.
c
c'
Display Manager Oommands
2-4
AL (ARROW _LEFT)
o
AL (ARROW _LEFT) -- Move cursor left one character.
FORMAT
AL
The AL command moves the cursor left one character from its current position.
default, the left arrow key (LA) on the left hand key pad executes this command.
By
o
o
o
o
2-5
Display Manager Commands
AP (ACKNOWLEDGE_POP)
AP (ACKNOWLEDGE_POP) -- Acknowledge alarm and pop window.
FORMAT
AP
The AP command acknowledges a Display Manager alarm and displays ( .. pops .. ) the
window to which the alarm pertains. This command is particularly useful if the window
is completely covered so that you cannot point to it. AP requires no arguments or
options.
Display Manager Commands
2-6
AR (ARROW _RIGHT)
o
AR (ARROW _RIGHT) -- Move cursor right one character.
FORMAT
AR
The AR command moves the cursor right one character from its current position. By
default, the right arrow key (LC) on the left hand key pad executes this command.
o
o
o
o
2-7
Display Manager Oommands
AS (ARROW _SCALE)
AS (ARROW_SCALE) -- Set scale factors for arrow keys.
FORMAT
AS [x[y]]
The AS command sets scale factors for the arrow keys. The scale factor is useful for
changing the apparent sensitivity of the arrow keys and for lining up the edges of
windows after moving them.
ARGUMENTS
If no arguments are specified, then the default scale factors are used, as described below.
x
(optional)
Specify horizontal scale factor in raster units (integer). This
value must be in the range 0-1023. (Note, however, that portrait
displays may only display up to 800 raster units in this
dimension.) There are approximately 100 raster units per inch.
The default horizontal movement is the width of the character
on which the cursor rests; if the cursor is not on a character, the
DM uses the width of a space in the last window. Specifying 0
for 'x' indicates that the default should be used.
c
Default if omitted: 0
y
(optional)
Specify vertical scale factor in raster units (integer). This value
must be in the range 0-1023. (Note, however, that landscape
displays may only display up to 800 raster units in this
dimension.) The default vertical movement is the height of a
line in the last window. Specifying 0 for 'y' indicates that the
default should be used.
Default if omitted: leave current y value unchanged
~,
(
'---
c
Display Manager Commands
2-8
AU (ARROW _ UP)
o
AU (ARROW_UP) -- Move cursor up one line.
FORMAT
AU
The AU command moves the cursor up one line from its current position. By default, the
up arrow key (L8) on the left hand key pad executes this command.
o
o
o
o
2-9
Display Manager Commands
BGC (BACKGROUND _ COLOR)
BGC (BACKGROUND_COLOR) -- Set background color of display.
FORMAT
BGC [-ON
I -OFF]
The BGC command sets the background color for monochrome displays. Note that this
is the display background only; window background color is controlled with INV
(INVERT _ COLOR).
The background color is ON, by default, at login.
NOTE:
BGC has meaning only for monochromatic displays. It has no effect on nodes
with color displays. See the DM command MONO for information about
background color on color displays.
OPTIONS
If no option is specified, BGC toggles the current mode.
-ON
-OFF
Set background color to grey or green, depending on display
type.
Set background color to black.
r
'- ..-/
Display Manager Commands
2-10
BL (BALANOE)
o
BL (BALANCE) -- Balance delimiters.
FORMAT
[range]BL [-I
I -0]
[1_ char] [r _ char]
BL determines whether a given pair of delimiting characters (for instance, left and right
parentheses) is balanced within a specified range of text.
ARGUMENTS
range
(optional)
Specify range of text to be checked. This argument is valid only
when used with -0; the range for -I is the current cursor position
to the end (or beginning) of the file. Define the range to be
"Defining a Range of Text" in the
checked as described in
previous chapter.
o
Default if omitted: check from cursor to end of line
I_char
(optional)
o
o
r char
(optional)
Specify the right delimiting character. If 'I_char' is specified
but this argument is omitted, the right delimiting character
defaults to '1_ char'. If both arguments are omitted, the right
delimiting character defaults to right parenthesis.
OPTIONS
If either of the following options is specified, it must precede any specified arguments.
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
-I
o
Specify the left delimiting character. If 'r _ char' is specified but
this argument is omitted, the left delimiting character defaults to
'r _ char'. If both arguments are omitted, the left delimiting
character defaults to left parenthesis.
(D)
Insert mode: search for balanced delimiters from the current
character to the beginning or end of the file. The behavior of BL
depends upon the character under the cursor when BL is
invoked.
If you position the cursor on a delimiter and BL finds a
balancing delimiter, it moves the cursor to the matched
character momentarily (to show you where the balance is
completed), then returns the cursor to the character immediately
iollowing the initial cursor postion. The search direction is
forward if the character under the cursor is a left delimiter, and
backward if the character is a right delimiter.
If you position the cursor on a delimiter and BL finds no
2-11
Display Manager Commands
BL (BALANCE)
balancing delimiter, it gives an error message and sounds the
alarm, then inserts a matching right delimiter at the initial
cursor position.
If you position the cursor on a character other than a delimiter,
BL searches backward for the first occurrence of '1_ char', briefly
shows you where it is, then inserts a matching right delimiter at
the initial cursor position.
-0
Check mode: check only -- do not insert balancing characters or
move the cursor . You may mark a range of text to be checked if
you specify this option; see the 'range' argument above. BL
checks all pairs of specified delimiters within the specified range.
Results of the check are displayed in the DM message window.
c
Display Manager Commands
2-12
CASE
o
CASE -- Change case of all letters in a defined range of text.
FORMAT
[range]CASE [options]
The CASE command changes the case of all the letters in a defined range of text. You
can instruct CASE to invert the case of all letters, change all letters to uppercase, or
change all letters to lower case. If you do not specify a range, CASE operates on the text
from the cursor position to the end of the current line.
OPTIONS
o
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
-S
CD)
Swap all uppercase letters for lowercase, and all lowercase
letters for upper case (in the defined range).
-u
Change all letters in the defined range to uppercase.
-L
Change all letters in the defined range to lowercase.
o
o
o
2-13
Display Manager Commands
CC
(CREATE_COPY) --
Create a copy of an existing window.
o
FORMAT
CC
The CC command creates a copy of an existing window. To use this command, mark
both edges of the new window with the DR command, then point to the window to be
and issue the CC
copied. With the cursor in the window to be copied, press key (R4) invokes the CE command, automatically moving the
cursor to the DM input pad and issuing the "Edit file: II prompt. Type the pathname of
the file to be edited.
o
Once an edit pad is created, you may use other DM commands to manipulate text in the
pad. See the DM index pages at the end of the previous chapter for a list of editing
commands.
To close a pad and window, use the DM command
we
(usually CTRL/N).
NOTE: CE does not create a process. It simply opens a file for editing within the current
Display Manager process.
o
ARGUMENTS
region
(optional)
Specify area of the screen where the new window will be
displayed. For details on window boundaries, see the previous
chapter.
Default if omitted: use next DM default window.
o
pathname
(required)
Specify file to be edited.
OPTIONS
-I
Specify that the window created for this pad will be in icon
format.
-C 'char'
Specify the icon character to be used in the icon window. 'char'
must reside in the current icon font. If this option is not
specified and -I is present, the Display Manager will use the
default icon character for this pad type.
o
2-15
Display Manager Commands
OMDF (OOMMAND _ FILE)
CMDF (COMMAND_FILE) -- Execute DM script
C/
1
/'
FORMAT
CMDF pathname
OMDF directs the Display Manager to read commands from a file (DM script). When it
reaches the end of the file, the cursor returns to its previous location.
Oommand files may be nested; i.e., OMDF may be used within another DM script.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify name of file to be executed. DM commands may appear
one per line, or several per line, each delimited by semicolons.
c
c'
c:\
Display Manager Commands
2-16
o
OMS (CLEAR_MARK_STACK) -- Erase existing marks.
FORMAT
OMS
The OMS command erases any existing marks. Use it to ensure that commands requiring
marked regions do not behave unexpectedly as a result of outstanding (but probably
forgotten) marks. The standard key definition is a good example:
.. OMS;TL;XD". Previous marks are cleared so that only the current line is deleted.
OMS requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
2-17
Display Manager Commands
CP (CREATE_PROCESS)
CP (CREATE_PROCESS) -- Create process, pads, and windows.
c'
FORMAT
[region]CP [options] pathname [args •••]
CP creates a process, input and transcript pads, and input and transcript windows, then
executes a program (indicated by the pathname argument) within that process. The
transcript pad is opened as standard output in the new process. To create a process
running the Shell that we supply, either press the key (which causes
everything to happen automatically) or specify /COM/SH for pathname as follows:
Command: CP /COM/SH
This command creates an input pad associated with the transcript pad, and opens it as
standard input. As a result, you have a new process, windows to its input and transcript
pads, and a shell.
To stop a shell and delete all windows and pads associated with its parent process, type
CTRL/Z in the shell's process input pad, then CTRL/N (refer to the DQ command in the
next section for more information).
c
ARGUMENTS
region
(optional)
Specify area of the screen where the new window will be
displayed. For details on window regions, see the previous
chapter.
Default if omitted: use next DM default window.
pathname
(required)
args •••
(optional)
Specify file to be executed by the new process: usually a Shell
(command interpreter).
Specify any arguments to be passed to the program 'pathname'.
If any of these arguments contain explicit blanks, enclose those
arguments in quotation marks.
OPTIONS
Note that options, if present, must precede the 'pathname' argument.
-I
Specify that the window created for this process will be in icon
format.
-C 'char'
Specify the icon character to be used in the icon window. 'char'
must reside in the current icon font. If this option is not
specified and -1 is present, the Display Manager will use the
default icon character for this pad type.
Display Manager Commands
2-18
c'
---_.. __
o
-N name
._-------------------------
Assign process name 'name.' If omitted, the DM assigns the
name "Process_n,II where n is an integer beginning with 1 and
incremented by 1 for each active process.
EXAMPLES
1. Create a process named 'spare' running the Shell.
suppresses startup file execution for the new Shell.
The '-nstart' option on SH
Command: (O.O)dr;(500.300)cp /com/sh -nstart -n spare
2. Create a process running the Shell, and place it in a window in icon format
using the default icon character for this pad type.
Command: cp -i /com/sh
o
o
o
o
2-19
Display Manager Commands
CPB (CREATE_PASTE_BUFFER)
CPB (CREATE_PASTE_BUFFER) -- Display a list of the windows in a group.
FORMAT
CPB group_name [options]
The CPB command creates a window on a named paste buffer specific to the given
group. The paste buffer contains a list of the windows in the group. Because these group
lists are held in paste buffers, your programs can access the groups by using the PBUFS
routines described in the DOMAIN System Call Reference.
The DM automatically creates three special paste buffers to help you manage your
windows and icons. These paste buffers contain the following groups:
• The INVIS _ GROUP -- this buffer holds the pathnames of all the windows
that you have made invisible.
• The ICON _ GROUP -- this buffer holds the pathnames of all the windows
that are represented by icons.
• The ALL _ GROUP -- this buffer holds the pathnames of every window open
on your node - Shell process windows, DM windows, visible and invisible
windows, and windows represented by icons.
These special groups are created regardless of any other groups, and their members may
overlap with the members of any other group (just as any group can have the same
member{s) as another).
c
A special feature of the CPB command allows you to directly access the windows in a
group when the paste buffer holding the group is displayed on your screen. To use this
feature:
1. Use the CPB command to display the list of windows.
2. Position the cursor on the pathname of the window you want to access.
3. Press , and issue the DR (MARK) command.
4. Press < CMD > again, and issue the desired DM command.
By using this feature you can directly access windows that are invisible, represented with
icons, etc.
ARGUMENTS
group_name
(required)
Specify the name of the group you want to display.
OPTIONS
Display Manager Commands
2-20
c'
o
Specify that the window created will be in icon format.
-I
-c
'char'
Specify the icon character to be used in the icon window. 'char'
must reside in the current icon font. If this option is not
specified and -I is present, the Display Manager will use the
default icon character for this pad type.
o
o
o
o
2-21
Display Manager Commands
CPO (CREATE_PROCESS_ONLY) -- Create process without pads or windows.
c
FORMAT
CPO [options] pathname [args •••]
The CPO command creates only a process, without associated pads or windows. The
four standard I/O streams are directed to /DEV/NULL. If this command appears in the
node's DM boot startup script 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP the system assigns the new
process the subject identifier (SID) USER.SERVER.NONE.local_node, and the created
process will continue to run regardless of whether or not anyone is logged in. This is
desirable for utilities like the PRSVR (PRINT _SERVER) and NETMAN, and means that
CPO is identical to CPS in this context.
If CPO is issued in any other startup script or from the keyboard, the SID of the new
process is derived from whatever process invokes CPO, and the created process will
terminate at logout.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
args •••
(optional)
Specify file to be executed by the new process.
Specify any arguments to be passed to the program 'pathname'.
If any of these arguments contain explicit blanks, enclose those
arguments in quotation marks.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed.
OPTIONS
If this option is omitted, the
-N name
Assign process name 'name'.
process is not named.
-w
Invoke II wait II mode. If this option is specified, the DM suspends
its activities until the newly created process terminates. As long
as the process runs, the DM will not respond to keyboard or
other input. USE THIS OPTION WITH CAUTION. If the
newly created process does not terminate, the DM will appear to
be hung. In addition, processes created using -W CANNOT
make any DM requests (via pad_ $ requests or DM commands)
because the DM is suspended and will not respond.
EXAMPLES
1. Run the ALARM_SERVER in a background process.
Command: cpo /sys/alarm/alarm_server -disk 98 -bell!
Display Manager Commands
2-22
~
"'-_/
CPS (CREATE_PROCESS_SERVER)
o
CPS (CREATE_PROCESS_SERVER) -- Create process independent of login.
FORMAT
CPS [options] pathname [args ••• ]
CPS creates a process (without associated pads or windows) that runs regardless of
whether or not anyone is logged in. This is desirable for utilities like the PRSVR
(PRINT _SERVER) and NETMAN. CPS may appear in any of the DM startup scripts.
You may prefer to issue the CPS command from the keyboard on selected occasions,
however, rather than include this function in a startup script.
o
The
created
process
is
assigned
the
subject
identifier
(SID)
USER.SERVER.NONE.local_node regardless of the context in-which the CPS command
appears. Be sure that any files to be used by this process (including the program
specified by the 'pathname' argument) give adequate access to this SID. If the ACLs on
the files do not allow proper access to the SERVER project name, the process will
terminate. And since background processes are essentially invisible, no error messages are
returned to the display, making fault diagnosis difficult.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(required)
args •••
(optional)
Specify file to be executed by the new process.
Specify any arguments to be passed to the program 'pathname'.
If any of these arguments contain explicit blanks, enclose those
arguments in quotation marks.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed.
o
OPTIONS
If this option
-N name
Assign process name 'name'.
process is not named.
-W
Invoke "wait" mode. If this option is specified, the DM suspends
its activities until the newly created process terminates. As long
as the process runs, the DM will not respond to keyboard or
other input. USE THIS OPTION WITH CAUTION. If the
newly created process does not terminate, the DM will appear to
be hung. In addition, processes created using -W CANNOT
make any DM requests (via pad_ $ requests or DM commands)
because the DM is suspended and will not respond.
IS
omitted, the
EXAMPLES
1. Run the server MBX HELPER.
o
Command: cps /sys/mbx/mbx_helper -n mbx_helper
2-23
Display Manager Commands
CURS (CURSOR_LOCK)
CURS (CURSOR_LOCK) -- Control cursor positioning.
FORMAT
CURS [-ON I -OFF]
CURS controls whether or not a window is available' for cursor positioning by the DM
command TN (TO _NEXT _ WINDOW), normally invoked by . All
windows initially default to CURS -ON, which permits the DM to move the cursor into
all windows via the TN command.
CURS operates on a per-window, per-pane basis. For example, you may prevent the DM
from moving the cursor to a transcript pad's pane while permitting it to move the cursor
to the related input pad's pane.
To set the window state, simply point to the appropriate window and then issue the
CURS command.
OPTIONS
If no option is specified, CURS toggles the current mode.
-ON
Enable cursor positioning.
-OFF
Disable cursor positioning.
Display Manager Commands
2-24
(~
\._./
CV (CREATE_ VIEW)
o
CV (CREATE_VIEW) -- Create a read-only edit pad and window.
FORMAT
[region] CV pathname [options]
The CV command creates a read-only edit pad to view an existing file. You may not
make changes to the file, only view it. If you decide that you want to make changes to it
after all, you must first disable read-only mode. See the RO command description for
details about that operation.
By default, the key (R3) invokes the OV command, automatically moving the
cursor to the DM input pad and issuing the "Read file: II prompt. Type the pathname of
the file to be read.
o
To close a pad and window, use the DM command
we
(usually CTRL/N).
ARGUMENTS
region
(optional)
o
Specify area of the screen where the new window will be
displayed. For details on window regions, see the previous
chapter.
Default if omitted: use next DM default window.
pathname
(required)
Specify file to be viewed. An error occurs if the file does not
exist.
OPTIONS
o
-I
Specify that the window created for this pad will be m Icon
format.
-C "char'
Specify the icon character to be used in the icon window. 'char'
must reside in the current icon font. If this option is not
specified and -I is present, the Display Manager will use the
default icon character for this pad type.
o
2-25
Display Manager Commands
DO (DEBUG _ oONTIUNE)
DC (DEBUG_CONTINUE) -- Continue a suspended process.
c
FORMAT
DC
command restarts a process that has been suspended by the DS
(DEBUG_SUSPEND) command. Refer to the DS command description for details about
that operation.
The
DO
DO requires no arguments or options.
c
c
Display Manager Commands
2-26
DQ (DEBUG_QUIT)
o
DQ (DEBUG_ QUIT) -- Generate a quit fault in a process.
FORMAT
DQ [entry _name] [options]
The DQ command generates a quit fault, which normally interrupts execution of the
current program and returns the process to the calling program (usually the Shell). This
command affects the process associated with the window that contains the cursor. By
default, CTRL/Q invokes DQ without options to generate a normal quit fault in the
program currently running.
ARGUMENTS
o
entry _name
(optional)
o
Specify the name of the window or window group whose process
is to receive the fault. Note that this is valid only for processes
with windows. To stop background processes, use the Shell
command SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS). If the name of the window
or group appears as a text string somewhere on the display, you
may use the following time-saving feature: place the cursor on
the name, then press . Now issue the DQ command.
DQ uses the MARKed name for the 'entry _name' argument.
Default if omitted: send fault to the process whose window is
under the cursor.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, then DQ generates a normal quit fault and halts whatever
program is currently running.
o
-0 nn
Generate an arbitrary asynchronous fault with the specified
hexadechnal status (nn).
-S
Stop entire process in a controlled way, if possible. Close open
streams, files, pads, etc. The Shell's parent process is stopped
and closed, too.
-B
NOTE:
o
Blast process; do not execute further user mode instructions.
If you are trying to stop a Shell's parent process (as opposed to some program
running within a Shell), there is an easier method than typing DQ :.S. Position
the cursor in the Shell's process input window and issue an EEF (END_OF _Fll.,E)
command (by default, CTRL/Z). This signals completion of input, and stops
both the Shell and the process. See the description of the DM command EEF for
more information.
2-27
Display Manager Commands
DR (DEFINE_REGION)
DR (DEFINE_REGION) -- Place a mark to define a region.
FORMAT
DR
The DR command marks some part of the display or some part of a pad. The mark can
be used to define a region for a substitute command, to grow, shrink, or move a window,
or to reposition the cursor.
You may specify a literal point at which the mark is to be placed by preceeding the DR
command with line and column numbers in a pad, x and y screen coordinates, or regular
expressions for matching text. If no point is specified, the mark is placed at the current
cursor position.
By default, the key invokes the DR command along with ECHO to provide
user-visible feedback.
("
~. /
r"
\'---. ....
Display Manager Oommands
2-28
DS (DEBUG_SUSPEND)
o
DS (DEBUG_SUSPEND) -- Suspend a process.
FORMAT
DS
The DS command generates a temporary interrupt for a process. All activities are
suspended. Processes may be restarted with the DC (DEBUG _ CONTINUE) command. See
the DC command description for details.
DS requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
2-29
Display Manager Commands
ECHO
ECHO -- Begin text echoing, end rubberbanding.
FORMAT
ECHO [option]
When used as part of the DR; ECHO command sequence invoked with , the
ECHO command performs two seperate operations depending on the situation where it is
used. When you press to begin defining a range of text, ECHO tells the DM
to begin highlighting the indicated text range in reverse video (text echoing). When you
use to complete a move window (WME) or grow window (WGE) operation,
the ECHO command tells the DM to remove the "rubberband" and move or grow the
window as indicated. You can abort text highlighting or rubberbanding using the SQ
command. (By default, the CTRL/X key combination issues the SQ command.)
OPTIONS
-R
Display Manager Oommands
Specify ECHO for a rectangular region of text. Use a mark
point and the cursor to specify a column along the left side of
the text you want to highlight in reverse video. When you issue
the ECHO command with the -R option all text to the right of
the specified column is then diplayed in reverse video.
2-30
ED (EDIT _DELETE)
o
ED (EDIT_DELETE) -- Delete character under cursor.
FORMAT
ED
The ED command deletes the character under the cursor. If the character is a
NEWLINE, ED joins two lines. By default, the key invokes the ED
command.
ED requires no arguments or options.
NOTE:
There is a homonymous Shell command: ED -- Invoke line mode editor. See
the ED command description in the Shell chapter for details.
o
o
o
o
2-31
Display Manager Commands
EE (EDIT _ ERASE)
EE (EDIT _ERASE) -- Delete 'character preceding cursor.
FORMAT
EE
The EE command deletes the character preceding the cursor. If the window is in
overstrike mode, EE replaces the preceding character with a blank. By default, the
key invokes the EE command.
EE requires no arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
2-32
EEF (EDIT _END _ OF _FILE)
o
EEF (EDIT _END _ OF _FILE) -- Insert end-of-file mark.
FORMAT
EEF
The EEF command inserts a stream end-of-file mark (EOF) in the pad. If the line
containing the cursor is empty, the end-of-file mark is written on that line. Otherwise,
the end-of-file mark is inserted following the current line.
By default, CTRL/Z executes the EEF command.
It is a common (although not universal) convention for programs to terminate execution
and return to the process which called them when they receive an EOF on their standard
input stream. The command Shell is such a program. When the top-level program in a
process (usually /eOM/SH) returns, the process stops and all of its streams are closed.
The Display Manager then closes the Shell's process input pad and window, and closes
the transcript pad. Whether or not the transcript window also disappears depends on the
setting of its auto-close mode (see the we command description for details).
If
auto-close is disabled (the default condition), then you must manually delete any windows
associated with the closed transcript pad by using the DM command we -Q, or
CTRL/N.
o
o
o
o
2-33
...
_-------_..._...... ..._----_ .._.... _ - _ . _ - - - - _
Display Manager Commands
EI (EDIT _INSERT)
EI (EDIT _INSERT) -- Set insert/overstrike mode.
FORMAT
EI [-ON
I -OFF]
The EI command puts the current pad into (-ON) or out of (-OFF) insert mode. If no
option is supplied, the current mode is inverted. In insert mode, characters you type are
inserted into the pad without replacing or overstriking any existing characters. This
causes existing text to drift to the right as new text is added. In overstrike mode (i.e.,
insert mode turned off), characters typed at the keyboard replace those under the cursor.
This can be useful for entering information into pre-formatted files so that the format is
undisturbed.
By default, the key on low-profile keyboards and the key on
880 keyboards invoke the EI command without options to toggle the current mode.
~','
\
,,~-~/
The window legend contains an "1" when the window is in insert mode.
disappears in overstrike mode.
The "1"
All pads are initially in insert mode, although this is irrelevant if the pad is also
read-only.
(
"'-...
_./
(~'I
"-... _ /
Display Manager Commands
2-34
EN (EDIT _NEWLINE)
u
EN (EDIT _NEWLINE) -- Insert NEWLINE.
FORMAT
EN
The EN command inserts (or overstrikes, depending on current mode) a NEWLINE
character at the current cursor position.
By default, the key invokes this command.
o
o
o
o
2-35
Display Manager Commands
ENV (ENVffiONMENT)
ENV (ENVIRONMENT) -- Set or display an environment variable.
FORMAT
ENV variable [value]
The DM command ENV sets or displays the value of an environment variable.
Environment variables are of primary concern to DOMAIN/IX users; please consult the
DOMAIN/IX documentation for details about their usage.
If you invoke ENV from the keyboard, you may use it only to display environment
variables, not set them. To set variables, ENV must appear in one of your startup
scripts so that it gets executed' before any Shells are created. This is because the DM
assigns values to environment variables for new Shells using those in effect for the
window that currently contains the cursor. ENV thus does not have a chance to
influence the new Shell if other Shell(s} already exist. In addition, the ENV command
will NEVER change the value of a variable in an existing process.
For details about manipulating environment variables from the Shell,
command description in the Shell commands chapter.
('
' -..
- -,'
see the EXPORT
ARGUMENTS
variable
(required)
value
(optional)
I~
Specify the name of the variable whose value is to be set or
displayed. Since the DM normally forces arguments to uppercase
prior to command scanning, enclose a variable whose name must
be lowercase in single quotation marks.
Specify the new value to be assigned to 'variable'. Since the
DM normally forces arguments to uppercase prior ,to command
scanning, enclose a value which must be lowercase in single
quotation marks.
Default if omitted: display the current value of 'variable'.
EXAMPLES
Command: env SYSTYFE
Display the current value for SYSTYFE
for the current Shell window.
Command: env SYSTYPE ·bsd4.2·
Set the SYSTYPE variable to ·bsd4.2·.
This line must appear in a startup
script to have any effect.
Display Manager Commands
2-36
\
"'----
,.'
-----------
---- -
---------------------
---------
ER (EDIT _RAW)
o
ER (EDIT_RAW) -- Insert raw character.
FORMAT
ERnn
The ER command sends a raw character to a program. The single argument nn
(required) is a one or two character hexadecimal value which defines the single byte sent
to the active program the next time the program requests input. The data byte is not
echoed anywhere on the display. In effect, this command delivers a single raw keystroke
to a program.
This command can be used by programs that need to define keys to return known values
for actions by the programs.
o
This command differs from the other text insertion commands in that it does NOT insert
the hexadecimal character into an edit pad. Its sole function is to pass a hexadecimal
character to a running program.
o
o
o
2-37
Display Manager Commands
ES (EDIT _ STRING)
~",
(
ES (EDIT _STRING) -- Insert string.
I
--",,/'
/
FORMAT
ES'string'
If a window is currently in write mode, then any text character typed at the keyboard is
inserted at the current cursor position. This is the default Display Manager action.
Typing text into a read-only window causes an error.
The ES command inserts a string of text at the current cursor position. Enclose the
string to be inserted in apostrophes. Since text insertion is the default action anyway,
this command is primarily useful in key definition commands where you want some text
written out when the key is pressed, or in DM scripts for writing text to the display.
c
Ci
2-38
Display Manager Commands
- - - - - - - --_.
__...__ ...... __ ...__._._.......
.
EX (EXIT)
o
EX (EXIT) -- Exit Display Manager to Boot Shell.
FORMAT
EX
The EX command causes the system to stop the Display Manager process and enter the
Boot Shell. This puts you in the same place that you would be if you had powered up
your node with the NORMAL/SERVICE switch set to SERVICE.
To restart the Display Manager, type
) GO
in the Boot Shell.
o
This command differs from SHUT, which shuts the node's operating system (AEGIS)
down completely and enters the Mnemonic Debugger that resides in the node's boot
PROM.
Do not confuse this command with the Shell command EXIT, which exits a Shell script
loop. See the EXIT command description for more information.
u
o
o
2-39
Di8play Manager Oommand8
FL (FONT _LOAD)
FL (FONT _LOAD) -- Load a font for use in pads.
FORMAT
FL pathname [-I]
The FL command loads a font for use in subsequent pads. Note that fonts apply to pads,
not windows, so any new window opened to an old pad uses the old font.
You can load up to 50 fonts. The DM keeps track of fonts loaded by the FL command or
programs. It unloads fonts on a least-recently-used basis.
If you need to unload a font (to edit it with EDFONT for example), issue an FL
command for another font, and close all the windows using the font you wish to unload.
If a program loaded the font, stop the program (issue an end-of-file -.;. usually CTRL/Z),
and close the window.
c
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify name of file containing font to be loaded. The given
pathname is first looked up directly, using the user working and
naming directory rules. If not found, it is looked up in the
directory /SYS/DM/FONTS.
OPTIONS
-I
Specify that the font to be loaded is an icon font.
~,
l/)
Display Manager Commands
2-40
GM (GO _ TO _MARK)
u
GM (GO_TO_MARK) -- Go to a mark.
FORMAT
GM
The GM command repositions the cursor at the most recently marked point after first
marking the current cursor position (where you invoked the GM command). This allows
you to alternate between two points with repeated invocations of GM. The most
common use of this is to II remember II a position in a file and return to it later. GM
repositions the window, if necessary, to display the marked pad location.
o
Pads may contain multiple marks, in which case GM works its way progressively through
the mark stack, consuming each mark as it goes. You may also place marks in different
pads; GM builds only one mark stack, not one for each pad. Thus you may use this
command to jump around between pads.
GM requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
2-41
Display Manager Commands
lOON
ICON -- Change a window or window group into an icon(s); change an icon
back into a window.
FORMAT
ICON [entry _name] [options]
The lOON command changes the specified window or group into an icon(s), or changes
an icon back into a window. You can use two methods to change a window into an icon:
specify the window name (shown in the window legend) when you issue the lOON
command, (either by typing it or using as described below), or simply
position the cursor in the window, press < OMD >, and issue the lOON command. If you
want to change a group of windows into icons, you must specify the group name when
you issue the lOON command. By default, if you do not specify an entry _name (the
name of a window or group) lOON manipulates the window under the cursor.
To change an icon back into a window, repeat the process described above. The window
reappears on your display at its former position.
(~
' '----,
When you change a window into an icon, the DM displays an icon character that
describes the type of information the window displayed, such as an edit pad, a graphics
file, or a Shell transcript pad. The default icon characters are held in a font file called
jSYSjDMjFONTSjICONS. If you desire, you can examine or change this file using the
EDFONT program described in the appendices. If you want to use your own icon font
file, invoke the FL (FONT _LOAD) command with the -I option prior to issuing the lOON
command.
ARGUMENTS
entry _name
(optional)
Specify the name of the window or group you want to change
into icon(s), or change back into a window. If the name of the
window or group appears as a text string somewhere on the
display, you may use the following time-saving feature: place the
cursor on the name, then press . Now issue the
lOON command.
lOON uses the MARKed name for the
'entry _name' argument.
Default if omitted: manipulate the window under the cursor.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, lOON toggles the current window setting.
-I
Force the window or group to appear as an icon. Not valid if
-W is specified.
-w
Force the window or group to appear as a window. Not valid if
-I is specified.
-0 char
Display Manager Oommands
Specify the the DM icon character used to represent a window.
2-42
('
1..."- ..,.,
IDF (ICON_DEFAULT)
o
IDF (ICON_DEFAULT) -- Set the icon default positioning and offset.
FORMAT
IDF
The IDF command sets the position of an icon on your screen, determines where
subsequent icons will be positioned (the offset), and specifies the icon shift vector to use
when icons start to overlap each other. Each time you issue the IDF command you reset
the positions where any subsequent icons appear.
o
By default, icons appear in a horizontal line along the top of portrait displays, and in a
vertical line along the right side of landscape displays. The default offset is set at the
width of one icon (60 bits) horizontally or vertically, depending on the display. You can
use IDF to change this default positioning and offset, to establish the position of an icon
created in a script, or to set your personal icon positioning and offset in a DM startup
script (STARTUP _DM). Specify the IDF command in one of the following ways:
o
Move the cursor to the new default icon position. Issue the IDF command.
This operation sets the first icon position; the offset of the next icon will be
0,0 (pixels) and the shift vector will be 0,0 (pixels). Therefore, all subsequent
icons will appear on top of one another at the first icon position.
o
o
Move the cursor to the new default icon position. Use the key or
issue the DR command to mark the cursor position. Move the cursor to
indicate the offset for the next icon. Issue the IDF command.
This operation sets the first icon position and next icon offset. The shift
vector is 0,0 (pixels). Therefore, when icons need to use already-occupied
positions, the DM places new icons directly on top of pre-existing icons.
o
o
Move the cursor to the new default icon position. Use the key or
issue the DR command to mark the cursor position. Move the cursor to
indicate the offset for the next icon and once again issue a or DR
command. Then move the cursor again· in order to set the shift vector for
reused icon positions.
This operation sets the first icen position and the next icon offset. It also
establishes a shift vector so that icons will not appear directly on top of one
another if the DM needs to place new icons over pre-existing ones.
o
Specify the icon position, offset, and shift explicitly in a command line. The
format is as follows:
(first_xy_pOs)DR; (next_xy_poS)DR; (shift_xy_pos);IDF
For example, the command line:
o
Command:
(800,10) DR; (850,60) DR; (820,10); IDF
places the upper-left corner of the first icon at bit position (800,10), sets the
2-43
Display Manager Commands
IDF (ICON _DEFAUL T)
icon offset vector to' (50,50) (found by subtracting the 'initial' from the 'next'
bit positions), and sets the shift vector to (20,0) (found by subtracting the
'initial' from the 'shift' bit positions). The next icon would, therefore, appear
at bit positions (850,60), the next at (900,110), etc. If an icon must be placed
on top of the first icon, then it will be positioned at (820,10), the next at
(870,60), etc.
,,~ __ /
I
The IDF command requires no arguments or options.
('.
\
Display Manager Commands
'-....
~
2-44
--------------
......-... _....
_._-_._......_.._._------_.. _.... _---_ .....
,..,
'
INV (INVERT _ COLOR)
o
INV (INVERT_COLOR) -- Set window color.
FORMAT
INV [-ON I -OFF]
The INV command sets the color of all windows on monochrome displays. Note that
these are window backgrounds only; the display background is controlled with BGC
(BACKGROUND _ COLOR).
The window color is ON, by default, at login.
NOTE:
o
INV has meaning only for monochro~atic displays. It has no effect on nodes
with color displays. See the DM command MONO for information about
window color on color displays.
OPTIONS
If no option is specified, INV toggles the current mode.
o
-ON
Display black characters on a white or green background,
depending on display type.
-OFF
Display white or green characters on a black background,
depending on display type.
o
o
2-45
Display Manager Commands
KBD (KEYBOARD)
KBD (KEYBOARD) -- Declare keyboard type.
FORMAT
KBD id
NOTE:
This command is valid only in the DM file 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP; it may not
be typed from the keyboard. See the DOMAIN System User's Guide for
information on startup files.
KBD allows you to specify the keyboard that is attached to your node so that the proper
set of standard key definitions may be applied. When this command is invoked in the
'NODE_DATA/STARTUP file, it causes the DM to execute the corresponding key definition
file (jSYS/DM/STD_KEYS, /SYS/DM/STD_KEYS2, or /SYS/DM/STD_KEYS3).
If this command is not invoked in the 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP file, the DM will do the
following. It will first test for a low-profile Model II keyboard and, if one is attached, it
will use 'KBD 3'. If a Model II keyboard is not present, the DM will then default to
'KBD 2' (low-profile Model I keyboard).
ARGUMENTS
id
(required)
Display Manager Commands
Specify keyboard ID. Valid IDs are' , for the 880 keyboard, '2'
for the low-profile Model I keyboard, and '3' for the low-profile
Model II keyboard.
2-46
~
(
\ ..~..---..,.
KD (KEY _DEFINITION)
o
KD (KEY _DEFINITION) -- Set or display key definition.
FORMAT
KD key _ name [[definition] KE]
The KD command defines a keyboard key as a sequence of DM commands. It also can
display the definition of a key.
ARGUMENTS
key_name
(required)
o
Specify the name of the key to be defined or displayed. Key
names are available from HELP DM KEYS. Enclose normal
alphanumeric and punctuation keys in quotation marks.
definition
(optional)
Specify sequence of DM commands that represent desired key
function; separate commands with NEWLINEs or semicolons.
Definition can be any number of commands, but cannot exceed
256 characters. Definitions may contain other predefined keys
(Le., key definitions may be embedded in one another).
o
The input request character, '&', which is frequently used in key
definitions, must be preceded by an escape character (@) when
the KD command appears in a script.
If 'definition' is not specified and KE is present (Le., definition is
null), then the current key definition is deleted and the key
reverts to its normal graphic value, if any. If KE is also absent,
then the definition of the named key is displayed in the DM
message window.
o
Default if omitted: see above
KE
(optional)
Signal. the end of the KD command. This argument is required
if 'definition' is present, or if you wish to delete a definition by
specifying a null definition.
Default if omitted: display 'key _ name' definition
EXAMPLES
o
1. Command: KD L3
Display definition of key L3.
2. Command: KD F6 AU;TR KE
Define F6 key to move the cursor to end of
previous line in window.
3. Command: KD
Delete current definition of CTRL/C.
~C
KE
You can embed key definitions in key definitions, and thereby define keys that define other
2-47
Display Manager Commands
KD (KEY _DEFINITION)
keys. The embedded key definition follows the same rules as any other key definition. The
KE that ends the embedded definition must be separated from the next command by an
II escaped II semicolon; that is, a semicolon preceded by the @ character. For example:
Command: KD F3 KD "'X ES 'April is the cruelest month' KE@; PV KE
changes the definition of the F3 key, which normally just invokes the DM command PV, so
that it also changes the definition of CTRL/X to print out the string shown. If the ';' were
not preceded by an escape character, the definition would not be accepted.
Note that key definitions within key definitions are scanned TIffiEE times: 1) when the
outer key definition is made, 2) when the outer key definition is executed and the inner key
definition is made, and 3) when the inner key definition is executed. Because of this, you
must exercise great care when escaping (with II@II) certain special characters such as II@II
itself.
~' \
(
Display Manager Commands
2-48
"'-_.
--'/
L (LOGIN)
o
L (LOGIN) -- Log in to a node.
FORMAT
L id [proj [org]] [options]
The L command allows you to log in to a node. It is valid only at the beginning of a
session in reponse to the "Please log in: II prompt. Typing the L command after logging
in causes an error. After entering the L command, the system will request a password. If
you specify either the ID or ~he password incorrectly, the system displays an error
message and the correct format of the L command, and you may try again.
o
o
If you forget your password, you will have to contact your System Administrator, who
can assign a new password to you. The administrator will NOT be able to tell YOll your
current password, since those are encrypted within the system and are not
human-readable.
The 'L' character itself is optional when preceded by the "Please log in: II prompt. You
may omit it and simply type your ID if you desire.
When you have logged in successfully, the system sets the working directory to your
IIlogin home directory," which may be anywhere in your file hierarchy that you please.
The login home directory name is first established by the System Administrator for your
network when your account is created. You may change it using the -H option (below).
ARGUMENTS
The 'id', 'proj' , and 'org' arguments may be separated either by blanks (as shown), or by
periods.
id
(required)
o
proj
(optional)
org
(optional)
Specify the user ID assigned to you by the System
Administrator when your access privileges were established.
Specify project ID associated with this user id. User IDs mayor
may not have project IDs, depending on how the access privileges
were set up.
Specify organization ID associated with this user and project ID.
Again, this mayor may not be necessary for any particular user
ID.
OPTIONS
-P
Set new password. After you have successfully logged on with
the old password, the system will prompt you to set a new
password. The password may be any combination of ASCII
characters up to a maximum of 8 characters. (Note: Some
network configurations may require the password to be at least 6
2-49
Di8play Manager Command8
L (LOGIN)
characters long for added security.
Check with your local
System Administrator to see if this requirement has been
implemented on your network.)
-H
Display Manager Commands
Set new home directory. After you have logged on successfully,
the system will prompt you to establish a new home directory for
login. Enter the desired pathname. This is the directory which
you enter by default each time you log on.
2-50
LCM (LOAD_COLOR_MAP)
o
LCM
(LOAD_CaLOR_MAP) --
Load a color map.
FORMAT
LCM [-p pathname]
LCM loads a color map from a file which specifies a set of color map entries. Each entry
establishes an association between an index and a color value. When the DM is initially
loaded, it sets the node's color map from the file in /sys/dm/color _map.
If no pathname is given, LCM loads the color map from /sys/dm/color _map. In this
case, all 16 colors (that is, color entries for color slots 0-15) are reloaded. If you specify a
pathname, then LCM reads the given file and tries to load the colors associated with the
indexes.
o
NOTE: IF there are direct mode graphics programs running that have changed the color
values for color slots 0-15, then the execution of this command will change the colors in
these windows as well as resetting the DM's colors.
OPTIONS
-Ppathname
C)
Specify file which contains the color values for red, green, and
blue. The format of this file should be identical to the DM's
color map file, /sys/dm/color _map. For more information
about the format of this file, please refer to the manual
"Programmer's Guide to DOMAIN Graphics Primitives".
EXAMPLES
1. Load the DM's color map found in the file /sys/dm/color _map.
Command: lcm
o
2. Load the color map specified in the file my _ colormap.
Command: lcm -p my_colormap
o
2-50.1
Display Manager Commands
--------------------
o
o
o
.1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----------.-
LO (LOG _ OFF)
o
LO (LOG_OFF) -- Log off a node.
FORMAT
LO [options]
TheLO command stops all user processes (except those created by the CPS command
and those created by the node startup file 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP), closes all pads and
files, and returns the display to the IIPlease log in: II prompt.
If LO cannot terminate all active processes normally, then the command asks you
whether or not you wish to blast the remaining processes (see -F below). Respond either
lIyll or IInll.
o
o
o
You may also disable the ability to log off. See -OFF below.
It is possible to execute a DM command script automatically at logout. The logout script
must be in a file named 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP _LOGOUT.type, where 'type' is one of the
standard display type extensions used for startup file names ('.19L', '.COLOR' or none).
Note that you cannot start up new processes with CP, CPS, or CPO from this script
because the DM is in the process of shutting down all existing processes.
OPTIONS
-F
Force log off by blasting processes that cannot be stopped
normally. If you use this option, be aware that some disk space
may be lost.
To recover the disk space, use the salvager
SALVOL. Files and programs that you had been working with
may also be lost. The -F option should only be used as a last
resort when the normal logoff proceedure is not working.
-OFF
Disable the ability to log off. When this option is specified, the
user who is currently logged in will not be able to log off.
-ON
Enable log off. Use this option to restore the ability for a user
to log off.
o
2-51
----------
...
_._-_
....
Display Manager Commands
MONO (MONOCHROME)
MONO (MONOCHROME) -- Set color monitor to black and white.
FORMAT
MONO [-ONI-OFF] .
MONO controls whether the DM displays text and windows in color or in black and
white. This command operates on color displays only. For information on controlling
window color on monochrome displays, see the DM commands BGC
(BACKGROUND _ COLOR) and INV (INVERT_COLOR).
MONO is OFF, by default, at login.
OPTIONS
If no option is specified, MONO toggles the current mode.
-ON
Enable monochrome mode.
-OFF
Disable monochrome mode.
Display Manager Commands
2-52
~
i,
\,
MSG (MESSAGE)
o
MSG (MESSAGE) -- Display a message in the DM output window.
FORMAT
MSG 'string'
The MSG command instructs the Display Manager to print a string in the DM output
window. The string must be enclosed in single quotes.
ARGUMENTS
string
(required)
o
Specify the string to be printed in the DM output window.
EXAMPLES
The DM command line:
Command: MSG 'Please select another key'
causes the DM to display the message "Please select another key" in the DM output
window.
o
o
o
2-53
Display Manager Commands
~i
PB (PAD_BOTTOM)
PB (PAD_BOTTOM) -- Move bottom of pad into window.
FORMAT
PB
The PB command moves the bottom line of the pad to the bottom of the current
window. This is a pad movement command, as opposed to TB, which moves the cursor
to the last line in the window, regardless of that line's position in the pad.
PB does not require either arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
2-54
PH (PAD_HORIZONTAL)
o
PH (PAD _HORIZONTAL) -- Move pad horizontally by characters.
FORMAT
PH [-]n
The PH command moves (scrolls) the pad horizontally under a window in units of
characters.
By default, the boxed horizontal arrow keys scroll a pad in lO-character increments.
ARGUMENTS
[-]n
o
(required)
Specify scrolling increment in characters. Positive (unsigned) 'n'
scrolls pad left; negative 'n' scrolls pad right.
o
o
o
2-55
Display Manager Commands
PN (PAD _NAME) -- Save trans<:ript pad in named file.
FORMAT
PN pathname
The PN command names a transcript pad and makes it permanent. That is, the pad is
stored in a file and remains on the system after all windows to it are deleted. The file
remains in use and locked, however, until the process is stopped and all windows are
closed. If you do not use the PN command, transcript pads are deleted when all windows
to them are deleted.
The PN command can also be used to change the name of an edit pad.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify the pathname where the DM saves the pad. The
pathname must be cataloged in a directory on your node (i.e.,
you cannot save a file on your node if the file name is cataloged
on some other node).
c
~'
Display Manager Commands
2-56
PP (PAD_PAGE)
o
PP (PAD _PAGE)
--
Scroll pad vertically by pages.
FORMAT
PP [-]n
The PP command scrolls the pad vertically under a window in units of pages. By
default, the boxed up and down arrow keys invoke this command, scrolling in half-page
units.
ARGUMENTS
[-]n
o
(required)
Specify scrolling increment in pages. Positive (unsigned) 'n'
scrolls down; negative 'n' scrolls up. Note that 'n' may also be a
decimal fraction.
A "page" is defined as the smaller of either of the following
values:
• the number of lines that fit in the window
o
• the number of lines between the bottom of the
window and the next form feed or frame
o
o
2-57
Display Manager Commands
PT (PAD _ TOP)
PT (PAD _ TOP) -- Move top of pad into window.
FORMAT
PT
The PT command moves the top line of the pad to the top of the current window. This
is a pad movement command, as opposed to TT, which moves the cursor to the first line
in the window, regardless of that line's position in the pad.
PT does not require either arguments or options.
c
I~"
\
\ ....
Display Manager Commands
2-58
".'
PV (PAD_VERTICAL)
o
PV (PAD_VERTICAL) -- Scroll pad vertically by lines.
FORMAT
PV [-]n
The PV command scrolls the pad vertically under a window in units of lines. By default,
the shifted up and down arrow keys on the low-profile keyboard and the F2 and F3
function keys on the 880 keyboard invoke this command, scrolling in one line units.
ARGUMENTS
[-]n
o
(required)
Specify scrolling increment in lines.
scrolls down; negative 'n' scrolls up.
Positive (unsigned) 'n'
o
o
o
2-59
Display Manager Oommands
PW (PAD _ WRITE)
PW (PAD_WRITE) -- Update edit file while ~aintaining edit pad unchanged.
FORMAT
PW
The PW command updates a file that is being edited. It is valid only for writable edit
pads. The first time you issue PW, the DM writes the contents of the edit pad to the file
that is being edited, without closing the edit pad. The previous contents of the file are
saved in a file with the same name and the added suffix .BAK. Subsequent PW or WC
(WINDOW _ CLOSE) commands rewrite the new file and leave the .BAK version of the file
unchanged.
PW is similar to WC with two exceptions. First, PW leaves the edit pad open. Second,
PW writes the new version of the file even if other windows are viewing the edit pad.
PW is useful if, for example, you want to try compiling a program you are editing. If
you decide to make additional changes to the program, you can just go back to the edit
pad and continue editing, since updates made by PW leave the edit pad open and active.
The key on the low-profile keyboard executes PW;RO to save the pad and put
it in read-only mode. There is no predefined key on the 880 keyboard that provides a
similar function, although PW is executed along with other DM commands by the default
CTRL/Y sequence.
The PW command requires no arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
2-60
RM (REPLACE_MARK)
o
RM
(REPLACE_MARK) --
Replace a mark on the mark stack.
FORMAT
RM
The RM command places the last issued mark (DR) back on the mark stack, allowing
you to use the mark again.
RM requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
2-61
.._ - - _ . _ . _ - - - - - - -
Display Manager Commands
RO (READ _ ONLY)
RO (READ_ONLY) -- Set read/write mode.
FORMAT
RO [-ON
I -OFF]
The RO command puts a pad into (-ON) and out of (-OFF) read-only mode. If no option
is supplied, the current mode is toggled. The pad must be in write mode (-OFF) in order
for you to insert or delete anything.
By default, CTRL/M invokes the RO command without options to toggle the current
mode.
An nRn appears in the window legend of a pad in read-only mode. The uRn disappears
in write mode.
An edit pad which has been modified cannot be made read-only without first writing it
out with the PW command. See the PW command description for details.
r
Display Manager Commands
2-62
RS (REFRESH_SCREEN)
o
RS (REFRESH_SCREEN) -- Refresh screen.
FORMAT
RS
The RS command refreshes the entire screen, updating all windows with any pending
changes. By default, the CTRL/F sequence invokes this command.
o
o
o
C)
2-63
Display Manager Commands
RW (REFRESH_WINDOW)
RW (REFRESH_WINDOW) -- R-efresh a window.
FORMAT
RW [-R]
The RW command causes the DM to refresh the contents of the current window
immediately, updating it with any pending changes.
When an unexpected system fault, such as a network failure, occurs, pads may be marked
undisplayable in order to avoid further faults. When this happens, the DM displays an
error message instead of the window's normal contents. When the problem has been
resolved, use the -R option (reset) to redisplay the window's normal contents.
Display Manager Commands
2-64
S (SUBSTITUTE)
o
S (SUBSTITUTE) -- Substitute all occurrences of matched string in defined range.
FORMAT
[range] S [[/[stringl]]/string2/]
The S command substitutes one literal string for a string described by a regular
expression over a defined text range. The command does not move the cursor or the
window, but does update the window when the substitution is completed. Strings used
with this command are also saved for later use (see below).
All substitutions are case sensitive, unlike searches, which ignore case unless told
otherwise. Substitution case sensitivity cannot be disabled.
o
If the Display Manager scans more than 100 lines while processing a substitute command,
it displays a II Substitute in progress ... II message in its message window. Then it polls for
keystrokes for every 10 lines it processes. At this point you may:
1. Wait for DM to complete the operation.
2. Use the keyboard. It works as it does normally. You can type into any pad
except the one being searched. You can issue any Display Manager command
except another search or substitute command. The Display Manager executes
these commands when it completes the substitution. You can type input to
another Shell or program (if it was previously waiting for input). Subsequent
user process input and output requests will be processed when the Display
Manager finishes the substitution.
o
ARGUMENTS
If no arguments are specified, the previous substitution will be repeated from the current
cursor position to the end of the line.
o
range
(optional)
Specify range of text in which substitution is to be made. See
the section on defining text ranges in the previous chapter for
details.
Default if omitted: use current cursor position to end of line
stringl
(optional)
Specify string to be replaced in the form of a regular expression.
If this argument is omitted but the opening delimiter U) is used
(i.e., "S/ /string2/"), then string! defaults to the string! used in
the last search operation. If the delimiter is also omitted (i.e.,
IS/string2/"), then string! defaults to the string used in the last
substitution operation.
Default if omitted: see above
o
string2
(optional)
Specify literal replacement string.
2-65
..... _.........._..............
_
_ _._._._....... __...__ ............. _ - - - - - - - - - - - - -
..._..... ..
This
IS
not a regular
Display Manager Commands
S (SUBSTITUTE)
expression). An II & II can be used to denote stringl. If 'stringl'
is present, then 'string2' is required.
Default if omitted: repeat last substitution command
EXAMPLES
1. CTRL/T
CTRL/B
s/Fielding/Tom Jones/
Move to first character in the pad.
Place a mark.
Move to last character in the pad.
Replace the string "Fielding" with
"Tom Jones" throughout the marked
range (in this case. the entire pad).
2. s/Tom/& Jones/
Replace "Tom" with "Tom Jones".
Since no range was marked or specified.
the replacement takes effect from
the current cursor position to the
end of the line.
See the section on IIUsing Regular Expressions" in the previous chapter for more
examples.
Display Manager Commands
2-66
SO (SET _ OASE)
o
SC (SET_CASE) -- Set search case sensitivity.
FORMAT
SC [-ON
I -OFF]
A search can be either case-sensitive or case-insensitive. In case-sensitive searches, the
characters must match in case (Le., /mary / would NOT locate the string nMARyn). In
case-insensitive searches, uppercase and lowercase letters are considered equivalent. By
default, searches are case-insensitive.
The -ON option explicitly specifies a case-sensitive search; the -OFF switch explicitly
specifies a case-insensitive search. Typing the SO command without options toggles the
current case comparison setting.
o
NOTE:
The SO command has no effect on 8ub8titution operations, only 8earch
operations.
Substitutions are always sensitive to the case of the strings
involved.
o
o
o
2-67
Di8play Manager Command8
SHUT
SHUT -- Shut down system. ~
FORMAT
SHUT [-F]
The SHUT command exits from the Display Manager and shuts down the system. The
Display Manager first closes all windows and pads, then unloads the operating system
(AEGIS) and enters the Mnemonic Debugger that resides in the node's boot PROM. If
user processes are still active, the SHUT command attempts to stop them. If they stop
normally, the shutdown proceeds. If the Display Manager cannot stop them normally,
the SHUT command aborts.
The SHUT command has the same effect on system software as turning the node's power
off.
To restart the system, type EX AEGIS in the Mnemonic Debugger.
To force either log off or shut down, specify the -F option. (The same effect can be
achieved by reponding "y" to a request to blast processes that cannot be closed
normally.) If you use this, however, be aware that some disk space may be lost if
processes cannot be terminated normally. To recover the disk space, use the salvager
SALVOL.
See the SALVOL (SALVAGE_VOLUME) command.
Display Manager Commands
2-68
SO (SUBSTITUTE _ ONCE)
o
SO (SUBSTITUTE_ONCE) -- Substitute first occurrence of matched string.
FORMAT
[range] SO [[/ [stringl]] / string2]
The SO command is identical to the S (SUBSTITUTE) command except that 'string2'
replaces only the first occurrence of 'string!' in each line of the defined range of text.
o
o
o
o
2-69
Display Manager Commands
SQ (SEARCH_ QUIT)
SQ (SEARCH_QUIT) -- Abort a search operation.
FORMAT
SQ
The SQ command aborts a text search, and cancels any action involving the ECHO
command. This command is equivalent to ABRT.
The SQ command aborts the current search. The DM returns the message II Search
aborted. II It does not move the window . Note that you cannot type this command
during a search. You must invoke it with a defined key.
When you use SQ to abort the ECHO command, SQ cancels a 'move window with
rubberbanding' or 'grow window with rubberbanding' operation; or, it cancels
highlighting for a defined range of text, depending on how ECHO was used.
c
c
c
Display Manager Commands
2-70
TB (TO _BOTTOM)
o
TB (TO _ BOTTOM) -- Move cursor to bottom line in window.
FORMAT
TB
The TB command moves the cursor to the bottom line in the window. This is in contrast
to the PB command, which moves the bottom line of the pad into the window.
TB requires no arguments or options.
NOTE:
There is a homonymous Shell command: TB (TRACEBACK) -- Print traceback after
a fault. See the TB command description in the Shell chapter for details.
o
o
o
o
2-71
Display Manager Commands
TDM (TO _DM_ WINDOW)
TDM (TO _DM_ WINDOW) -- Move cursor to DM input window.
C-)
FORMAT
TDM
TDM moves the cursor to the Display Manager input window (labeled .. Command: .. at
the bottom of the screen) so that you can enter DM commands.
By default, the
< CMD >
key (L5) invokes the TDM command.
TDM requires no arguments or options.
c
c
Display Manager Commands
2-72
- --
._----------------------------------
TH (TAB_RIGHT)
o
TH (TAB_HORIZONTAL) -- Move cursor right to next tab stop.
FORMAT
TH
The TH command moves the cursor right to the next horizontal tab stop. Tabs are
global (Le., they apply to all windows), and may be set with the DM command TS.
Initially, tabs are set every 5 spaces.
By default, the key invokes the TH command. Note that this does NOT insert
an ASCII tab character into the file; it simply positions the cursor to the next tab stop.
TH requires no arguments or options.
o
C)
o
o
2-73
Display Manager Oommands
THL (TAB_HORIZONTAL_LEFT)
THL (TAB_HORIZONTAL_LEFT) -- Move cursor left to previous tab stop.
FORMAT
THL
The THL command moves the cursor left to the next horizontal tab stop. Tabs are
global (i.e., they apply to all windows), and may be set with the DM command TS.
Initially, tabs are set every 5 spaces.
By default, the CTRL/ sequence invokes the THL command. Note that this
does NOT insert an ASCII tab character into the file; it simply positions the cursor to the
previous tab stop.
THL requires no arguments or options.
(~
\
Display Manager Commands
- _......... _ ....... _.... __._--_._._.
2-74
__. _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - . - - _._----------_._----- - - - -
TI (TO _INPUT _ WINDOW)
o
TI (TO_INPUT_WINDOW) -- Move cursor to next input window.
FORMAT
TI
TI moves the cursor to the next fully unobscured window in which input is accepted (i.e.,
the next window that opens into neither a transcript nor a read-only edit pad). The
cursor is placed at its last previous position in the window.
The Display Manager scans across the screen from left to right and top to bottom to find
the next window.
o
o
o
o
2-75
Display Manager Commands
TL (TO_LEFT) -- Move
cursor~to
the beginning of the current line.
FORMAT
TL
The TL command moves the cursor left to the beginning of the current line. By default,
the bar-left arrow key invokes the TL command.
TL requires no arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
2-76
TLW (TO _LAST _ WINDOW)
o
TLW (TO_LAST_ WINDOW) -- Move cursor to last (previous) window.
FORMAT
TLW
TLW moves the cursor back to the window it was in before it moved to the current
window. The cursor is placed at its last previous position in the window.
By default, the CTRL/L sequence invokes the TLW command.
o
o
o
o
2-77
Display Manager Commands
TN (TO _NEXT _ WINDOW)
TN (TO_NEXT _ WINDOW) -- Move cursor to next window.
()
FORMAT
TN
TN moves the cursor to the next fully unobscured window on the screen. Any window
that is partially covered by another is not considered in the search .. The DM scans the
screen from top to bottom to find the next window, selecting the one whose upper-left
corner is the II highest II (i.e., has the lowest Y coordinate value), then proceeding
downward across the screen. If there are panes within a window, the cursor is positioned
in the next lower pane until the pane choices have been exhausted, before moving to the
next IIlower" window. Once the next window is located, the DM places the cursor at its
last previous position within that window.
By default, the key (LB) invokes this command.
c'
Display Manager Oommands
2-78
------
"--~-
-----"-""-"---""""" --""-
---"---------------------""----
TNI (TO _NEXT _ICON)
o
TNI (TO_NEXT_ICON) -- Move cursor to next icon.
FORMAT
TNI
TNI moves the cursor to the next fully unobscured icon on the screen. Any icon that is
partially covered by another is not considered in the search. The DM scans the screen
from top to bottom to find the next icon, selecting the one whose upper-left corner is the
II highest II (i.e., has the lowest Y coordinate value), then proceeding downward across the
screen.
This command is similar to the TN command, which positions the cursor to the next
fully unobscured window on the screen.
o
o
o
o
2-79
Display Manager Commands
TR (TO _ RIGHT)
TR (TO _RIGHT) -- Move cursor to the end of the current line.
FORMAT
TR
The TR command moves the cursor right to the end of the current line. By default, the
bar-right arrow key invokes the TR command.
TR requires no arguments or options.
c
(~
'-..-
Display Manager Oommands
2-80
'
TS (TAB _ SET)
o
TS
(TAB_SET) --
Set tab stops for all windows.
FORMAT
TS [n1] [n2] .•• [-R]
The TS command sets the default tab stops for all windows. Tab stops may also be set
from within a program using a call to the system routine PAD _ $ SET _ TABS; those set
under program control override the tab stops set by TS within windows belonging to the
program.
By default, tabs are initially set every 5 spaces.
NOTE:
o
The DM command "=" displays the line and column numbers of the current
cursor position. This can be helpful when trying to set tab stops visually.
ARGUMENTS
If no arguments are specified, a stop is set at every character on the line.
n1 n2 ..•
(optional)
o
Specify tab stops. The 'n' values are integers representing
absolute character positions. They must appear in increasing
order. Columns are numbered starting with one.
Default if omitted: see above
OPTIONS
-R
Repeat the last interval.
EXAMPLES
o
Command: T8 7 12 -r
(Set tabs at columns 7 and 12. and every 5
spaces thereafter.)
o
2-81
Display Manager Commands
TT (TO_TOP)
TT (TO _ TOP) -- Move cursor to top line in window.
FORMAT
TT
The TT command moves the cursor to the top line in the window. This is in contrast to
the PT command, which moves the top line of the pad to the the top of the window.
TT requires no arguments or options.
c~'
Display Manager Oommands
2-82
TWB (TO _ WINDOW _BORDER)
o
TWB (TO_WINDOW _BORDER) -- Move cursor to a specified window border.
FORMAT
TWB {-L
I -R I -T I -B}
The TWB command moves the cursor to a border of the current window, as specified by
the command options. You must specify an option with TWB.
OPTIONS
One of the following options is required.
o
-L
Move the cursor to the left window border parallel to the
previous cursor position.
-R
Move the cursor to the right window border parallel to the
previous cursor position.
-T
Move the cursor to the top window border directly above the
previous cursor position.
-B
Move the cursor to the bottom window border directly below
the previous cursor position.
o
o
o
2-83
Display Manager Commands
UNDO
UNDO -- Undo previous DM command(s).
FORMAT
UNDO
UNDO works by compiling a history of DM activities in input and edit pads in reverse
chronological order. Invoking UNDO reverses the effect of the most recent DM
command. Successive UNDOs will undo further back in history. Note that this only
applies to DM operations; Shell operations (such as compiling a program) cannot be
undone.
The UNDO buffers (one per edit pad and one per input pad) are circular lists that, when
full, eliminate the oldest entries to make room for new ones. Entries are grouped
together in sets. For example, a S (SUBSTITUTE) command may change five lines. While
UNDO considers this to be five entries, the five entries are grouped into a single set so
that one UNDO will change all five lines back to their original state. When a buffer
becomes full, the oldest set of entries is erased. This means that UNDO will never
partially undo an operation: it will either completely undo it or do nothing.
An edit undo buffer can hold up to 1024 entries. An input undo buffer can hold up to
128 entries.
By default, the key on low-profile keyboards invokes the UNDO command.
There is no predefined key for this function on 880 keyboards.
UNDO requires no arguments or options.
c'
Display Manager Commands
2-84
-------------------------------_._-----------
....----. . . .-
WA (WINDOW _AUTOHOLD)
o
WA (WINDOW _AUTOHOLD) -- Set window autohold mode.
FORMAT
WA [-ON I -OFF]
NOTE:
Autohold mode applies only to windows open into transcript pads.
The WA command switches a window into (-ON) and out of (-OFF) autohold mode. WA
without options toggles the current setting. In autohold mode, the window automatically
enters hold mode (in which the contents of a window are temporarily frozen) if either of
the following conditions is true:
• A full window of output is available and none of it has been displayed.
o
o
A form feed or create frame operation is output to the pad. In this case, the
window displays the output preceding the form feed. When the window exits
from hold mode, the output following the form feed or create frame operation
starts at the top of the window.
Initially, windows are not in autohold mode. The window legend contains an IIAII when
the window is in autohold mode.
o
o
o
2-85
- - - - ..__ __... ...,_. __. _ - - - - _
.
_
Display Manager Commands
..
-
.......
WC (WINDOW _ CLOSE)
WC (WINDOW_CLOSE) -- Close window and associated functions.
FORMAT
WC [entry_name] [-Q
I-F I-A I-S]
The WC command closes (deletes) a window or window group. It may also close the pad
into which the window looks, depending on the following conditions.
If other windows into the pad besides the one being closed exist, the DM naturally leaves
the pad open. If there are no other windows into the pad, however, the DM closes it.
The closed pad is then either deleted (if it was temporary) or saved under its pathname
(if it was named and permanent, i.e., a permanent disk file).
If the pad is a writable edit pad, and is being viewed only through the current window,
the DM renames the old file by appending .BAK to its name, and writes the edited
version to the original rile name. If multiple windows are viewing the edit pad, WC
simply closes the window -- it does not write the file or rename the old file. To force the
DM to write the file and create the .BAK version, use the DM command PW
(PAD_ WRITE) or the or CTRL/Y keys (see below).
A transcript (output) window normally cannot be closed if it is the last window into an
active process (see -F below).
Note that the DM cannot delete a permanent pad (file); you must use the Shell command
DLF (DELETE_FILE) for this purpose.
Two keys (or control/key sequences) have been predefined to perform related functions:
low-profile
880
CTRL/Y
Close window. pad;
update file
CTRL/N
Close window, pad;
ignore changes
PW;WC -Q
(or)
WC -Q
(or)
(R5S)
(R5)
ARGUMENTS
entry _name
(optional)
Specify the name of the window or window group to be closed.
If the name of the window or group appears as a text string
somewhere on the display, you may use the following time-saving
feature: place the cursor on the name, then press .
Now issue the WC command. WC uses the MARKed name for
the 'entry _ name' argument.
Default if omitted: close the window under the cursor.
Display Manager Commands
2-86
C~'
WC (WINDOW _ CLOSE)
o
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, WC closes the window and pad, then deletes the pad (if
temporary) or rewrites it (if permanent) as described above. Only one of the following
options may be specified at a time.
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
o
-Q
Quit without updating pad (file). Any changes made while
window was open are ignored. The system prompts you with
IIFile modified. OK to quit? II if you have made changes to verify
that you really wish to discard them.
-F
Force window closure, even if this window was the last one open
into a process. Note that the process will become inaccessible,
however, if no windows are left.
-A
Enable auto-close for current window. When auto-close is
enabled, the current window will close when the pad into which
it looks is closed.
-S
(D)
Disable auto-close for current window. If auto-close is disabled
(the default condition), then the current window persists after
the pad into which it looks is closed.
o
o
o
2-87
Display Manager Commands
WDF (WINDOW _DEAULT)
WDF (WINDOW _DEFAULT) -- Define DM default window positions.
FORMAT
[region]WDF [n]
The WDF command lets you define any of the DM's five default window positions. To
define a default window postion, mark (with the DM command "DR") the region that
will display the window, and issue the WDF command.
ARGUMENTS
region
(optional)
Specify the area of the screen where the new window will be
displayed. For details on window regions, see "Defining Points
and Regions ll elsewhere in this chapter.
('
,-, ..,'
Default if omitted: use marked region
n
(optional)
Specify the ID number (1-5) of the DM default window that is
being defined. If you omit n, the WDF command discards any
saved window parameters, so the next window created uses the
stock default window boundaries.
Default if omitted: see above
(
'
"-_
.../
(~'I
'-- ... ,'-
Display Manager Commands
2-88
WG (WINDOW _ GROW)
o
WG (WINDOW_GROW) -- Grow or shrink a window.
FORMAT
[region]WG
NOTE:
o
There is a companion grow command WGE that provides visible feedback
during a grow operation. See the WGE command description elsewhere in this
chapter for information on that command.
The WG command changes the size of a window by moving one edge or corner across the
screen while leaving the c.>ther edges and/or corners where they are. To grow or shrink a
window, first mark the edge or corner you want to move by positioning the cursor at
that edge or corner and issuing the DR command string or pressing . Then
move the cursor to the edge or corner's new location and issue the WG command. (By
default, CTRL/G invokes the WG command on low-profile keyboards. This function is
not available by default on 880 keyboards.) The marked edge or corner moves to the
new cursor position, and the window shrinks or grows accordingly. If you want to move
only an edge, move the cursor only in the direction perpendicular to .that edge. Moving
the cursor in two dimensions causes a corner to move.
ARGUMENTS
o
region
(optional)
Specify old and new locations of edge or corner. May be
see IIDefining Points and
specified in a variety of formats:
Regions ll in the previous chapter. This argument is REQUIRED
if you do not use the cursor placement and operation
described above.
Default if omitted: use marked region
o
o
2-89
Display Manager Commands
WGE (WINDOW _ GROW _ECHO)
WGE (WINDOW _GROW _ECHO) -- Grow/shrink a window with rubberbanding.
FORMAT
WGE
The WGE command changes the size of a window. To enlarge or shrink a window with
WGE, position the cursor in the window and issue the WGE command. (By default, the
key invokes the WGE command on the low-profile keyboard, while CTRL/G
provides the same function on the 880 keyboard.) After you enter the WGE command,
an outline, or "rubberband II will appear to show you the size and shape that the window
will take when you complete the grow operation. Move the cursor until the rubberband
matches the new size you want for the window. Then issue the DR; ECHO command
sequence or press to complete the grow operation. You can use the SQ
command (CTRL/X) to abort a grow operation using rubberbanding.
WGE requires no arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
-------------------
WGRA (WINDOW _ GROUP _ADD)
o
WGRA (WINDOW_GROUP _ADD) --Create or add to a window group.
FORMAT
WGRA group_name [entry _name]
The WGRA command creates a new window group with the specified group _ name, or
adds a window or group to an existing group. By default, if you do not specify an
entry _name (the name of a window or group) WGRA uses the pathname of the window
where the cursor was last positioned.
ARGUMENTS
o
group_name
(required)
entry _name
(optional)
Specify the name of the group to be created or enlarged.
Specify the name of the window or group to be added to
'group _ name'.
Default if omitted: Use the pathname of the window where the
cursor was last positioned.
o
EXAMPLES
Command: WGRA Shell- Windows Process- 1
This command adds a window called II Process
II Shell
Windows II •
1" to a group of windows called
o
o
2-91
Display Manager Commands
WGRR (WINDOW _ GROUP _REMOVE)
WGRR (WINDOW _GROUP _REMOVE) -- Remove window/group from group.
FORMAT
WGRR group_name [entry _name]
The WGRR command removes a window or group from a window group. By default, if
you do not specify an entry _name (the name of a window or group) WGRR uses the
pathname of the window where the cursor was last positioned.
ARGUMENTS
group_name
(required)
entry _name
(optional)
Specify the name of the window group that contains the window
or group you want to remove.
c
Specify the name of the window or group to be removed.
Default if omitted: use the pathname of the window where the
cursor was last positioned
EXAMPLES
c
Command: WGRR Shell Windows Process 2
-
-
This command removes a window called IIProcess
IIShell Windows ll •
Display Manager Commands
211 from a group of windows called
WH (WINDOW _HOLD)
o
WH (WINDOW _HOLD) -- Set window hold mode.
FORMAT
WH [-ON I -OFF]
NOTE: Hold mode applies only to windows open into transcript pads.
The WH command switches a window into (-ON) or out of (-OFF) hold mode. WH
without options toggles the current setting. In hold mode, the contents of the window
are II frozen II and do not change when a program sends more output to the pad. When a
window is not in hold mode, the window automatically moves to the end of the pad as
new output appears.
o
By default, the key on low-profile keyboards and the key on
880 keyboards invoke the WH command.
Initially, windows are not in hold mode. The window legend contains an IIHII when the
window is in hold mode.
o
o
o
Display Manager Commands
WI (WINDOW _ INVISIBLE)
WI (WINDOW _INVISIBLE) -- Make a window or group visible or invisible.
FORMAT
WI [entry _name] [-WI -I]
The WI command controls the visibility or invisibility of the specified window or group.
WI without options toggles the current mode. By default, if you do not specify an
entry _name (the name of a window or group) WI uses the name of the window under
the cursor.
ARGUMENTS
entry _name
(optional)
Specify the name of the window or group you want to make
visible or invisible. If the name of the window or group appears
as a text string somewhere on the display, you may use the
following time-saving feature: place the cursor on the name, then
press . Now issue the WI commal).d. WI uses the
MARKed name for the 'entry _ name' argument.
Default if omitted: manipulate the window under the cursor.
OPTIONS
If no option is specified, WI toggles the current visiblity setting.
-I
Force the window or group to be invisible.
-W
Force the window or group to appear as a window.
Display Manager Commands
2-94
r
'---_/
WM (WINDOW _MOVE)
o
WM (WINDOW _MOVE) -- Move a window across the screen.
FORMAT
[region]WM
NOTE:
o
o
There is a companion move command WME that provides visible feedback
See the WME command description elsewhere in
during a move operation.
this chapter for information on that command.
The WM command moves a window across the screen. The DM moves the window whose
nearest unobscured edge or corner is the first point of the region. The new location of
this edge or corner is the second point of the region. So, to move a window, place the
cursor at one corner of the window you want to move and issue the DR command (or
press the window you
want to move.
ARGUMENTS
region
(optional)
Specify old and new locations of edge or corner. This may be
specified in a variety of formats:
see "Defining Points and
Regions II in the previous chapter.
Default if omitted: use current cursor position
o
o
2-95
Display Manager Oommands
WME (WINDOW _MOVE_ECHO) -- Move a window using rubberbanding.
FORMAT
WME
The WME command moves a window across the screen using the rubberbanding feature.
To move a window, place the cursor in the window you want to move and issue the
WME command. (By default, the key invokes the WM command on the
low-profile keyboard while CTRL/W provides the same function on the 880 keyboard.)
After you issue the WME command an outline or "rubberband" will appear to show you
where the window will be when you complete the move operation. Now move the cursor
until the rubberband is at the desired window position. Finally, issue the DR; ECHO
command or press to complete the grow operation. You can use the SQ
command (CTRL/X) to abort a move operation using rubberbanding.
The WME command requires no arguments or options.
Display Manager Commands
2-g6
WP (WINDOW _POP)
o
WP (WINDOW _POP) -- Push or pop a window on the stack.
FORMAT
WP [entry _name] [-TI-B]
The WP command pops a window to the top of the stack or pushes a window to the
bottom of the stack. If the cursor rests in a partially obscured window, the WP
command pops the window to the top of the pile. If the cursor rests in a completely
visible window, WP pushes the window to the bottom of the pile. WP can also
manipulate specific named windows or window groups. See the ARGUMENTS section
below.
o
By default, the WP command is invoked by the key on low-profile keyboards,
while the same function is provided by CTRL/P on 880 keyboards.
ARGUMENTS
entry _name
(optional)
o
Specify the name of the window or group you want to push or
pop. If the name of the window or group appears as a text
string somewhere on the display, you may use the following
time-saving feature: place the cursor on the name, then press
<:MARK>. Now issue the WP command. WP uses the
MARKed name for the 'entry _name' argument.
Default if omitted: push or pop the window under the cursor.
OPTIONS
The following options are intended primarily for use in DM scripts, where you may not be
able to predict the presence of other windows on the screen.
o
-T
Force a window to the top of the window stack.
-B
Force a window to the bottom of the window stack.
EXAMPLES
Command: wp -t
Pop the window containing the cursor
to the top of the window stack.
Command: wp slide -b
Push the window named 'slide' to the
bottom of the stack.
o
2-97
Display Manager Commands
WS (WINDOW _SCROLL)
WS (WINDOW _SCROLL) -- Set window scroll mode.
FORMAT
WS [-ON
I -OFF]
NOTE: Scroll mode applies only to windows open into transcript pads.
The WS command switches a window into (-ON) and out of (-OFF) "line-at-a-time"
scrolling. WS without options toggles the current setting. When II line-at-a-time II
scrolling is in effect, output appears in the window one line at a time, scrolling past.
When "line-at-a-time" scrolling is not in effect, output appears a window at a time.
By default, CTRL/S invokes the WS command.
Initially, all windows (except edit windows) have "line-at-a-time" scrolling. The window
legend contains an II S II when the window is in scroll mode.
~'-.
(
,
~ .... ,
c
Display Manager Commands
2-98
xc (COPY)
o
xc (COPY) --
Copy text to paste buffer.
FORMAT
[range]XC [-R] [-F pathname
I name]
The XC command copies a range of text from any pad into a paste buffer or system file.
The copied text remains undisturbed.
By default, the < COpy> key on low-profile keyboards and CTRL/C on 880 keyboards
invoke the XC command using the default (unnamed) paste buffer.
ARGUMENTS
o
range
(required)
Specify range of text to be copied. Define the range to be
copied as described in
"Defining a Range of Text" in the
previous chapter.
Default if omitted: copy from cursor to end of line
name
(optional)
(J
Specify paste buffer name. Text is written to the named buffer.
If text is copied to a buffer that has previously been used, the
new text overwrites the old. You may have up to 100 buffers
open per log in session.
Default if omitted: use unnamed buffer
OPTIONS
-F pathname
o
-R
Specify system file to receive copied text. If the file already
exists, the copied text overwrites the current file contents. Not
valid if 'name' argument is present.
Specify copy for a rectangular portion of text.
o
2-99
Display Manager Commands
XI)
(CUT)
XD (CUT) -- Cut (delete) text and write it to paste buffer.
FORMAT
[range]XD [-R] [-F pathname
I name]
The XI) command copies a range of text into a paste buffer or system file, then deletes
the text from the pad. This command can be used only in a writable pad.
By default, the key on low-profile keyboards and CTRL/E on 880 keyboards
invoke the XI) command using the default (unnamed) paste buffer.
ARGUMENTS
range
(required)
Specify range of text to be cut. Define the range to be cut as
"Defining a Range of Text" in the previous
described in
chapter.
c
Default if omitted: cut from cursor to end of line
name
(optional)
Specify paste buffer name. Text is written to the named buffer.
If text is copied to a buffer that has previously been used, the
new text overwrites the old. You may have up to 100 buffers
open per log in session.
Default if omitted: use unnamed buffer
OPTIONS
-F pathname
-R
Display Manager Commands
Specify system file to receive cut text. If the file already exists,
the cut text overwrites the current file contents. Not valid if
'name' argument is present.
Specify cut for a rectangular portion of text.
2-100
C~'
XI (COpy _IMAGE)
u
XI (COPY_IMAGE) -- Copy a display image into a graphics map file.
FORMAT
[range]XI [-F pathname]
The XI command copies a display image into a graphics map file (GMF). If you do not
mark the portion of the display window you want to copy, XI copies the entire window
where the cursor is positioned. You can print the· GMF using the PRF Shell command
with the -PLOT option.
ARGUMENTS
o
range
(optional)
Specify range of image to be copied. Define the range to be
IIDefining a Range of Text" in the
copied as described III
previous chapter.
Default if omitted: copy current window
OPTIONS
-F pathname
o
Specify GMF output file. If this option is omitted, the image is
written to 'NODE_DATA/PASTE_BUFFERS/DEFAULT.GMF. You can
print the GMF using the PRF Shell command with the -PLOT
option.
o
o
2-101
Display Manager Commands
XP (PASTE)
XP (PASTE) -- Paste (write) buffered text into pad.
1\......_ . ./
FORMAT
XP [-R] [-F pathname
I name]
The XP command inserts the contents of a paste buffer or system file into a pad at the
current cursor position. The contents of the paste buffer or file are unchanged by this
command, making multiple insertions possible. This command can be used only in a
writable pad.
By default, the key on low-profile keyboards and CTRL/O on 880 keyboards
invoke the XP command using the default (unnamed) paste buffer.
c
ARGUMENTS
name
(optional)
Specify paste buffer name. Text is copied from the named
buffer. You may have up to 100 buffers open per log in session.
Default if omitted: use unnamed buffer
OPTIONS
-F pathname
-R
Display Manager Commands
Specify system file to provide paste text.
argument is present.
Not valid if 'name'
Specify paste of a rectangular portion of text.
2-102
o
Chapter 3
Shell Basics
This chapter summarizes the basic concepts that apply to the Shell commands described
individually in the following chapter. For a more indepth discussion of these concepts, please
refer to the DOMAIN System User's Guide.
3.1. Command Format
o
In the most general sense, the operating system has no commands. There are simply files that the
Shell looks for and executes. When you type "date" in the Shell input window, the Shell looks
for a file called DATE (following its command search rules) and executes it. This means that any
files that you create can be given to the Shell for execution. (Of course, if you tell the Shell to
execute a file containing nonbinary data -- like the text of a memo -- you will receive an error
message.) The point is that any file, no matter where it comes from, may be given to the Shell
for interpretation and execution.
The simplest command line consists of a command name followed by arguments to the command,
separated by spaces:
$ command argl arg2 '"
(J
argn
Normally, you enter one command per line. You may continue a command over several lines by
typing @ at the end of each line to be continued. The Shell then prompts with
II $ _ II to indicate that the current line continues the previous one.
3.1.1. Argu:ments
o
The command Shell, which we supply, handles commands that accept multiple arguments (see
Figure 3-1). Usually, those arguments come in two forms: a pathname designating a file on which
to operate or some other sort of literal string for manipulation, and instructions for special
command action. Those arguments that specify special action are almost always optional, and
are immediately preceded by a hyphen (-). (The hyphen is necessary because these arguments
often require secondary arguments of their own. The commands use the hyphen to interpret
correctly where all the different arguments apply.) These special arguments are labeled "Options"
in the command descriptions in Chapter 4.
$ ld my_dir -len
Option (command modifier)
Argument (object of command action)
- - - - - Command (LIST_DIRECTORY)
__________ Shell prompt
Figure 3-1.
Typical Shell Command Format
3-1
Shell Basics
3.1.2. Separators
Normally, Shell commands are separated from each other by carriage returns (NEWLINE
characters). You may place multiple commands on the same line by separating the commands
with semicolons, up to a total of 256 characters per line. For example,
$ wd //mydir/subl;ld
This command line sets your working directory to the directory
the contents of that directory.
11//mydir /subl ll
and then lists
Multiple commands may also appear on a single line when you are using pipes and filters.
3.1.3. Node Specifications
Many Shell commands require you to identify a target node on which the commands are to
operate. For example, the CRP (CREATE_A_PROCESS) command needs to know which node is
going to host the new process. You identify nodes with a node specification.
A node specification permits a node's communications software to locate other nodes in a local
ring or in an internet (a network composed of individual network rings joined via
DOMAIN/BRIDGEs). This node specification may be either an internet address or a node name.
Internet Addresses
An internet address has the format:
[net].node_id
The net represents a network number and the node_id represents a hexadecimal node ID. A
network number of 0 refers to the local network.
If a node is cataloged (in either your local cache or the NS _HELPER database), then you can
omit the network number when you use an internet address. When you provide only the node ID,
the system obtains the network number from either your local cache or the NS _HELPER
database. If you choose to provide a complete internet address, however, the system attempts to
locate the node only on the network you specify. Thus, if you specify an incorrect network
number, the system will look for the node only on the network that you specify and then report
an error; the system will not attempt to locate the node on another network.
If a node is not cataloged, the system cannot obtain a network number if you omit it. In this
case, the system assumes that the node is on the local ring. Thus, for an uncataloged node on the
local network, you must provide the node ID, but the network number is optional. However, you
must provide both the network number and node ID for an uncataloged node on a remote·
network.
Node Names
A node name has the format:
/ / node _ name
You can use a node name as a node specification only if the node is cataloged (in either your local
Shell Basics
3-2
o
cache or the the NS _HELPER database.) When you use a node name, the system obtains the
internet address associated with that name. If a node is not cataloged, you must use an internet
address to specify the node.
Note that both disked and diskless nodes can be cataloged and named.
Node Specification Examples
The following examples illustrate ways you can specify a node with an ID of A105, a name of
/ /CAEEY, and a network number of 4051237 A. (These examples assume that / /CASEY is
cataloged in the NS _HELPER database.)
1. $ LUSR -N OA10S
o
(Note that hex IDs that start with a letter must
be preceded by a '0' for the Shell to parse them
correctly.)
2. $ LUSR -N //CASEY
3. $ LUSR -N 40S1237A.Al0S
In addition, if you are using a node on ring 4051237A, you can use the following internet address
to refer to / /CASEY:
$ LUSR -N 0.Al0S
o
o
('0' indicates the local network.)
3.2. Using Special Characters
The Shell recognizes a variety of special characters that allow you to change the action of
commands. The characters in Table 3-1 have special meanings when they appear on a command
line. Note that, while some of these characters have already been discussed as having special
meanings in Display Manager commands, regular expressions, and so forth, those meanings do not
necessarily carryover to the command Shell environment. Please be careful to keep the different
meanings distinct: regular expressions appearing in Shell commands, for instance, should be
enclosed in quotation marks to avoid confusion.
The at sign (@) is the Shell's escape character. You can place an II@II anywhere on the
command line to suppress the special meaning of the next character (including the II @ II character
itself).
For a full discussion of the usage of Shell special characters, please refer to the DOMAIN System
User's Guide.
o
3-3
Shell Basics
Table 3-1.
Command Shell Special Characters
(~\
',,- ... /
Pathname Wildcards
Character
?
*
[string]
=
(names)
{expr}
Match any single character except
NEWLINE.
Match zero or more characters up
to but not including the period.
Match zero or more occurrences of the
preceding character.
Match any single character in the
character class "string".
Match any character except those
in "string".
Match zero or more subordinate directories.
Copy (derive) leafname from
previous argument.
Group pathnames for use in
later derived names.
Tag expression for later use.
Figure continued on next page . . .
3.3. The Command Line Parser
Many Shell commands that we supply share a standard command line parsing procedure. It
determines how each command processes command line information. Chapter 4 of this manual,
and the on-line HELP files, identify commands that use the command line parser. These
commands support the following features:
1. You may use wildcards to specify existing pathnames.
2. You may use derived names to specify logically-related pathnames, and parentheses to
create several derived names with one command line. (See Table 3-1.)
3. When pertinent, you may include multiple pathnames as command line arguments.
For example, uPRF file1 file2 file3 u .
4. You may use the asterisk character (*) to cause commands to read pathnames from
standard input or from another file. For example,
$ prf */fred/names_file
prints the files listed in /FRED/NMv1ES_FILE. Also,
Shell Basics
3-4
o
Table 3-1. Command Shell Special Characters (cont.)
Input/Output Control
Character
Redirect standard input
Redirect error input
Read in-line data from standard input
Read in-line data from error input
Redirect standard output
Redirect error output
Append standard output
Append error output
Pipe standard output
Group commands for I/O redirection
<
<1
«~I
0
«1/
>
>1
»
»1
I
(
Notes
Usage
)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
Parsing Operators
0
Character
#
&
.... lIcmd
.... ·cmd·
ll
0
@
Notes
Usage
Comment line in a command file
Run a program or command in
the background
Insert parameter
Insert parameter and rescan
Insert output of "cmd
with expansion
Insert output of IIcmd
no expansion
Separate commands on a line
Quoted string. with expansion
Quoted string. no expansion
Escape character
Space
ll
ll
•
•
(4)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(4)
(4)
(5)
(2)
Notes:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Special anywhere; causes a new command to start.
Special anywhere; causes a new argument to start.
Special anywhere; does not start a new argument.
Special only at the beginning of an argument.
Special only when immediately preceding a character
that would otherwise be special.
o
3-5
Shell Basics
(--\1
$ PRF *
file1
file2
fileS
***EOF***
\,_../'
$
reads the names II file I II , II file2 11 , and II file3 11 from standard input, and prints each
file. When using the keyboard for standard input, a NEWLINE and an end-of-file
character must follow the last name. By default, CTRL/Z generates an end-of-file
character.
If you include more than one name on an input line, in standard input or in a names
file, the command interprets all names except the first one on each line as derived
names. For example,
$ CHN *
is equivalent to
$ CHN * =.old
a a.old
b b.old
C c.old
***EOF***
a
b
~
__
'-..
.",/
C
**EOF***
$
$
Do not confuse the action of the II * II character with that of the input redirection
symbol H < II • The II *II character causes a Shell command to read pathname8 from
standard input or from another file. The II < II symbol causes a Shell command to
read data from a file.
c
3.3.1. Standard Command Options
All Shell commands that we supply support the following standard options:
-HELP
Display detailed usage information.
-USAGE
Display brief usage summary.
-VERSION
Display software version number.
NOTE:
Using any of these three standard options precludes using any other options
within the same command.
3.3.2. Command Line Parser Options
Commands that use the command line parser also support the following options (D indicates a
default option):
-AE
-NQ
Abort if a name in pathname cannot be found. If omitted, processing continues
to the next name.
(D)
-QW
Shell Ba8ics
Do not issue query to verify wildcard names.
Issue query to verify wildcard names.
3-6
C.~.
-~
o
-QA
Issue query to verify all names.
- (hyphen alone) Read further data from standard input. End input with OTRL/Z.
* [pathname]
Read file specified for further pathname arguments. If pathname is omitted,
read standard input for further pathname arguments.
Oommands that delete or modify objects automatically verify names specified with wildcards.
You can suppress this query using -NQ, or extend it to all names using -QA.
When you select a query option, the command writes the selected names to the error output
stream with a ? to prompt you for a response. Then it reads your response from the error input
stream (normally the keyboard).
o
o
o
If you respond:
The command:
h
Displays help information.
y
Operates on the name.
n
Ignores the name.
q
Quits immediately.
g
Operates on the name and suppresses further name queries.
d new
default
Resets the default. The Shell performs the default action when
it receives a null line query response (i.e., when you simply press
). To change the default, enter d followed by
II yes II ,
II no" , or "none".
The initial default is II none II , which
means that the command ignores null line responses, and requires
explicit yes or no responses.
Ohapter 4 describes each Shell command in detail. Those commands that use the command line
parser refer you to this section for information on the standard options to avoid repetition in the
text.
o
3-7
Shell Basics
Shell Basics
3-8
o
Functional Command Index
Manipulating Files/Directories
Creating Files/Directories
CRD (CREATE_DIRECTORY) -- Create a directory
CRF (CREATE_FILE) -- Create a file
CRL (CREATE _ LINK) -- Create a link
CRRGY (CREATE_REGISTRY) -- Create -or modify network registry
o
Cataloging Files
CTOB (CATALOG_OBJECT) -- Catalog an object
UCTOB (UNCATALOG_OBJECT) -- Uncatalog a pathname without'deleting the object
LD (LIST _DIRECTORY) -- List contents of a directory
ND (NAMING_DIRECTORY) -- Set or display naming directory
WD (WORKING_DIRECTORY) -- Set or display working directory
Changing File/Directory Attributes
o
CRN (CHANGE_NAME) -- Change an object's name
CVT _REC _ UASC -- Convert files between types
OBTY (OBJECT _ TYPE) -- Set or display the type of an object
Copying Files
o
CATF (CATENATE_FILE) -- Catenate files and write to output
CPF (COPY _FILE) -- Copy a file
CPBOOT (COpy _BOOT) -- Copy system boot file
CPSCR (COPY _SCREEN) -- Copy the display to a file
CPT (COPY_TREE) -- Copy a tree
CRP AD (CREATE_PAD) -- Create a transcript pad and window
MVF (MOVE_FILE) -- Move a file
TEE -- Copy input to output and to named files
Comparing Files
CMACCT (COMPARE_ACCOUNT _FILE)-- Compare account files
CMPPO (COMPARE_PPO _FILE) -- Compare person, project, or organization names
CNIF (COMPARE_FILE) -- Isolate differences between files
CMSRF (COMPARE_SORTED _FILES) -- Isolate differences between sorted files
CMT (COMPARE_TREE) -- Compare all objects in trees
o
3-9
Shell Basics
Printing Files
PRF (PRINT _FILE) -- Print a file on a printer
Deleting Files/Directories
DLF (DELETE_FILE) -- Delete a file
DLL (DELETE_LINK) -- Delete a link
DLT (DELETE_TREE) -- Delete a tree
Salvaging Files/Directories
SALD (SALVAGE_DIRECTORY) -- Salvage a directory
SALVOL (SALVAGE_VOLUME) -- Verify and correct allocation of disk blocks
Protecting Files/Directories
ACL (ACCESS _ CONTROL _ LIST) -- ,List or copy an access control list
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL_LIST) -- Edit or list an existing ACL
SALACL (SALVAGE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST) -- Salvage an ACL
UMASK -- Set DOMAIN/IX file-creation mode mask.
Backing Up Files/Directories
ARCF (ARCHIVE_FILE) -- Maintain an archive file
RBAK (READ _BACKUP) -- Restore or index a magnetic tape backup file
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP) -- Create a magnetic tape backup file
LockingjUnlocking Files
LKOB (LOCK_OBJECT) -- Lock an object
LLKOB (LIST _LOCKED _ OBJECTS) -- List locked objects
ULKOB (UNLOCK_ OBJECT) -- Unlock an object
Reading and Writing Files on Tape
EDMTDESC (EDIT _MAGTAPE_DESCRIPTOR) -- Create or modify magtape descriptor file
RWMT (READ _ WRITE _ MAGTAPE) -- Read and write files on magnetic tape
RBAK (READ _BACKUP) -- Restore or index a magnetic tape backup file
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP) -- Create a magnetic tape backup file
Editing Files
Locating Text
FPAT (FIND_PATTERN) -- Find a text pattern in a file
FPATB (FIND_PATTERN_BLOCK) -- Find blocks of lines containing a pattern
Shell Basics
3-10
o
\, ............ ,,../
o
Replacing Text
CHPAT (CHANGE_PATTERN) -- Replace pattern in 'text file
DLDUPL (DELETE_DUPLICATE_LINES) -- Strip repeated lines from a file
ED (EDIT) -- Edit a text file
EDACCT (EDIT _ACCOUNT) -- Edit registry account file
EDPPO (EDIT _PPO) -- Edit registry PPO files
EDSTR (EDIT _STREAM) -- Edit a stream
MACRO -- Expand macro definitions
OS (OVERSTRIKE) -- Convert ASCII to FORTRAN carriage control
TLC (TRANSLITERATE_ CHARACTER) -- Replace characters
Sorting Text
o
CREFS (CROSS_REFERENCE_SYMBOLS) -- Cross-reference symbols in file
EXFLD (EXTRACT _FIELDS) -- Manipulate fields of data
FLEN (FILE_LENGTH) -- Count lines, words, and characters in a file
LAMF (LAMINATE_FILE) -- Laminate files
REVL (REVERSE_LINES) -- Reverse each line in a text file
SRF (SORT _FILE) -- Sort and/or merge text files
Formatting Files
()
FMC (FORMAT _MULTI_ COLUMN) -- Format text file into multiple columns
FMT (FORMAT_TEXT) -- Format text file
OS (OVERSTRIKE) -- Convert ASCII to FORTRAN carriage control
PAGF (PAGINATE_FILE) -- Paginate a file to output
Developing Programs
Oompiling Programs
o
MACRO -- Expand macro definitions
Debugging Programs
ABTSEV (ABORT _SEVERITY) -- Set or display abort severity level
DEBUG -- Invoke the Language Level Debugger
ESA (EXTERNAL_SYMBOL_ADDRESS) -- Display address of external symbol in
installed library
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PRO GRAM_ COUNTER) -- Make a histogram of the program counter
STCODE (STATUS_CODE) -- Translate status code value to text message
TB (TRACEBACK) -- Print traceback after a fault
Loading Programs
o
BIND -- Combine object modules into an executable file
INLIB (INSTALL_LIBRARY) -- Install a user-supplied library
LBR (LIBRARIAN) -- Create an object module library
3-11
Shell Basics
Managing Your Node
CALENDAR (SET SYSTEM CALENDAR) -- Set system calendar clock
CPBOOT (COpy _BOOT) -- Copy system boot file
FIND _ ORPHANS -- Locate and catalog uncataloged objects
LVOLFS (LIST _ VOLUME_FREE_SPACE) -- List free space on all logical volumes
SALVOL (SALVAGE_VOLUME) -- Verify/correct allocation of disk blocks (see Appendix D)
SCRTO (SCREEN_TIMEOUT) -- Set/show screen timeout
SHUTSPM -- Shut down SPM on a node.
TPM (TOUCH_PAD _MODE) -- Set characteristics for the touchpad
Requesting Process/System Information
Process
CSR (COMMAND _SEARCH_RULES) -- List or define command search rules
DSPST (DISPLAY _PROCESS_STATUS) -- Display process status graphically
FST (FAULT _STATUS) -- Display fault status information
LOPSTR (LIST_OPEN _ STREAMS) -- List open streams
PST (PROCESS_STATUS) -- List process internal state information
STCODE (STATUS_CODE) -- Translate status code value to text message
Node
BLDT (BUILD _ TIME) -- Display time at which system was built
DATE -- Display current date and time
TZ (TIME_ZONE) -- Set or display system time zone
LAS (LIST_ADDRESS_SPACE) -- List objects mapped into the address space
LLKOB (LIST _LOCKED _ OBJECTS) -- List locked objects
LVOLFS (LIST_ VOLUME_FREE_SPACE) -- List free space on all logical volumes
NETSTAT (NETWORK_STATISTICS) -- Display network statistics
NETSVC (NETWORK_SERVICE) -- Set or display network services
TCTL (TERMINAL _ CONTROL) -- Set or display terminal (SIO line) characteristics
("
"'--_
..
~~"
(
\ ...
'
Network
LCNET (LIST_CONNECTED _NETWORKS) -- Display internet routing information
LCNODE (LIST_CONNECTED _ NODES) -- List nodes connected to the network
LUSR (LIST_USER) -- List users logged on
NETMAIN (NETWORK_MAINTENANCE) -- Control/analyze network maintenance statistics
NETMAIN _NOTE (NETWORK_MAINTENANCE_NOTES) -- Place message in network error log
NETSTAT (NETWORK_STATISTICS) -- Display network statistics
NETSVC (NETWORK_SERVICE) -- Set or display network services
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK) -- Probe network and display error statistics
RTCHK (ROUTING _ CHECK) -- Test traffic between adjacent routers
RTSTAT (ROUTING_STATISTICS) -- Display internet router information
RTSVC (ROUTING_SERVICE) -- Set or display internet routing service
Shell Basics
3-12
c
o
Setting Process Conditions
Controlling Programs
ABTSEV (ABORT _SEVERITY) -- Set or display abort severity level
FPPMASK (FLOATING_POINT _MASK) -- Set or display floating-point error mask
PPRI (PROCESS _PRIORITY) -- Set or display process priority
SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS) -- Signal a process to stop
SHUTSPM -- Shut down SPM on a node.
RETURN -- Return from the current Shell level at a specific error value
Controlling Shells
o
o
o
o
SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS) -- Signal a process to stop
SHUTSPM -- Shut down SPM on a node.
CRP (CREATE_A_PROCESS) -- Create a process on a remote node
CRSUBS (CREATE_SUBSYSTEM) -- Create a protected subsystem
CSR (COMMAND _SEARCH_RULES) -- List or define command search rules
ENSUBS (ENTER_SUBSYSTEM) -- Enter a protected subsystem at Shell command level
RDYM (READY _MESSAGE) -- Set system ready message
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM) -- Set or display subsystem attributes
SH (SHELL) -- Invoke a Shell (command line interpreter)
SET -- Set current Shell conditions
BON -- reset SHELL -B flag
BOFF -- reset SHELL -B flag
EON -- reset SHELL -E flag
EOFF -- reset SHELL -E flag
VOFF (VERIFY_OFF) -- Reset SHELL -V flag
VON (VERIFY_ON) -- Reset SHELL -V flag
XOFF -- Reset SHELL -X flag
XON -- Reset SHELL -X flag
XSUBS (EXECUTE_SUBSYSTEM) -- Execute a Shell script-protected subsystem manager
LOGIN -- Log in to a running process
Writing Your Own Commands (Shell Scripts)
ARGS (ARGUMENTS) -- Echo command line arguments
EQS (EQUALS) -- Compare strings for equality
EXISTF -- Check to see if an object exists
EXIT -- Exit a loop
NEXT -- Return to the top of a loop
RETURN -- Return from current Shell level
IF -- Execute a conditional statement
FOR -- Execute a FOR loop
SELECT -- Execute a SELECT condition
WHILE -- Execute a WHILE loop
XDMC (EXECUTE_DM_ COMMAND) -- Execute a Display Manager command
SOURCE -- Execute a Shell script at the current Shell level
3-13
Shell Basics
Using Shell Variables
(
DLVAR (DELETE_VARIABLE) -- Delete a Shell variable
EXISTVAR (EXIST _ VARIABLE)-- Check to see if a variable exists
EXPORT -- Change a Shell variable into an environment variable
LVAR (LIST _ VARIABLES) -- List name, type, and value of current variables
READ -- Set variables equal to input values
READC -- Set variables equal to input character values
READLN -- Set a variable equal to an input value
Managing Network Functions
Manipulating the Network Registry
CMACCT (COMPARE_ACCOUNT _FILE) -- Compare account files
CMPPO (COMPARE_PPO_FILE) -- Compare person, project, or organization names
CRRGY (CREATE_REGISTRY) -- Create or modify network registry
EDACCT (EDIT _ACCOUNT) -- Edit registry account file
EDNS (EDIT _NAMING_SERVER_HELPER) -- Invoke editor for NS _HELPER
EDPPO (EDIT _PPO) -- Edit registry PPO files
LRGY (LIST _REGISTRY) -- List contents of registry files
MRGRGY (MERGE_REGISTRIES) -- Merge two network registries
SALRGY (SALVAGE_REGISTRY) -- Salvage network and local registries
Managing an Internet
LCNET (LIST _ CONNECTED _NETWORKS) -- Display internet routing information
LCNODE (LIST_CONNECTED _NODES) -- List nodes connected to the network
LUSR (LIST_USER) -- List users logged on
LVOLFS (LIST_ VOLUME_FREE_SPACE) -- List free space on all logical volumes
NETMAIN (NETWORK_MAINTENANCE) -- Control/analyze network maintenance statistics
NETMAIN_NOTE (NETWORK_MAINTENANCE_NOTES) -- Place message in network error log
NETSTAT (NETWORK_STATISTICS) -- Display network statistics
NETSVC (NETWORK_SERVICE) -- Set or display network services
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK) -- Probe network and display error statistics
RTCHK (ROUTING_CHECK) -- Test traffic between adjacent routers
RTSTAT (ROUTING_STATISTICS) -- Display internet router information
RTSVC (ROUTING_SERVICE) -- Set or display internet routing service
Controlling Peripheral Devices
EDMTDESC (EDIT _MAGTAPE_DESCRIPTOR) -- Create or modify magtape
descriptor files
NETSVC (NETWORK_SERVICE) -- Set or display network services
PRSVR (PRINT _ SERVER) -- Start the Print Server
Shell Basics
3-14
..
_.............. _..._.. _.._---_ .. _
------
o
Controlling Logical Volumes
CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE) -- Catalog a node in the network
UCTNODE (UNCATALOG_NODE) -- Uncatalog a node
INVOL (INITIALIZE_VOLUME) -- Initialize a disk volume (see Appendix C)
MTVOL (MOUNT_VOLUME) -- Mount a logical volume
DMTVOL (DISMOUNT_VOLUME) -- Dismount a logical volume
Using Miscellaneous Utilities
o
CALENDAR -- Set hardware clock and calendar (see Appendix A)
CRUCR (CREATE_USER_CHANGE_REQUEST) -- Create a User Change Request form
DCALC (DESK_CALCULATOR) -- Evaluate logical and arithmetic expressions
EDFONT (EDIT _FONT) -- Edit a character font (see Appendix B)
FSERR (FIND _SPELLING_ERRORS) -- Find spelling errors in a text file
HELP -- Invoke HELP facility
SEND _ALARM -- Send messages to alarm servers
Communicating With Remote Computers
o
EM3270 -- Emulate an IDM 3270 terminal
VT100 -- VT100 terminal emulator
VCTL (VT100_CONTROL) -- Set/display VT100 terminal characteristics
EMT (EMULATE_TERMINAL) -- Emulate a dumb terminal
TCTL (TERMINAL_ CONTROL) -- Set or display terminal (SIO line) characteristics
SIORF (SIO _RECEIVE_FILE) -- Receive a file from a remote host
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE) -- Transmit a file to a remote host
o
o
3-15
Shell Basics
/-""
'0
Chapter 4
Shell Commands
o
()
o
o
4-1
Shell Commands
ABTSEV (ABORT _SEVERITY _LEVEL)
ABTSEV (ABORT_SEVERITY) -- Set or display the abort severity level.
FORMAT
ABTSEV [options]
Every Shell command or program returns a completion status message to its caller. The
message may indicate that the program completed successfully, or it may inform its caller
of a fatal internal error. Completion status messages vary in their severity. The
following completion status messages appear in order of their severity:
1. OK -- the program completed successfully and performed the requested action.
2. TRUE -- the program completed successfully; its purpose was to test a
condition, and the value of that· condition was TRUE.
3. FALSE -- the program completed successfully; its purpose was to test a
condition, and the value of that condition was FALSE.
4. WARNING -- the program completed successfully and performed the
requested action. However, an unusual (but nonfatal) condition was detected.
5. ERROR -- the program could not" perform the requested action because of an
error in the input. The output, however, is sound.
6. OUTPUT INVALID -- the program could not perform the requested action
because of a syntactic error in the input, and the output is not structurally
sound.
7. INTERNAL FATAL -- the program detected an internal fatal error and
stopped. The state of the output is unknown.
The ABTSEV command lets you set the severity level at which a Shell command or
program aborts. If a Shell command or program meets or exceeds the abort-severity
level, then it (and all of its ancestors) abort.
ABTSEV works on a per Shell program basis. A new Shell or Shell program inherits its
creator's abort-severity level, and the operating system restores that abort-severity level
when you exit from the Shell or when the Shell program stops.
ABTSEV is an internal Shell command.
See the PGM_ $SET _ SEVERITY description in the DOMAIN System Call Reference
for further information on severity levels.
OPTIONS
Specifying ABTSEV without options displays the current abort severity level. All options
must be specified in UPPERCASE letters.
-F[ALSE]
Shell Commands
Set level to false.
4-2
ABTSEV (ABORT _SEVERITY _LEVEL)
o
-W[ARNING]
Set level to warning.
-E[RROR]
Set level to error.
-0 [UTINV]
Set level to output invalid.
-I [NTFATAL]
Set level to internal fatal error.
-P[GMFLT]
Set level to program fatal error.
-M[AX_SEVERITY]
Set level to maximum severity error.
EXAMPLES
o
$ abtsev
error
$ abtsev
$ abtsev
warning
Show initial setting.
-w
Set level to WARNING.
Show new level.
$
o
o
o
4-3
Shell Commands
ACL (ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
ACL (ACCESS _ CONTROL_LIST) -- List or copy an ACL.
FORMAT
ACL [target_object [source _ object]] [options]
Every directory and file has an associated access control list (ACL) which lists users and
their rights to the object. ACL lets you copy an ACL from one object to another, or
display an ACL. For a detailed discussion of ACL structure and usage, please refer to
the EDACL (EDIT _ACL) command description.
In addition to its own ACL, each directory contains within it two additional ACLs (called
"initial ACLslI): one for new files and another for new subdirectories that are created
within that directory. When you create a new file or directory, the system assigns the
appropriate initial ACL stored in the parent directory. Also, when you copy files or
directories to new locations in the file hierarchy, the destination object receives the
appropriate initial ACL from its new parent directory. To change or display these initial
ACLs stored within a directory (so that newly created objects receive new initial ACLs),
use the -I, -ID, or -IF options.
The ACL command only displays ACLs or copies ACLs from one object to another. To
make changes to an existing ACL, use the EDACL command.
ARGUMENTS
target_ object
(optional)
Specify the object whose ACL you want to set or display. You
may use a wildcard to specify this argument.
DO NOT,
HOWEVER, DO $ acl / ... (anything) AS THIS MAY RENDER
YOUR NODE UNUSABLE. This wildcard sequence includes
files in the /SYS tree, which require special ACL settings in
order for system software to run.
Default if omitted: use current working directory
source _ object
(optional)
Specify the file or directory whose ACL(s) is to be used to set
the ACL(s) of the target object(s).
Default if omitted: display target _ object's ACL
OPTIONS
The following options confine the ACL command's operation to target objects of the given
type.
-D
-F
Shell Commands
Set or display ACLs of only those target objects that are
directories. If used with -I, -ID, or -IF options, set or display
initial ACLs for subdirectories.
Set or display ACLs of only those target objects that are files.
4-4
----"
---.------
ACL (ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST)
o
The following options control the ACL command's effect on target objects. If the target
object is a directory, they cause ACL to operate only on the initial ACLs stored within that
directory for use on newly created objects, and not on the ACL of the directory itself. Note
that this does NOT imply that all the target object(s) are directories, however. (That is
what -D specifies.)
-I
Set or display initial ACLs. If you are setting the ACLs of a
target directory, the source object's type (file or directory)
determines which initial ACL (the one for files or the one for
directories) of the target directory is set. If the target object is a
file (or if a wildcarded target list includes files) and the source is
a directory, you will get an error unless you have also specified
-IS (so that the initial file ACL in the source directory, rather
than the ACL of the directory itself, can be copied to target
files). If both source and target are files, then the source file's
ACL is applied to the target file, as you would expect. You must
run SALD (SALVAGE_DIRECTORY) on target directories that have
never contained initial ACLs (i.e., those directories created using
software prior to SR4.1).
-ID
Set or display only the initial ACLs inside those target objects
that are directories that apply to new subdirectories created in
those directories.
-IF
Set or display only the initial ACLs inside those target objects
that are directories that apply to new files created in those
directories.
o
o
(Specifying both -ID and -IF is the same as -1. Neither implies -D.)
The following option specifies that one (or both) of the initial ACLs inside the source object
is to be copied to the target, rather than the ACL of the source itself. This assumes that
the source object is a directory and not a file, since files cannot contain initial ACLs for
subordinate objects.
-IS
o
Copy the initial ACL(s) in the source object (which must be a
directory) to the target. If there is a single target object (either
a file or a directory), then the appropriate initial ACL inside the
source is applied to the target. If the -I option is also specified,
then both initial ACLs in the source are copied to the initial
ACLs inside those target objects that are directories.
The following option specifies that all the ACLs of the target object(s) are to be set or
displayed.
-ALL
o
Set or display all ACLs of the target object(s). If you are using
wildcards to specify the target, you may qualify this action by
also specifying -D or -F. If the source object is a directory, then
all of its ACLs (both its own and the two initial ACLs that it
applies to newly created subordinate objects) are used to set the
corresponding ACLs of the target object(s). If -IS is also
specified, however, the ACL of the source object itself will not be
used, although all three ACLs of the target directories are still
set. Thus using -ALL (with or without -IS) may be used to
propagate new ACLs throughout subtrees.
4-5
Shell Commands
ACL (ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
The following options perform miscellaneous tasks:
-LINKS
If target_object is a wildcard that specifies link(s), operate on
the link(s). By default ACL does not operate on links specified
with wildcards. ACL always, however, operates on links you
specify explicitly (without wildcards).
-L
List object names as the command sets ACLs.
-BR
Display ACLs only, not object names.
ACL uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command options
listed in Chapter 3 with the exception of the use of hyphen (-) to read data from standard
input.
EXAMPLES
1. $ acl new file old file
Assign old_file's ACL to new_file.
2. $ acl joe mary -i -is
Set the initial ACLs inside JOE using
the initial ACLs inside MARY (which must
be a directory) .
3. $ acl abc?* file1 -d -if
Set the initial file ACL in all
subdirectories of the current working
directory whose names begin with ABC to
the ACL of FILE1.
4. $ acl abc?* dir2 -f -is
Set the ACLs of all files in the current
working directory whose names begin with
ABC to the initial file ACL inside DIR2.
5. $ acl abc?* dir2 -i -is
The initial ACLs in all subdirectories
of the current working directory whose
names begin with ABC are set using the
initial ACLs in DIR2. and the ACLs of all
files whose names begin with ABC are set
using the intial file ACL in DIR2.
(Adding -D would confine the operation
to directories.)
6. $ acl abc?* dir2 -all
The ACLs of all files matched are set
using the initial file ACL in DIR2. The
ACLs of all directories matched are set
using the ACL of DIR2 itself. The initial
ACLs inside those matched directories are
set using the initial ACLs inside DIR2.
7. $ acl abc?* dir2 -all -is
The ACLs of all files matched are set
using the initial file ACL in DIR2. The
ACLs of all directories matched are set
using the initial directory ACL in DIR2.
The initial ACLs inside those matched
directories are set using the initial
ACLs inside DIR2.
Shell Commands
4-6
ARCF (ARCHIVE _FILE)
o
ARCF (ARCHIVE_FILE) -- Maintain an archive file.
FORMAT
ARCF command arcname [pathname •.•]
ARCF collects sets of files into one large file and maintains that file as an archive. Files
can be extracted from the archive, new ones can be added, old ones can be deleted or
replaced by updated versions, and data about the contents can be listed. Only text files
can be archived.
o
Files to be added to an archive must exist as files with the name given. Files that are
extracted from an archive will be written to files with the name given. Files that are
added to archives can, of course, be archive files themselves. Any number of files can be
nested this way. Thus, ARCF can be used to maintain tree-structured file directories.
NOTE:
When you use the update and print commands, the files are updated and
printed in the order they appear in the archived file, not in the order listed on
the command line.
ARGUMENTS
o
command
(required)
Specify the operation to perform on the archive file arcname.
Follow the command with V to get verbose output. Possible
commands are:
-D
Delete the named files from the archive. If the
V option is used, filenames are displayed on
the standard output as they are deleted from
the archive.
-p
Write the named files on standard output.
The V option causes the filenames to precede
the file.
-T
Write a table of contents for the archive file.
Normally, the table contains only the
filename. If the V option is used, the table
also includes the file's length, type, and date
and time of the last change.
-U
Update the named archive by replacing
existing files, or adding new ones at the end.
If no filenames are given, all possible files in
the archive will be updated with files of the
same name in the current directory. If the
archive file does not exist, it will be created
with the name given. If the V option is used,
filenames are displayed on standard output as
files are written to the new archived file.
o
o
4-7
Shell Oommands
AROF (AROHIVE _ FILE)
Arcname
(required)
pathname
(optional)
-x
Extract the named files from archive. Write
each to a file with the same name. If the file
already exists, the new version replaces the
old. If the V option is added, filenames are
displayed on standard output as files are
extracted.
V
Request verbose output. This command can
follow any of the other commands (see
example below), and will cause the archiver to
print
additional
information,
generally
filenames, on standard output. Its specific
action for each command has already been
described.
Specify name of archive file being created or maintained.
Specify name of file to be added or deleted from the archive.
Multiple names are permitted, separated by blanks. Specifying a
hyphen as a filename will cause further names to be read from
standard input, one per line.
Default if omitted: perform action on all files in the archive
(except -D, which requires that names be
explicitly given).
EXAMPLES
1.
$ arcf -uv my_archive stamps
stamps
$
2.
$ arcf -tv my_archive
stamps
330 local
$
Shell Commands
02/18/83
4-8
Update archive file "my_archive"
with a new copy of the file
"stamps". returning verbose
output.
13:53:07
Report on the contents of the
archive.
c
ARGS (ARGUMENTS)
o
ARGS (ARGUMENTS) -- Echo command line arguments.
FORMAT
ARGS [-ERR[OUT]] string ...
ARGS writes its arguments, one per line, to standard output unless -ERR is specified.
Use it to write to files by redirecting standard output into a file with the II > pathname II
expression. The ARGS command is useful for inserting messages and diagnostics to be
reported to the display into Shell scripts and for inserting lines of text into files.
ARGUMENTS
o
string
(required)
Specify the string of characters to be written. Multiple strings
are permitted; separate strings with blanks. Strings are written
one per line. To write phrases containing literal blanks, enclose
strings in quotes.
OPTIONS
-ERR[OUT]
(j
Write the string{s) to error output instead of standard output.
This option is useful for writing to the transcript pad (where
error output is usually directed) from an ARGS command inside
a pipeline, since standard output is then connected to the pipe.
EXAMPLES
1. $ args Hi there
Hi
there
o
$
2. $ args "Hi there" "Mary"
Hi there
Mary
$
3. $ args "Hi there, Mary." >my_file
Write "Hi there, Mary." into
the file MY FILE in the
current working directory.
o
4-9
Shell Commands
BIND
BIND -- Combine object modules into an executable file.
BIND combines two or more object modules into one executable object module. It
resolves external references to global symbols and combines sections that have the same
name. For full details on the binder, see the DOMAIN Binder and Librarian Reference
manual. The binder takes the following format:
$ BIND pathnamel ... [pathnameN] [option] ...
In other words, the command line simply consists of the word BIND, one or more
pathnames, and zero or more options.
The binder uses the object modules stored in pathnamel through pathnameN to create an
executable object file. Each pathname must be the name of a valid object file or library
file. (A compiler creates an object file, and the librarian creates a library file.) You may
use wildcards in pathnames. The binder automatically loads all object modules stored in
object files, but conditionally loads the object modules stored in library files.
Options modify the binder's actions. Of all the binder's options, -BINARY is the most
important. You must use this option to get an executable output object file.
c
Following is a summary of the BIND options. See the DOMAIN Binder and Librarian
Reference manual for complete descriptions of each option. Default options are indicated
by U(D)".
-ALIGN section-name LONG
Aligns the named section on a 32-bit boundary
at runtime.
-ALIGN section-name QUAD Aligns the named section on a 54-bit boundary
at runtime.
-ALIGN section-name PAGE Aligns the named section on an 8,192-bit
boundary at runtime.
-ALLKEEPMARK
Preserves all marks.
Marks all global symbols in the input object
-ALLMARK
files that appear after the option on the
BIND command line.
-ALLRES[OLVED]
Signals a shell severity level of "error" if
there are unresolved global symbols at the
end of a BIND command. Useful in controlling
Shell scripts.
-ALLUNMARK
(D) Unmarks all global symbols in the input Object
files that appear after the option on the
bind command line.
Adds a pathname to the list of directories the
-BDIR directory_name
binder searches for input Object files.
Creates an output Object module and stores it
-B[INARY] pathname
at pathname.
Signifies end of a command that is spread over
-END
several lines.
specifies a nondefault start address.
-ENTRY global_symbol
Makes the binder case-sensitive to all
-EXACTCASE
variable names and section names.
Writes currently defined global symbols to
-GLO[BALS]
error output.
Prints this list of commands.
-H[ELP]
Unconditionally loads the named Object module
-INCL[UDE] module-name
from a library file into the output Object
file.
Shell Oommands
- - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . - - - _.._-
4-10
r-~'
(,
~\
~,.--.'
BIND
o
o
o
o
o
-INCL[UDE] -ALL
Unconditionally loads all Object modules from
a library file into the output Object file.
-INLIB pathname
Specifies that the Object modules in pathname
are to be "installed" when the output Object
file is invoked. (This is an alternative to
the -INLIB utility.)
-LOCALSEARCH
Forces the binder to make another search
through a library file if the previous search
loaded an Object module containing an
unresolved external reference.
-LOOKS[ECTION] name
Makes the named section available for sharing
with a public section in an installed
library.
-LOOKS[ECTION] -ALL
Makes all sUbsequent sections available for
sharing with their counterpart public
sections in an installed library.
-MAK[ERS]
Lists the version numbers of the compilers.
binders. etc. that were used to create the
input Object files.
-MAP
Writes a complete binder map to standard
output.
-MARK global_symbol
Marks the specified global symbol.
-MARK -ALL
Same as "-ALLMARK".
-MARKS[ECTION] section name
Makes section_name public. Affects only
those Object files that are destined to
be installed as an installed library.
-MARKS[ECTION] -ALL
Makes all sUbsequent sections public. Affects
only those Object files destined to be
installed as an installed library.
-MERGE [BSS]
Merges all sections corresponding to C global
variables into a single section named BSS$.
-MES[SAGES]
(D) Produces informational messages at the end of
a BIND command.
-MOD [ULE] new name
Changes the name of the output object module
from the default (i.e .• the first input
Object module loaded) to new_name.
-MSGS
(D) Same as -MESSAGES.
-MULTIRES
Reports errors if multiple resolutions of the
same external symbol exist in Object module
libraries.
-NMSGS
Same as -NOMESSAGES.
-NOEXACTCASE
(D) Makes the binder case-insensitive to all
variable and section names.
-NOINLIB pathname
Specifies that the object file(s) in pathname
are no longer to be "installed" when the
program is invoked.
-NOLOCALSEARCH
(D) Searches each library file once. then proceeds
to searching the next input object file.
-NOLOOKS[ECTION] name
Makes the named section unavailable for
sharing.
-NOLOOKS[ECTION] -ALL (D) Makes all sUbsequent data sections unavailable
for sharing.
-NOMARKS[ECTION] section name
Makes section_name private.
-NOMARKS [ECTION] -ALL·
Makes all sUbsequent sections private.
-NOMES[SAGES]
Suppresses informational messages.
-N[O]MULTIRES
(D) Omits error reporting when there are multiple
possible resolutions in a library.
4-11
Shell Commands
BIND
-NOUND[EFINED]
Suppresses the listing of undefined globals.
-Q[UIT]
Exits from the binder without finishing.
-READONLY[SECTION] section name
Changes the read/write attribute of
section_name to read-only.
-SEC [TIONS]
Displays a section map.
-SET_VER[SION] number.number
Sets the program version in the map to the
specified number.
-SORTL[OCATION]
Sorts global symbols numerically (by
position) .
-SORTN[AMES]
(D) Sorts global symbols alphabetically (by
name) .
-SYS [TEM]
Makes system globals visible.
-SYSTYFE type
Builds a shared resource record into the
output object module. For type, you must
specify the name of an operating system
(sys3, sys5, bsd4.1, or bsd4.2). This option
overrides all system information stored in
the input object modules.
-UNO [EFINED]
Suppresses a listing of unresolved external
symbols present at the end of a bind command
line.
-UNMARK global_symbol
Remove a mark from the specified global
symbol.
-UNMARK -ALL
Same as "-ALLUNMARK".
-UNMARKS[ECTION] name
Makes section_name private. Affects only
those object files that are destined to be
installed as an installed library.
-UNMARKS[ECTION] -ALL (D) Makes all sUbsequent sections private. Affects
only those object files that are destined to
be installed as an installed library.
-XREF
Displays a listing of cross references.
- (hyphen)
Tells the binder that more input will follow
on the next line.
EXAMPLES
1. $ bind a.bin b.bin -binary my_program
A simple binder command line.
The binder builds an output
object file in my_program
from two input object files.
2. $ bind a.bin my_library -b my_program
A library file can also serve
as an input object file.
3. $ bind one.bin two. bin three. bin -map -b my_program
The -MAP option causes bind
to print substantial binder
information.
4. $ BIND
The command BIND specified
by itself tells bind that
*paul.bin -ALLMARK -B name.bin
*time.bin -UNMARK date -UNMARK year more input will follow on
the next line. Specify a
*john.bin -map
blank line to end the
*
prompting.
Shell Commands
4-12
~
"-.
... /
BIND
o
5. $ BIND a.bin b.bin {a comment} -b hope
Put comments inside braces.
o
o
o
o
4-13
Shell Commands
BLDT (BUILD _ TTh1E)
BLDT (BUILD _ TIME) -- Display time at which operating system was built.
C
FORMAT
BLDT [pathname] [options]
BLDT displays the time at which the running version of AEGIS was built.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Display the build time of the node whose network root directory
is II pathname II •
Default if omitted: display build time of current node
C,'
OPTIONS
-N node_spec •••
Display build time of specified node[s]. See the section on node
specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
-A
Display build time of all nodes.
EXAMPLES
1. $ bldt
**** Node 532 **** "I/paris"
AEGIS, revision 5.0, built on Friday, June 5, 1982
2:29:44 am (EST).
2. $ bldt //08
**** Node 21 **** "I/london"
AEGIS1, revision 6.0x, built on Tuesday, June 24, 1983 9:01:00 pm (EDT).
3. $ bldt -n 74
**** Node 74 **** "I/munich"
AEGIS 1 , revision 6.0x, built on Monday, July 1, 1983
10:26:41 am (EDT).
4. $ bldt -n //brooklyn
**** Node COCOA. 584 **** / /brooklyn diskless to 11/ /new_york"
AEGIS2-DOMAIN/IX kernel, revision 9.0, Friday, June 21, 1985 3:40:04 pm
C
Shell Gomnwnds
4-14
BOFF
o
BOFF -- Deactivate the Shell's -B flag.
FORMAT
BOFF
BOFF turns off the Shell's -B (display output of background process) flag, which is
turned on by the BON command or the -B option on the SH command line. When the
flag is off, the output of background processes created with the & parsing operator is sent
to /DEV /NULL. This background process output is sent to /DEV /NULL by default.
BOFF requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
4-15
Shell Commands
BON
BON -- Activate the Shell's -B flag.
FORMAT
BON
BON activates the Shell's -B (display output of background process) flag. The flag can
also be activated by using the -B option on the SH command when the Shell is invoked.
The BOFF command deactivates the -B flag. By default, the flag is off when a Shell is
invoked.
This flag causes the Shell to send the output of a background process (created with the
11&11 parsing operator) to the display. The output of the background process is displayed
in the transcript pad of the Shell where it was invoked.
If BON is turned on in a Shell script, it remains on until that Shell script exits, or until it
is over-ridden by a BOFF command in a nested Shell script. When a Shell script exits,
the state of execution tracing is returned to the state in effect just before the script was
invoked.
BON requires no arguments or options.
Shell Commands
4-16
CALENDAR
o
CALENDAR (SET SYSTEM CALENDAR) -- Set system calendar clock.
FORMAT
CALENDAR (from the Shell)
EX CALENDAR (from the Mnemonic Debugger)
The calendar utility is used to set or reset the calendar clock in a node. It can also be
used to update the last valid time known to the system, which is stored on the boot
volume. Normally, the clock is set at the factory, and there is no need to reset it. Care
must also be taken if setting the clock backwards in time, since duplicate UIDs may be
generated, resulting in the loss of files. For information on changing the timezone, see
the TZ (TIMEZONE) command description.
o
Note that CALENDAR only works on unmounted volumes, so you must invoke it from
the Mnemonic Debugger in order to set the clock on the boot volume.
Please refer to the DOMAlN System Utilities manual for complete information on the
use of this software tool.
CALENDAR prompts for all required arguments and options.
o
o
4-17
Shell Commands
OATF (OATENATE_FILE)
CATF (CATENATE_FILE) -- Read file(s) and write to standard output.
FORMAT
CATF [pathname ..•]
OATF reads input files in order and writes them to standard output.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file(s) to write to standard output.
If multiple
pathnames are given, they are read and written in the order that
they appear on the command line.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Ohapter 3.
EXAMPLES
Writes the file "garbage" on standard output.
1.
$ catf garbage
2.
$ catf garbage - trash >collector
Concatenates the file "garbage." the lines read
from standard input. and the file "trash." and
writes the result in the file "collector."
3.
$ catf collector »junk
Appends the contents of "collector" to the file
"junk.
II
Shell Commands
4-18
c
_...
o
----------
-----
- --_. ---------.----
-----
CHHDIR (CHANGE_HOME_DIRECTORY) -- Change a login home directory.
FORMAT
CHHDIR pathname
The login home directory contains your initial working and naming directories. After
login, you are automatically in your login home directory. Use CmmIR to change your
login home directory.
In order for this command to work properly, the network registry must have been sealed
the command descriptions for _CRSUBS,
so it is owned by the LOGIN subsystem. See
SUBS, and ENSUBS for more information on protected subsystems and the objects they
protect.
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify name of new login home directory.
EXAMPLES
o
$ chhdir //user/john
Set new login home directory to
//user/jOhn.
o
o
4-19
Shell Commands
CHN (CHANGE _ NAlviE)
CHN (CHANGE_NAME) -- Change an object's name.
FORMAT
CHN old_name [new _name] [old_name [new _name] •..] [options]
CRN changes the name of a file, directory, or link. CRN works with the rightmost
component ("leafname") of the old name (see EXAMPLES).
This command cannot be used to change the name of a directory embedded in a complete
pathname, which would result in the file's relocation to some other part of the naming
tree. For instance,
$ chn //et/mary/letters //et/fred/letters
c\
is illegal. Use the MVF (MOVE_FILE) command for that operation.
ARGUMENTS
Multiple 'old_name'/'new _name' pairs and pathname wildcarding are permitted.
old_name
(required)
new name
(optional)
Specify the current pathname of the object to be renamed.
(
Specify the new name of the object. The new name may be
derived from the old name.
'New _ name' may be omitted
entirely if -D, -Y,or -U are specified. Otherwise, some portion of
it is required. Names may be 1 to 32 characters long.
Default if omitted: derive 'new
name' from 'old
name'.
OPTIONS
-D
Append today's date (month and day) to 'new
form "new name.mm.dd II
-y
Append today's date (year, month, and day) to 'new _name' in
the form II new _name.yy.mm.dd"
-U
Force 'new _name' to be unique by appending a sequence
number to the end of the name until it becomes unique.
-S
name' in the
List names changed on standard output.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
Shell Oommands
4-20
'- ....
./
- - - - - _ .__._------_.- ---.--.--.... - ._.-
CRN (CHANGE_NAME)
o
EXAMPLES
1.
$ chn fritz henri
Change the name "fritz" to "henri" in
the current working directory.
2.
$ chn henri mike peter paul
Change henri to mike and peter to paul.
3.
$ chn (a b c) =.zorp
Change a band c to a.zorp, b.zorp and
c.zorp.
4.
$ chn /my/stuff/lips red_lips
Change the file Illips" to Ilred_lips"
in the directory "/my/stuff.
1I
o
5.
$ chn henri -d
henri.07.19
Change henri to henri.mm.dd where
mm is the current month (01-12) and
dd is the current date (01-31).
6.
$ chn joe -u
joe.1
Change joe by appending sequence number
to end of file name.
o
o
o
4-21
Shell Commands
CHPASS (CHANGE_PASSWORD)
CHPASS (CHANGE_PASSWORD) -- Change a login password
(
''
/,'
FORMAT
CHPASS [new _password]
CHPASS changes your login password to 'new _password.'
change your password from the Shell command level.
CHPASS allows you to
In order for this command to work properly, the network registry must have been sealed
so it is owned by the LOGIN subsystem. Refer to CRSUBS, SUBS, and ENSUBS, plus
HELP PROTECTION, for more information on protected subsystems and the objects
they protect.
Your login password can also be changed using the -P option under the L (LOGIN) Display
Manager command.
ARGUMENTS
new _password
(optional)
Specify new password. Omitting this option causes CHPASS to
prompt for your new password. Input echo is disabled. A second
prompt verifies the password and guards against typing
mistakes.
Default if omitted: prompt up to three times for password.
c
EXAMPLES
$ chpass sesame
Set new login password to "sesame,"
C~)
Shell Commands
4-22
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_._-_.
CHPAT (CHANGE_PATTERN)
o
CHPAT
(CHANGE_PATTERN) --
Replace pattern in text file.
FORMAT
CHPAT [options] [pathname •••] [-P] [pat •.• ] from_pattern [to_expression]
CHPAT copies every line from its input files to its output files, globally substituting the
text replacement pattern "to _ expression" for each occurrence of "from _ pattern" in
those lines designated by the "pat" argument(s) and any options.
Refer to the descriptions of the ED (EDIT), FPAT (FIND_PATTERN), and EDSTR
(EDIT _STREAM) commands for related information.
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify name of file to be searched. Multiple pathnames and
wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: search standard input.
o
o·
from _ pattern
(required)
to _ expression
(optional)
pat
(optional)
Specify target text string (a regular expression) for substitution
or deletion. If the string includes the characters % $ [ ] { } ! *
or any other Shell special characters, enclose it in quotes to avoid
unpredictable results. If the 'pathname' argument is present,
precede this argument (or the 'pat' argument, if present) with
"-p" to separate the pathname(s) from the regular expressions
on the command line.
Specify replacement string. If no replacement is specified, the
'from _ pattern' string will be deleted. If regular expressions
defining a range of text ('pat' argument) are present, you must
use a literally null 'to _ expression' (" .. ) to delete
'from _ pattern' .
Specify range of text for which the substitution is to apply, in
the form of a regular expression. Multiple expressions separated
by blanks are permitted. Unless modified by options, any line of
text matching any pattern is replaced and all lines, changed or
not, are written to output. If the 'pathname' argument is
present, precede this argument with "_p II to separate the
pathname(s) from the regular expressions on the command line.
Default if omitted: use 'from_pattern' to select matching lines.
o
4-23
Shell Commands
OPTIONS
-A
Select only lines that match all of the leading expressions, in
any order.
-x
Select only lines that match none of the leading expressions.
-0
Write only the selected lines to standard output. By default,
CHPAT writes all lines to output.
-L
List name(s) of input file(s) on output file(s) as the input file(s)
are searched.
-OUT pathname
Specify name of output file. Pathname may be derived from the
input file name. If this option is omitted, output is written to
standard output.
EXAMPLES
\,
1. $ chpat foo bar
Changes all occurrences of 'foo' in standard input to
and writes the results to standard output.
2. $ chpat '%This'"
'bar'
*" , ,
In lines starting with 'This', it changes all occurrences
of multiple spaces to a single space.
3. $ chpat '%This' '%That'
Like 2., but works
'That' .
on
II
*"
lines
starting
with
either
'This' or
4. $ chpat -a '%when' 'only$'
In lines that start with 'when' and end with 'only', change
all semicolons to colons.
5. $ chpat -x not none some all
In lines that do not contain either 'not' or 'none',
all instances of 'some' to 'all'.
change
6. $ chpat erase
Delete (replace with nothing) all occurences of 'erase'.
Exactly the same effect can be obtained with:
$ chpat erase "
Shell Commands
4-24
o
7. $ chpat -0 other_opts pat ... fr_pat to_pat
Is exactly the same as
$ fpat pat ... I chpat other_opts fr_pat to_pat
8. $ chpat ?*.pas -out =.new -p "if x = y" "if (x = y)
II
Change all occurrences of the string
"if x = y"
to "if (x = y)1I in all Pascal source files (files ending with
'.pas') and put the output for 'X.pas' in 'X.pas.new'.
o
o
o
4-25
Shell Commands
CMACCT (COMPARE_ACCOUNT_FILE)
CMACCT (COMPARE_ACCOUNT_FILE) -- Compare account files.
FORMAT
CMACCT rgyl_path rgy2_path
CMACCT compares two different network registries' accounts. Accounts that appear in
both registries and are associated with different home directories and/or passwords are
reported. Use EDACCT to resolve these account collisions.
CMACCT is for use in a DOMAIN/BRIDGE Internet. For complete information on
comparing network registries, see Managing DOMAIN Internets.
ARGUMENTS
rgyl_path
(required)
rgy2_path
(required)
Specify the pathname of a registry file to be compared. The
pathname
may
be
the
master
registry
file
U/node/REGISTRY/RGY _MASTER), a node's copy of the
master registry file U/node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY), or simply
a node entry directory U/node). If the pathname is a node entry
directory, the / /node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY file is used.
Specify the other registry file to be compared.
EXAMPLES
The following commands compare the account files in two different registries, delete the
account that is assoicated with different home directories from one of the registries, and
then compare the account files again to check that there are no more collisions.
$ cmacct //alpha/registry/rgy_master //beta/registry/rgy_master
Account user.none.none has different home directories: /
//guest/user
1 account collision
$ edacct -r //alpha/registry/rgy_master
=> d user none none
user
none none /
OK to delete this account? (Y/N/Quit): y
Current entry is: smith none
r d
=>
//martha/smith
wr
$ cmacct //alpha/registry/rgy_master //beta/registry/rgy_master
No account collisions
$
c
Shell Commands
4-26
C1v1F (C01vlPARE _ FILE)
o
CMF (COMPARE_FILE) -- Identify differences among files.
FORMAT
CMF file _ a [•••file _ e) [options]
C1v1F compares the contents of two to five ASCII files and reports the differences on
standard output. This· command works only on files: to compare directory trees, use
CMT (COMPARE_TREE).
ARGUMENTS
o
file_a
(required)
file _ b ••• file
(optional)
o
o
o
Specify pathname of original file; all differences are reported in
relation to this file. Wildcarding of this pathname is permitted
to achieve multiple comparisons.
e
Specify descendants of 'file _ a'. If more than one file is
specified, you may use a hyphen (-) to cause standard input to be
read in place of a pathname. Pathnames may be derived from
'file_a'.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
-R pathname
Report all differences to the specified report file, in addition to
reporting to standard output. This pathname may be derived
from 'file _ a' (if 'file _ a' is wildcarded) to produce one report for
each comparison. If 'file _ a' is wildcarded and this report file
name is NOT derived, then all reports are concatenated into the
single report file.
-TB
Include trailing blanks in the comparison. By default, ignore
trailing blanks. -TB also causes C1v1F to regard the NEWLINE
character at the end of the last line in the file as significant (if it
exists).
-BR
Display only line numbers of lines containing discrepancies. By
default, display both line numbers and line contents.
-L
Display names of files being compared before each comparison is
performed. This is useful when wildcarded pathnames are
specified.
-Mn
Set the minimum number of lines for a rematch to 'n.' This is
the minimum number of lines, following a reported difference,
which must match for CMF to consider the files synchronized.
The default value is 3.
4-27
Shell Commands
GMF (C011PARE _ FILE)
EXAMPLES
Assume that file II file! II contains
Fourscore
and seven
years ago,
our fathers brought
forth
and IIfile2 11 contains
Eighty-seven
years ago,
our fathers brought
GtvIF produces the following output when IIfile!1I is compared to IIfile2. 11
$ cmf file1 file2
c
Ai
Fourscore
A2
and seven
changed to
Bi
Eighty-seven
forth
deleted before
end of file B
AS
2 discrepancies found.
C'._- ,
Shell Commands
4-28
---------
------------ --------- - - - - - -
C1v1PPO (C01v1PARE_PPO _FILE)
o
CMPPO (COMPARE_PPO_FILE) -- Compare person, project, or organization names.
FORMAT
C1v1PPO compares two different network registries' person, project, and/or organization
names. Names that appear in both registries and are associated with different name IDs
are reported. Use the C (CHANGE_NAME) command in EDPPO to change duplicate
names in one of the registries; do not delete names.
C1v1PPO is for use in a DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet. For complete information on
comparing network registries, see Managing DOMAIN Internets.
o
o
ARGUMENTS
rgyl_path
(required)
Specify the pathname of a registry to be compared. The
pathname
may
be
the
master
registry
file
U/node/REGISTRY/RGY _MASTER), a node's copy of the
master registry file U/node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY), or simply
a node entry directory U/node). If the pathname is a node entry
directory, the / /node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY file is used.
rgy2_path
(required)
Specify the other registry to be compared.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
o
-PERS
Compare the names in the Person files.
-PROJ
Compare the names in the Project files.
-ORG
Compare the names in the Organization files.
-ALL
(D)
Compare the names in the Person, Project, and Organization
files.
EXAMPLES
The following commands compare person names in two registries, change duplicate names,
and then compare person names again to check that all duplicate names have been handled.
$ cmppo //alpha/registry/rgy_master //beta/registry/rgy_master -pers
Names with different ids found in both registries' person file:
o
martin
smith
2 names.
4-29
Shell Commands
CMPPO (C01vlPARE _ PPO _ FILE)
$ edppo -r //beta/registry/rgy_master -pers
=> c martin emartin
=> c smith msmith
=> wr
$ cmppo //alpha/registry/rgy_master //beta/registry/rgy_master -pers
No names with different ids found in both registries' person file
$
c
c'
Shell Commands
4-30
CMSRF (COMPARE_SORTED _FILE)
o
CMSRF (COMPARE_SORTED_FILE) -- Find lines common to two files.
FORMAT
CMSRF [options] file1 [file2]
CMSRF reads sorted files, 'filel' and 'file2', and produces 1-, 2-, or 3-column output.
Column 1 contains lines found only in 'filel', column 2 contains lines found only in 'file2',
and column 3 contains lines found in both files. The number option, -N, specifies which
columns you want to print. To compare unsorted files, use CMF (COMPARE_FILE).
ARGUMENTS
Use of a hyphen for either file name will cause the data to be read from standard input.
o
file1
(required)
Specify first file for comparison.
file2
(optional)
Specify second file for comparison.
Default if omitted: compare filel to standard input.
o
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, CMSRF produces a complete 3-column report.
Specify number(s), where n is an integer sequence representing
the following:
-n
o
1
Report only lines exclusive to 'filel'.
2
Report only lines exclusive to 'file2'.
3
Report only lines commmon to both files.
EXAMPLES
Compare '//us/sorted_stuff.c
to standard input and report
lines found in either place.
but not both.
1.
$ cmsrf -12 //us/sorted_stuff.c
2.
$ cmsrf -3 //us/sorted_stuff.a //us/sorted_stuff.b
Report only common lines
for both files.
o
4-31
Shell Commands
CMT (CO:MPARE_ TREE)
CMT (COMPARE_TREE) -- Compare source tree to target tree.
FORMAT
CMT source_pathname target_pathname [options]
CMT compares all the objects in the source tree against all objects in the target tree.
CMT reports any objects cataloged in the source that do not also appear in the target. If
the target contains objects that do not appear in the source, however, the differences are
ignored.
CMT
compares
objects
based
on
their
internal
representation,
unlike
CMF
(COMPARE_FILE), which treats its input data as ASCII text streams and compares them as
such.
Both the source and target pathnames must specify the same type of object, either a
directory or a file. CMT, however, can compare objects of any type, unlike CMF, which
compares only text files.
If CMT encounters differences, it reports that the objects are different and continues the
comparison with the next object.
ARGUMENTS
Both the source and target pathnames must specify the same type of object, either a
directory or a file. Use of wildcards in pathnames is permitted. Multiple source/target
pairs are permitted.
source _ pathname
(required)
target _pathname
(required)
Specify source tree.
Specify target tree.
'source _ pathname.'
Name
may
be
derived
from
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, CMT will only report the names of directories and files with
differences in source and target trees.
-L
List all directories and files compared.
-LD
List all directories compared.
-LF
List all files compared.
-AE
Abort on the first mismatch, or if the source tree contains a
name not found in the target tree. By default, the comparison
continues after the mismatch is reported.
Shell Commands
4-32
c
CMT (C01\1PARE _ TREE)
o
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
Assume that the directories II dir 111 and II dir2 11 each contain three files called II a, II lib, II
and IIC,II and that the contents of the IIb ll files differ. Following is the result of a
comparison of those two directories.
$ cmt dir1 dir2
*** compare failed at file loc 0 SRC: 10002 DST: 100011
dir1/b - compare failed (from US / file utility)
o
o
o
o
4-33
Shell Commands
CPBOOT (COPY _BOOT)
CPBOOT (COPY_BOOT) -- Copy the system boot file SYSBOOT.
FORMAT
CPBOOT source_directory { target_directory I-DEV CT }
CPBOOT copies the system boot file SYSBOOT from one directory to another. The
sysboot file is used by the bootstrap PROM to start the system. CPBOOT is useful for
copying SYSBOOT to a floppy disk, thus making the stand-alone utilities {SAUl
directory on the floppy disk accessible from the boot PROM. You may also use it to
update a Winchester disk when a new software release is distributed.
If you wish to build a bootable cartridge tape, II-DEV CTII should be specified in place of
the target directory. This will copy CTBOOT -- the cartridge tape version of SYSBOOT
-- from the source directory (usually !SYS) onto the beginning of the cartridge tape.
{Note: subsequent WBAKs to the tape should use the -SYSBOOT option to avoid
overwritting CTBOOT on the tape.)
ARGUMENTS
source _ directory
(required)
target _ directory
(optional)
Specify directory containing the file SYSBOOT or CTBOOT.
Specify directory to which SYSBOOT is to be copied.
must be the entry directory on the target logical volume.
This
Default if omitted: must use -DEV.
OPTIONS
-DEV CT
Specify that you wish to build a bootable cartridge tape. This
option must be specified if you omit the 'target_directory'
argument.
EXAMPLES
$ cpboot /flpa /
Copy the SYSBOOT file from the directory
"/flpa" to the current node entry directory.
$ cpboot /8Y8 -dev ct
Shell Oommands
Copy the CTBOOT file from the directory "/8Y8"
to the cartridge tape.
4-34
~
('- ./
CPF (COPY _FILE)
o
CPF (COpy _FILE) -- Copy a file.
FORMAT
CPF source_pathname [target_pathname] [options]
CPF copies a file from the source pathname to the target pathname. CPF only copies
files; see CPT (COPY_TREE) for copying directories and their subordinate objects.
ARGUMENTS
source _ pathname
(required)
o
target _ pathname
(optional)
Specify file to be copied. If the source pathname is a link name,
CPF resolves the link and copies the file to which the link refers.
Specify target for copy. If target _ pathname is a directory,
source_pathname is copied into this directory. Target must
NOT be a link.
Default if omitted: copy 'source_pathname' into current
working directory
Multiple source/target pairs and pathname wildcarding are permitted.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D).i.
-C
0
(D)
-R
Replace target with copy of source.
-LF
List files copied.
-LDL
List files deleted as a result of a II replace II (-R).
-CHN
-DACL
o
Create source file at target. An error occurs if the target file
already exists.
Use with -C to change the name of an existing object with the
target pathname before the copy is made. Use with -R to change
the name of a target file if it is in use and cannot be deleted.
(D)
-SACL
-SUBS
Apply the target directory's default ACL for files copied. In
addition to its own ACL, each directory has two default ACLs,
one for its files and another for its subdirectories. Unless 1) you
specify -SACL, or 2) the file belongs to a protected subsystem
(see -SUBS), the system assigns to the target file its parent
directory's default ACL for files.
Retain the source file's ACL.
(D)
Retain source ACL for objects which belong to subsystems.
4-35
Shell Commands
CPF (COPY _FILE)
-NSUBS
Apply the target directory's default ACL for objects which
belong to subsystems.
-F
Force deletion of target object if 'p' rights are present.
-DU
Delete when unlocked. This option is useful with -R. If the
object to be replaced is locked when CPF is invoked, the replace
operation will be performed when the object is unlocked.
-PDT
Preserve the source file's modification and used times.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ cpf /latest/wbak wbak.latest
$
Copy the file "wbak" from the
"/latest" directory to the
current directory. and call it
"wbak.latest".
2.
$ cpf /latest/com/wbak /com -r
Copy the file "/latest/com/wbak"
to the "/com" directory. replacing
the existing "/com/wbak".
$
3.
$ cpf /games/space?* -If
(file) "spacewar" copied.
(file)
spacebunny" copied.
(file) "space_shot" copied.
Copy and list all files in the
"/games" directory starting with
"space"to the working directory.
II
$
4.
$ cpf ?*.pas backup/=.12.07
$
Shell Commands
Copy all files in the working
directory with the suffix ".pas"
to the directory "backup".
appending a date.
4-36
-------------------------------
------~
~--~.~--
.. - - -... - ..
CPL (COPY _LINK)
o
CPL (COPY _LINK) -- Copy a link.
FORMAT
CPL Iinkname [pathname] ••• [options]
CPL copies a linkname to the target object.
ARGUMENTS
Multiple linkname/pathname pairs and wildcarding are permitted.
o
o
Iinkname
(required)
pathname
(optional)
Specify the target pathname of the copied link. If 'pathname' is
a linkname, then this link is created or replaced (depending on
various options below). If 'pathname' is a directory, then the
link text is copied into this directory. In no case is the object to
which the link refers affected: only the text of the link itself.
Default if omitted: copy link into current working directory.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
-C
0
Specify the name of the link to be copied.
(D)
Create source link at target. An error occurs if the target link
already exists.
-R
Replace target with copy of source.
-LL
List links copied.
-LDL
List links deleted because of replacement (-R).
-CHN
Change name of existing link with target_pathname before
copying.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
1. $ cpl //ai/sources /progs
Copy the link HI/ai/sources"
to the node entry directory as
"progs" .
o
4-37
Shell Commands
CPL (COPY _LINK)
2. $ cpl //zorba/sys/print /sys -r
Copy the link "/sys/print" from the
node whose entry directory is
"zorba" to the local /sys directory.
replacing any existing link.
/--"
'\..... _ / '
c
I'/~
''-.. ... /
Shell Commands
4-38
CPSCR (COPY _SCREEN)
o
CPSCR (COpy _SCREEN) -- Copy the current display to a file.
FORMAT
·1
CPSCR pathname [-INV] [-APPEND] [-GPR[_BITMAPII
CPSCR copies the current screen image (without clearing it) to the file you specify. Use
the PRF (PRINT _FILE) command to print the file.
Use the Display Manager command CPO to copy the screen without creating a new
process window or changing the current transcript pad. CPO invokes the CPSCR
command from the Display Manager without creating a pad or window. Thus, press
< GMD > then type:
o
CPO /COM/CPSCR pathname
You may copy small portions of a black and white screen (such as a single window) with
the DM command XI.
By default, black and white screens are copied into a GMF file. Color screens are copied
into a GPR bitmap.
ARGUMENTS
o
o
pathname
(required)
Specify file to which the screen is copied.
OPTIONS
-INV
Invert image. Use this option to store the image in reverse
video. Black screen pixels become white and white screen pixels
become black.
This switch cannot be used with the
-gpr _ bitmap switch or on color nodes.
-APPEND
Appends a black and white screen image to an existing GMF
file. This switch cannot be used with the -gpr _ bitmap switch or
on color nodes.
Use this option to copy a black and white screen into a gpr
bitmap file rather than a gmf file. This option has no meaning
for color nodes. since color screens are already copied into gpr
bitmaps.
EXAMPLES
1. $ cpscr //uS/looky_there -inv
o
Invert and copy the current screen
image to the specified file. Since
the command line is echoed in the
Shell"s process transcript pad prior
to execution, this command will
appear in the resulting image.
4-39
Shell Commands
I
CPSCR (COPY _SCREEN)
2.
c
Command: cpo /com/cpscr //US/looky_there -inv
Same result as in example 1,
but the CPSCR line will not
appear in the plotted output.
c
Shell Commands
4-39.1
_._-_._-----._-_ _ - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----...
-----.-.---~------.---
_
... _---_.
o
o
o
o
o
CPT (COPY_TREE)
CPT
(COPY_TREE) --
Copy a directory tree.
FORMAT
o
CPT source_pathname target_pathname ••• [options]
CPT is a multipurpose tool for copying, merging, and replacing files, directories, and
links. To copy files only, use CPF (COpy _FILE).
ARGUMENTS
Multiple source/target pairs and wildcarding are permitted.
source _ pathname
(required)
target _pathname
(required)
Specify the file, link, or directory tree to be copied. CPT does
not change the contents or link references of the source, so errors
that occur will leave the source unaffected.
Specify the file or directory tree to be created, replaced, or
merged. The target pathname may be derived from the source
pathname. The target can NOT be a link. In addition, the
target can NOT be a logical volume entry Jirectory, or the
network root unless the -:MD option is specified.
\
\,
OPTIONS
,/
Default options are indicated by II{D).II
-AF date
Copy only objects whose dtms (date-times) are after the given
date and time: [[[yy]yy/]mm/dd][.][hh:mm[:ss]] I TODAY. The
date defaults to today, and the time to midnight; if either are
omitted from 'date'.
-BE date
Copy only objects whose dtms are before the given date and
time: [[[yy]yy/]mm/dd][.][hh:mm[:ss]] I TODAY.
The date
defaults to today, and the time to midnight if either are omitted
from 'date'.
-C
(D)
Create source at target. If the file or directory already exists,
an error will occur and processing will continue to the next
source/target pair. Not valid if -MS, -:MD, or -R is specified.
If the source is a file, CPT copies it to the target. If the source
is a directory, CPT copies the directory to' the target. It then
copies every file cataloged in the directory (and all
subdirectories) until it reaches the end of the tree.
Each link name in the source tree is created as a link name in
the target, but the object that the link references is not copied.
If 'source _ pathname' is itself a link, however, the link is
resolved and the object to which it points is copied to the target.
Shell Commands
4-40
o
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - _ . _ - - - - - - _ . _ - - - _ .__ ... _..
- - - _.._-_.._----_ .. __.._ - CPT (COPY_TREE)
o
-R
Replace target with source. Not valid iC -C ,-MS, or -:MD is
specified. CPT deletes the tree starting at the target pathname
and copies the entire source tree in its place. Note that the target
is deleted BEFORE copying begins. If no target tree by the
specified name exists, CPT creates one and duplicates the source.
-MS
Merge source and target if both are directories. Not valid if -C
or -R is specified. If the target does not exist, CPT duplicates
the source at the target. If the target exists, CPT merges the
source into the target, replacing files and links, and combining
directories.
If both the source and the target are directories, CPT merges
their contents as described below. Otherwise, CPT deletes the
target and replaces it with the source.
To merge directories, CPT compares their contents, object by
object. Objects that exist in the source but not in the target are
created in the target. Objects that exist in the target but not in
the source remain unchanged. Files and links with the same
name in both the source and the target are deleted Crom the
target and replaced by the source version. Directories with the
same name in both source and target are merged.
CPT
continues this process recursively until it reaches the end of the
source tree.
o
o
-MD
Merge source and target if both are directories. Similar to -MS
except that files and links with the same name in both source
and target are leCt unchanged in the target.
-F
Force deletion oC target object iC 'p' rights are present.
-DACL
(D)
o
Apply the target directory's deCault ACLs. In addition to its
own ACL, each directory has two deCault ACLs, one for its Ciles
and another Cor its subdirectories. -DACL causes CPT to apply
the target directory's default ACLs to each subdirectory and Cile
it copies. The -SACL option causes each object to retain its
original ACL.
-SACL
Retain the source ACL.
-CHN
Use with -C to change the name of a target beCore source is
copied. Use if target_name already exists. Use with -R, -MS,
and -:MD to change the target _name iC target is in use.
-SUBS
(D)
-NSUBS
Retain source ACL Cor objects which belong to subsystems.
Apply the target directory's deCault ACL Cor objects which
belong to subsystems.
-PR pathname
o
Preserve the object 'pathname' in target when another object
with the same name exists in the source. Valid with -MS option
only.
4-41
Shell Commands
CPT (COPY_TREE)
-PDT
Preserve the source's modification and used times.
The following five options allow you to monitor CPT's operation. You can use -LD, -LF,
and -LL in any combination. By default, the listing options apply to both copied and
deleted objects. To list only deletions, use -LDL with -L, -LD, -LF, or -LL.
-L
List all objects as they are copied.
-LD
List directories as they are copied.
-LF
List files as they are copied.
-LL
List links as they are copied.
-LDL
List only objects deleted as a result of replacements.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
WARNING
Five conditions always terminate execution:
• You attempt to use the network root or node entry directory as a target, without
specifying a merge.
• An error occurs in reading the top level of the source tree.
• You attempt to create an existing directory (if the target is an existing directory, you
must specify -R or -M).
• The logical volume containing the target directory is full.
• A quit or stop fault occurs in this process.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ cpt Icom Icom.backup -r
2.
$ cpt my_circuits Icircuits -ms
Shell Commands
Copy the directory tree "/com"
to "/com.backup" replacing the
existing "/com.backup" tree.
4-42
Merge the directory tree
"my_circuits" into the
"/circuits" tree.
C~
./
CRD (CREATE_DIRECTORY)
o
CRD (CREATE_DIRECTORY) -- Create a directory.
FORMAT
CRD pathname •••
CRD creates a directory with the specified pathname.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
o
Specify the subdirectory name to be created.
Multiple
pathnames are permitted. The new directory receives its parent
directory's initial ACL.
OPTIONS
This command uses the command line parser I and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
o
$ crd /my_dir/new_dir
Create the subdirectory new_dir
in the directory /my_dir.
o
o
4-43
Shell Commands
CREFS (CROSS_REFERENCE_STIvIBOLS)
CREFS (CROSS_REFERENCE_SYMBOLS) -- Cross-reference symbols in a file.
c
FORMAT
CREFS [-F] [pathname ..• ]
CREFS produces a cross-referenced list of the symbols in each of the named files, and
writes each list to standard output. A symbol is a string of letters, digits, underscores,
and dollar signs and must begin with a letter. The list contains every symbol in the file in
alphabetical order, followed by the numbers of the lines in which the symbol appears.
Symbols of more than 32 characters are truncated.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify input file. Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are
permitted: separate names with blanks.
Default if omitted: read text from standard input.
OPTIONS
If the option is not specified, CREFS treats uppercase and lowercase letters as different
characters, and places uppercase letters before lowercase letters in the alphabetical sort.
-F
Treat all input text as lowercase while cross-referencing.
-K key _file
Only the words listed in 'key _file' are cross-referenced. These
words must be listed one per line.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
c'
To find all occurrences of certain variables in the program II cycle, II type:
$ crefs cycle
CREFS can also be used in conjunction with other commands to produce more refined
results. For instance:
$ crefs cycle I tee cycle.all I fpat wheel spoke axle
> cycle.some
The output file II cycle. all II contains a list of all the symbols in the program, with
references to the line containing them. The output file II cycle.some ll contains only the
lines with references to the three variables named: wheel, spoke, and axle.
(\
\.__
Shell Commands
4-44
/
CRF (CREATE_FILE)
o
CRF (CREATE_FILE) -- Create a tile.
FORMAT
CRF pathname .••
CRF creates a zero-length file with the specified pathname. The new file receives its parent
directory's initial ACL for files. There is a maximum of 1300 files per directory.
(See the ACL command description for more information.) The file type is set to OBJECT and
the file is made permanent. The type UID is set to nil.
This command is most useful for system-level debugging. Use the Display Manager editing
capability to create normal text files.
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify file to be created. Multiple pathnames are permitted,
separated by blanks.
OPTIONS
o
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
o
o
4-45
Shell Commands
CRL (CREATE_LINK)
CRL (CREATE_LINK) -- Create a link.
FORMAT
CRL Iinkname object_name ••• [-R]
CRL is used to create links. Links normally serve two functions: as a shorthand way of
specifying objects with lengthy (and frequently recurring) pathnames and as static
pointers to other objects.
Links cause the Shell to redirect a pathname to another object. In effect, links allow you
to take a detour from one part of the naming tree to another.
ARGUMENTS
Iinkname
(required)
Specify the link's name and location.
object _ name
(required)
Specify the object to which the link points.
Multiple linkname/pathname pairs are permitted.
OPTIONS
-R
Replace an existing link.
object_name.
Use this option to change a link's
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ crl bugs /ma1ntenance/reports
Create a link called "bugs" in
the current working directory.
Now, when you use "bugs" in a pathname, the command Shell substitutes the text
II /maintenance/reports".
Therefore, the pathname:
bugs/sticky_cursor
refers to the same file as the pathname:
/maintenance/reports/sticky_cursor
Shell Commands
4-46
o
CRP (CREATE_A_PROCESS) -- Create a process on a remote node.
FORMAT
CRP [command line] -ON node_spec [options]
CRP creates a process on a remote node.
ARGUMENTS
command line
(optional)
o
Specify command line to be executed by the remote process. If
the command string contains embedded blanks, enclose it in
quotation marks.
Default if omitted: execute /COM/SH (the Shell)
OPTIONS
The following option, which specifies the remote node, is REQUffiED:
-ON node_spec
o
Specify the remote node on which the process is to be created.
See the section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more
information.
One of the following options may be specified (default option is indicated by a II(D)II):
-CP
o
o
(D)
Create a remote process running with standard streams
connected to the current window. Not valid if -CPO or -CPS is
specified. You may stop these processes by typing an EEF
(usually CTRL/Z) in the process input pad.
-NWP
Do not create a window pane legend indicating that the local
window is connected to a remote process. Use with -CP option
only.
-CPO
Create a remote process without a connection to the current
window, and an identity of 'user .none.none'. Not valid if -CP or
-OPS is specified. To stop these processes, you must first create
a visible remote process running the Shell, then issue the SIGP
command to stop the background process.
-CPS
Create a remote process without a connection to the current
window, and an identity of 'user.server.none'. Not valid if -CP
or -CPO is specified. To stop these processes, you must first
create a visible remote process running the Shell, then issue the
SIGP command to stop the background process.
-N name
Specify the name of the remote process. If this option is not
specified, the default is II user id.node _ id II. This allows remote
processes to be traced to their originator.
4-47
Shell Commands
-LOGIN name [password]
Specify the login sequence for the remote process on the
command line. If the password is omitted, the system prompts
you for it. A null (zero-length) password is specified by the null
string ".
c
Normally, -LOGIN appears with -CPo You may, however, use
-LOGIN with -CPO and -CPS as well. If -LOGIN is specified
with either -CPO or -CPS, then the identity of the created
process is the same as that of the caller's (as opposed to
'user.none.none' or 'user.server.none', respectively). This means
that -CPO and -CPS are identical if -LOGIN is also specified.
If you use -LOGIN with -CPO or -CPS, you must place both the
name and the password on the command line. No prompting is
available in this case.
-ME
-ME is typically specified instead of -LOGIN. If -:ME is
specified, then the created process on the remote node inherits
the caller's working directory, naming directory, home directory
text string and SID. In some sense, this is similar to popping up
another Shell except that the process is running on another node.
If -ME is specified with either -CPO or -CPS, then the identity
of the created process is also that of the caller's (as opposed to
'user.none.none' or 'user.server.none', respectively). This means
that -CPO and -CPS are identical if -ME is also specified.
-QUIET
Suppress connection/disconnection messages in the transcript
pad.
EXAMPLES
$ crp -on 532 -login joe
Create a process on node 532 running the
Shell. and log in with the user id "joe".
$ crp -on Oaef -me
Create a process on node AEF running the
Shell. and inherit the current process
state information.
Shell Commands
4-48
('
\.....
o
CRPAD
(CREATE _PAD) --
Create a transcript pad and window.
FORMAT
CRPAD [pathname] [options]
CRPAD creates a transcript pad, copies a file (or standard input) into that pad, and then
opens a window into the pad. This new pad is NOT related to the transcript pad
attached to processes running the Shell; it is for viewing file contents only. This is
primarily useful for displaying output being produced inside a pipeline without
interrupting the flow of control in the pipe.
Transcript pads are not editable. If you wish to place a file in a pad for editing, use the
key or the DM command CE (CREATE_EDIT).
o
CRPAD -IN behaves differently. This creates an edit pad and lets you create whatever
text you want. When you close the edit pad (with WC or CTRL/Y), that text is copied
to standard output.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify the file to be copied into the pad. Not valid if -IN is
present.
o
Default if omitted: copy standard input.
OPTIONS
-IN[PUT]
Copies data from a temporary edit window to standard output.
Not valid if -TEE or -PN are specified.
-PN pathname
Specify a pathname for the pad. If you specify a pathname, the
pad is saved in that file. Note that you can also save the pad
after it is created by using the DM command PN (PAD _NAME).
o
-TEE
Copy output to standard output in addition to the new pad.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ crpad test.data
Create a pad that displays
the file "test.data".
I crpad -tee I srf >phone.book.local
Display the intermediate results
in a pipeline.
2. $ fpat -p '256-' key,
since that key actually creates a new, separate process. Its Shell receives the default
search rules described below.
By default, the Shell looks for commands in this order:
1. Your working directory ("."), or the directory specified by the command's
pathname.
2. Your personal command directory, ........ COM (the COM subdirectory of your
naming directory).
3. The system command directory, ICOM.
Refer to The DOMAIN System User's Guide for a detailed discussion of command
search rules.
Specifying CSR without arguments or options displays the current command search rules.
ARGUMENTS
directory
(optional)
Specify new command search sequence. Multiple directory
pathnames are permitted; separate names with blanks. The
Shell will search the directories in the order that you specify.
Default if omitted: display current search rules unless -A is
specified.
OPTIONS
-A dir
name
Append the specified directory name(s) to the existing command
search sequence. This allows you to add a new directory to the
end of the list without retyping the entire list.
Multiple
directory pathnames are permitted; separate names with blanks.
EXAMPLES
Display current search rules.
1. $ csr
-com /com
.
C
/
Shell Commands
4-56
o
2. $ csr . -com //us/myproj/com /com
Set new search sequence by adding
an additional command directory.
3. $ csr -a -com/special_commands
Append the directory
-com/special_commands to the
current list of directory names.
o
o
o
o
4-57
Shell Commands
CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE)
CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE) -- Catalog a node in the network.
FORMAT
CTNODE [node_name [net.]node_id •••] [options]
CTNODE informs the local node that a remote node exists, thereby enabling network file
access to the remote node. The command catalogs the node _ name in the local copy of
the network root directory as the entry directory for the remote node. In other words,
CTNODE adds the directory / /node_name to your copy of the network root directory.
For information on deleting a node_name entry, see UCTNODE (UNCATALOG_NODE).
We assign a node ID to every node during the manufacturing process. To find out the
node ID of a node, type the following command at its keyboard:
$ lcnode -me
At SR9.0, CTNODE supports the ability to merge information from another node's
network root into your own, or any other node's network root. The merge options (-MD
and -MS) add the entry for a node to the target provided the entry does not already exist
and the source has exactly one entry for that node. In the case of one source and one
target entry for a node which match, those entries are assumed to be correct. All other
cases are considered to be ambiguous and the "confusion resolution protocol" is invoked.
This .. confusion resolution protocol" first attempts to verify the correct entry name with
the node itself. If the node is available, then the reply from the node is cataloged
regardle88 of whether -MD or -MS i8 u8ed. This is because an answer from the node
itself is assumed to be the truth.
If the node is unavailable to resolve an ambiguity, then the entry containing the most
recent UID (latest time stamp portion of the UID), is used. In this case, existing entries
in the target directory are only updated if the -MS option is used.
ARGUMENTS
node name
(optional)
Specify the name of the node you wish to catalog. If the
'[net.]node_id' argument is specified, then 'node_name' IS
required.
Default if omitted: must use -N, -UPDATE, or -FROM
[net.]node _ id
(optional)
Specify the hexadecimal ID (and optional network ID) of the
node you wish to catalog. The node must be connected to the
network when this command is executed. If the 'node name'
argument is specified, then 'node_id' or 'net.node_id' IS
required.
Default if omitted: must use -N, -UPDATE, or -FROM
I-~,
Multiple name/ID pairs are permitted.
Shell Command8
4-58
"-_.~/'
CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE)
o
OPTIONS
If neither -N, -UPDATE, or -FROM is specified, then the 'node_name' and
'[net.]node_id' arguments are required. The -N, -UPDATE, and merge options work
only for remote nodes running AEGIS SR5.0 or later. The '[net.]node_id' forms work
only when both the local and remote nodes run AEGIS SR9.0 or later.
-ROOT
Catalog 'node_name' as the entry directory name for
'node_id' in both the master network root directory and the
local copy of the network root directory. This option is valid
only if the 'node_name' and 'node_id' arguments are specified.
This option is not valid if the -N option is specified.
-N [net.]node_id •••
Copy the entry directory name from the network root directory
of the specified remote node, to the network root directory of the
local node. You do not need to know the entry directory name.
However, you must specify the node _ id or the net.node _ id of
the remote node. Multiple node_id's and net.node_id's may be
Use
this
option
instead
of
the
specified.
'node_name'/'[net.]node_id' argument pair. This option is not
valid if the -R option is specified.
o
-UPDATE
o
Obtain a list of nodes currently responding to a network inquiry
and perform the same operation as "-N" for each node. Names
are replaced with the most current version, if they already exist
in your local copy of the network root directory, and new names
are added.
-FROM / /node •••
o
Look in the specified list of network root directories for the
names to add to the target network root, or use this network
root as the source for names to merge into the target network
root. Wildcards may be used to specify source node names. The
-FROM option is not supported in a DOMAIN internet
enviroment.
-MD
Used with -FROM. Merges all names in the source network
root into the target network root. Preference is given to existing
names in the target if there are unresolved conflicts (see the
discussion of "confusion resolution protocol" above).
-MS
Same as -MD, except that preference is given to entries in the
source network root when there are unresolved conflicts (see the
discussion of "confusion resolution protocol" above).
-ON / /node •••
o
Catalog names in the network root of the specified nodes instead
of the local network root. Wildcards may be used to specify
target node names. The -ON option is not supported in a
DOMAIN internet enviroment.
-R
Replace cataloged names if they already exist. An error occurs
if you do not specify this option and try to add a node _ name
4-59
Shell Commands
CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE)
that has already
-UPDATE).
been
cataloged
(unless
you
are
using
-L
List node names as they are cataloged.
-IDUPL
Ignore entry (suppress error messages) if name already exists in
the target.
-LC
List invocations and resolutions of the "confusion resolution
protocol II •
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
1. $ ctnode os 21
Add the node whose 10 is 21 and whose entry
directory name is "os" to your node's catalog.
2. $ ctnode -update
Bring your node's catalog up to date with any
new nodes on the network.
,~
\-- ..•. /
3. $ ctnode os eve -from //master
Copy names "os" and neve" from the network
root on //master.
4. $ ctnode os 21 -on //a?*
Add node IO 21 with the name "OS" to
the network root of all nodes whose names
begin with "An.
5. $ ctnode -md -from //os
Merge network root of as into local network
root. resolving conflicts.
c
Shell Commands
4-60
CTOB (CATALOG _ OBJECT)
o
CTOB
(CATALOG_OBJECT) --
Catalog an object.
FORMAT
CTOB pathname uid_hi uid_low
CTOB assigns a pathname to an object that has a known unique identifier (UID). CTOB
catalogs the pathname and associated UID in the naming tree. This command is
primarily for system-level debugging.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(required)
uid_hi
(required)
uid_low
(required)
o
Specify assigned pathname.
Specify the high portion of the UID as a 32-bit hexadecimal
number.
Specify the low portion of the UID as a 32-bit hexadecimal
number.
OPTIONS
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
o
$ ctob lastfile 10AOBAAD 60000102
o
4-61
Shell Commands
CVT _REC _ UASC (CONVERT _RECORD _ UASC)
OVT _REO _ UASO (CONVERT _RECORD _ UASC) -- Convert file types.
FORMAT
CVT _REO _ UASC source_pathname [target_pathname] -OT type [options]
CVT _ REC _ VASe converts files from type II rec II, II hdru II, or H uasc II to files of type
II rec II , II hdru II , or "uasc".
It functions on nodes running software release 4.1 and later.
ARGUMENTS
source _pathname
(required)
target _pathname
(optional)
Specify the file to be converted.
Specify file to be created. An error occurs if this file already
exists (see -R below). The target_pathname may be derived. If
target is a directory, the source file is converted and placed in
that directory.
Default if omitted: the converted file becomes
'source _ pathname' and the original file is
renamed'source_pathname.CBAK'.
-OT type
(required)
Specify type of file to be created ('target_pathname'). Ohoose
one of the following for 'type': II rec II , "hdru II, or luasC."
Wildcards in pathnames associated with this command are permitted.
OPTIONS
-R
Replace 'target_pathname' if it already exists.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
c
Shell Command8
4-62
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ---..- - - - - - - - - . - -
CVT _REC _ VASC (CONVERT _RECORD _ VAS C)
o
EXAMPLES
1. $
ld -a
List current files in specified directory and their types.
Directory II /larry/cvt_rec_uasc_examples" :
sys
type
type
uid
file
file
file
rec
rec
rec
blocks
used
current
length
1
42
42
44
1
1
attr rights
P
P
P
name
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
a
b
c
3 entries, 3 blocks used.
o
o
2. $ cvt rec uasc 1* -ot uasc -nq
$ ld -a
Convert all files to type uasc;
suppress wildcard queries.
Directory II/larry/cvt_rec_uasc_examples
sys
type
type
uid
blocks
used
current
length
file
file
file
file
file
file
uasc
rec
uasc
rec
uasc
rec
1
1
37
42
38
42
40
44
1
1
1
1
ll
:
attr rights
P
P
P
P
P
P
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
name
a
a.cbak
b
b.cbak
c
c.cbak
6 entries, 6 blocks used.
3. $ cvt rec uasc [a-c] =.X -ot rec -nq
$ ld -a
o
Directory II /larry/cvt_rec_uasc_examples" :
sys
type
type
uid
blocks
used
current
length
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
uasc
rec
rec
uasc
rec
rec
uasc
rec
rec
1
1
37
42
42
38
42
42
40
44
44
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
attr rights
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
Convert files named II a" "b"
and "c" to type rec and write
them to "a.x" Ib.X" and IIC.X"
name
a
a.cbak
a.x
b
b.cbak
b.x
c
c.cbak
c.x
9 entries, 9 blocks used.
$
o
4-63
Shell Commands
DATE
DATE -- Display the current date and time.
FORMAT
DATE [options]
DATE prints the current system date and time. It requires no arguments or options. If
no options are specified, the date is displayed as shown in Example 1 below.
The hardware date and time may be set with the Shell command CALENDAR.
OPTIONS
-y
Display year as Y¥YY.
-MD
Display month and day as :MM/DD.
-T
Display time in 24-hour format (Illi::MM:SS).
-D
Display year, month, and day.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ date
Tuesday. June 9. 1981
2.
4:20:15 pm (EDT)
$ date -t
15:36:14
3.
$ date -d
1983/08/08
r",
I
\ .... ,.-
Shell Commands
4-64
./
--------------------------------------------
DCALC (DESK_ CALCULATOR)
DeALe (DESK_CALCULATOR) -- Evaluate logical and arithmetic expressions.
FORMAT
DeALe [-H] [pathname •••]
DCALC mimics the features of a desk calculator, evaluating both logical and arithmetic
expressions.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
o
Specify input file containing expressions to be evaluated, one
expression per line.
Default if omitted: read standard input; stop with CTRL/Z
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, all operations are decimal-based.
-H
o
Specify hexadecimal operations.
Expre88ion8
Input expressions can be simple arithmetic expressions or variable assignment expressions.
DCALC writes the value of each evaluated expression on standard output. Variables hold
temporary values, which DCALe does not automatically write.
Expressions may include any of the operators listed below (in order of precedence):
()
1.
+
unary plus and negation operators. These may only
appear at the start of an expression or within
parentheses.
2.
« »
logical left and right shift
3.
**
*
exponentiation
4.
C)
/
%
multiply, divide, modulo (remainder)
5.
+
add, subtract
6.
--
equal to
!=
not equal to
>
greater than
>=
greater than or equal to
4-65
Shell Command8
DCALC (DESK_ CALCULATOR)
<
less than
<=
less than or equal to
7.
unary logical not
8.
logical or
logical and
i;
logical xor
Relational operators return the value 1 for true and 0 for false. DCALC performs
operations in double precision floating point, except for logical operators listed as items 2
and 8 above, which use 32-bit integers.
Variable8
Expressions may include previously declared variables.
variable:
name
Use this format to declare a
= expression
• A variable name must begin with a letter and may consist of any combination of
letters and digits .
• DCALC does not automatically print replacement expressions, because they
usually contain temporary values.
Radix Control
You can change the default base for input or output using ibase (input base) and obase
(output base) statements. For example,
ibase
obase
=2
= 16
causes DCALC to interpret input in binary and print results in hexadecimal.
To set an individual number's radix, precede it with the desired radix and a pound sign.
For example,
16#100
specifies the hexadecimal number 100 (equals 256 in decimal).
Shell Command8
4-66
DCALC (DESK_ CALCULATOR)
o
EXAMPLES
Your input:
DCALC output:
1.
10 + (-64/2**4)
6
2.
temp
temp
3.
= 2#101
== 5
1 (true)
=
ibase
16
obase = 2
11 + 28
la
+
Of
111001
101001
(Note that when you type a hexadecimal number that begins with
a letter. you must precede it with a zero.)
o
4.
=
=
ibase
16
numa = 100
numb
100
numa + numb
512
o
o
o
4-67
Shell Commands
DEBUG
DEBUG -- Invoke the Language Level Debugger.
FORMAT
DEBUG [options] {-PROC process_name
I target
[args ••.]}
The Language Level Debugger (DEBUG) lets you debug programs written in Pascal,
FORTRAN, or C. The DOMAIN Language Level Debugger Reference manual details the
debugger. After you've invoked it, you can enter DEBUG's 'HELP' command to read
other help files that explain how to operate the debugger.
Preparing a File for Debugging
In order to use DEBUG to debug a program, you must have compiled your source code
with the correct compiler option. Each compiler supports four command options (-DB,
-DBA, -DBS, or -NDB) that affect DEBUG's access to a program.
-DB, the default, gives you limited access to the debugger. -DBA and -DBS both give you
full access to the debugger. With -DBA, the compiler removes any optimizations which
might interfere with debugging. With -DBS, the compiler allows any optimizations
specified by the -OPT option. If you compile with -NDB, you cannot debug the file.
c
Invoking the Debugger
To invoke DEBUG, enter a command having one of the following two formats:
$ DEBUG debug_options target [args ... ]
or
$ DEBUG debug_options -PROe process_name
The necessary arguments and options are described below. By default, the window from
which you invoke DEBUG is divided into three windowpanes. One windowpane will
contain all I/O for the program you are debugging. Another windowpane will contain all
the DEBUG commands you enter and all the responses from DEBUG. A third
windowpane will display the source code of the program you are debugging.
ARGUMENTS
One of the following two arguments is required on the command line.
target [args ••• ]
(optional)
Specify the pathname of the file containing the program you
wish to debug, plus any arguments which that program may
require.
-PROC process_name
(optional)
Perform explicit cross-process debugging. This primes DEBUG
to watch for target invocation in an already-existing process
(specified by 'process_name'). After you invoke DEBUG with
this option, it will watch the given process for the invocation of
a program. When the invocation of the target program occurs,
Shell Commands
4-68
c
DEBUG
o
DEBUG will wake up and take control of the target program,
and give you the regular DEBUG access to it. You cannot debug
an already running program, or a process which is already the
target of another debugger.
This feature is especially useful when the normal invocation of
DEBUG and a target perturbs the environment enough to make
a bug disappear. In this case, creating a new process for DEBUG
and directing it to watch the old process will help ensure that the
target runs in the same environment as when it runs alone.
Cross-process debugging is also helpful for programs which
perform graphics or in some way alter or control the window(s)
of the process in which they run, thus making normal,
within-process debugging impossible.
OPTIONS
o
Note that all DEBUG options MUST PRECEDE the pathname of the target program.
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
-NC
Prevent DEBUG from copying the target object file. Instead,
DEBUG maps the object file so that you can write breakpoints
directly into the object file.
-R[EAD] pathname
Invoke a DEBUG command file with the specified pathname.
This option may appear only once on the command line.
o
o
Set debug variable prior to invoking the target program.
'arg_string' is the body of a valid Set command. The string
must be quoted if it contains spaces, so that the command line
parser sees it as one argument. See Example 2 below. If you
submit a -SET option which does not have an assignment
operator (=, :=) in 'arg_sring', the Set command will be
interactive as it is during normal DEBUG operation.
-WPn
Specify size of DEBUG windowpane from 10% to 90%. 'n' may
equal 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90. Default if omitted:
DEBUG creates a windowpane in the top 50% of the window.
-NWP
Do not create DEBUG windowpanes. Instead, DEBUG will
perform input and output operations using the error input and
error output streams in your transcript pad.
-SRC
-SRC T
-SRC R
o
(D)
These options cause DEBUG to display the source file(s) which
were used to make the target program being debugged. The
-SRC option lets DEBUG choose where the source will be
displayed. The -SRC _ T option makes DEBUG put the source
at the top of the window; the -SRC _ R option makes DEBUG
put the source on the right-hand side of the window.
4-69
Shell Commands
DEBUG
-NSRC
Suppress creation of a source-display windowpane.
-SDIR pathname
This option provides alternative directory pathnames for finding
the source file(s), when one of the -SRC options is used. It may
be given any number of times on the command line. The
working directory is always checked and hence need not be
specified.
-GLOB
-SMAP
Enable DEBUG to enter routines in global address space.
Print a brief section map of the target program loading
operation.
DEBUG Startup Files
When you invoke DEBUG it looks in your login home directory for a file named
ll
II user _ data/startup _ debug •
If it finds the file DEBUG processes its contents as a
sequence of DEBUG commands. DEBUG then looks in the working directory for a file
named II startup _ debug II and similary processes it. No error occurs if one or both files are
not found. Startup file processing preceeds processing of a file given in a -READ option.
Saving a DEBUG Session
To save your dialog with DEBUG, use the Display Manager's command "PN" to name the
debugger's transcript pad anytime before you issue the debugger's quit command. See the
PN command description for more information.
EXAMPLES
1. $ debug my_prog
Tells the debugger to debug the file
named my_prog.
2. $ debug -read sl my_prog
Invokes the debugger for a debugging
session with file my_prog. and starts
the session by executing the commands
stored in file sl.
3. $ debug -src -set "'max_array_dim
c
= 8"
my_prog
Sets the 'MAX ARRAY DIM variable as
you invoke DEBUG; allows DEBUG to
select the most appropriate type of
source display.
c
Shell Commands
4-70
DLDUPL (DELETE_DUPLICATE_LINES)
o
DLDUPL (DELETE_DUPLICATE_LINES) -- Strip repeated lines from a file.
FORMAT
DLDUPL [-0] [pathname •••]
DLDUPL reads the input file(s), comparing adjacent lines. Second and succeeding copies
of repeated lines are removed; the remaining lines are written to standard output.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
o
Specify input file.
names with blanks.
Multiple file names permitted; separate
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
-0
Write number of occurrences of each line to standard output.
EXAMPLES
o
Suppose you have two dictionary files. To create one dictionary file containing the words
from both, use:
$ srf -m diet1 diet2 I dldupl >diet.new
This merges the words from the two files (SRF -M), then deletes any duplicate words and
saves the result in the new dictionary.
o
o
4-71
Shell Commands
DLF (DELETE_FILE)
DLF (DELETE_FILE) -- Delete one or more tiles.
FORMAT
DLF [pathname .•.] [options]
DLF deletes the file(s) specified.
To delete objects other than files, see DLL
(DELETE_LINK) and DLT (DELETE_TREE).
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file to be deleted. Multiple names and wildcarding are
permitted; separate names with blanks.
Default if omitted: read names from standard input
OPTIONS
-F
-L
-DU
Force file deletion if you have owner rights, even if you don't
have delete rights.
List names of deleted files.
Delete when unlocked. If the object to be deleted is locked when
DLF is invoked, the delete operation will be performed when the
object is unlocked.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ dlf mary.bak -L
(file) "mary.bak" deleted.
Shell Commands
4-72
c
DLL (DELETE_LINK)
o
DLL (DELETE_LINK) -- Delete a link.
FORMAT
DLL pathname ••• [options]
DLL deletes a link. After execution of this command, the link is no longer available for
use.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
o
Specify pathname of the link to be deleted. Multiple pathnames
and wildcarding are permitted; separate names with blanks.
OPTIONS
-L
List name(s) of link(s) as deleted.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
o
EXAMPLES
$ dll bugs
$
Delete the link "bugs" from the
current working directory_
o
o
4-73
Shell Commands
DLT (DELETE_ TREE)
DLT
(DELETE_TREE) --
-",
C
Delete a tree.
.-....• /
FORMAT
DLT pathname •.• [options]
DL T deletes the directory named by the pathname, and all its descendants in the naming
tree.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify directory or link to be deleted. If ··pathname ll is a
directory, DLT deletes the directory and all subordinate objects
(subdirectories, files, and links). If a link, DLT deletes the link
name, but has no effect on the files and directories named by the
link. Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
OPTIONS
-L
List files, links, and directories as they are deleted.
-LD
List directories as they are deleted.
-LF
List files as they are deleted.
-LL
List links as they are deleted.
-F
Force object deletion if you have owner rights, even if you don't
have delete rights.
-DU
Delete when unlocked. If the object to be deleted is locked when
DL T is invoked, the delete operation will be performed when the
object is unlocked.
-PR pathname
Preserve specified pathnames.
-LD, -LF, amd -LL may be combined to create the type of listing you desire.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
Delete the two directory trees
specified.
Shell Commands
4-74
c
__._--_._-----------------------------
.
----------
------------------_._---------------------
DL TY (DELETE _ TYPE)
o
DLTY (DELETE_TYPE) -- Derete a type.
FORMAT
DLTY type_name [options]
DLTY deletes a type and any installed type manager.
ARGUMENTS
type_name
(required)
o
Specify the name of the type to be deleted.
OPTIONS
- N node _ spec
Specify the node on which the type is to be deleted. See the
section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
You may also specify the entry directory of a volume mounted
for software updates, as shown in the example below. If this
option is omitted, the type is deleted on the current node.
List the type name/type identifier pair that is deleted.
-L
o
EXAMPLES
$ dlty example_type -1
example_type " 24BF9F41.100001FB deleted.
II
$ dlty example_type -n //test_vol -1
example_type 24BFA6F8.200001FB deleted from volume //test_vol.
II
o
II
In the following example, the disk has been mounted for software updates. The disk's top
level directory (catalogued as '/mount _ disk' by the MTVOL command) must contain a
"sys" directory. If it does not, you will get a "types file not found" error.
$ mtvol w /mount disk
$ dlty example type -n /mount_disk -1
II example_type II
24BFB71E.200001FB deleted from volume //my_node/mount_disk.
o
4-75
Shell Commands
DLVAR (DELETE _ VARIABLE)
DLV AR (DELETE_VARIABLE) -- Deletes all of the specified variables.
FORMAT
DLV AR var
name •••
The DLVAR command deletes the variable(s) specified. If a variable had another value
at a higher level of invocation, the variable is restored to that value.
ARGUMENTS
var name •••
(required)
Shell Commands
Specify the variable name to be deleted.
permitted, separated by blanks.
4-76
Multiple names are
-----------------------------
.-
...
_--
------_._---------------
DMTVOL (DISMOUNT _ VOLUME)
o
DMTVOL (DISMOUNT_VOLUME) -- Dismount a logical volume.
FORMAT
DMTVOL device[unit] [log_vol_number] [pathname] [options]
DMTVOL dismounts a logical volume that was previously mounted with the MTVOL
(MOUNT _ VOLUME) command. After the volume has been dismounted, it is unavailable for
further access.
ARGUMENTS
o
device
(required)
unit
(optional)
Specify the type of disk on which the volume resides: "W" for
a Winchester disk, "S" for a storage module, or "F" for a floppy
disk.
Specify a unit number (0 or 1 only) for the device, if necessary.
For example, ISI" denotes storage module unit 1.
Default if omitted: 0 (zero)
o
log_ vol_number
(optional)
Default if omitted: 1
pathname
(optional)
o
Specify the number of the logical volume to be dismounted.
Specify the entry directory of the logical volume. If you include
this argument, DMTVOL dismounts the volume and uncatalogs
its entry directory. If you omit it, DMTVOL dismounts the
logical volume, but retains its name in the naming tree.
Default if omitted: see above
OPTIONS
-FU
Forcibly unlock any locked objects, then dismount the volume.
If you omit this option, the dismount fails if the volume contains
any locked objects.
-NW
No write -- Prevents DMTVOL from trying to write to the
disk during the dismount. Normally, writing to the disk saves
current information. However, if the disk was removed prior to
dismount, this option should be used.
o
4-77
Shell Commands
DMTVOL (DISMOUNT _ VOLUME)
EXAMPLES
1. $ dmtvol s 2
$
2. $ dmtvol f /floppy
$
Shell Oommands
Dismount storage module unit zero,
logical volume 2, and leave its name in
the naming tree.
Dismount floppy unit zero, logical volume 1,
and delete its name from the naming tree.
4-78
DSPST (DISPLAY_PROCESS _ STATUS)
o
DSPST (DISPLAY _PROCESS_STATUS) -- Display process status graphically.
FORMAT
DSPST [options]
DSPST displays process statistics in a graphical, bar-chart fashion within the current
process window. The chart is updated periodically (see -R below). The default action of
this command is to display the brief OS process list, all user processes and all I/O
information in a font size automatically selected based on window size.
While DSPST is running, the following keys are interpreted as follows:
All keyboards:
o
Move to top
Move to bottom
Exit
Exit
Exit and save current image
880 keyboard only:
Boxed up arrow
Boxed down arrow
o
F2
F3
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
forward 1/2 window
backward 1/2 window
backward 1 line
forward 1 line
Low-profile keyboard only:
Boxed up arrow
Boxed down arrow
Shifted up arrow
Shifted down arrow
EXIT or ABORT
SAVE
o
Scroll backward 1/2 window
Scroll forward 1/2 window
Scroll backward 1 line
Scroll forward 1 line
Exit
Exit and save current image
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
Specify that the display should be repeatedly updated every 'n'
seconds. If this option is omitted, the display is updated every 4
seconds.
-Rn
-P
Show process information.
-Ll
Show OS and user process information.
-OS
o
-M
(D)
Show brief OS and full user process information.
Show missing CPU time in addition.
4-79
Shell Commands
DSPST (DISPLAY _PROCESS_STATUS)
-10
(D)
-A
Show I/0 statistics.
Show all information (same as -Ll -10 -M).
- N node _ spec
Specify remote node whose process statistics are to be listed. See
the section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more
information.
-LARGE
-SMALL
(D)
Force use of large font for display.
Force use of small font for display.
EXAMPLES
as.
$ dspst
Display
$ dspst -n //fred -large
Display as. user process. and I/O status for
the node named //fred using the large font.
user process. and I/O status.
c
c
Shell Commands
4-80
ED (EDIT)
o
ED (EDIT) -- Invoke line editor.
FORMAT
ED [-N] [pathname]
ED invokes the line editor. Input text and editing commands are read from standard
input. While you may use ED to create text files interactively, it is better suited for use
in programs and scripts. Use the key or the DM command, OE, to create and
edit files interactively.
NOTE:
o
There is a homonymous DM command: ED -- Delete character preceding cursor.
See the ED command description in the DM chapter for details.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file to be edited. ED reads the file into a buffer for
editing and remembers its name for future use. ED operates on
the buffer cOPYi changes made there have no effect on the
original file until you issue a W (write) command from within
ED. Files are limited to 6400 lines.
If the 'pathname' argument is omitted, the edit buffer is empty
and no file name is remembered for future use. You will have to
specify an explicit file name when you exit the editor.
o
Default if omitted: see above
OPTIONS
-N
o
Suppress the printing of line counts by the E (edit), R (read),
and W (write) commands.
SUMMARY OF ED COMMANDS
Oommands to ED have a consistent format: zero, one, or two line addresses followed by a
single-character command, with optional parameters following the command. The general
format is:
[line.] [line] command parameters
The [line] specifies a line number or address in the current edit buffer. There is usually a
useful default for each command (normally the current line) so that you don't need to
specify an address explicitly.
Refer to the ED description in the DOMAIN System Utilities manual for detailed
explanations of individual ED commands.
o
4-81
Shell Oommands
ED (EDIT)
Addresses:
a decimal number
the current line
the last line of the file
search forward for line containing pat
search backward for line containing pat
n lines forward from line
n lines backward from line
17
$
/pat/
\pat\
line+n
line-n
Defaults:
use
use
use
use
(.)
(. +1)
(.
)
..
(1.$)
current line
the next line
current line for both line numbers
all lines
Commands:
(.)
A
(. .. n) Bn
(. •. )
C
(. •. )
D
E file
F
F file
I
(.)
( ... )
(.
)
(.
)
P
(.)
(.
)
R [file]
S/pat/new/GP
(1.$)
W [file]
(.)
( .+1)
(1.$)
=[p]
(1.$)
X/pat/command
..
..
Kline
Mline
Q
..
G/pat/command
# .,.
$n
Append text after line (text follows)
Browse over the next n lines (default n is 22) .
If n is negative. print last n lines before
current line. If 'B.' is specified. print n
lines with current line in center of screen.
Change text (text follows)
Delete text
Discard current text. enter file. remember
filename
Print filename
Remember filename
Insert text before line (text follows)
Copy text to new line after specified line
Move text to line after specified line
Print text (can be appended to other commands)
Quit
Read file. appending after current line
Substitute new for leftmost pat (G implies all
occurrences)
Write file. leave current text unaltered (if
no file is specified. write to current filename)
Print line number. current line
Print next line
Execute command on lines containing pat
(except A. C. I. Q commands)
Execute command on lines not containing pat
(except A. C. I. Q commands)
Comment
Read or write temporary buffer. "n".
c
The error message II?II is printed whenever a command fails or is not understood.
LIMITATIONS
o
Files being edited can contain up to 6400 lines.
o
When a global search and substitute combination fails, the entire global search
stops.
o
Problems sometimes occur when removing or inserting NEWLINE characters
(via @n), especially in global commands.
Shell Commands
4-82
c
EDACCT (EDIT _ACCT _FILE)
o
EDACCT (EDIT _ACCT _FILE) -- Create, edit, or list accounts.
FORMAT
EDACCT [options]
EDACCT is used to define accounts in the network registry. Valid person, project, and
organization names must have been previously defined with EDPPO.
While all of the EDACCT options are described below, it is unlikely that you will be able
to manipulate the network registry unless you are the network administrator for your
network. The registry is protected by ACL restrictions. However, you will be able to list
registry entries.
o
For complete information on the use of network administration commands such as
EDACCT, see Administering Your DOMAIN System.
OPTIONS
At least one of the following options must be specified; however, you may only include one
-A, -D, -C, or -L option per command·line. If the command line does NOT include -A, -D,
-C, or -L, EDACCT enters an interactive editing session and accepts commands from
standard input.
See the "EDACCT COJvTh.1ANDS" section below.
o
o
-R pathname
Specify pathname of registry you want to use. You should only
use this option w:ith -LOC (described below) to manipulate a
remote node's local registry. If you want to manipulate the
master registry, omit this option and let EDACCT use the
network registry file copy (' /registry /registry') on the current
node to locate the master registry.
- A pers proj org homedir password
Add a new account with the person, project, organization, log in
home directory, and password indicated. You must specify all
fields; you can use "None" to specify proj and/or org. A space
between two quotation marks specifies a blank password. This
option is not valid for local registries.
- D pers proj org
Delete the account with the person, project, and organization
names indicated. You must specify all fields. This option is not
valid for local registries.
-C pers proj org [-p passw] [-h homedir]
Change the password and/or the login home directory for the
account named. A space between two quotes may be used to
specify a blank password. This option is not valid for local
registries.
o
-L [pers [proj [org]]]
List specified entries. All entries for a particular category are
listed if you omit that portion of the account specification. You
4-83
Shell Commands
EDAOdT (EDIT _AOOT _FILE)
may also use "%" in any of the fields to match all entries in
that field. If you indicate no accounts by name, all accounts are
listed.
-LOC
Use the registry' /registry /local_registry' on the node given by
the -R option or this node. You may specify only the node name
U/node) for II pathname" on -R in this case. If you specify -LOO,
the only valid operation is to list entries (-L).
-NP
Suppress prompts for interactive editing.
EXAMPLES
$ edacct -loc -1
paul
joe
csa
rjm
zoo
flip
user
mfg
none
none
mktg
cage
none
none
List entries in the local account file.
Note that two have expired.
none
r d
none
pay
feed
wilt
none
30
1FB
30
B8
1FB
83/03/12.12:16
83/03/15.08:28
83/03/15.08:32
83/03/15.09:50
83/03/14.20:53
124 83/03/09.18:46
~O 83/03/14.19:22
exp:83/03/12
exp:83/03/15
exp:83/03/15
exp:83/03/15
exp:83/03/14
exp:83/03/09
exp:83/03/14
//pj/paUl
//bye/joe
//my/csa
//slash/rjm
*INVALID* lIme
//go/flip
*INVALID* /
EDACCT COMMANDS
The following interactive editing commands may be entered from standard input if you do
not include -A, -D, -0, or -L on the EDACOT command line. In all cases, periods may be
used instead of blanks to separate person, project, and organization identifiers.
a [pers [proj [org [homedir [password]]]]]
Add a new account. The account is added AFTER the current account (last one
listed) unless you have positioned to the top (t). You will be prompted for any
fields omitted. Press to assign the default, if appropriate. A
space between two quotes may be used to specify a blank password.
d [pers [proj [org]]]
Delete one or more accounts. If no fields are given, only the current entry (last
one listed) is deleted. % may be specified for wildcard match, in which case all
matching entries (from the top) are deleted. If proj and/or org are omitted, %
is assumed for them. Verification of each deletion is requested. The last deleted
entry is saved and may be moved to a different place using 'i'.
Insert the last deleted entry at the current location (after the current entry or at
the top).
t
Move to the top of the file, before the first entry.
b
Move to the bottom of the file) at the last entry.
n [[-]number]
Move up (-) or down "number" entries. For example, "n 2" moves down two
entries, while lin -4" moves up four entries. If "number" is omitted, the default
is 1.
Shell Commands
4-84
c'
EDACCT (EDIT _ACCT _FILE)
o
c [pers [proj [org]]]
Change one or more entries. If no arguments are specified, only the current
entry is changed. % specifies wildcard match. If proj and/or org are omitted, %
is assumed for them. If arguments are given, the search begins at the top of the
file. Wildcarded fields are not eligible for changing. You will be prompted for
each new field in order. Press to keep a field unchanged.
1 [pers [proj [org]]]
List the current entry (if no arguments are specified) or the first matching entry,
starting at the top. % may be used to specify wildcard match.
la [pers [proj [org]]]
List all matching entries, starting at the top.
wildcard match.
o
o
% may be used to specify
In [pers [proj [org]]]
List the next matching entry, starting at the current entry. If no arguments are
given, the previous name specification is used.
lc
List all the changed or new entries.
11
List the locality of the current entry, displaying the preceding and succeeding
five entries.
wr
Update the file with all changes and exit.
q
Quit without updating.
h [comm]
Help - list briefly all the available commands or a particular command in
detail.
o
o
4-85
Shell Commands
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
EDAOL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL_LIST) -- Edit or list an AOL.
FORMAT
EDAOL [commands] [options] pathname •••
Every directory and file has an associated access control list (ACL) that lists users and
their rights to the object. EDACL edits or displays the ACL of the object(s) specified.
The structure and usage of an ACL is described in detail in the DOMAIN System User's
Guide.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
commands
(optional)
Specify the object whose ACL you wish to edit or display.
Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
c'
Specify the action(s) described below. If you do not specify a
command, EDACL enters an interactive editing mode.
Default if omitted: read commands from standard input; do not
precede commands with a hyphen (-) in this
mode.
COMMANDS
Many of the commands described below take arguments called 'sid' and 'rights'. These are
summarized in the sections preceeding the EXAMPLES.
-L
List ACL entries.
- A sid rights
Add the specified entry to an ACL. You will receive an error
message if the ACL entry exists.
- AF sid rights
Add force. Add the specified entry to an ACL. You will not
receive an error message if the ACL entry exists.
C
-~
_.-'
"
- AR sid rights
Add the specified rights to an ACL. You will receive an error
message if the entry does not exist.
-0 sid rights
Change the access rights in the entry for 'sid' (replaces current
rights). You will receive an error message if the entry does not
exist.
-OF sid rights
Change force. Change the access rights in the entry for 'sid'
(replaces current rights). You will not receive an error message
if the entry does not exist.
-D sid
Delete the ACL entry for 'sid' . You will receive an error
message if the entry does not exist. If 'sid' is '%.%.%.%', then
Shell Commands
4-86
c'
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS_ CONTROL_LIST)
o
EDACL will leave the entry with'S' and 'E' rights to maintain
DOMIAN/IX compatibility.
-DF sid rights
Delete force. Delete the specified rights from the entry for 'sid'.
You will not receive an error message if the ACL entry does not
exist.
- DR sid rights
Delete the specified rights from the entry for 'sid'.
receive an error message if the entry does not exist.
-CDN node
Change the default node ID.
-CN sid node
Change the node ID entry in 'sid'.
-Q
o
o
You will
Quit without changing the object's ACL. This command is
useful only when you supply EDACL commands interactively
(see -I). To signal successful completion and update the ACL, use
EOF in standard input (usually ).
-I
EDACL interprets commands as you enter them. This is the
default when you have not redirected standard input. You may
only specify one pathname (with no wildcards) in this mode.
EDACL changes a copy of the ACL; the command does not
assign a new ACL to an object until it reads an EOF. Thus,
EDACL -I does not change an ACL if you terminate the session
with the II Q II command.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
SIDS
An SID (subject identifier) is the mechanism used to identify people to the system when
they log in. Basically, an SID has three parts: a person name (P), project name (P), and
organization name (0); the combination is often abbreviated to 'PPO'. In some cases, the
node on which the subject is running is of importance as well. Thus, a full SID also contains
this item of information, in which case it is a 'PPON'; but most of the time PPO is all that
is of concern.
SIDs consist of the P,P, and 0 seperated by periods. Thus
joe.sftwr.r _ d
might be the name of a software programmer in the R&D organization. His person name
is 'joe'; his project name is 'sftwr'; his organization name is 'r _ d'.
If the node ID is required then a PPON for the above example might look like:
joe.sftwr.r _ d.14C
where '14C' is the node ID of the node where 'joe' is logged in.
In ACLs, SIDs may contain one or more wildcards, similar in concept to wildcards used
with pathnames. A '%' in the person, project, organization, or node id part of a SID will
match any person, project, organization, or node (respectively). Thus
joe.%.%.%
Shell Commands
4-88
c
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
o
would match user 'joe' regardless of his project or organization names, and regardless of
which node he happened to be using.
RIGHTS
The following are the basic kinds of operations that can be performed on objects, and the
rights which allow them when present in an ACL entry.
for all objects:
p
protect rights; allows rights to be changed
g
grant rights; allows creation of new entries
with a subset of creator's rights
n
change node list rights; allows CD. CN commands
for files:
d
o
o
w
r
x
delete rights; allows file to be deleted
write rights; allows file to be written
read rights; allows file to be read
execute rights
for directories:
d
delete rights; allows directory to be deleted
c
change rights; allows names to be changed.
and links to be deleted
a
append rights; allows names to be added to directory
I
link rights; allows links to be added to directory
r
read rights; allows directory to be listed
s
search rights; allows directory to be searched for
subordinate objects (for DOMAIN/IX)
e
expunge rights; allows subordinate objects to be
deleted provided delete rights are also available
for the subordinate object (for DOMAIN/IX)
The following abbreviations exist for sets of rights: (Note, that search and expunge rights
are always set.)
0
-OWNER
-USER
-READ
-EXEC
-LDIR
-ADIR
-NONE
0
Gives all rights.
For files. it means:
pgndwrx
For directories:
pgndcalrse
Gives all rights except ability to change ACL.
For files. it means:
dwrx
For directories:
dcalrse
For files. allows reading; can't change ACL.
Precisely. it means:
r
For files. allows reading. execution; can't change ACL.
Precisely. it means:
rx
For directories. allows listing; can't change ACL.
Precisely. it means:
rse
For directories. allows adding names and links.
and listing; can't change ACL.
Precislely. it means:
alrse
Gives no rights. for files or directories.
Used to explicitly deny rights to specific
SIDs that would otherwise be granted righs
because they are members of a project or
organization.
For directories it means: se (unless -UNIX was
4-89
Shell Commands
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
specified when EDACL was invoked, in which
case all rights are revoked.)
EXAMPLES
(The DOMAIN SY8tem U8er'8 Guide also provides detailed examples of applying and
manipulating ACLs.)
1. The order of the commands in the following sequence is significant.
$ edacl -L sales
%.%.%.%
pgndwrx
List ACL for the file 'sales'. The
ppon is all wildcards (%.%.%.%), so
all users have complete rights
(pgndwrx) to 'sales'.
$
$ edacl sales -cf dan.%
$ edacl -L sales
DAN.~.%.~
------%.%.%.%
pgndwrx
$
-none
$ edacl sales -a joe -owner
$ edacl -L sales
joe.%.%.%
dan.%.%.~
%.%.%.%
Deny user DAN access to 'sales'.
Other users still have all rights.
Note that the system automatically
places specific entries before
general ones.
Add user JOE to the ACL for 'sales'
with all rights.
pgndwrx
------pgndwrx
$
$ edacl sales -a %.%.mktg wrx
$ edacl -L sales
joe.%.%.%
pgndwrx
dan.%.%.%.
-------
%.%.mktg.%
%.%.%.%
----wrx
pgndwrx
Allow users in the MKTG organization
to change file contents, but do not
let them assign rights to others (p
and g), change the node ID entry (n).
or delete the file (d).
$
$ edacl sales -c % r
$ edacl -L sales
joe.%.%.%
pgndwrx
dan.%.%.%
-------
%.%.mktg.%
%.%.%.%
----wrx
----r--
Change everyone else's access to read
only. Note that the more liberal
rights (wrx) assigned to the MKTG
organization in the previous line
still apply. since specific entries
override general ones.
$
Shell Commands
4-90
EDACL (EDIT _ACCESS _ CONTROL _LIST)
o
2. The following examples illustrate the effect of the -UNIX option.
$ edacl d1r
d1r
*1
%.%.%.%
* a j 1m -none .
pgndcalrse
--------se
j1m.%.%.%
a ers -r
ers.%.%.%
*
*
-------rse
1
--------se
-------rse
pgndcalrse
j1m.%.%.%
ers.%.%.%
%.%.%.%
Now specify -UNIX
o
$ edacl dir -unix
dir
*1
%.%.%.%
* a jim -none
jim.%.%.%
* a ers -r
pgndcalrse
-------r--
ers.%.%.%
*
o
1
rees.%.%.%
ers.%.%.%
%.%.%.%
-------r-pgndcalrse
3. Set the initial file ACL for the directory //test/tmp/dir to be dynamic.
$ edacl //test/tmpd1r -if -dyn
o
o
4-91
Shell Commands
EDFONT
EDFONT -- Edit a character font.
FORMAT
EDFONT [pathname [char]]
EDFONT is an interactive, menu-driven program that allows you to create, edit and view
character font files. For a detailed explanation on editing a character font, see the
EDFONT description in the DOMAIN System Utilities manual.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify the name of the font file to be edited.
Default if omitted: EDFONT prompts for the pathname.
char
(optional)
Specify the first character to be edited. This argument is valid
only if the 'pathname' argument has been specified.
Default if omitted: begin editing session with character 'g'.
c
Shell Commands
4-92
EDIP (EDIT _ IP _ HELPER)
o
EDIP (EDIT _IP _HELPER) -- Invoke editor for IP _HELPER.
FORMAT
EDIP [[net.]node_id]
EDIP allows you to inspect and modify the IP _HELPER's directory of DOMAIN node
names, Internet Protocol addresses, DOMAIN addresses, and the IP _HELPER's replica
list. Once invoked, EDIP enters an interactive mode and accepts the commands
described below.
ARGUMENTS
o
[net.]node_id
(optional)
Set the default IP HELPER to the IP
specified by this identifier.
HELPER at the node
COMMAND SUMMARY
Some EDIP commands use node specifications and DOMAIN internet addresses as
arguments. If a command accepts a node specification, the syntax line uses the term
'node_spec'. If a command accepts a DOMAIN internet address, the syntax line uses the
term '[net.]node_id'.
o
o
When a command accepts a node specification, you can provide a node name (if the name is
cataloged in the default IP _HELPER database) or you can provide a DOMAIN internet
address. When a command accepts a DOMAIN internet address, you must specify a node
ID, and in some cases, a DOMAIN network number.
Note that the rules for specifying DOMAIN internet addresses in EDIP commands differ
slightly from the rules for specifying DOMAIN internet addresses in Shell commands. If the
node is on the local ring, the network number is optional. If the node is on a remote ring,
the network number is required. When you issue EDIP commands from a node in a
network that has a non-zero network number, you cannot specify the number 0 to indicate
the local ring.
When you specify a DOMAIN internet address in an EDIP command, the DOMAIN internet
address must begin with an integer. If the address begins with a letter, precede the address
with a 0 (e.g. OD34.1E05).
o
4-93
Shell Commands
EDIP (EDIT _ IP _HELPER)
FUNCTION
SYNTAX
C
-~
...... ~".
(abbreviation shown
in UPPER case)
Default options are indicated by "(D)".
ADD name -IP Internet Protocol address
-DA [net.]node_idAdds a DOMAIN node name, its Internet
Protocol(IP) address, and its DOMAIN address
to the default IP_HELPER's copy of the
directory. The IP address must be
entered as 4 decimal digits each separated
by a period ".". The DOMAIN address net and
nodeid must be entered as hexidecimal digits
separated by a period ".". The DOMAIN
address or the IP address may be omitted.
IP_HELPER propagates the new information
to all IP_HELPERs in its replica list.
If the node name or its IP address
already exists in IP_HELFER's database,
EDIP does not add the entry and displays
an error message.
ADDRep node_spec
Adds a replica to the default IP HELPER's
replica list. The IP_HELPER propagates
the new replica's identity to all
IP_HELPERsin its replica list.
The IP HELPER accepts a new replica only
if the entry does not already exist in
the replica list. If an entry already
exists, then the IP HELPER does not
accept the entry and EDIP displays an
error message.
Changes the DOMAIN address of the replica
old_node_spec to new_node_spec in the
default IP_HELPER's replica list; only
the DOMAIN net number may be changed. The
IP_HELPER propagates the change to all
IP_HELPERs in its replica list, including
the replica whose address changed.
CM? [node specA] node specB
[=LAI-ND]
Shell Commands
-
Compares two IP_HELPER directories and lists
entries that appear in both directories. The
CM? command shows names and Internet Protocol
addresses that appear in both copies of the
IP_HELPER directory. If you do not provide
a value for node_specA, then EDIP uses the
default IP HELPER database.
c
_._---------_._-_.- - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EDIP (EDIT _ IP _ HELPER)
o
-ND
(D)
-LA
o
Do not list entries that are exact
duplicates. Only list cases where a name
or Internet Protocol address is associated
with diferent entry information in the two
directories.
List all names and Internet Protocol
addresses that appear in both directories.
DELete name
Deletes a node name from the default
IP_HELPER's copy of the directory.
The IP_HELPER propagates the delete request
to all IP_HELPERS in its replica list.
If the name you specify does not exist.
EDIP returns an error message and does not
accept or propagate the DELETE request.
DELRep node_spec
Deletes an IP HELPER from the default
IP_HELPER's replica list. The IP_HELPER
propagates the delete request to all
IP_HELPERs in its replica list. thereby
removing the replica from all other
replica lists. In addition. DELRep causes
the deleted replica to delete its database.
The deleted replica stops running after
its propagation list has been emptied.
o
If the replica you specify with the DELRep
command does not exist in the IP HELPER's
replica list. EDIP returns an error and
does not accept or propagate the DELRep
request.
It is best to wait at least fifteen minutes
before restarting a deleted replica.
o
DIFF [node_specA] node_specB
Lists the differences between two IP HELPER
databases. The DIFF command shows
differences between the copies ~f the
IP_HELPER directory and between the
replica lists. If you do not provide a
value for node_specA. then EDIP uses the
default IP HELPER database.
INFO
Displays the DOMAIN address and status
information for the default IP HELPER.
o
4-95
Shell Commands
EDIP (EDIT _ IP _HELPER)
INIT [node_specA] [-FROM node_specB]
Initializes an IP_HELPER database. If you
do not specify a value for node_specA,
then EDIP initializes the default IP HELPER
database. After you initialize an IP_HELPER
it becomes active. That is, the IP_HELPER
can communicate with other IP HELPERs and
can respond to lookup and update requests.
(Before an IP_HELPER is initialized, it will
repond only to the INFO, INIT, MERGE_ALL and
SHUT commands.)
-FROM node_specB
If you specify the -FROM option, EDIP
performs some additional initialization.
First, EDIP adds the IP HELPER on node A
(or the default node) to node B's replica
list. Then node B propagates the new
replica information to all the replicas in
its (node B's) replica list. Thus, the other
IP HELPERs will now have node A (or the
default IP HELPER) on their replica lists.
Finally, EDIP merges all entries from node
B's IP HELPER database into node A's (or
the default) database. This merge includes
the entries in node B's copy of the
directory and in node B's replica list.
LD [names] [-NODE node id]
[-NET net]
[-IPADDR IP address]
[-SN I-NSN] [-N] [-DA] [ - IP] [-DTE]
-NET net
Lists IP_HELPER directory entries by name;
if names are specified, only those names
are listed.
Lists directory entries with the
specified DOMAIN network number. If names
are specified, LD lists entries with the
specified names, and also lists entries
with the specified network number.
-NODE node id
Lists entries with specified DOMAIN
node 10. If names are also specified,
LD lists entries with the specified names
and also lists entries with the specified
node 10.
-IPADDR IP address
Lists entries with specified Internet
Protocol address. If names are also
specified, LD lists entries with the
specified names and also lists entries with
the specified IP address.
-SN
-NSN
(D)
c
r~
'-......•.
,'
Lists entries sorted by name.
Suppresses name sorting.
("
Shell Oommands
4-96
.----------------------.-----.~-----.--
EDIP (EDIT _IP _HELPER)
o
The following options specify what special information should be
displayed with each entry that is listed:
-N
-DA
-IP
-DTE
LR
[-CLOCKS]
-CLOCKS
o
Displays list of replicas in the network.
Displays each replica's current clock
date/time and checks for any replicas
whose clocks are skewed.
MERGE [node_specA] -FROM node_specB
Merges all entries in the IP_HELPER
database on node B into the IP HELPER
database on node A; node B's database
remains unchanged. If you do not specify
a value for node A. then EDIP merges node
B's database into the default IP HELPER
database.
If node A's database contains an entry
with the same name as an entry being
merged from node B. then the entry with
the latest timestamp is saved in node A's
database. (A timestamp is the time an
entry receives when it is first added to .
an IP HELPER database. An entry keeps its
original timestamp when it is propagated to
other IP_HELPERs.)
o
The MERGE command affects only the database
on node A; node A does not propagate any
entries it obtains from the merge.
o
MERGE ALL [node_spec]
o
Displays node id.
Displays DOMAIN address.
Displays Internet Protocol(IP) address.
Displays date/time this entry was made
to the directory and the node_id of
the replica where this entry was made.
Performs a global merge using the
IP_HELPER at the node you specify as the
base for the merge. If you omit the
node_spec. EDIP uses the default IP_HELPER.
To do a global merge. EDIP merges each
IP_HELPER database in the specified
IP_HELPER's replica list into the
specified IP_HELPER's database. Then.
EDIP merges the updated database back out
to each replica. EDIP merges both the
replica lists and the copies of the
directory. If a database contains an entry
with the same name as an entry being
merged. then the entry with the latest
timestamp is saved. (A timestamp is the
time an entry receives when it is first
4-97
Shell Commands
EDIP (EDIT _ IP _HELPER)
added to an IP_HELPER database. An entry
keeps its original timestamp when it is
propagated to other IP_HELPERs.)
An IP HELPER must be listed in the base
IP_HELPER's replica list to be included
in a global merge. The IP_HELPERs in
the replica list may be uninitialized.
If an IP_HELPER is not already initialized,
the MERGE ALL command will initialize its
database and allow the IP HELPER to be
active.
QUIT
Terminates the current EDIP session.
REPlace name -IP IP address
-DA [net.]node_id
Changes the Internet Protocol(IP) address
and DOMAIN address associated with name in
IP_HELPER's copy of the directory. The IP
address must be entered as 4 decimal digits
each separated by a period (.). The
The DOMAIN address net and nodeid must be
entered as hexidecimal digits separated by
a period. The DOMAIN address or the IP
address may be omitted; an address which is
omitted is entered as NULL for the entry.
IP_HELPER propagates the new information
to all IP_HELPERs in its replica list. If
the IP address is associated with another
entry that already exists in IP_HELPER's
database, EDIP does not replace the entry
and displays an error message.
SET [nOde_spec]
Sets the default IP HELPER to the IP HELPER
running on the node you specify. Subsequent
EDIP commands will be directed to this
IP_HELPER, unless you specify a different
IP_HELPER in the command. If you use the
SET command and omit a node specification,
EDIP will select an active IP HELPER
(with an initialized database) to be the
default.
SHUT node_spec
Shuts down the IP_HELPER replica on the
node you specify. This command causes
the specified replica to delete its
database and stop running immediately.
The shutdown replica is not removed from
any replica lists.
For complete information on EDIP command usage, see Managing TGP/IP-Based
Communications Products.
~
'- ..
.. _./
Shell Commands
4-98
EDMTDESC (EDIT _MAGTAPE _DESCRIPTOR)
o
EDMTDESO (EDIT _MAGTAPE_DESCRIPTOR) -- Edit magtape descriptor file.
FORMAT
EDMTDESO pathname {options}
EDMTDESC allows you to create, list, and modify magnetic tape descriptor objects.
These descriptor files provide information to the streams manager so that it can handle
subsequent tape operations much as an SIO descriptor file describes the configuration of
an SIO line.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(required)
Specify name of magtape descriptor file to be created, listed, or
edited.
OPTIONS
At least one of the following options must be specified.
o
-0
Create a new magtape descriptor object with the name given in
the 'pathname' argument.
-L [var •••]
List the values of the variable{s) specified. If no variables are
named, the entire magtape descriptor is listed.
-S {var value} .••
Set the variable(s) indicated to the specified value(s). At least
one variable/value pair is required if -S is specified. Multiple
variable/value pairs are permitted, separated by blanks.
o
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
VARIABLES
The variables known to EDMTDESC are listed below, along with their types and default
values. The variable types are: integer (int), Boolean (y In), character string of n letters (c
[n)), and date (in format yy/mm/dd.hh:mm).
o
4-99
Shell Commands
EDMTDESC (EDIT _MAGTAPE_DESCRIPTOR)
name
type
DEV
c [1]
int
M
U
LAB
yIn
yes
REO
yIn
no
CLV
yIn
yes
SPOS
yIn
no
VID
VACC
OWN
F
c [6]
c [1]
c [14]
int*
-auto
RF
c [1]
D
BL
RL
ASCNL
FSECT
FID
FSID
GEN
GENV
CDATE
EDATE
FACC
SYSC
SYSU
BOFF
int
int
yIn
int
c [17]
c [6]
int
int
date
date
c [1]
c[xx]
c [xx]
int
default
o
-auto
1
2048
2048
yes
1
1
1
-auto
-auto
o
definition
device type ('M' for magtape. 'C' for cartridge)
magtape unit number (normally 0)
'yes' if magtape is ANSI labeled. 'no' if
unlabeled
'yes' to reopen previously used volume. 'no'
to open new volume ('yes' suppresses rewind)
'yes' closes volume when file is closed.
'no' leaves volume open
'yes' saves volume position when volume is
closed (for reopen). 'no' rewinds volume
when closed
volume identifier (labeled volumes)
volume accessibility (labeled volumes)
volume owner (labeled volumes)
file sequence number -- integer or "cur" for
current file. or "end" for new file at ~nd
of labeled volume
record format -- "F" for fixed length. "D"
for variable length. US" for spanned.
"un for undefined
block length. in bytes
(maximum) record length. in bytes
'yes' for ascii newline handling (strip
newlines on write. supply them on read).
'no' for no newline handling
file section number (labeled volumes)
file identifier (labeled volumes)
file set identifier (labeled volumes)
generation of file (labeled volumes)
generation version of file (labeled volumes)
creation date of file (labeled volumes)
expiration date of file (labeled volumes)
file accessibility (labeled volumes)
system code (labeled volumes)
system use (labeled volumes)
buffer offset (labeled volumes. should be 0)
("'\
\
'-
/
For cartridge tape (DEV C), you must change the block length (BL) and the record length
(RL) to be 512 or less and the record format to be fixed ('RF F').
EXAMPLES
$ edmtdesc set_tape -s u 1 lab yes
Edit file "set_tape";
set the tape unit number
to 1; declare tape as
ANSI labeled.
$ edmtdesc ct -c -s dev c bl 512 rl 128 rf f
Create descriptor file ct for
cartridge tape. blocking 4
records of maximum length 128
to each block.
Shell Commands
4-100
c.~
EDNS (EDIT _NAMING_SERVER_HELPER)
o
EDNS (EDIT_NAMING_SERVER_HELPER) -- Invoke editor for NS_HELPER.
FORMAT
EDNS [[net.]node_id]
EDNS allows you to inspect and/or modify NS _HELPER's master network root
directory and replica list. Once invoked, EDNS enters an interactive mode and accepts
the commands described below. For complete information on NS _HELPER and EDNS
usage, see Admini8tering Your DOMAIN SY8tem.
ARGUMENTS
o
[net.]node _ id
(optional)
Set the default NS HELPER to the NS
specified by the internet address.
HELPER at the node
Default if omitted: Set the default NS _HELPER to any active
NS HELPER. An NS HELPER becomes
active after its database has been initialized.
EDNSCOMMANDSUMMARY
o
Some EDNS commands use node specifications and internet addresses as arguments. If a
command accepts a node specification, the syntax line uses the term node _ 8pec. If a
command accepts an internet address, the syntax line uses the term [net.Jnode _ id.
When a command accepts a node specification, you can provide a node name (if the name is
cataloged in the default NS _HELPER database) or you can provide an internet address.
o
When a command accepts an internet address, you must specify a node ID, and in some
cases, a network number. Note that the rules for specifying internet addresses with EDNS
commands differ slightly from the rules for specifying internet addresses with Shell
commands. If the node is on the local ring, the network number is optional. If the node is
on a remote ring, the network number is required. When you specify an internet address
with an EDNS command, the internet address must begin with an integer. If the address
begins with a letter, precede the address with a 0 (e.g., OD34.1E05). When you issue EDNS
commands from a node in a non-zero network, you cannot specify the number 0 to indicate
the local ring.
For complete information on EDNS command usage, see Admini8tering Your DOMAIN
SY8tem and Managing DOMAIN Internet8.
o
4-101
Shell Command8
FUNCTION
SYNTAX
(abbreviation shown
in uppercase)
Defaul t options are indicated by
ADD name [net.]node_id
II
(D)
II •
Adds a new node name, and the associated
node information, to the default
NS_HELPER'S copy of the master root
directory. After accepting a name, the
NS_HELPER propagates the new information
to all NS_HELPERs in its replica list.
The NS_HELPER accepts a new name only if
it does not already exist in the master
root directory. If a name already
exists, then the NS_HELPER does not
accept the entry and EONS displays an
error message.
c
The node you are adding must be connected to the network in order for EONS
to obtain information needed for the
database. For a disked node, EONS gets
the UID for the node entry directory.
For a diskless node, EONS verifies that
it is diskless and creates a canned UID.
ADDRep node_spec
Adds a replica to the default
NS_HELPER's replica list. The NS HELPER
propagates the new replica's identity to
all NS_HELPERs in its replica list.
The NS_HELPER accepts a new replica only
if the entry does not already exist in
the replica list. If an entry already
exists, then the NS_HELPER does not
accept the entry and EONS displays an
error message.
Compares two NS_HELPER databases and
lists names, network numbers, and UIDs
that appear in both copies of the master
root directory. CMF also lists replicas
that appear in both replica lists. If
you do not provide a value for
node_specA, then EONS uses the default
NS HELPER database.
DELete name
Shell Commands
Deletes a node name from the default
NS_HELPER's copy of the master root
directory. The NS_HELPER propagates the
delete request to all NS_HELPERs in its
replica list. If the name you specify
does not exist, EONS returns an error
message and does not accept or propagate
the DELETE request.
4-102
(
'
'--_/
o
DELRep node_spec
Deletes an NS HELPER from the default
NS_HELPER's replica list. The NS HELPER
propagates the delete request to all
NS_HELPERs in its replica list. thereby
removing the replica from all other
replica lists. In addition. DELRep
causes the deleted replica to delete its
database. The deleted replica stops
running after its propagation list has
been emptied.
If the replica you specify with the
DELRep command does not exist in the
NS_HELPER's replica list. EONS returns
an error and does not accept or
propagate the DELRep request.
o
o
o
o
It is best to wait at least fifteen
minutes before restarting a deleted
replica.
DIFF [node_specA] node_specE
Lists the differences between two
NS HELPER databases. The DIFF command
shows differences between both copies
of the master root directory. and
between both replica lists. If you do
not provide a value for node_specA.
then EONS uses the default NS HELPER
database.
INFO
Displays the internet address and status
information for the default NS HELPER.
IN IT [node_specA] [-FROM node_specE]
Initializes an NS HELPER database. If
you do not specify a value for
node_specA. then EONS initializes the
default NS_HELPER database. After you
initialize an NS_HELPER. it becomes
active. That is. the NS_HELPER can
communicate with other NS HELPERs and
can respond to naming requests from
other nodes. (Before an NS~HELPER is
initialized. it will respond only to
the INFO. INIT. MERGE ALL and SHUT
commands.)
To use the INIT command without the
-FROM option. you must use EONS from a
node on the same ring as the NS_HELPER
you are initializing. In such a case.
EONS gets a list of all nodes on the
local ring. and adds these nodes to the
NS_HELPER database that you are
initializing. The NS_HELPER propagates
the new information to all replicas in
its replica list.
4-103
Shell Commands
EDNS (EDIT _NAMING_SERVER_HELPER)
If you initialize an NS_HELPER that has
previously been initialized. the INIT
command adds any new node names to the
existing database and propagates these
names to the NS_HELPERs on its replica
list.
-FROM node_specB
If you specify the -FROM option. EDNS
performs a different type of
initialization. First. EONS adds the
NS_HELPER on node A (or the default
node) to node B's replica list. Then
node B propagates the new replica
information to all the replicas in its
(node B's) replica list. Thus. the
other NS HELPERs will now have node A
(or the default NS_HELPER) on their
replica lists.
Next. EONS merges all entries from node
B's NS_HELPER database into node A's (or
the default) database. This merge
includes the entries in node B's copy of
the master root directory and in node
B's replica list.
Finally. if node A (or the default node)
and node B are on different rings. EDNS
also gets a list of all nodes on node
A's network and adds these nodes to node
A's copy of the master root directory.
Then node A's NS_HELPER propagates these
names to all the NS HELPERs on its
replica list. When node A and node B
are on different rings. you must use
EDNS from a node on the same ring as
node A.
LD [names] [-NODE node_id]
[-NET net]
[-SN I-NSN]
[ -T]
[ -U]
[ -N]
[ - rA]
Lists root directory entries by name; if
names are specified. only those names
are listed.
[ -DTE]
-NET net
Lists root directory entries with the
specified network number; if names are
specified. LD lists entries with the
specified names. and also lists entries
with the specified network number.
-NODE node id
Lists entries with specified node ID;
if names are also specified. LD lists
entries with the specified names and
also lists entries with the specified
node ID.
-SN
-NSN
Shell Commands
(D)
Lists entries sorted by name.
Suppresses name sorting.
4-104
c
o
The following options specify the special information to be displayed
with each entry that is listed:
-T
-U
-N
-IA
-DTE
LR
o
Displays entry type.
Displays UID.
Displays node id.
Displays internet address.
Displays date/time this entry was made
to the directory and the node_id of
the replica where this entry was made.
[-CLOCKS]
Displays list of replicas in the
network.
-CLOCKS
Displays each replica's current clock
date/time and checks for any replicas
whose clocks are skewed.
MERGE [node_specA] -FROM node_specB
Merges all entries in the NS_HELPER
database on node B into the NS HELPER
database on node A; node B's database
remains unchanged. If you do not
specify a value for node A. then EONS
merges node B's database into the
default NS HELPER database.
o
If node A's database contains an entry
with the same name as an entry being
merged from node B. then the entry with
the latest time stamp is saved in node
A's database. (A time stamp is the time
an entry receives when it is first added
to an NS_HELPER database. An entry
keeps its original time stamp when it is
propagated to other NS_HELPERs.)
o
The MERGE command affects only the
database on node A; node A does not
propagate any entries it obtains from
the merge.
MERGE ALL [node_spec]
o
Performs a global merge using the
NS_HELPER at the node you specify as the
base for the merge. If you omit the
node_spec. EDNS uses the default
NS HELPER.
To do a global merge. EDNS merges each
NS HELPER database (in the specified
NS-HELPER'S replica list) into the
specified NS_HELPER's database. Then.
EONS merges the updated database back
out to each replica. Note that EDNS
merges both the replica lists and the
copies of the master root directory. If
a database contains an entry with the
4-105
Shell Commands
same name as an entry being merged. then
the entry with the latest time stamp is
saved. (A time stamp is the time an
entry receives when it is first added to
the NS_HELPER database. An entry keeps
its original time stamp when it is
propagated to other NS_HELPERs.)
An NS HELPER must be listed in the base
NS_HELPER'S replica list to be included
in a global merge. The NS_HELPERS in
the replica list may be uninitialized.
If an NS_HELPER is not already
initialized. the MERGE_ALL command will
initialize its database and allow the
NS HELPER to be active.
QUIT
Terminates the current EONS session.
REPlace name [net.]node_id
Changes the internet address and UIO
associated with a name in the default
NS_HELPER'S copy of the master root
directory. The NS_HELPER propagates the
new information to all NS HELPERs in its
replica list. Use this command after
running the utilities CHUVOL. or INVOL.
or replacing a disk.
The node you are replacing must be
connected to the network in order for
the NS HELPER to obtain information
needed for the database. For a disked
node. EONS obtains the UIO for the node
entry directory. For a diskless node.
EONS verifies the diskless status and
creates a canned UIO.
SET [node_spec]
Sets the default to the NS HELPER
running on the node you specify.
Subsequent EONS commands will be
directed to this NS_HELPER. unless you
specify a different NS_HELPER in the
command. If you use the SET command and
omit a node specification. EONS will
select an active NS_HELPER (with an
initialized database) to be the default.
SHUT node_spec
Shuts down the NS HELPER replica on the
node you specify. This command causes
the specified replica to delete its
database and stop running immediately.
The shutdown replica is not removed from
any replica lists.
Shell Commands
4-106
c:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ------
o
UPDATE [node_spec]
Updates the NS_HELPER database on the
node specified. If you do not specify
a node. then EONS updates the default
NS HELPER database. An NS HELPER must
be initialized before it can be updated.
EONS gets a list of all nodes on the
EONS node's local ring. It adds nodes
which are not already in the NS_HELPER
database and replaces node information
(such as internet address and entry
directory UID) which has changed.
NS_HELPER propagates new information
to all replicas in its replica list.
o
o·
o
o
4-107
Shell Commands
EDPPO (EDIT_PPO_FILE)
EDPPO (EDIT _PPO _FILE) -- Edit/list person, project, or organization names.
FORMAT
EDPPO {options}
EDPPO is used to define usernames in the network registry. This is a prelude to creating
network accounts, which associate usernames with log-in home directories and passwords.
Use EDACCT (EDIT_ACCOUNT) to perform that operation.
While all of the available EDPPO options are described below, you will probably not be
able to edit network registry files unless you are the network administrator' for your
network. You should, however, be able to list the contents of the network and local
registries. Use EDPPO to find out who is associated with a particular username and
account.
.f"\
For detailed examples of editing network registry files and complete information on
network registry commands, see Administering Your DOMAIN System.
OPTIONS
If you omit the -A, -D, -L, and -LF options, EDPPO enters an interactive editing session
which reads commands from standard input as described in the COMMANDS section below.
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
-R pathname
Specify the registry to be edited or listed. You should only use
this option with -LOC (described below) to edit or list a remote
node's local registry. If you want to edit or list the master
registry, omit this option and let EDPPO use the network
registry file copy (' /registry /registry') on the current node to
locate the master registry.
Only one of the following three options may be present on a command line.
-PERS
(D)
Edit or list the contents of the Person file.
-PROJ
Edit or list the contents of the Project file.
-ORG
Edit or list the contents of the Organization file.
-LOC
Specify that the node's local registry (' /registry /local_registry')
is to be listed. If you specify -LOC, the only other valid options
are -R -L, -COL, and -D. You may not manipulate the local
registry using EDPPO's interactive mode; the list or delete
functions must be specified on the command line.
-A name [fullname]
Add a name and optional full name text. PPO names can be up
to 32 characters long, must begin with a letter, and can include
only letters, numbers, and underscores (_). PPO names are
automatically maintained in lowercase. Associated full name
text is optional but strongly recommended. It can include any
Shell Oommands
4-108
(~
"'-. ../
EDPPO (EDIT _PPO _FILE)
o
o
characters and be up to 32 characters long. Use single (or
double) quotation marks to embed spaces (or quotation marks) in
a full name.
-D name
Delete a name. Command line delete is valid only on a local
registry. To delete a name from the network registry file, use
EDPPO's interactive mode.
DELETE WITH EXTREME
CAUTION, even locally, because once you delete a name no one
can EVER access any files created by the user who had that
PPO. (The system cannot recreate a unique name identifier once
it has been deleted.) Normally, you should delete people's
accounts (using EDACCT), NOT their names.
-L [name ..•]
List the name(s) specified. If 'name' is omitted, all names are
listed.
-LF [name ••.]
List the name(s) specified, along with associated full name text,
if any. If 'name' is omitted, all names are listed.
-COL
List the names in a single column.
-NP
Suppress prompts during interactive editing.
COMMANDS
If you omit the -A, -D, -L, and -LF options on the command line, EDPPO enters an
o
o
interactive editing session which accepts the following commands from standard input.
a [name [fullname]]
Define one or more new names, along with optional full name. If
'fullname' is omitted, EDPPO prompts you for it. Enter an
empty line if you wish the fullname field to be null. (See -A
above for name formats and restrictions.) If no name is
specified, names are read from standard input. We strongly
recommend that you supply full names.
c name new _name [new _fullname]
Change 'name' to 'new name'. If 'new fullname' is also
specified, change the full name associated with 'name' to
'new fullname'.
cf name new
d name
o
fullname
Change the full name associated with the name indicated.
Delete the name indicated. Once deleted, the unique name
identifier cannot be recreated, so DELETE WITH EXTREME
CAUTION. Once you delete a name, no one can EVER access
any files created by the user who had that PPO. Normally, you
should delete people's accounts (using EDACCT), NOT their
names.
1 [name]
List one or all names defined (including new ones).
If [name]
List one or all names defined with their associated full names, if
any.
4-109
Shell Commands
EDPPO (EDIT _PPO _FILE)
In
List only those names added during this editing session.
wr
Update the file with the changes and exit.
q
Quit without updating.
h [comm]
Help -- list briefly all the available commands or a particular
command in detail.
EXAMPLES
List the names of people in the local registry.
$ edppo -loc -1
adm
bso
chrissy
sqh
vic
alan
burt
cmt
sys_person
wilson_j
apgar
cas
col
taylor
zahn
beth
charlie
color
todd
bls
chris
csa
user
$
c
Shell Commands
4-110
----------------------
.-.........._-..
_
.....
-... .
EDSTR (EDIT _ STREA1v1)
C)
EDSTR (EDIT _STREAM) -- Edit a stream.
FORMAT
EDSTR [- N] { command
I -E
command
I -F
cmdfile ••• } [pathname]
EDSTR copies the named input files to standard output, performing editing as directed
by EDSTR commands in the command line or in the named command file.
ARGUMENTS
If neither the -E or -F argument is specified, EDSTR assumes that the first token on the
command line without a hyphen is an EDSTR command (see below) and that the remaining
tokens (if any) are pathnames.
o
command
(optional)
Specify a single EDSTR command (except A, 0, or I). EDSTR
accepts the ED commands A, 0, D, I, P, R, S, W, and
To use
the A, 0, or I commands, place them in a command fil~ as
described below.
=.
Default if omitted: use -E and/or -F
o
o
The following two arguments may be repeated and intermixed in any order.
executes them in the order in which they appear on the command line.
-E command
(optional)
EDSTR
Specify an EDSTR command (except A, 0, or I). To use the A,
0, or I commands, place them in a command file as described
below.
EDSTR can accommodate commands totaling
approximately 5000 characters (including arguments),
and lines up to 120 characters long.
Default if omitted: use 'command' or -F
-F cmdfile
(optional)
Specify a file containing EDSTR commands, one per line.
Control is passed to this file for command processing. See -E for
EDSTR command restrictions.
Default if omitted: use 'command' or -E
pathname
(optional)
Specify input file to be edited.
permitted.
Multiple pathnames are
Default if omitted: edit standard input
OPTIONS
o
-N
Supress writing of output except for P and W EDSTR
commands. By default, EDSTR writes each line of input to
standard output after editing. If this option is specified, it must
precede any arguments on the command line.
4-111
Shell Commands
EDSTR (EDIT _STREAM)
EXAMPLES
$ edstr -e s/joe/mary/g -e '20r add_stuff' infile > outfile
This command first replaces all occurrences of "joe" with II mary II , then copies material in
the file II add stuff II into "infile" following line 20. Results are written to the file
II outfile II •
SUMMARY OF EDSTR COMMANDS
Addresses:
17
$
/pat/
\pat\
line+n
line-n
a decimal number
the last line of the file
search forward for line containing pat
search backward for line containing pat
n lines forward from line
n lines backward from line
Defaults:
o
(+1)
(1.$)
(no address) use current line
use the next line
use all lines
Commands:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
C
D
I
P
R file
S/pat/new/GP
(1.$)
W file
0
=[P]
("
Append text after line (text follows)
Change text (text follows)
Delete text
Insert text before line (text follows)
Print text (can be appended to other commands)
Read file, appending after line
substitute new for leftmost pat (G implies all
occurrences)
Write file, leave current text unaltered (if
no file is specified, write to current filename)
Print line number, current line
Arguments:
$n
Shell Commands
Write to/read from the nth temporary buffer
4-112
"-.._./
EM3270 (EMULATE_3270)
o
EM3270 (EMULATE_3270) -- Emulate an IBM 3270 terminal.
FORMAT
EM3270.{ device}
EM3270 allows a DOMAIN node to emulate an mM 3270 terminal over an SIO line
connected to a VT100-to-3270 converter. The command is meaningless without this
additional hardware.
While EM3270 requires no arguments or options, there are actually three different
commands, depending on which protocol converter you are using. The following protocol
converters support the EM3270 Package software:
•
•
•
•
o
1001 Model OA20
1001 Model OA12
KMW Model BAO-3270 FS
POI 1076
Specify the device name with the EM3270 command. For example:
$ em3270.pci
if you are using the POI 1076 protocol converter.
o
Follow the manufacturer's directions for connecting the converter you choose to the
node's SIO lines.
EM3270 Commands
Once you have invoked EM3270, you may use the following commands:
o
H
Display command summary information.
LI [n]
Select SIO line n. The default SIO line is 1.
Q
Exit from EM3270.
SPEED n
Set SIO line speed. Valid speeds are 50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600,
1200, 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, and 19200.
[NO]SYNO
Enable/disable XON/XOFF on the SIO line.
In addition to these commands, two control/key sequences perform special functions:
OTRL/
Switch between command mode and Remote 3270 mode.
OTRL/
Display a layout of the 3270 emulation keyboard.
o
4-113
Shell Commands
EM3270 (EMULATE _ 3270)
Keyboard Conversion
(--------\
The following special keyboard keys map to the
mM equivalents indicated.
HEX CODE
IBM KEYBOARD
APOLLO KEYBOARD
X'5F'
X'4A'
X'6A'
CENT SIGN
NOT SIGN (PLI-NOT)
DOUBLE VERTICAL BAR
(ONE ABOVE THE OTHER)
VERTICAL BAR (PLI-OR)
LEFT BRACKET • [.
RIGHT BRACKET .]
CARET ......
X'4F'
\\....._./'
.
DOUBLE VERTICAL BAR
(...
~
\, '--
Shell Commands
4-114
.
"
EMT (EMULATE _ TERMINAL)
o
EMT
(EMULATE_TERMINAL) --
Emulate a dumb terminal.
FORMAT
EMT [pathname]
EMT allows your node to emulate an ASCII terminal connected to another computer.
This asynchronous connection exists through a stream opened on one of the node's SIO
lines. EMT also permits ASCII file transfer between your node and the remote host.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(optional)
Specify file containing EMT commands.
Default if omitted: read commands from standard input
Using EMT
EMT begins execution in local mode, and displays the following prompt:
emt>
o
To enter remote mode, press . (The EMT command DL no 'longer exists.) In remote
mode, your terminal operates as if it is physically connected to the remote computer ("host").
You can log on and enter remote host commands.
To return to local mode, press again.
Input/Output Streams
EMT uses the four standard streams (standard input, standard output, error input, and
error output) as follows:
o
• EMT commands are read from an EMT command file or from standard input.
The command filename may be specified on the command line or using the EMT
'run' command. Up to four levels of command files may be nested. When EOF
is reached on a command file, commands are read from the previous file or from
standard input. If EOF is reached on standard input, EMT exits.
• Keystrokes to be sent to the host computer are read from error input. Error
input may not be redirected to a file. Use the EMT 'xmit' command to transmit
a file (of commands or data) to the host. Use the EMT 'rev' command to
receive host transmissions to a DOMAIN file.
• EMT Command responses and all messages from the host are written to
standard output.
o
• Error messages from AEGIS system calls are written to error output. Optional
monitoring (MONIT) may also be written to error output (or to a named file).
4-115
Shell Commands
EMT (EMULATE _ TERMINAL)
Trans/erring Files
r---\
You can transfer files using EMT's receive (ROV) or transmit (XMIT) commands. XMIT
sends a DOMAIN file to the remote host. Rev opens a DOMAIN file to receive
information from the remote host. For example, if you type (in local mode):
~-.-./
emt> XMIT FILEA
EMT displays the following message:
Ready to transmit file FILEA
Next, press . EMT enters remote mode, and transmits FILEA to the remote host.
If you type:
emt> Rev FILEB
(
EMT displays this message:
"\
-~,/
Ready to receive file FILEB.
Next, enter remote mode by pressing . Use a remote host command to display the
information that you want FILEB to receive. EMT automatically writes this and all
subsequent host transmissions into FILEB. To stop the Rev, press .
Transmission Conventions
Use the EMT command INTERM to specify the line terminator used by the host. If you. do
not know what the host uses as a line terminator, experiment by changing INTERM. Use
the EMT command OUTTERM to specify the line terminator to be transmitted to the host.
EMT allows you to open only one DOMAIN file at a time. If EMT receives a XMIT or
Rev command while another DOMAIN file is active, it closes the open DOMAIN file, and
executes the new command.
During remote mode, EMT waits on both the keyboard and SIO line for characters to
process, and monitors the data for characters of special interest to EMT.
You can specify which keyboard characters EMT should interpret by placing the keyboard
in raw or cooked mode. In raw mode, EMT passes all keyboard input (except the function
keys, keys Ll through L12, and keys Rl through R4), directly to the host. Cooked mode
lets you use many of the Display Manager's features for editing the input pad. EMT places
your keyboard in cooked mode by default.
Shell Commands
4-116
c
EMT (EMULATE _ TERMINAL)
o
o
EMT COMMANDS
Keys
Switch between local and remote modes.
Interrupt a file transfer and close the file.
Turn TEE on or off. TEE on causes EMT to display file transmission
records on the screen. You can use this feature to monitor file transfers,
and decide if and when you should stop or interrupt a transfer. The
default is TEE on.
Send a BREAK to the host.
CTRL/
Display function key definitions.
These function keys may be simulated by typing the EMTESC character followed by the
function key number (i.e., .........1 for F1). When EMT is used from the VT100 emulator,
F1-shifted is used instead of F2, and F1-control is used instead of F3.
Commands
AE
ASConly
o
o
Abort on error.
I NOTASOonly
Sift out most non-printing ASCII codes. Eliminates triangles, allows BS,
OR, ESO, FF, LF, TAB. The default is NOTASO.
BREAK [n]
Set the BREAK duration value to n milliseconds. The default is 200. If
set to 0, the (break) key does nothing.
CLOSE
Deactivate an RCV file. See the RCV command for related information.
CODE [ xx I NONE ]
Set the HOST-COMMAND-CODE to the hexadecimal number xx.
default is NONE.
COOKED
The
Place the keyboard in cooked mode. This enables many Display Manager
features for editing the input pad, and provides an escape sequence for
sending control characters to the remote host. To send the host a OTRL
character, precede the character with a tilde (......... ). The sequence ......... _
transmits a delete character. To send the host a single tilde character,
type ...................
The EMT default is cooked mode. Cooked mode always echos keystrokes, so it does not
require a full duplex connection to the host. (See the RAW command for
related information.) Note that the COOKED and RAW commands refer
only to the transcript pad and keyboard input. The SIO line itself is
always in RAW mode.
o
EMTESO [chrINONE]
Set the EMT escape character to chr. Use NONE to disable the escape
character. Default is ......... for cooked mode, NONE for raw mode.
4-117
Shell Commands
EMT (EMULATE _ TERMINAL)
The following three commands are useful when standard input is redirected to a file of
EMT commands:
Fl
Enter remote mode (Simulate Function key Fl).
F2
Terminate file transfer (Simulate Function key F2).
F3
Toggle TEE mode (Simulate Function key F3).
HANGUP
Cause modem to break connection with the remote host.
HELP [tctl]
Display information about EMT commands or about TCTL commands.
LINE {11213Ipathname}
Select the SIO line. Pathname must specify an SIO device descriptor
(e.g., /DEV/SI02). The default SIO line is 1 (jDEV/SI01).
L
Display the current SIO line, all EMT switch settings and the receive
filename, if any.
MONIT [pathname]
Write every character received over the SIO line to 'pathname'. If a
filename is not specified, the previous specification or error output is
used.
NOMONIT
Stop monitoring.
QUIT
End the EMT session.
RAW [-ECHOI-NOECHO] [-LFI-NOLF]
Place the keyboard in raw mode. This sends keyboard input directly to
the remote host, interpreting only function keys. The -ECHO option
echos keystrokes on standard output; you should use it when the host is
in half-duplex mode. The default is -NOECHO. The -LF option converts
CR to LF for lines echoed. The default is -NOLF. (See the COOKED
command for related information.) Note: The -ECHO and -LF options
are purely local functions that enable you to read what you type. They
do not in any way change host/node transmissions.
RCV [-R] [-KEYSI-NOKEYS] [pathname]
Prepare the DOMAIN file specified to receive remote host transmissions.
If 'pathname' already exists, EMT appends the transmission to it, unless
you specify -R. The receive begins when you enter remote mode .
If you omit 'pathname', EMT uses the previous name, if any. The
-KEYS option writes keystrokes to the file along with received data. The
default is -NOKEYS.
EMT allows you to interrupt an Rev command at any time by pressing
. EMT remains in whatever mode it was in, but keeps the Rev
file active. When you are ready to continue receiving host transmissions,
you may type Rev again (in local mode) without a filename, and EMT
will use the same RCV file.
Shell Oommands
4-118
c
----------- ---------
EMT (EMULATE_ TERMINAL)
o
If you omit filename and no Rev file is active, EMT issues an error
message. If you specify a new Rev file while another Rev file is active,
Rev closes the active file, and prepares the new file to receive the
transmission.
Use the CLOSE command to deactivate an Rev file.
TCTL {tctl commands}
Pass this command line to the Shell command TCTL to configure the
SIO line. It is not necessary to specify the line number (-line), although
you may if you wish to operate on a different line than the one you are
using. The SPEED and SYNC commands have been superseded by this
direct invocation of TCTL.
o
o
INTERM {CRILFICRLFIVAXI'hex'}
Select the input line terminator. The default is CRLF.
OUTTERM {CRILFICRLFI'hex'}
Select the output line terminator. The default is CR. EMT transmits
the selected hexadecimal value as the terminator for each line.
X11IT pathname Prepare to transmit the DOMAIN file specified to the remote host. If
you omit 'pathname', or if you specify a file that does not exist, EMT
issues an error message. When you issue this command, EMT remains in
local mode. EMT transmits the file when you press .
When EMT completes the transfer, it closes the file and returns to the
previous mode. EMT does not send an end-of-file (EOF) signal to the
remote host. If the host requires an EOF, enter remote mode and
transmit it manually.
EMT can also receive commands from the host. If the host transmits the sequence:
o
HOST-COMMAND-CODE (EMT COMMAND STRING) LINE-TERMINATOR
EMT interprets the string as an EMT command. Use the EMT command CODE to define
HOST-COMMAND-CODE.
Input Line
Terminators
o
EMT Response
CRLF
Converts sequence to a line feed. ignoring
any null characters that may separate the
pair.
CR
Converts sequence to a line feed and
ignores LFs.
LF
Interprets it as a line feed. and ignores
CRs.
VAX
Interprets both CR and CR-LF as terminators
and converts them to line feed.
4-119
Shell Commands
EMT (EMULATE_ TERMINAL)
'hex'
Converts the given hexadecimal value to LF.
r~
1,--.. . ./
I
~,
"'-
Shell Commands
4-120
. ./
----------------------------
ENSUBS (ENTER_SUBSYSTEM)
o
ENSUBS (ENTER_SUBSYSTEM) -- Enter a protected subsystem.
FORMAT
ENSUBS subsystem_name
ENSUBS is used to enter a protected subsystem at Shell command level.
creates a new process in which to run the subsystem Shell.
ENSUBS
Once in the subsystem, the SUBS command can be used to create new managers for the
subsystem or to seal data objects so that only managers of the subsystem can operate on
them. Also, subsystem managers can be debugged conveniently in this mode using
DEBUG, and protected data objects can be examined. Note, however, that access to
protected objects requires prior use of the SUBS -UP command.
o
ARGUMENTS
subsystem _ name
(required)
Specify name of subsystem to be entered. The Shell will search
the directory jSYSjSUBSYS for the file specified.
NOTES
o
o
ENSUBS :xxx just invokes the command jSYSjSUBSYSjxxX in a new process
(unless the current process is already running in Subsystem XXX). The new
process shares the window of the creating process, and is therefore subject to the
same restrictions found when logging into a window. To avoid the limitations, a
new window, containing a Shell running in the subsystem, can be created using
the DM. Press the < CMD > key; next to the prompt, type:
Command: cp /sys/subsys/xxx
o
o
The access control list on the file jSYSjSUBSYSjsubsystem_name determines
who can enter the subsystem 'subsystem_name': whoever has read and execute
rights to it can enter the subsystem. Usually, this capability should be restricted
to the creators of the subsystem or to the System Administrator.
o
4-121
Shell Commands
EOFF
EOFF -- Deactivate the Shell's - E flag.
FORMAT
EOFF
EOFF disables variable evaluation.
Variables are evaluated only inside variable
expression delimeters, ((expression)); otherwise, the Shell treats the "var _name
expressions as strings and they are not evaluated. To enable variable evaluation
regardless of the context in which the variable appears, specify EON.
By default, EOFF is in effect when a Shell is invoked.
If EOFF is specified in a Shell script, it remains in effect until that Shell script exits, or
until over-ridden by an EON in a nested Shell script. When a Shell script exits, the state
of variable evaluation is returned to the state in effect just before the script was invoked.
EOFF requires no arguments or options.
c
Shell Commands
4-122
EON
o
EON -- Activate the Shell's -E flag.
FORMAT
EON
EON enables variable evaluation regardless of the context in which the variables appear.
Normally, variables are evaluated only inside variable expression delimiters,
((expression)); otherwise, the Shell treats the "var _name expressions as strings and they
are not evaluated.
By default, EOFF is in effect when a Shell is invoked.
o
If EON is turned on in a Shell script, it remains on until that Shell script exits, or until
over-ridden by an EOFF in a nested Shell script. When a Shell script exits, the state of
variable evaluation is returned to the state in effect just before the script was invoked.
EON requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
4-123
Shell Oommands
EQS (EQUAL_STRING)
EQS (EQUAL_STRING) -- Compare strings for equality.
FORMAT
EQS [stringl [string2]]
EQS compares strings for equality, and sets the abort severity level accordingly.
ARGUMENTS
If no arguments are specified, EQS always returns TRUE.
stringl
(optional)
Specify text string to test. If this is the only string given (i.e.,
'string2' is not specified), return TRUE if 'string 1' is empty;
otherwise return FALSE.
Default if omitted: return TRUE
string2
(optional)
Specify text string to compare against 'string!'. EQS returns
TRUE if the strings are equal, and FALSE if they are not.
Default if omitted: test 'string 1' only
EXAMPLES
The following Shell script will compile the PASCAL module named by the first argument
(AI) if the second argument (A2) is '-c'. Then it will bind the module with 'library'.
if eqs -2 '-c' then pas -1 endif
bind -l.bin library -b -1
If the second argument is not '-c', or if there is no second argument, the program simply
binds the module.
Shell Commands
4-124
---------------------------
ESA (EXTERNAL_SYMBOL_ADDRESS)
o
ESA (EXTERNAL_SYMBOL_ADDRESS) -- Display address of external symbol.
FORMAT
ESA symbol_name
ESA displays the address of an external symbol in an installed library. This command is
primarily intended for system-level debugging.
In addition to displaying the address of an external symbol, ESA returns TRUE to the
Shell if the symbol exists in an installed library and FALSE if it does not. This means
that you may use ESA in conjunction with the Shell IF statement to determine whether
or not a library is installed, provided you know the name of one of its symbols. For
example, you might place the following lines in a Shell script:
o
if not esa my_favorite_symbol >/dev/null >?/dev/null then
inlib my_library
endif
Note that in this instance, only the value returned by ESA is relevant; the actual address
of the symbol does not matter. Hence all textual output is redirected into / dev /null.
ARGUMENTS
o
symbol_ name
(required)
Specify symbol whose address you wish to display. ESA is case
sensitive with respect to the symbol name. Lowercase must be
used to refer to symbols defined in FORTRAN and Pascal
programs. Mixed case may be used, as needed, for symbols
defined in C programs.
EXAMPLES
o
$ esa gpr_$init
A1580C
$
This command displays the address of GPR _ $INIT.
library, which was installed at system startup time.
This symbol resides wi thin the GPR
o
4-125
Shell Commands
EXFLD (EXTRACT _FIELDS)
EXFLD (EXTRACT _FIELDS) -- Manipulate fields of data.
FORMAT
EXFLD {field_spec} output_format [pathname •••]
EXFLD manipulates data kept in formatted fields. It copies data from specified fields of
the input files to specified places in standard output.
ARGUMENTS
field_spec
(required)
field
Specify either one of the following two arguments:
list
Integer list identifying fields in the input file to be copied. Up to
9 input fields are allowed. You can specify a field by the
columns in which it occurs or by its starting column and length.
For example, 5-10 denotes a field that extends from column 5
through column 10, and 3+2 denotes a field that starts in
column 3 and spans 2 columns. When specifying more than one
field, separate the specifications with commas,. for example:
5-10.16.72+8
Fields can overlap, and need not be in ascending numerical
order .. Thus
c~
1-25.10.3
is a valid field specification.
-T [e]
Free-format separator specification. If input fields do not fall in
certain columns, but rather are separated by some character
(such as a blank or a comma), describe the fields by using '-T c',
replacing 'c' with the appropriate separator. A tab character is
the default for 'c'.
output _ format
(required)
Specify literal string representing output format. Fields from
input are referred to as $1, $2, $3, and so forth, denoting the
order in which the fields are specified. Up to 9 fields are
allowed, plus the argument $0 which refers to the whole line.
Place the $n symbol in the output format wherever the
corresponding field should appear, surrounded by any characters
desired. For example, an output format of:
"$2 somewords $1"
would produce an output line such as:
Shell Commands
4-126
"
'
C
"."~
..
EXFLD (EXTRACT _FIELDS)
o
field2 somewords field1
pathname
(optional)
Specify input file to be manipulated.
Default if omitted: read standard input
EXAMPLES
$ exfld 1-5,14-18 "$2 follows $1"
ABCDE is not DEFGH
DEFGH follows ABCDE
*** EOF ***
Specify extraction.
Input text from standard input.
Result.
Signal completion with CTRL/Z.
$
o
o
o
o
4-127
Shell Commands
EXISTF
EXISTF -- Check for existence of an object.
FORMAT
EXISTF pathname •••
EXISTF reads the object pathname(s) you supply and checks to see if the object exists.
If the object does exist, EXISTF returns with a good program status (PGM_ $TRUE). If
the object does not exist, EXISTF returns an error status (PGM_$FALSE).
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify the object to be checked. Multiple pathnames and
If you specify more than one
wildcarding are permitted.
pathname, all the objects must exist for EXISTF to return
TRUE.
EXAMPLES
1. $ if eXistf my file then args liThe file is there."
$_else args "Out of luck." end1f
Out of luck.
$
Shell Commands
4-128
Test for "my_file"
which does not
exist.
EXISTVAR (EXIST _ VARIABLE)
o
EXISTVAR (EXIST_VARIABLE) -- Check that a variable is set.
FORMAT
EXISTVAR var name .••
The EXISTVAR command checks to see if the variable name(s) declared as its
argument(s) has a currently set value. If the variable is currently set, EXISTVAR
returns a "TRUE" value. If the variable is not currently set, EXISTVAR returns
"FALSE". If you specify more than one variable name to check, all the variables must
exist for EXISTVAR to return II TRUE II.
ARGUMENTS
o
var _name [.••]
(required)
Specify the variable name to be checked. Multiple names are
permitted, separated by blanks.
o
o
o
4-129
Shell Command8
EXIT
EXIT -- Exit from a loop.
FORMAT
EXIT
EXIT terminates the flow of control in a Shell loop construct (FOR, SELECT, and
WHILE). When EXIT is encountered, control passes to the first command following the
body of the loop (see example below).
You may also interrupt the flow of control in a loop without actually leaving the loop by
using the NEXT command. See the NEXT command description for more information.
Do not confuse this command with the DM command EX, which exits the Display
Manger and returns control to the Boot Shell. See the EX command description in the
DM commands chapter for more information.
The EXIT command requires no arguments or options.
EXAMPLES
Consider the following section from a Shell script:
WHILE «true»
DO
READe a
IF
"y"» THEN EXIT ENDIF
ARGS "still looking ... "
ENDDO
ARGS "Finished."
«"'a =
When the READe (READ_CHARACTER) command reads a character into variable II a II that
matches the character "y", the EXIT command executes and causes the script to jump to
the command following the ENDDO.
For more information on variables, refer to the DOMAIN System User '8 Guide.
Shell Commands
4-130
~..
(
~--'
EXPORT
o
EXPORT -- Change a Shell variable into an Environment variable.
FORMAT
EXPORT var name ...
The Shell can access enviroment variables using all of the standard variable commands
and operators. The EXPORT command adds the capability of turning regular Shell
variables into environment variables.
Environment variables are variables that programs can access or set and that are used to
store global state information. Several are generated automatically when you create a
process; they can be displayed using the LVAR (LIST _ VARIABLES) command. For
example:
o
o
$ lvar
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
environment
$
=
NODETYPE
DN400
TZ
ESTSEDT
PATH = :-com:/usr/ucb:/bin:/com:/usr/bin
TERM
apollo_iSP
HOME
//node_8e4/joseph
USER
joseph
LOGNAME
joseph
PROJECT
none
ORGANIZATION
r d
NODEID
8E4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Environment variables are of special interest to users of DO~N/IX.
DOMAIN/IX documentation for additional information.
NOTE:
o
Consult the
The Shell creates environment variables in UPPERCASE only. (Environment
variables are case sensitive in DO~N/IX; the Shell only allows uppercase
ones to avoid collisions between environment variables and Shell variables.)
ARGUMENTS
var name
(required)
Specify the Shell variable to be changed into an environment
variable. It doesn't matter whether or not the name is typed in
uppercase; the Shell converts it to uppercase automatically.
Multiple variable names are permitted, separated by blanks. If
the specified variable does not exist, EXPORT creates it.
EXAMPLES
o
$ eon
$ current_dir := II//panacea/joe ll
$ lvar
string current_dir
//panacea/joe
environment USER
joe
environment LOGNAME
joe
=
=
=
4-131
(Shell variable created.)
Shell Commands
EXPORT
=
environment PROJECT
none
environment ORGANIZATION
r d
environment NODEID
D5B
environment PATH
:-com:/usr/ucb:/bin:/com:/usr/bin
environment TERM
apollo_19L
environment NODETYPE
DN300
environment TZ
EST5EDT
environment HOME
//panacea/joe
$ export current_dir
$ lvar
environment USER
joe
environment LOGNAME
joe
environment PROJECT = none
environment ORGANIZATION
r d
environment NOOEIO = 05B
environment PATH
:-com:/usr/ucb:/bin:/com:/usr/bin
environment TERM
apollo_19L
environment NOOETYPE
ON300
environment TZ
EST5EDT
environment HOME = //panacea/joe
environment CURRENT_OIR
//panacea/joe (Environment variable created.)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Shell Commands
4-132
FIND
o
FIND
ORPHANS
ORPHANS -- Locate and catalog uncataloged objects.
FORMAT
FIND _ ORPHANS [options] [volume_pathname]
FIND _ ORPHANS finds all uncataloged permanent objects in a local volume. It uses or
creates a directory ORPHANS in the root of the volume and enters the names of all
objects not cataloged elsewhere. Uncataloged directories are found first, so no redundancy
occurs.
o
o
The user of this command must have read permission to all directories on the volume. If
some directory is not readable, every object under that directory will be cataloged in the
ORPHANS directory. In addition, the user must either have permission to create the
ORPHANS directory or to catalog objects in ORPHANS when it already exists.
The objects cataloged by FIND _ ORPHANS are given sequential names like Fl, F2, etc.,
and can be moved using MVF to a directory of the user's choice.
This command is useful for finding objects that are lost by a broken directory. It should
be run only on a quiescent node: i.e., one not connected to the network (use NETSVC -N
to disable network communications) and not actively running any processes other than
the one performing the FIND _ ORPHANS operation.
ARGUMENTS
volume _pathname
(optional)
Specify the name of the volume to be searched. The volume
must be physically attached to your node; you may not find
orphan objects on volumes elsewhere in the network.
Default if omitted: search node boot volume
o
OPTIONS
-V[ERIFY]
Verify only; don't catalog any orphans
EXAMPLES
$ find_orphans
0
llEE936C.50000105
1216E28E.40000105
12A2BC34.40000105
12B782DC.40000105
12B78321.50000105
12B78353.60000105
12B783EF.00000105
12B784E3.90000105
12B7863C.30000105
12C18DBE.40000105
12F98201.40000105
13452895.80000105
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
fl
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
flO
fl1
f12
4-133
Shell Oommands
FIND
ORPHANS
140090B4.40000105
140090F4.EOOO0105
15322D3A.70000105
17872C66.50000105
Number of orphans:
$ ld /orphans -a
->
->
->
->
16
f13
f14
f15
f16
C"
._/
Directory "/orphans":
sys
type
type
uid
blocks
used
current
length
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
file
rec
nil
obj
nil
nil
nil
uasc
mbx
nil
nil
obj
obj
rec
obj
mbx
nil
2
0
1
4
4
4
0
17
0
0
1462
0
58590
4096
4096
4096
245
280172
0
0
65862
135724
8412
116188
278636
0
66
134
9
115
15
0
attr rights
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
p-ndwrx
fl
flO
fll
f12
ft3
f14
f15
f16
f2
f3
(',
,,---------'
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
C~
16 entries, 371 blocks used.
Shell Commands
name
4-134
I
--------------------------------
FLEN (FILE _ LENGTH)
o
FLEN (FILE_LENGTH) -- Count lines, words, and characters in a file.
FORMAT
FLEN [options] [pathname .••]
FLEN prints the number of lines, words, and characters in each of the named files. A
word is defined as any sequence of characters delimited by tabs, spaces, and NEWLlNEs.
If more than one file is specified, totals for all the files are printed, also.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(required)
Specify input file.
permitted.
Multiple file names and wildcarding are
Default if omitted: read standard input; suppress total counts
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, all counts are reported.
o
-L
Print only line counts.
-w
Print only word counts.
-0
Print only character counts.
Options may be mixed to achieve the desired reporting results.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
o
EXAMPLES
$ flen -L -C mary
Print the number of lines and characters in the
file 'mary'.
o
4-135
Shell Commands
FMC (FORMAT _MULTI_ COLUMN)
FMC (FORMAT _MULTI_ COLUMN) -- Forma.t text into multiple columns.
FORMAT
FMC [options] [pathname •••]
FMC reads the named files and formats them into multiple columns on standard output.
Each input line is placed in one column of an output line; input lines which are longer
than the output column width are truncated. This command is useful to format text
which is already in the form of a column or list.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify input file. Multiple pathnames are permitted, separated
by blanks.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
The options control output format. If no options are specified, the default output format is:
number of columns
page length
column width
gutter width
-C n
2
55
60
8
Specify n columns. Default: 2.
-L n
Specify page length in n lines. FMC produces output in pages,
but does not place separators between the pages. Default: 55.
-Wn
Specify column width in n characters. Input lines longer than n
characters are truncated. Default: 60.
-G n
Specify gutter width in n spaces.
between columns. Default: 8.
-D n
Specify display terminal as output device. The column width is
set to n characters and the page size is set to 24 lines. The
number of columns and the gutter width are computed to
maximize the amount of information on the screen. Default: 10.
The gutter is the space
EXAMPLES
$ crefs sample I fmc -c 3 -w 22 -g 4
This command line first produces a cross-referenced list of all the symbols in the file
SAMPLE, then formats the report in a 3-column list.
Shell Oommands
4-136
c
FMT (FORMAT _ TEXT)
o
FMT
(FORMAT_TEXT) --
Format a text file.
FORMAT
FMT [pathname •••] [options]
FMT is a general purpose text formatting program, allowing you to arrange output text
according to formatting directives embedded in the input file or typed on·standard input.
By default, formatted text is written to standard output. You may redirect it to a file
with the -OUT option.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(optional)
Specify input file to be formatted. This argument must precede
any command line options. Multiple pathnames and wildcarding
are permitted; however, FMT will concatenate multiple files
prior to formatting. If FMT cannot find one of the specified
input files, control shifts to standard input.
Default if omitted: read standard input
o
OPTIONS
-F n
Begin output at the first page numbered n.
-Tn
Terminate output at the first page numbered higher than n.
-8
o
Stop before printing each page, including the first. This option
is useful for paper manipulation. The prompt II Type return to
begin a page" is issued only once, before the first page.
-PO n
Page Offset. Shift the entire document n spaces to the right.
-LF
List names of files as they are processed.
-OUT pathname
Specify output file. If this option is omitted, formatted text is
written to standard output.
EXAMPLES
$ fmt mary -out mary.formatted -po 9
$
Format "mary" with a page offset
of 9 spaces, and write the
res~lts to "mary.formatted".
Request Line Summary
o
Complete information on using FMT is available in the DOMAIN System Utilities manual.
4-137
Shell Commands
FMT (FORMAT _ TEXT)
Request
Initial
Default
.#
. bd
.bp
.br
.cc
.ce
.cu
.de
.ef
n
n
n=i
c
c=.
n
n
n=i
n=n+i
c=.
n=i
n=l
xx
/l/c/r
Break
Meaning
no
Ignore this line. Precede comment
lines with this symbol .
Boldface the next n lines
Begin new page and number it n
Break
Control character becomes c
Center the next n input lines
Continuously underline next n input lines
Command xx; ends at .EN
Foots on even pages are l(eft), c(enter) ,
r(ight). '#' and '%' produce page number
and date, respectively .
Heads on even pages are l(eft), c(enter) ,
r(ight) . '#' and '%' produce page number
and date, respectively.
Terminate command definition
Begin filling output lines
Foot titles are l(eft), c(enter), r(ight)
'#' and '%' produce page number and date,
respectively .
Head title is l(eft), c(enter), r(ight)
'#' and '%' produce page number and date,
respectively .
Set left margin to column n+i
Begin justifying filled lines
Set line spacing to n
Space between top of page and head
Space between head and text
Space between text and foot
Space between foot and bottom
Need n lines; break if new page
Stop filling'
Stop justifying
Set number register x to m,
-m, +m for decrement, increment
Foots on odd pages are l(eft), c(enter) ,
r(ight) . '#' and '%' produce page number
and date, respectively .
Heads on odd pages are l(eft), c(enter) ,
r(ight). '#' and '%' produce page number
and date, respectively.
Set page length to n lines
Set page offset to n spaces
Tab replacement character is c
Set right margin to column n
Change fixed space character to c
Switch input to file
Space n lines, except at top of page
Space to line n from top; -n spaces to line
n from bottom
Set tab stops at columns ni, n2, ...
Tab character is c
Temporarily indent next output line n
spaces
Underline words in the next n input lines
no
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
. eh /l/c/,r
no
.en
.fi
yes
.fo /l/c/r
no
yes
no
. he /l/c/r
no
. in
. ju
.ls
.mi
.m2
.m3
.m4
.ne
.nf
.nj
.nr
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
x m
n=O
yes
n=i
n=3
n=2
n=2
n=3
no
no
m=O
n=O
yes
n=i
n=3
n=2
n=2
n=3
n=O
m=O
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
y/n
yes
no
no
.of /l/c/r
no
. oh /l/c/r
no
.pl
.po
.rc
.rm
.sc
.so
.sp
.st
n
n
c
n
c
file
n=66
n=O
n=66
n=O
n=i
n=O
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
n=65
c=#
n=65
c=#
. ta ni n2 ...
.tc c
.ti n
n=O
no
no
yes
.ul n
n=i
no
n
n
Shell Oommands
4-138
FMT (FORMAT_TEXT)
o
IN-LINE FLAGS
{ c }
{leI}
@nc
#
no
no
no
no
Underline characters enclosed in braces
Boldface characters enclosed in braces
Replace with value in number register c
Insert literal blank
KEY
n
t
c
o
denotes numerical values
denotes titles
denotes single characters
Signed numbers signify relative changes to a quantity; unsigned numbers signify absolute
settings. Unless otherwise noted, omitted 'n' fields set the value to 1, omitted 't' fields are
empty, and omitted 'e' fields restore the default character.
o
o
o
4-139
Shell Commands
FOR
FOR -- Execute a FOR statement.
FORMAT
FOR var name .- int_expr [TO int_expr] [BY int_expr] command ... ENDFOR
FOR var name IN string_expr [BY {CHARIWORDILINE}]
command ... ENDFOR
FOR allows you to build a control structure that executes commands repeatedly as long
as the result of a Boolean test is TRUE. The FOR command has two formats: one for
assigning and testing integer expressions, and one for assigning and testing string
expressions.
In the integer form, the (optional) TO and BY clauses permit you to specify ranges and
increment values, respectively. For example, you might want to loop 5 times by saying
FOR a := 0 TO 10 BY 2
If you do not specify "BY int_expr", the default increment is 1. If you do not specify
II TO int _ expr", you will probably want to increment the variable manually inside the
body of the loop. You should also put a test condition inside the loop (and probably use
an EXIT to get out) or else you risk looping forever.
In the string form, the (optional) BY clause allows you to control the string assignment
operation. If you specify "BY WORD II (the default), each word (a sequence of non-blank
characters) in 'string_expr' is assigned to 'var _name' one at a time until 'string_expr'
is exhausted. You may also assign string values a character at a time, or a line at a time,
by using the "BY CHAR" and "BY LINE II clauses, respectively.
ARGUMENTS
var name
(required)
Specify the name of the Shell variable whose value is to be
assigned and tested.
int_expr
(required)
Specify any valid expression that returns an integer value.
string _ expr
(required)
Specify any valid expression that returns a string value.
command .••
(required)
c
Specify the command to be executed as long as the FOR test
returns TRUE. This may be a Shell command, a Shell script, a
variable assignment, or any other valid Shell operation. Multiple
commands are permitted; separate them with semicolons or
NEWLINE characters.
c
Shell Commands
4-140
· FOR
o
EXAMPLES
1. The following example demonstrates the advantages of a FOR loop over a
WHn..E loop in one instance. Assume these line appear in a Shell script.
#
#
A loop using WHILE.
#
eon
a := 0
while «-a <= 10)) do
args -a
-a + 2
a
enddo
#
o
#
#
The same loop using FOR.
FOR a - 0 TO 10 BY 2
args -a
ENDFOR
#
#
End of script.
2. This example assigns three names to a variable.
o
#
#
#
Script FILE_NAME
eon
FOR file IN foo bar zap" BY word
args -file
ENDFOR
II
#
#
End of script.
Execution produces:
o
$ file_name
foo
bar
zap
$
o
4-141
Shell Commands
FPAT (FIND _ PATTERN)
FPAT
(FIND_PATTERN) --
Find a text pattern in an ASCII file.
FORMAT
FPAT [options] [pathname ••• - P] reg_ expr •••
FPAT searches its input file(s) for lines matching the specified regular expressions and
writes them to standard output or the file specified.
ARGUMENTS
reg_ expr •••
(required)
pathname -P
(optional)
One or more regular expression patterns. By default, a line that
contains any of these expressions matches and is written to
standard output. For a description of regular expressions used
for pattern matching, see the chapter on DM basics. Patterns
containing embedded spaces or Shell special characters must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
Specify name of file to be searched. If you specify a pathname
with this argument, you must follow it with "_p II to separate the
pathname(s) from the search patterns on the command line.
Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, any line that matches anyone of the regular expressions is
considered a matching line.
-OUT pathname
Write output to specified file. If input file names were specified,
output filename can be derived. If this option is not specified,
matching lines are written to standard output.
-A
Select only lines that match ALL regular expressions, in any
order.
-x
Select only lines containing NONE of the regular expressions.
-C
W rite only a count of matching lines, not the lines themselves.
-I
Ignore cases for search (i.e., become case-insensitive).
-L
W rite line number with each line that matches the regular
expression.
-Mn
Set the maximum number of search lines to n (a decimal value).
FPAT terminates after searching n lines.
Shell Commands
4-142
c
c'
FPAT (FIND_PATTERN)
o
-LF
Display the name of the file being examined before searching its
lines.
-LM
Similar to -LF, but display the name{s) of only those file{s)
which contain matches for the regular expression.
-RMn
Set maximum number of matches to be reported for this
execution of FPAT.
-RMF n
Set maximum number of matches to be reported for each file
being searched.
Summary of Regular Expression Notation
c
o
?
%
$
[ ... ]
[- ... ]
[c1-c2]
@c
@n
@t
*{ ... }
o
Literal character
Any character (except newline)
Beginning of line
End of line
Character class (anyone of these characters)
Negated character class (all characters except those in brackets)
Any single character in the range c1 through c2
Escaped character (e.g.,@%, @[, @*)
Newline
Tab character
Closure (zero or more occurrences of previous pattern)
Tagged pattern
EXAMPLES
1. Assume the file "text" contains:
now
is
the
time
for
all
good
o
Then the command,
$ fpat text -p
now
for
good
$
produces ...
0
and the command,
$ fpat -x -m 5 -1 text -p
2) is
(
3) the
(
4) time
$
0
produces ...
(
o
4-143
Shell Commands
FPAT (FIND _ PATTERN)
2. $ fpat text?* -p the
Search for the string "the" in all files
whose names begin with "text".
3. $ fpat text?* -p the -out =.out
Search for the string "the" in all
files whose names begin with "text".
(i.e .. "text". "text!". "text file".
etc.) and write the output to-the
files "text.out". "text!.out".
"text_file.out". etc.
c
c
Shell Commands
4-144
~~~--.-----------
------------------------------------ - - - - - - - - -
FPATB (FIND _PATTERN_BLOCK)
o
FPATB (FIND_PATTERN_BLOCK) -- Find blocks of text containing patterns.
FORMAT
FPATB [options] [pathname .•. -P] reg_expr .•• [-OUT pathname]
FPATB reads blocks of text from its input files and writes them to its output file(s) so
they meet the specified matching criteria. By default, blocks of lines are separated by an
empty line or by a line containing only blanks.
FPATB is similar to FPAT
(FIND _PATTERN) except that if a pattern is found, the entire block of lines is copied to
output, rather than only the line in which the pattern occurs. Thus, it is useful for
searching mailing lists, bibliographies, and similar files, where several lines are grouped
together to form cohesive units.
o
o
ARGUMENTS
reg_expr
(required)
pathname -P
(optional)
Specify regular expression to be used for matching search. Each
expression defines a text pattern, and you can specify up to nine
expressions with each FPATB command.
FPATB is
case-sensitive; for example, II a II is different from II All. For a
description of regular expressions used for pattern matching,
see the chapter on DM basics.
Specify name of file to be searched. If you specify a pathname
with this argument, you must follow it with "_p" to separate the
pathname(s) from the search patterns on the command line.
Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: read standard input
o
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, any block containing a line that matches anyone of the regular
expressions is considered a matching block.
-OUT pathname
Write output to specified file. If input file names were specified,
output filename can be derived. If this option is specified, it
must be the last option on the command line (i.e., it must follow
any regular expressions specified). If this option is not specified,
matching lines are written to standard output.
o
-A
Select only blocks containing lines that match ALL regular
expressions, in any order.
-x
Select only blocks containing NONE of the regular expressions.
-c
W rite only a count of matching lines, not the lines themselves.
4-145
Shell Commands
FPATB (FIND_PATTERN_BLOCK)
Specify 'reg _ expr l' as the block separator, instead of a blank
or empty line.
Text blocks begin at lines containing
'reg_exprl'. If -B is specified and -E is not, 'reg_exprl' begins
and ends the block.
-E reg_ expr2
Specify 'reg _ expr l' to start a block and 'reg _ expr2' to end a
block. Note that the -E option is used only in conjunction with
the -B option.
-L n
Write only the first n lines of selected blocks. If a block
contains fewer than n lines, this option pads the output block
with blank lines.
-LF
Display the name of the file being examined before searching its
lines.
c
Summary of Regular Expression Notation
c
?
%
$
[ ... ]
[- ... ]
[c1-c2]
@c
@n
@t
*{ ... }
Literal character
Any character (except newline)
Beginning of line
End of line
Character class (anyone of these characters)
Negated character class (all characters except those in brackets)
Any single character in the range c1 through c2
Escaped character (e.g .. @%. @[. @*)
Newline
Tab character
Closure (zero or more occurrences of previous pattern)
Tagged pattern
c
EXAMPLES
$ fpatb address list -p 01824 -out Zip_list
$
Locate text blocks with
the string "01824" in
the file "address list"
and write the results
to "Zip_list".
c'
Shell Oommands
4-146
-----~---.-----------
FPPMASK (FLOATING_POINT ':"'MASK)
o
FPPMASK (FLOATING_POINT _MASK) -- Set/display floating-point error mask.
FORMAT
FPPMASK [options]
FPPMASK sets or displays the state of the floating-point package error mask for a
process. The error mask specifies some of the conditions that constitute a floating-point
exception for the process.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the current floating-point error mask condition is displayed.
o
- D condition •••
Disable 'condition' (see below).
specified.
Both conditions may be
- E condition •••
Enable 'condition' (see below). Both conditions may be specified;
'condition' may be either of the following:
o
LOS
Loss of significance. This condition occurs when subtracting
floating-point values that are exactly equal.
UNDR
Underflow. This condition occurs when a floating-point result is
too small to be represented. For single-precision values, this
error occurs at about 0.118E-37. For double-precision values,
the error occurs at about 0.223E-307.
Both conditions are initially disabled when a process is created.
o
EXAMPLES
Display current settings.
1. $ fppmask
LOS (loss of significance):
UNDR (underflow):
disabled
disabled
2. $ fppmask -e los undr
Enable both LOS and UNDR
conditions.
3. $ fppmask -d undr
Disable UNDR condition.
o
4-147
Shell Commands
FSERR (FIND _ SPELLING _ ERRORS)
FSERR (FIND _SPELLING_ERRORS) -- Find spelling errors.
FORMAT
FSERR [pathname •••] [options]
FSERR copies the named files line-by-line to standard output, while looking up each
word in a dictionary. If it finds any spelling errors on a line, or if it finds words that are
not in the spelling dictionary, FSERR prints the line containing the questionable word
and asks whether or not the word is spelled correctly. If you indicate that the word is
misspelled, you are prompted for the correct spelling. FSERR corrects the spelling on
standard output and continues.
FSERR uses three ASCII files. The large standard dictionary file is /SYS/DICT, which
contains the bulk of the words known to FSERR. Add words to this file if you want
them to become permanent additions to your dictionary, making sure entries remain in
alphabetical order. (Use the SRF (SORT _FILE) command to alphabetize the file if
necessary.) If you do not wish to alter the standard dictionary, you may direct FSERR
to use a file containing your own special words by specifying the -D option each time you
invoke the command.
/SYS/DICTDX serves as an index into the large dictionary file to speed searches. Do not
edit this file manually. If you make changes to /SYS/DICT, delete the index file; FSERR
generates a new one if /SYS/DICTDX does not exist. Note that it takes some time to
generate this index, so be prepared for a delay the first time you use FSERR after
altering the dictionary.
Finally, a relatively few "common words" that occur with great frequency are stored in
/SYS/CDICT. These are read and put into an internal hash table each time FSERR
starts up, making access to them faster than looking in the large dictionary file. This list
of words is not alphabetized; rather, words appear in order of relative frequency, with
the most common words at the top of the file. You may make changes to this file if
necessary. Just be careful not to make the file too big, since that would defeat the
purpose of a high-speed lookup mechanism for common words.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file containing text to be checked. Multiple pathnames
are permitted separated by blanks.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
-F
Process words just after a period ('.') in column 1 (i.e., FMT
directives). The default is to ignore such "words".
-N
Process digits. The default is to ignore digits.
-u
Shell Commands
Underline misspelled words instead of prompting for correction
or verification.
4-148
----------
----------
FSERR (FIND _SPELLING_ERRORS)
o
-8
Collect and print statistics on dictionary use.
-0 pathname
Write words that are not in the dictionary, but are correctly
spelled, into 'pathname'.
-D pathname
Add the words in the file 'pathname' to the dictionary used for
this run. Words in the file must appear one per line.
o
o
o
o
4-149
Shell Commands
FST (FAULT_STATUS)
FST
(FAULT_STATUS) --
Print fault status information.
FORMAT
FST [options]
FST prints information about the most recent fault that occurred in the process. The
information always includes the fault status, the program counter (PC) at which the fault
occurred, and a textual description of the error (as reported by the system call
ERROR_ $PRINT).
This command is intended for system-level debugging.
If you are using a Peripheral Bus Unit (PBU) device, you can get fault information by
using the option "_U" (see below).
\
C
../
OPTIONS
-R
Print the contents of the CPU general registers when the fault
occurred.
-S
Print the supervisor PC, entry control block (ECB), and status
register (SR) if the fault occurred in supervisor mode. This
option is ignored if the fault occurred in user mode.
-A
Print all available fault information.
information as both-S and -R.)
-Un
Print the same information as both -S and -R for faults caused
by the PBU interrupt handler for unit n.
(Prints the same
EXAMPLES
$ fst -a
Fault Diagnostic Information
Fault Status
00120010:
process quit (from as I fault handler)
User Fault PC
000157FC
DO-D7: 00120010 00000000 00000002 FFFFFFFE 00000008 00000006 00000182 00000004
AO-A7: 0020A452 00E2F22E 0020A3D4 0020A450 00E2F174 0000C92C 002746B4 002746AC
Supervisor ECB
00000000
Supervisor SR
0000
Supervisor PC
00000000
=
=
=
=
=
Shell Commands
4-150
------------------
HELP
o
HELP -- Provide help on Shell and DM commands.
FORMAT
HELP [topic [subtopic] ]
This feature provides information on Shell and DM commands and miscellaneous system
services by opening a window to display the file that you request. For a list of subjects
in the HELP library, type:
$ HELP INDEX
o
Access to system HELP files is also provided through the key on low-profile
keyboards. This key opens a read-only pad on a HELP file using your typed input to
construct the pathname, so the syntax is slightly different if you are seeking information
on a subtopic. In that case, separate the topic and subtopic with a slash U) instead of a
blank. For example:
Help on: shell/commands
ARGUMENTS
o
topic
(optional)
Specify the name of the command or topic for which you desire
help.
Default if omitted: display introductory information
subtopic
(optional)
Specify subtopic to be viewed. For example,
$ help shell commands
o
displays a topical index of Shell commands, while
$ help shell
displays general information about the Shell.
Default if omitted: no subtopic displayed
o
4-151
Shell Commands
HLPVER (HELP _VERSION)
HLPVER (HELP_VERSION) -- Provide HELP support for Shell scripts.
FORMAT
HLPVER script _ name version Al
HLPVER provides access to the DOMAIN HELP system utilities that support the
standard command options -HELP, -VERSION, and -USAGE for Shell commands. By
placing the HLPVER command inside a Shell script, you can allow users of the script to
specify these three standard command options and receive meaningful output.
HLPVER looks for help information in a file called /SYS/HELP /script_name.HLP.
HELP files have special information at the top that HLPVER uses. This information
must follow a standard format. The following example shows the header of the HELP
file for the WD (WORKING _DIRECTORY) command.
1.1;wd (working_directory). revision 1.1. 81/06/27
WD (WORKING_DIRECTORY) -- Set or display the current working directory.
usage: ~TI [pathname]
All HLPVER output goes to standard output (normally directed to the process transcript
pad). HLPVER returns the first line of the HELP file in response to -VERSION. It
returns the second line through the first blank line in the file in response to -USAGE. It
returns the entire file in response to -HELP.
Any user file placed in the /SYS/HELP directory is also available to the HELP command
for display in a standard HELP window. Thus the file /SYS/HELP /MARY.HLP can be
viewed with $ HELP MARY regardless of whether or not you are using HLPVER inside
the MARY script. HLPVER is solely for the purpose of enabling the three standard
command options mentioned above.
ARGUMENTS
script _ name
(required)
version
(required)
Specify the name or. the script for which HELP is to be
provided. The name is the right-most leaf in the pathname, not
the entire pathname of the script. HLPVER uses this name to
construct the pathname for the HELP file to be returned (i.e.,
/SYS/HELP /script _name.HLP).
Specify the version number of the Shell script. HLPVER
compares this number to the version number in the HELP file
(the first characters in the file up to the first semicolon) and
returns an error if they do not match. This allows you to
coordinate versions of the script and the HELP file.
Al
(required)
Shell Commands
Pass in the desired option from the command line. II 1" must
appear literally so that HLPVER can tell what information to
return (-HELP, -VERSION, or -USAGE). See the example
below.
A
4-152
c
------------------------
HLPVER (HELP _VERSION)
o
EXAMPLES
Assume that the following lines appear in a file called IItest_script":
#
# Example script showing HLPVER usage.
#
hlpver test_script 1.0 -1
args "Please enter
#
End of script
When the user types:
o
$ test_script -help
HLPVER returns the contents of /SYS/HELP /TEST _SORIPT.HLP to the transcript pad.
Likewise, when the user types:
$ test_script -version
HLPVER returns the first line of the HELP file containing the version number.
o
o
o
4-153
Shell Commands
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER)
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER) -- Program counter histogram.
FORMAT
HPC [options] pathname [args •••]
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER), part of DPAK (DOMAIN Performance Analysis
Kit), looks at the performance of programs at the PC level.
HPC produces a histogram of the program counter during program execution, thus
helping you locate the most compute-bound portions of your program.
While your program is executing, HPC samples the program counter at regular intervals,
gathering a set of data points. Each data point records the region in which the program
was executing -- the location of the program counter -- when the sample was taken.
HPC divides your program into 256 equally sized regions called "buckets. 1I The size of
the region depends on the size of your program or the range you select. The smaller the
regions, the better the resolution of the analysis.
When execution of your program has ended, HPC displays statistics and a histogram (bar
graph) of the program counter. Each bar corresponds to an area of program memory.
The length of the bar indicates how much time the program spent executing in the
corresponding area. HPC tells you which procedures and line numbers each bar
represents.
While HPC and your program are executing, a serial line is not available for output.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
args
(optional)
Specify the name of the program to be evaluated.
Specify any arguments to be passed to the program
IIpathname li • These are not processed by HPC, but passed
directly to your program.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, a histogram is produced for the entire program, with 500
samples taken per second.
-LOW x
Specify lowest address ('x') to be included in the histogram. 'x'
must be a hexadecimal value. If this option is omitted, the
histogram starts at the beginning of the program or procedure
(see -FROM below).
-HIGH x
Specify highest address ('x') to be included in the histogram. 'x'
must be a hexadecimal value. If this option is omitted, the
Shell Commands
4-154
c'
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER)
o
histogram continues to the end of the program or procedure (see
-TO below).
- FROM procedure
Specify the beginning of a procedure as the lowest address to be
included in the histogram. If both -FROM and -LOW are
omitted, the histogram starts at the beginning of the program.
Note the the procedure name is case-insensitive.
-TO procedure
Specify the end of a procedure as the highest address to be
included in the histogram. If both -TO and -HIGH are omitted,
the histogram stops at the end of the program. Note the the
procedure name is case-insensitive.
-PROC procedure
o
o
Specify a single procedure to be included in the histogram. Note
the the procedure name is case-insensitive.
By limiting the range of addresses in the histogram with -LOW, -HIGH, -FROM, -TO, and
-PROC, you can study a specific part of your program, such as an I/O routine.
-LIMIT n
Limit the displayed histogram bars to those that represent more
than 'n'% of the monitored program execution. The default
value for 'n' is 1. Use -LTh1IT 0 to show all histogram entries.
-RATE n
Specify how many times ('n') HPC samples the program counter
per second. 'n' must. be a decimal number in the range 5 to
2000. The default is 500 samples per second. A higher rate
results in a more accurate histogram, but tends to slow program
execution.
-NHDR
Generate the histogram without the header information. Using
this option makes filtering the output easier.
-MAP
Generate a list of the names and starting and ending locations
of the procedures in the program. This list is reduced if -FROM,
-TO, -HIGH, or -LOW are used to restrict monitoring to specific
procedures or memory addresses. The output from this option
can be quite verbose for large programs.
-BRIEF
Produce a compact bar chart by showing only the name of the
first procedure, or procedure fragment, contained in the bucket
represented by each bar. By default, DPAT shows the names of
all procedures or procedure fragments contained in the bucket.
This option also suppresses source line information.
o
EXAMPLES
This section describes the use of HPC with the program VANDERBILT. First we call HPC,
passing 'VANDERBIL T' as an argument. Then we describe the output of HPC's analysis of
VANDERBILT.
o
We invoke HPC as follows:
$ HPC VANDERBIL T
4-155
Shell Oommands
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER)
Note that any HPC option would precede the name 'VANDERB~ T'.
HPC displays the following (each of the note numbers, e.g., {I}, are explained after the
output).
c
{I}
Address
00208040
002A6250
002083C4
Size
00000384
000000A8
0000015A
Section
PROCEDURE$
OATA$
DEBUG $
{2}
VANOERBILT Done.
{3}
Program //corey/d_s/vanderbilt.bin from 00208040 to 0020843F in 4-byte
increments
87178 interrupts. 7654 low misses. 2671 high misses. 67556 process
misses
9297 measurements in 209 buckets. 11% percent of total
C
{4}
Address
Proc. Name
Stmt. No.
0020811C
00208120
00208124
002D8128
002D812C
00208230
00208234
00208238
002D8308
002D830C
00208310
00208314
00208318
0020831C
00208320
00208324
002D8328
002D832C
002D8330
00208338
002D833C
002D8340
00208344
002D8348
0020834C
00208350
00208354
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
OECORATOR
DECORATOR
DECORATOR
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
ELECTRICIAN
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
PLUMBER
Less than 1%
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Shell Commands
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
73
75
76
76
76
100
100
100
-110
110
111
112
112
114
114
114
116
116-123
124
125
125
127
127
127
129
129-
4-156
% of Hits
]
1.2%
]
1.0%
]
1.5%
]
1.5%
]
1.2%
]
6.0%
]
3.0%
]
7.2%
]
2.7%
]
1.3%
]
1.5%
]
1.7%
]
1.4%
] 13.7%
]
8.5%
] 16.6%
]
1.5%
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
1.3%
2.5%
1.4%
1.2%
1.4%
4.2%
2.5%
6.0%
1.0%
1.3%
5.4%
1*
1*
*
*
*
******
***
*******
**
*
*
*
*
************
********
***************
*
*
**
*
*
*
****
**
******
*
*
*****
(~
\"-'''/
C
C
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_COUNTER)
o
Explanation of Notes
{I} A section map, showing the addresses and SIzes of the program sections in
VANDERBILT.
{2} The output of the VANDERBIL T program itself, which IS simply the print
statement 'VANDERBIL T Done.'
{3} HPC parameters and statistics are summarized as follows:
Program //c~rey/d_s/vanderbilt.bin from (a) 002D8040 to
(b) 002D843F in (c) 4-byte increments
(d) 87178 interrupts. ~) 7654 low misses.
(f) 2671 high misses. (g) 67556 process misses
(h) 9297 measurements in (i) 209 buckets.
11% percent of total
6;
o
o
o
Note that we have annotated the output to clarify the following descriptions.
from (a) to (b)
The range of addresses in the sample. These addresses are
derived from those specified with the -LOW and -HIGH or
-FROM and -TO options after rounding to the nearest bucket
address. If no option is specified, the range is the starting and
ending addresses of the program.
{c}-byte increments
The bucket sizet derived from the equation {b-a )/256=c where
b is the last address given, and a is the first address given in
the II from (a) to (b;U range described above. Also, where 'c' is
rounded up to the nearest power of 2. 256 is the maximum
number of buckets.
(d) interrupts
The number of times HPC sampled the program coun.t.er.
(e) low misses
The number of data points below the Low address. This is
specified with either the -LOW option, the -FROM option, or
the low end of the program.
(f) high misses
The number of data points above the High address. This is
specified with either the -HIGH option, the -FROM option, or
the high end of the program.
(g) process misses The number of data points ignored because they are not
within the monitored process.
(h) measurements The number of real hits in the program.
This number is
derived from the equation h=d-{e+f+g), that is, the number
of interrupts minus the low, high, and process misses.
(i) buckets
o
The number of buckets between the highest and lowest
buckets in which there were any real hits, inclusive. HPC
divides the range of addresses in the sample. Buckets are
numbered consecutively from 0 according to increasing bucket
4-157
Shell Commands
HPC (HISTOGRAM_PROGRAM_ COUNTER)
address. The equation is i=(highest non-zero bucket number)
- (lowest non-zero bucket number) + 1, where non-zero
buckets is less than or equal to 256.
(j) percent of total
The ratio of real hits to interrupts, expressed as a percentage.
The percentage is derived from the equation j=(h/d)*10rf%.
This number is smaller if your program spends a lot of time
in the system libraries performing I/O.
In our example, the program ran from (a) 002D8040 to (b) 002D843F. While
VANDERBILT was running, there were 87178 interrupts, 7654 low misses, and
2671 high misses. The number '9297 measurements' indicates the number of
hits between the high and low addresses in the monitored process. The
percentages of hits shown in {4} are relative to the 11% of the total. For
example, of the 11% hits to the program, 13.7% of them were in statement 114.
{4} The HPC histogram.
The histogram lists buckets in ascending· order by
hexadecimal bucket address. Buckets for which the real hit percentage fell
below the -LIMIT threshold are not listed. For each bucket, HPC lists the
names of procedures contained entirely or partially in the bucket. For a
procedure that is only partially contained in the bucket, HPC prints source line
numbers to indicate which part of the procedure resided in the bucket, in the
following form:
[starting-line-number - ending-line-number]
If the end of the procedure is contained in the bucket, HPC omits
'ending-line-number'. If the start of the procedure is contained in the bucket,
HPC omits 'starting-line-number'. If the procedure resides entirely within the
bucket, HPC prints no source line numbers for the procedure.
For each listed bucket, HPC prints a percentage and a bar composed of asterisks
(*). The percentage indicates the percentage of real hits that fell into the
bucket. Notice that this percentage is calculated using the total number of
:MEASUREMENTS (quantity (h) from the header) rather than INTERRUPTS.
The size of the bar is proportional to this percentage. Each asterisk in the bar
represents 1% of the total number of measurements. The total number of
asterisks is the percentage rounded down to the nearest whole percent. For
example, 4.2% is represented as ****.
If there were non-zero buckets that HPC did not list because of the -LIMIT
threshold, the last line of the histogram is a summary line that indicates the
percentage of real hits that were contained in those buckets as a group. For
example,
Less than 1%
Shell Commands
5.4% 1*****
4-158
r
'------
IF
o
IF -- Execute a conditional statement.
FORMAT
IF condition THEN command_1 •.• [ELSE command_2 •••] ENDIF
IF executes a conditional statement depending on the results of a Boolean test. You can
extend the IF command over several lines if you use it interactively or in a Shell script.
When you use IF interactively, and extend the command over more than one line, the
Shell prompts you for each new line of the command with the $ _ prompt (refer to the
example below).
ARGUMENTS
o
o
condition
(required)
Refer to the DOMAIN System User's
information on Shell variables.
command 1
(required)
command
(optional)
o
Specify a command or program to execute and test for truth, or
specify a variable expression or Boolean variable to test for
truth.
II Truth II
usually means that the command executes
successfully (without any errors), or that the Shell variable
expression or Boolean is "true". (Specifically, this argument is
evaluated TRUE if it returns an abort severity level of 0 (zero).)
Guide for more
Specify command or program to execute if 'condition' returns
TRUE.
2
Specify command or program to execute if 'condition' returns
FALSE (Le., a severity level greater than zero).
EXAMPLES
1. $ IF eqs a a
$ THEN args "a is a"
ELSE args "Aristotle was wrong.
$_ ENDIF
a is a
$
$=
II
2. IF eqs -2 '-c'
THEN pas -1
bind -1.bin library -b -1
ELSE bind -1.bin library -b -1
END IF
o
Example 2 might appear in a Shell script. These lines will compile the Pascal module
named by the first argument ("I) if the second argument ("2) is '-c'. Then it will bind the
module with 'library'. If the second argument is not '-c', or if there is no second argument,
the command simply binds the module.
4-159
Shell Commands
INLIB (INSTALL _ LIBRARY)
INLm (INSTALL_LIBRARY) -- Install a user-supplied library.
FORMAT
INLm pathname .••
INLIB installs a library at the current Shell level; it remains installed until the Shell that
installed it exits. (To load a library that is used by all processes, see note below.) The
newly installed library will be used to resolve external references of programs (and
libraries) loaded after its installation. (Thus, previously loaded libraries and programs
will NOT be affected.)
Note that only those global references which have been MARKed by the binder become
visible, and that the default action of the binder is to leave globals UNMARKed. You
should, therefore, take care to MARK all appropriate globals when you bind your library.
See the BIND command description for more details.
INLIB is an internal shell command.
NOTE:
At Version 4.1 and later you can create a library that will be installed
automatically in every process.
This library resides in the file
/LIB/USERLIB.PRIVATE. The procedure text in this library will be shared among
all processes.
This library must be present at node startup time in order to be installed.
After copying your library to. jLIBjUSERLIB.PRIVATE with the Shell command
OPF (COpy _FILE), you must shut down the node and start it up again in order
to use the library. Ohanges to the library also require rebooting the node to
load the new routines.
Global names in
DOMAIN libraries.
/LIB/USERLIB.PRIVATE
must not duplicate names used in
C
ARGUMENTS
~
.~,,-
pathname
(required)
Specify name of library file(s) to be installed.
pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
Multiple
EXAMPLES
1. $ inlib my_lib
Install the library IImy_Iib li
2. $ inlib ?*.lib
Install all files in the current
working directory with a lI.lib"
suffix.
Shell Oommands
4-160
.
."
--------------------------
---------
------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
INTM (INSTALL_ TYPE_MANAGER)
o
INTM (INSTALL_TYPE_MANAGER) -- Install a type manager.
FORMAT
INTM type_name [mgr _pathname] [options]
INTM installs a new type manager for a specified type. The manager is copied into the
type manager directory. This command does not accept wildcards.
ARGUMENTS
type_name
(required)
o
mgr _pathname
(optional)
Specify the type for which the manager is to be installed.
Specify the pathname of the manager object file to install for
this type.
Derault if omitted: object rile is named 'type _name'.
OPTIONS
-N node _spec
Specify the node on which the type manager is to be installed.
See the section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more
If this option is omitted, the type manager is
information.
installed on the current node.
o
-L
List the results of the operation.
-R
Replace an existing type manager if it exists.
EXAMPLES
o
1.
$ intm example_type /mydir/my_example_mgr.bin
2.
$ intm exmaple_type /mydir/old_example_mgr.bin -n //remote_vol -1
"/mydir/old_example_mgr.bin" installed as the ma.nager for
type exa.mple_type on volume //remoto_vol.
o
4-161
Shell Commands
INTY (INSTALL _ TYPE)
INTY (INSTALL_TYPE) -- Install a new type.
FORMAT
INTY type_name source_volume [-N node_spec] [options]
INTY installs a type from one node to another. It will install both the type name and
type manager on the target node (given by the -N option).
ARGUMENTS
type_name
(required)
source volume
(required)
Specify the name of the type to be installed.
Specify the pathname of the source volume from which to copy
the type name and type manager.
c
OPTlor~s
- N node _ spec
Specify the node on which the type is to be installed. See the
section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
You may also specify the entry directory of a volume mounted
for software installation, as shown in the example below. If this
option is omitted, the type is installed on the current node.
-L
List the results of the installation.
-R
Replace any existing type name/manager pair· that currently
exists.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ inty example_type //test_vol
Type example_type installed.
II
II
2.
$ inty example_type limy_vol -n //test vol -1
Type "example_type" installed on volume //test_vol.
3.
$ mtvol w /mounted disk
$ inty net_ethernet //rocket_j -n /mounted_vol -1
Type "net_ethernet" installed on //my_node/mounted_vol.
In this case. the disk has been mounted for software installation.
Shell Commands
4-162
c
-------------------------
.. - - - - ...-
.. _-----
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---_._-_._._._---- --_ ....._--
INVOL (INITIALIZE _ VOLillJE)
o
INVOL (INITIALZE_ VOLUME) --- Initialize disk volumes.
FORMAT
From AEGIS command Shell: INVOL
From Mnemonic Debugger: EX INVOL
INVOL initializes physical disk volumes, creates logical volumes, and maintains badspot
lists. . Once initialized, a volume can be mounted with the MTVOL (MOUNT_VOLUME)
command, or can be used to bootstrap the operating system, providing it contains the
necessary files.
For a detailed explanation of INVOL, see the DOMAIN System Utilities manual.
o
INVOL prompts for all required information.
o
o
o
4-163
Shell Commands
lOS
TEST
lOS
TEST -- Test lOS
c
$ calls
FORMAT
10S_ TEST [-INIT]
lOS _ TEST is a program for testing type managers that manage input and output to
objects. lOS _ TEST allows you to open a stream to any type of object and then use
selected lOS calls on the open stream. With lOS _ TEST, you can open streams to
existing or new objects. For more information on using lOS _ TEST to test type
managers, see Using the Open System Toolkit Jor Extending the Streams Facility.
Complete descriptions of the lOS _ TEST interactive commands are available in the
DOMAIN System Utilities manual.
OPTIONS
-INIT
, Call the lOS _ $INITIALIZE routine (within a type manager) at
startup time.
(~~
.'....... _•..
,/
C~
c
Shell Commands
4-164
LAMF (LAMINATE_FILE)
o
LAMF (LAMINATE_FILE) -- Laminate files.
FORMAT
LAMF [pathname ••• ] [-S string]
LAMF laminates the named files to standard output. That is, it concatenates the first
lines of all input files, sequentially, and writes the result to standard output; and so on
for the next input lines. If the files contain different numbers of lines, null lines are used
for the missing lines in the shorter files.
NOTE:
o
To insert a NEWLINE character between lines, use the escape sequence, @n, as
a string argument. (See Example 4, below.)
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify name(s) of file(s) to be laminated to standard output.
Multiple pathnames are permitted, separated by blanks.
Default if omitted: read standard input for input lines. Use a
hyphen (-) to specify standard input in a list
of file names.
o
OPTIONS
-8 string
Specify a string of text to be placed in each output line at the
point it appears in the command argument list. 'String' may not
exceed 300 characters. Strings containing embedded spaces must
be in quotes (.. ").
EXAMPLES
o
1. $ lamf mary fred
Laminate files II mary II and IIfred and
write results to standard output.
2. $ lamf jan - george
Laminate lines from IIjanll, standard
input, and IIgeorge ll , in that order.
3. $
li
lamf -8 IIA line from A: II a -S II, and from B: II b
would produce:
A line from A: first line from a, and from B: first line from b
Note that the text strings inserted are not bound in any way to the position of the
pathname arguments: you may place strings wherever you please. Those strings that
contain literal blanks must be enclosed in quotes, as above.
Escape sequences are valid in string arguments. For example:
.0
4-165
Shell Commands
LAMF (LAMINATE_FILE)
4. $ lamf mary -8 @n fred
Insert a NEWLINE character between each
line from mary and fred. thus interleaving the lines from the two files.
c'
c
Shell Commands
4-166
-------------------
- - - - - - -----
LAS (LIST_ADDRESS_SPAOE)
o
LAS (LIST _ADDRESS_SPACE) -- List objects mapped into the address space.
FORMAT
LAS [options]
LAS produces a list of objects mapped into the address space. Information printed
includes the virtual address range, the starting address within the object, and its
pathname if available (in that order).
This command is most useful for system-level debugging.
OPTIONS
o
If no options are specified, LAS lists the address space of the current process.
-ALL
List all address space, including that occupied by AEGIS.
-F[ROM] address
Begin listing at the hexadecimal address specified.
-T[O] address
End listing at the hexadecimal address specified.
-PROC[ESS] name
o
List addresses for the process named.
Use the PST
(PROCESS_STATUS) command to display the names of existing
processes.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ las
VA Range
o
o
8000
18000
30000
38000
50000
58000
68000
AOOOO
A8000
COOOO
E8000
F8000
100000
128000
150000
158000
160000
170000
188000
-
17FFF
2FFFF
37FFF
4FFFF
57FFF
67FFF
9FFFF
A7FFF
BFFFF
E7FFF
F7FFF
FFFFF
127FFF
14FFFF
157FFF
15FFFF
16FFFF
187FFF
19FFFF
Obj Start
0
0
0
0
0
10000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20000
0
0
Pathname
/sys/node_data/global_data
/11b/pm11b
/11b/sys11b.peb
/11b/ks11b
/11b/tra1t_type_11b
/sys/node_data/global_data
/11b/streams
/11b/vfmt_streams
/11b/error
/11b/swt11b
/11b/ftn11b
/11b/pbulib
/11b/gprlib
/lib/c11b
/lib/11sp_initlib
/sys/node_data/global_rws
/sys/node_data/global_data
/lib/shlib
/lib/tfp
4-167
Shell Commands
LAS (LIST _ADDRESS _ SPACE)
lAOOOO
lCOOOO
100000
200000
2BOOOO
2B8000
2COOOO
2C8000
200000
BCOOOO
BOOOOO
-
lBFFFF
lC7FFF
107FFF
2AFFFF
2B7FFF
2BFFFF
2C7FFF
2CFFFF
2F7FFF
BCFFFF
BOFFFF
0
0
30000
0
0
0
0
0
BOOOO
0
0
/lib/dialoglib
/sys/node_data/ipc_data
/sys/node_data/global_data
-- temporary file -/sys/node_data/dm_mbx
/com/sh
-- temporary file -/com/las
--'temporary file -/help_area/worksite
/j tj
(
'
"--_/
2944 KB mapped.
2. $ las -from 188000
VA Range
188000
lAOOOQ
lCOOOO
100000
200000
2BOOOO
2B8000
2COOOO
2C8000
200000
BCOOOO
BOOOOO
-
19FFFF
lBFFFF
lC7FFF
107FFF
2AFFFF
2B7FFF
2BFFFF
2C7FFF
2CFFFF
2F7FFF
BCFFFF
BOFFFF
Obj Start
0
0
0
30000
0
0
0
0
0
BOOOO
0
0
Pathname
/lib/tfp
/lib/dialoglib
/sys/node_data/ipc_data
/sys/node_data/global_data
-- temporary file -/sys/node_data/dm_mbx
/com/sh
-- temporary file -/com/las
-- temporary file -/help_area/worksite
/j tj
1408 KB mapped.
C
(:'
3. $ las -f 188000 -t 200000
VA Range
188000
1AOOOO
1COOOO
100000
-
19FFFF
lBFFFF
lC7FFF
107FFF
Obj Start
0
0
0
30000
Pathname
/lib/tfp
/lib/dialoglib
/sys/node_data/ipc_data
/sys/node_data/global_data
C~
288 KB mapped.
c
Shell Oommands
4-168
LBR (LIBRARIAN)
o
LBR (LIBRARIAN) -- Combine object modules into a library.
FORMAT
LBR {-C
I -UPD}
library _pathname [module_pathname] [options] [-]
The librarian manages libraries of object modules. It adds, removes, or replaces modules
in the library. As input, you must provide the pathname of a library you want to create
or update, followed by an optional list of object module pathnames and processing
options. As output, the librarian produces a new or updated library file.
o
You can use LBR in two ways: by entering complete LBR command strings, or by using
the II_II (hyphen) option to ask the librarian to prompt you for multiple strings of
module _pathname arguments and options. By using prompting you can perform several
operations on object modules in the Bame library file, without entering LBR each time.
For a complete description of the librarian, see the DOMAIN Binder and Librarian
Reference.
Prompting
o
o
The optional hyphen at the end of the command line requests the librarian to begin
prompting. The hyphen is valid only on the line containing the LBR command, and must
be the last item on the line. Note that prompting is also requested if the command line
contains only the LBR command.
If you request prompting, the librarian processes the arguments and options on the
current command line, then displays an asterisk (*) on standard output. In response to
the asterisk, you can enter additional module_pathname arguments and options. For
example:
$LBR -c mylib.lib -
*file1.bin -DEL my_module
*file2.bin -L -REPL file3.bin
*
Prompting ends when you enter the -END switch or press in response to
the asterisk. After prompting ends, the librarian finishes creating or updating the library
file.
Oomment Statement8
You can include comments to an LBR command during a prompting session or in a Shell
script. Comments must be delimited by braces, as in this example:
$LBR -UFO plot. lib
*plot_line.bin { Add PLOT_LINE procedure to library}
*{ Generate library directory }
*-L
o
*-ENO
The librarian ignores any comments when it processes the command line.
4-169
Shell Oomma.nd8
LBR (LIBRARIAN)
Librarian Error8
If a problem occurs during LBR execution, the librarian displays a message on error
output. The message indicates the nature and severity of the problem. Error-level
messages are issued for fatal conditions, which prevent the librarian from creating or
updating a library file. Warning-level messages are issued for conditions that do not
prevent the librarian from producing a library file, but the file's contents may not be
what you were expecting.
ARGUMENTS
-C[REATE] I-UPD[ATE] library _pathname
(required)
The pathname of the library output file must be specified on the
command line before you can specify any option that performs
an operation on a library (such as adding to, extracting from, or
reporting about a library). The -C (CREATE) or -UPD (UPDATE)
option must be specified with the library pathname argument to
indicate whether you want to create or update a library.
Remember that only one library output file can be specified per
execution of the librarian.
module _pathname
(optional)
Specify an object module to be added into the library. Multiple
pathnames and wildcarding are permitted. If omitted, no new
object modules are added to the library.
OPTIONS
c
c
The following options instruct the librarian to perform various tasks. Note that some
options apply directly to a library, while other options act on modules within the library.
Default options are indicated by "(D)".
Remove an object module from the library. If a module of the
given name cannot be found in the library, a warning is issued.
Note that the librarian is case-sensitive to the name 'module'.
-DEL module
-EX module [-0 pathname]
Extract the named module from the library. If the pathname
modifier is specified with -0, the module will be copied to that
pathname. Otherwise, the module is copied to a file having the
same name as the module.
Note that the librarian is
case-sensitive to the name 'module'.
List a directory of the library contents to standard output.
This report shows the name of each module in the library, with a
list of section information and global declarations and references
for each module.
-L
-MSGS
(D)
Shell Command8
Cause LBR to issue purely informational messages such as a
summary of the number of errors and warnings that occurred.
Cause LBR to suppress issuing purely informational messages.
-NMSGS
-NSYS
c
(D)
Do not list global variables which are defined in the system
4-170
c'
LBR (LffiRARIAN)
o
library when generating a listing of global definitions and
references with the -L option.
-REPL pathname
Replace, in the library, any modules found in the file specified by
pathname. This option has an effect equivalent to first deleting
all the modules found in pathname from the library, and then
adding all the modules in pathname back into the library. The
advantage gained by using -REPL is that you do not need to
know the names of the modules in 'pathname'. Also, if you
attempt to add a module to a library without using the -REPL
option, and a module of that name does already exist, an error
message is issued. If a module found in pathname does not
already exist in the library, a warning message is issued.
-SYS
o
List global variables which are defined in the system library
when generating a listing of global definitions and references
with the -L option.
- (hyphen alone)
Request librarian prompting for further arguments.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
o
EXAMPLES
Refer to the DOMAIN Binder and Librarian Reference for detailed examples of LBR.
o
o
4-171
Shell Commands
LCNET (LIST _ CONNECTED _NETWORKS)
LCNET (LIST_CONNECTED _NETWORKS) -- Display internet routing information.
o
FORMAT
LCNET [options]
LCNET displays the list of known networks, their distances from the current node, the
router used as the first hop towards that network, and other information.
The distances (hops) towards remote networks are measured in intervening routers. The
distances are all for one-way traffic; if a network is three hops away from yours, your
requests pass through three routers to get to that network. The responses also pass
through three routers on the way back.
The -CONN option shows you the full internet topology, i.e. the list of networks and how
the routers connect them together.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
-LOCAL
(D)
Display the 'First Hop' and 'Hops' information for each network
in the internet. The first hop is the node ID of a router on your
network. It is the first router used in sending packets from your
network to the target network. Other routers are also used if
the target network is more than one hop away from your own.
-FULL
Display information showing how up-to-date the routing table is
(the 'Age' and 'Expiration' columns) in addition to the 'First
hop' and 'Hops' information shown by the -LOCAL option.
-FULL also lists inaccessible networks.
-CONN
Show which routers are connected to each network, and which
other networks those routers touch. This option displays the
'Touching' information.
-HW
Display the type of hardware used for each of the networks (ring
or IIC).
The -CONN and -HW options may take several seconds to
execute if you have a large internet.
- N node-spec
Print another node's view of the internet.
The outputs
produced by -LOCAL and -FULL vary from node to node; -N
affects these outputs. The -N option does not affect the output
produced by the -CONN or -HW options, since the hardware and
connectivity do not depend on a node's position in the internet.
-0
The -C option suppresses the title over each output column. It
also fills every line of the IINetwork ll column produced by the
-CONN option, and every line of the II Hardware II column
produced by the -HW option. These format changes make it
easier to use LCNET's output as another program's input.
Shell Commands
4-172
c~
LCNET (LIST _ CONNECTED _NETWORKS)
o
EXAMPLES
In this example, the node is directly connected to network COFFEE. Networks 5AlAD and
EDIFICE were connected in the past, but are not now accessible (perhaps because the
routers are down).
The expiration date and time for the 'local' network is meaningless.
$ lcnet -full
Network
========
o
0
B020
BOOBOO
5A1AD
COFFEE
ED1F1CE
DODO
Hops
Age
Expiration date/time
-----
--- ===================
1
2
gone
local
gone
1
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
NEW
1985/06/16
1985/06/16
1985/06/16
1985/06/09
1985/06/16
1985/06/16
14:33:21
14:33:21
14:33:21
10:27:46
14:33:21
14:33:39
The 'Touching' information describes your internet completely. This example includes
several kinds of information: - Network DEFACED has one router, node 2A3B. That
router connects DEFACED to EFFACED. - Network FACEOFF contains two routers,
3lDO and 1371. Those routers connect FAOEOFF to OOOOA and COFFEE, respectively.
$ lcnet -conn
Touching
Network
Router
Touching
Network
========
========
FOOD
5A1AD
B002E
COCOA
0
First
Hop
----4B6F
4B6F
4B6F
0
4B6F
BAD 1
DECAF
BOOB1E
COFFEE
DEFACED
ED1F1CE
EFFACED
FACEOFF
========
5COB
36CF
459B
45BE
3FOA
BAD 1
56BO
31DC
5COB
BAD 1
36CF
459B
3FOA
1371
2A3B
45BE
56BO
2A3B
31DC
1371
DECAF
COFFEE
COFFEE
ED1F1CE
COFFEE
BOOB1E
EFFACED
FACEOFF
FOOD
COCOA
FOOD
5A1AD
B002E
FACEOFF
EFFACED
5A1AD
COCOA
DEFACED
COCOA
COFFEE
$ lcnet -conn -c
0
FOOD
FOOD
5A1AD
5A1AD
BG02E
COCOA
COCOA
5COB
36CF
459B
45BE
3FOA
BAD 1
56BO
DECAF
COFFEE
COFFEE
ED1F1CE
COFFEE
BOOB1E
EFFACED
4-173
Shell Commands
LCNET (LIST_CONNECTED _NETWORKS)
COCOA
DECAF
BOOB1E
COFFEE
COFFEE
COFFEE
COFFEE
DEFACED
ED1F1CE
EFFACED
EFFACED
FACEOFF
FACEOFF
Shell Commands
31DC
5COB
BAD 1
36CF
459B
~FOA
1371
2A3B
45BE
56BO
2A3B
31DC
1371
FACEOFF
FOOD
COCOA
FOOD
SAlAD
B002E
FACEOFF
EFFACED
SAlAD
COCOA
DEFACED
COCOA
COFFEE
0
4-173.1
.... _.....
_-----_.-._--------------
()
o
o
o
LCNODE (LIST _ CONNECTED _NODES)
LCNODE (LIST_CONNECTED _NODES) -- List nodes connected to the network.
FORMAT
LCNODE [options]
LCNODE lists the nodes currently connected to the network. The list contains the ID of
every node connected, the time at which the node was started,. the current time, and the
name of each node's entry directory.
This command reports only the nodes that respond within a preset time limit. Should a
node be connected, but temporarily unable to respond within the specified time, it will
not appear in the produced list.
OPTIONS
-M[E]
Request information about your node only.
displays the node ID.
-B[RIEF]
Request brief output. LCNODE lists only the entry directory
name for each connected node. Note that the entry directory of
a diskless node is the entry directory of its paging partner.
-ID
When used with -BRIEF, display the node ID in addition to the
en try directory.
.
This option
.~,
r
\
-C[OUNT]
Request node count only. LCNODE lists only the number of
nodes responding to its query.
'- .... /
-MAX[NODES] n
.Set a limit on the number of nodes you want to see, even if more
could have responded.
-FROM node_spec
Starts the node list at some node other than your own. This is
especially useful in an internet environment, for looking at
networks other .than your own.
See the section on node
specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
-NAME
(
,~
\
",-,,/
When you specify the -BRIEF option, LCNODE normally prints
the entry directory for each node. If you specify -NAME with
-BRIEF, LCNODE prints the node-name catalogued with the
naming server. Only diskless nodes are printed differently. A
diskless node's entry directory is its partner's node name; a
diskless node's node-name is uniquely its own.
Unless the -FROM option specifies your own node, the list will
only include an unbroken sequence of nodes running AEGIS
SR9.0 or later. The rest of the node list is lost, starting with the
first running a pre-SR9.0 AEGIS.
c
Shell Commands
4-174
,
LCNODE (LIST _ CONNECTED _NODES)
o
EXAMPLES
1.
$ lcnode
The node 10 of this node is 21.
3 other nodes responded.
10
Boot time
Current time
21
17
27
11
1984/06/09 9:21:44 1984/06/09 16:06:22
1984/06/09 13:62:02 1984/06/09 16:06:13
1984/06/09 12:63:28 1984/06/09 16:06:07
1984/06/09 12:03:39 1984/06/09 16:06:16
2.
$ lcnode -me
Entry Directory
//dollar
//quarter
//nickel
** DISKLESS **
/ /diskless_$l1 partner node: 17
The node 10 of this node is 21.
o
3.
$ lcnode -b
/ /dollar
//quarter
//nickel
//quarter
(//QUARTER appears once as the host for a diskless node and
once for the node with the disk.)
o
4.
$ lcnode -b -name
//dollar
//quarter
//nickel
//diskless_$000011
(-NAME shows you the name under which diskless node 11 is catalogued)
o
6.
$ lcnode -c
466 other nodes responded.
6.
$ lcnode -c -m
The node 10 of this node is 116A.
466 other nodes responded.
7.
$ lcnode -b -id
21 / /dollar
17 //quarter
27 //nickel
11 / /quarter
8.
$ lcnode -from OFAD.3924 -max 2
Starting from node 3924.
1 other node responded,
but more might have responded with a high -MAX value.
Node 10
o
3924
34Bf
Boot time
Current time
1986/02/14 17:20:45
1986/02/14 18:46:62
1985/02/14 19:07:04
1985/02/14 19:08:09
4-175
Entry Directory
//laurel
//hardy
Shell Commands
LD (LIST _DffiECTORY)
LD (LIST _DIRECTORY) -- List contents of a directory.
FORMAT
LD [pathname •.•] [options]
LD lists the objects in a directory on standard output. It provides a wide variety of
information on the contents of the various objects, depending on the command options
that you select.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify pathname of the object to be described. The object may
be a directory, a file, or a link. If you specify a directory, LD
describes the files in that directory. If you specify a file, the
attributes of that file are reported. Multiple pathnames and
wild carding are permitted. (If they are used, each name is
assumed to be a filename.)
C'
,/
Default if omitted: list contents of working directory
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by .. (D)."
Attribute8
-A
Display all attributes.
-ATTR
Display permanent/immutable/trouble flags.
-BL
Display disk blocks used.
-LEN
Display current length in bytes.
-R
Display your access rights to entries.
-ROOT
Display the contents of the replicated root directory managed by
the naming server helper.
-ST
Display system object type.
-TU
Display type UIDs.
Date and Time
-D
Display creation, modified, and last used dates.
-DTC
Display date/time created.
-DTM
Display date/time last modified.
Shell Oommand8
4-176
_..
------------
------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - -
LD (LIST _DffiECTORY)
o
-DTU
Display date/time last used.
Streams
-SI
Display all stream header information.
-AB
Display streams ASCII/binary flag.
-CONC
Display streams object concurrency.
-RT
Display streams record type.
Entry Selection
o
o
o
o
-CRB d
Display entries created before date and time II d II.
-CRAd
Display entries created after date and time II d II •
-USB d
Display entries used before date and time II d II •
-USA d
Display entries used after date and time II d II •
-MOBd
Display entries modified before date and time II d II. Same as old
-BE option.
-MOAd
Display entries modified after date and time
-AF option.
-BE d
Display entries modified before date and time lid II. Obsolete
option: use -MOB.
-AF d
Display entries modified after date and time
option: use -MOA.
-DI
Treat all names as directory names and list the contents of
those directories.
-ENT
List attributes of the target object itself. This option has no
effect if the pathname refers to a file. If the target object is a
directory, -ENT causes LD to display attributes of the directory
itself rather than its contents. If the target object is a link,
-ENT causes LD to display attributes of the link itself rather
than trying to resolve the link and display attributes of the
resolution object. See Example 5 below.
II
d II. Same as old
II
d II. Obsolete
-LD
(D)
List directory names. If this option is specified, then -LF, -LL,
and -LN lose their default status, and must be specified
explicitly, if desired.
-LF
(D)
List file names. If this option is specified, then -LD, -LL, and
-LN lose their default status, and must be specified explicitly, if
desired.
-LL
(D)
List link names. If this option is specified, then -LD, -LF, and
-LN lose their default status, and must be specified explicitly, if
desired.
4-177
Shell Oommands
LD (LIST _DffiECTORY)
-LN
(D)
-LT
List diskless node names. If this option is specified, then -LD,
-LF, and -LL lose their default status, and must be specified
explicitly, if desired. Diskless node names normally appear only
when you specify -ROOT, or when you list the / / directory.
Display link resolution names.
Output Control
-so
Sort the output vertically in columns.
-SR
(D)
-Wn
Sort the output horizontally in rows.
Adjust the output to be 'n' characters wide. If this option is
omitted, LD automatically adjusts the width of the output to the
size of the transcript pad's window, unless the command is issued
from a dumb terminal or some other windowless device. In that
case, the output defaults to 80 characters wide if -W is omitted.
-0
List entries in a single column, suppress header.
-HD
(D)
-NHD
Display header and totals.
Suppress header and totals.
-SN
(D)
-NSN
Sort entries by name.
Suppress entry sorting.
-WARN
(D)
-NWARN
Produce a warning if no wildcard matches are found.
Suppress warning if no wildcard matches are found.
LD uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command options with
the exception of the query options (-QA, -NQ, -QW).
TIME
The time at which a file is created, modified, or used is accurate within a certain tolerance.
The reported time of creation or modification is correct within one minute of the actual
creation or modification time. The time of last use is updated only if more than an hour
has elapsed since the recorded time of last use. Hence, the time of last use reported by the
LD command may vary by as much as an hour from the actual time of last use.
EXAMPLES
1. $ ld -a
Directory "/col/users/final1":
sys
type
type
uid
file
file
rec
rec
Shell Commands
blocks
used
current
length
18
18
17640
18428
attr rights
P
P
4-178
pndwrx
pndwrx
name
ch1
ch2
c
LD (LIST _DIRECTORY)
o
file
file
rec
rec
67210
11554
67
12
P
pndwrx
pndwrx
P
ch3
ch4
4 entries, 115 blocks used.
2. $ ld -dtm
Directory "/col/users/finall":
date/time
modified
82/03/28
82/03/28
82/03/28
82/03/28
name
17:18
17:18
17: 19
17:20
chi
ch2
ch3
ch4
4 entries, 115 blocks used.
o
o
3. $ ld /sys/ins/[a-e]?*.ins.ftn -a
sys
type
type
:uid
blocks
used
current
length
file
file
file
file
rec
rec
uasc
rec
1
2
20
1
872
1274
19966
738
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
pndwrx
P
P
P
P
name
/sys/ins/base.ins.ftn
/sys/ins/cal.ins.ftn
/sys/ins/core.ins.ftn
/sys/ins/ec2.ins.ftn
4 entries listed, 24 blocks used.
4. $ ld //v?* -a
sys
type
o
attr rights
type
uid
blocks
used
node
sdir nil
5
(attributes unavailable)
sdir nil
3
current
length
attr rights
5120
P
-------rse
3072
P
pgn-calrse
name
//victor
//visitor
//void
//vulture
4 entries listed, 8 blocks used.
NOTE: in this example, //victor is the name of a 'diskless node.
5. $ crl foo //behemoth/rkd/foo.dat
$ ld foo -11 -It
? (ld)
"foo" - name not found (OS/naming server)
{This error occurs because the resolution object
//behemoth/rkd/foo.dat does not exist. Now use -ENT to show
attributes of the link itself without trying to resolve it.}
$ ld foo -11 -It -ent
foo
o
"//behemoth/rkd/foo.dat"
1 entry listed.
4-179
Shell Commands
LD (LIST _DffiECTORY)
{The following command displays the contents of the working
directory.}
$ ld . -a
Directory "//otis/tstlib/trash":
sys
type
type
uid
blocks
used
current
length
file
link
uasc
1
32
attr rights
P
pgndwrx
name
abc
foo
2 entries. 1 block used.
{Now display attributes of the working directory itself.}
$ ld . -ent -a
sys
type
type
uid
dir
nil
blocks
used
current
length
2
2048
attr rights
P
name
pgndcalrse
1 entry listed. 2 blocks used.
CI
Shell Commands
4-180
--------------------.------------
LKOB (LOCK_ OBJECT)
o
LKOB (LOCK_ OBJECT) -- Lock an object.
FORMAT
LKOB pathname [options]
LKOB locks the specified object. The locking constraint is lin readers XOR 1 writer".
LKOB is primarily used for system-level debugging.
To list locked objects, use LLKOB (LIST _LOCKED _ OBJECTS). To unlock an object, use
ULKOB (UNLOCK_ OBJECT).
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify object to be locked.
wildcarding are permitted.
Multiple pathnames and
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
o
o
-R
(D)
Lock the object for reading.
-W
Lock the object for writing.
-I
Lock the object for reading, with intent to write.
-R2W
Change the lock mode of the object from
"read-intend-write" to "write".
II read II
or
-R2RIW
Change the lock mode of the object from
"read-intend-write" .
II read II
to
-W2R
Change the lock mode of the object from "write" to II read ".
-W2RIW
Change the lock mode of the object from
II read-in tend-write II .
II write II
to
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ lkob susan -w
Lock file "susan" for writing.
o
4-181
Shell Commands
LLKOB (LIST _LOOKED _ OBJEOTS)
LLKOB (LIST _LOCKED _ OBJECTS) -- List locked objects.
FORMAT
LLKOB [options]
This command lists the locked objects resident on volumes mounted on this node, and
objects resident in other nodes that are locked by processes running locally.
The listing for each object includes the locking constraints imposed on the object (e.g.,
n-readers XOR 1-writer), the specific lock mode being used (e.g., Read, Write,
Read-Intending-Write), the network node ID of the node at which the object is located,
the node ID of the node in which the locking process is active, and the name (if it is
available) of the object itself.
OPTIONS
Specify list of only those objects that either reside on this node
and are locked by another node, or reside on another node and
are locked by this node (Le., those objects whose locks are in
some way remote).
-R[EMOTE]
-C[OUNT]
List only a one-line summary of the number of objects locked.
c
EXAMPLES
1. $ llkob
USE
W
R
W
R
W
CONSTRAINT
nR
nR
nR
nR
nR
xor
xor
xor
xor
xor
1W
1W
1W
1W
1W
HOME
NODE
21
21
21
21
21
LOCKING
NODE
FILE
/sys/dm/pdb
/sys/dm/fonts/std
--Temporary F1Ie---Uncataloged Permanent File---Display Manager Pad--
21
21
21
21
21
C,\
2. $ llkob -c
locked: 102 -- 100 local, 2 remote; 100 locally locked, 2 remotely
c·
Shell Commands
4-182
------------------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LOGIN
o
LOGIN -- Log in to a running process.
FORMAT
LOGIN [person [.project[.org]] [-LP [passwd]] [-0 pathname args ••. ] ]
The LOGIN command allows you to log in to a running process with a different identity.
This permits you to have multiple concurrent processes running under different Subject
Identifiers (SIDs). See the EDACL command description for an explanation of SIDs.
o
As of SR9.2, the DM inherits the working and naming directories, plus the environment
variables, of the new login process. This means that normal DM activities (like editing
files) are now transparent to login activity. In releases prior to SR9.2, the DM did not
assume the process identity and could not interact transparently with other process
activities.
To log out of a running process and return control of the process to the original SID,
enter an end-of-file mark (usually CTRL/Z) in the process input pad.
ARGUMENTS
o
person
(optional)
Specify your username. If you omit 'person', then LOGIN
prompts you to log in interactively. In this case, respond just as
you do to the DM log in prompt, i.e., issue the L command in
the form:
L person[.project[.org]] [-P] [-H]
You will be asked for a password, and may take the opportunity
to change your password and login home directory with the -P
and -H options.
See the L command description in the DM
command chapter for more information.
When you have
successfully logged in, the process in the window assumes the
new identity, and the node's local registry is updated.
o
Default if omitted: prompt for 'L' command
project
(optional)
Specify project ID (if one exists). This ID may be separated
from 'person' by either a blank space or a period.
Default if omitted: no project ID specified
org
(optional)
Specify organization ID (if one exists). This ID may be
separated from 'person' by either a blank space or a period.
Default if omitted: no organization ID specified
o
4-183
Shell Commands
LOGIN
OPTIONS
- LP [passwd)
Specify password. If the 'person' argument appears on the
command line, and -LP is not specified, you will be prompted for
a password. If -LP is specified without an associated password, a
blank password is used. -LP must follow the 'person' argument
and precede the -0 option. In addition, "-0" cannot be the
password. Note that using -LP makes your password visible in
the window.
After a successful login, the node local registry is updated with
the new identity.
-0 pathname [args •.•]
Specify a program (followed by optional arguments to be passed
to the program) that is to be invoked in the window after a
successful login. If -0 is not specified, /OOM/SH (the Shell) is
invoked. -0 must not precede the 'person' argument.
EXAMPLES
$ login
Please log in: 1 user
Password:
Logged in as user.none.none Monday. March 5. 1984 11:06:55 (EST).
$ args "And now for something completely different."
c
('
, , _ . . .J
$ (CTRL/Z)
*** EOF ***
process stop
$
(as/fault handler)
#
Control returned to original SID
c
c
Shell Commands
4-184
LOPSTR (LIST _ OPEN _ STREAMS)
o
LOPSTR (LIST _ OPEN_STREAMS) -- List open streams.
FORMAT
LOPSTR
LOPSTR lists the streams that are open for the current process. The list contains the
stream ID and access mode (read, write, append, and so forth) for each stream. The
pathname (if one exists) associated with each stream is also displayed.
LOPSTR requires no arguments or options.
EXAMPLES
0
$ lopstr
st#
open
read
append
read
3 append
0
1
2
4
name
(standard input)
(standard output)
(error input)
(error output)
streams open.
0
o
o
4-185
Shell Commands
LRGY (LIST _REGISTRY)
LRGY (LIST _REGISTRY) -- List registry sites.
FORMAT
LRGY [options]
LRGY lists registry site names and the name of the network master registry file. For
complete information on the use of local and network registries, see Administering Your
DOMAIN System.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, LRGY lists the sites in the current node's registry file copy
(fREGISTRY/REGISTRY).
-R pathname
-LOC
Specify name of registry file to be listed. If the -LOC option is
also present, this name must be a node name (see example 3). If
you omit this option but include -LOC, LRGY lists your node's
local registry U/'node'/REGISTRY/LOCAL_REGISTRY).
List local registry.
EXAMPLES
1. $ lrgy
List registry file copy.
Registry:
//os/registry/rgy_master
Sites of registration data files:
//os/registry/rgy dir.1
//us/registry/rgy-dir.2
//tape/registry/rgy_dir.3
2. $ lrgy -loc
List current node's local registry.
Registry:
//tape/registry/local_registry
Sites of registration data files:
//tape/registry/local_site
Registry is LOCAL. It has 11 slots for login;
the expiration period is 10 days.
3. $ lrgy -r //os -loc
List local registry of node "os".
Registry:
//os/registry/local_registry
Sites of registration data files:
//os/registry/local_site
Registry is LOCAL. It has 11 slots for login;
the expiration period is 10 days.
Shell Commands
4-186
c
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----
LTY (LIST _ TYPES)
o
LTY (LIST_TYPES) -- List installed types.
FORMAT
LTY [options]
LTY lists the types currently installed on a volume.
contents of internal caches for debugging purposes.
It can also be used to list the
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, LTY lists types installed on the boot volume.
o
o
- N node _ spec
Specify the node whose type names are to be listed. See the
section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
You may also specify the entry directory of a volume mounted
for software installation, as shown in the example below.
-u
Display type UIDs as well as type names.
-GLOB
Display contents of global type name cache instead of the type
file (for debugging only).
-PRIV
Display the contents of the private (per-user) type name cache
instead of the type file (for debugging only).
EXAMPLES
$ lty
Local type file
o
area
lheap
pipe
bitmap
mbx
ree
boot
mt
seh
easehm
nil
sio
ddf
null
uase
evetype
obj
und
hdru
objlib
ipad
pad
In the following example, the disk has been mounted for software installation. The disk's
top level directory (catalogued as '/mounted_disk' by the MTVOL command) must contain
a II sys II directory. If it does not, you will get a II types file not found II error.
$ mtvol w /mounted disk
$ lty -n /mounted_disk
Type file for "//my_node/mounted_disk"
area
lheap
pipe
bitmap
mbx
ree
boot
mt
seh
easehm
nil
sio
ddf
null
uase
evetype
obj
und
hdru
objlib
ipad
pad
o
4-187
Shell Commands
LUSR (LIST_USER)
LUSR (LIST_USER) -- List logged on users.
FORMAT
LUSR [options]
LUSR lists the identities of active users on the network.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the person name and node entry directory of all users logged into
the DM are listed.
-ME
List the user logged on to this node by person, project,
organization name, and node ID.
-N node_spec .••
Lists user(s) logged on to the node specified. See the section on
node specifications in Chapter 3 for more information. Multiple
pathnames or node IDs are permitted; separate them with
blanks.
-BR
Suppress listing of home directory names.
names are listed if this option is not specified.
-FULL
List complete PPON (person, project, organization name, and
node ID) for each user listed.
-NOFULL
List only the person name of each user listed. This is the
default setting unless -1\1E is specified, in which case the full
PPON is listed by default.
-ALLP
List identities for all user processes, not just the DM, either by
node (if -N is also specified), by name (-PPO), for the current
node only (-1\1E), or everywhere in the network.
-PPO ppo
List user(s) named, at all nodes to which they have logged in to
the DM. 'ppo' is a string of the form 'pers.proj.org', where '%'
may be used as a wildcard specifier and trailing %'s may be
omitted (e.g., %.os_dev or joe.%.r _d).
-IDLE
Include idle nodes in report. If this option is omitted, LUSR
suppresses the names of nodes at which no one is logged in.
EXAMPLES
1. $ lusr -me
10c.none.mfg.1D5
$
Shell Oommands
//ET
4-188
Home directory
c
LUSR (LIST _ USER)
o
2. $ lusr -me -noful1 -br
10c
$
3. $ 1usr -n //magic //mountain //park
//MAGIC
joe
//MOUNTAIN
brian
//PARK
gordon
$
4. $ 1usr -full
jtj .none.none.532
andy.none.now.12B
caro1.none.mtg.334
ne1son.none.pres.838
annie.none.r d.6CA
o
0
now.system.a~vent.368
beth.none.mfg.2F7
//zoid
lIme
//vip
*** diskless 383 ***
//halfwit partner node: //p1an
//lunar
*** diskless 368 ***
//disk1ess_$000368 partner node: //zoid
//mack
$
5. $ lusr -idle
//magic
joe
*No one logged in* //strider
*No one logged in* //panacea
*** diskless //cutie ***
janet
//duke
john
eric
fIlion
*No one logged in* //fourbits
//basi1
harper
$
partner node: //nirvana
o
o
4-189
Shell Commands
LVAR
LVAR (LIST _ VARIABLES) -- List information about set variables.
FORMAT
LVAR [var _name •••]
The LVAR command lists the type, name, and value of currently set variables.
Optionally, you can specify individual variable names.
ARGUMENTS
var name •••
(optional)
List type, name, and value of the specified variable{s).
Default if omitted: list information for all variables currently set
(',
,'--_/
.
Shell Oommands
4-190
LVOLFS (LIST_ VOLUME_FREE_SPACE)
o
LVOLFS (LIST_ VOLUME_FREE_SPACE) -- List free space on logical volumes.
FORMAT
LVOLFS [pathname] [options]
LVOLFS prints information about the amount of available storage on mounted volumes.
This information includes the total amount of storage in disk blocks, the amount of free
storage, the percent of the total storage that is free, and the entry directory name for the
volume.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(optional)
Report on the volumes mounted on the home node of the
specified file.
Default if omitted: list free space on current node
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, LVOLFS reports the storage available on the volumes mounted
on the current node.
o
-A
Report on all volumes mounted in the network.
-N node_spec •••
Report on the volumes mounted on the specified node[s]. See the
section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more information.
Multiple 'node _ spec' strings are permitted; separate them with
blanks.
EXAMPLES
0
$ LVOLFS -A
#
free
24217
16589
7927
14497
#
total
% free
node id
30012
30012
30012
30012
81
55
26
48
1A
2B
3C
40
entry directory
/
//OEV
//LANG
//MKT
o
4-191
Shell Commands
MACRO
MACRO -- Expand macro definitions.
FORMAT
MACRO [-0] [pathname •••]
MACRO is a general-purpose macro processor. MACRO reads the files and writes to
standard output a new file with the macro definitions deleted and the macro references
expanded.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file containing macro definitions to be processed.
Multiple pathnames are permitted.
Default if omitted: read standard input
~.
\..__ /
OPTIONS
(Zero, not letter 0) Remove one level of brackets in macro calls
prior to processing. Normally, brackets appearing outside any
macro calls (level zero brackets) are NOT removed.
-0
A macro is a symbolic constant; when you use MACRO, each constant is replaced by the
string of characters which define it. The general form of a macro definition is:
DEFINE(name,replacement text)
The string 'name' can consist of letters (a-z and A-Z), digits (0-9), underscores (_), and
dollar signs ($). All subsequent occurrences of the string 'name' separated from other
letters, digits, underscores, and dollar signs by any other characters, spaces, or newline
characters will be replaced by the replacement text. No space is allowed between the
command (in this case, DEFINE), and the left parenthesis.
Blanks in definitions are significant; they should appear in the replacement text only where
desired. Uppercase and lowercase letters are also significant. The replacement text may be
more than one line long. However, when an entire macro definition is followed immediately
by a newline, the newline is discarded. This prevents extraneous blank lines from appearing
in the output.
A simple example of a macro is:
DEFINE(EOF,-l)
Thereafter, all occurrences of 'EOF' in the file would be replaced by '-1'.
You may specify arguments in macro definitions with the characters '$n', where n is a
number between 0 and 9. The arguments to be inserted when the macro is encountered are
given inside parentheses following the macro name. $0 refers to the name of the macro
itself. For example,
Shell Commands
4-192
c·
MACRO
o
DEFINE(eopen,$3
= open($l,$2)
)
defines a macro that, when called by
eopen(name, READ, fd)
expands into
fd = open(name,READ)
If a macro definition refers to an argument that was not supplied, the $n will be ignored.
The $ is taken literally if a character other than a digit follows it.
o
Macros can be nested, and can be called recursively. Any macros encountered during
argument collection are expanded immediately, unless they are surrounded by square
brackets ([ D. That is, input surrounded by brackets is left absolutely alone, except that
one level of [ and] is stripped off. Thus it is possible to write the macro D as
DEFINE(D, [define($l,$2)])
The replacement text for D, protected by the brackets, is literally 'DEFINE($1,$2)' so you
could use:
D (a, be)
o
to define a as bc. Brackets must also be used to redefine a macro. For example:
DEFINE(X,y)
DEFINE(x.z)
o
will define y in the second line, instead of redefining x. To define x the second time, the
operation must be expressed as
DEFINE(X.y)
DEFINE ( [x] . z)
Normally, brackets appearing outside any macro calls (level zero brackets) are not removed.
When the -0 (zero, not letter 0) option is specified, one level of brackets is removed both
inside and outside the macros. One level of brackets is also removed when the macro
reference is expanded. Thus, to rewrite the 'D' macro above so that it is evaluated to the
literal string 'define($1,$2)', the definition is:
DEFINE(D. [[define($l,$2)]])
o
In order to redefine the macro 'DEFINE' (for example, so that the Pascal keyword
'DEFINE' can be used) the following definition can be used:
4-193
Shell Commands
MACRO
DEFINE ( [DEFINE],
[[DEFINE]])
Both arguments get one level of brackets stripped when the definition is processed; the
second argument gets another level stripped when the macro is invoked.
The following built-in macros are provided:
DEFINE(a,b)
defines a to be b and returns the null string.
IFELSE(a,b,c,d)
returns c if a is identical to b. Otherwise, it returns d.
INCR(a)
interprets a as an integer and returns a+1.
SUBSTR(a,m,n)
returns a substring of the string a starting at character number m and
extending for n characters.
LEN(a)
returns the length of a.
INCLUD(a)
returns the contents of file a.
EXPR(a)
returns the result of evaluating infix expression a.
Operators in
increasing order of precedence are as follows. Parentheses may be used as
usual.
I It
logical OR and AND
unary logical NOT
<= < > >= arithmetic comparison
+ addition and subtraction
multiplication. division. modulus
*/ %
(remainder)
**
exponentiation
+ unary plus and negation
Logical operators return 0 (false) or 1 (true)
DIAGNOSTICS
arith evaluation stack overflow
Arithmetic expressions can only be nested to 30 deep.
arg stack overflow
The total number of arguments exceeds the limit of 100.
call stack overflow
Definitions can only be nested to 20 deep.
EOF in string
An end-of-file has been encountered before a bracketed string has been
terminated.
evaluation stack overflow
Too many characters are used for the name, definition, and arguments of
one macro. 2500 characters are allowed.
unexpected EOF An end-of-file was reached before a macro definition was terminated.
Shell Commands
4-194
C~
MACRO
o
filename: can't open
The named file could not be opened.
filename: can't include
The indicated file cannot be included with the built-in macro INCLUD.
includes nested too deeply
Files included with the built-in macro INCLUD can be nested only. up to
128 deep.
expression: invalid infix expression
There is a syntax error in the indicated infix expression as passed to the
built-in macro EXPR.
o
too many characters pushed back
A macro expansion is too large to be rescanned. A macro definition may
contain up to 2500 characters.
name: too many definitions
The table space for macro definitions has been exhausted; this occurred
upon the definition of the named macro.
token too long
A name or symbol in the input was longer than the token buffer. Each
token may be up to 200 characters long.
o
o
o
4-195
Shell Commands
:MRGRGY (MERGE _REGISTRIES)
MRGRGY (MERGE_REGISTRIES) -- Merge two network registries.
FORMAT
MRGRGY rgyl_path rgy2_path
:MRGRGY merges two previously independent network registries. This command merges
each network's site directories. Thus, all site directories' person, project, organization,
full name, and account files are merged.
:MRGRGY selects one master registry file to be the merged master. It then merges the
master registry files from each network into the merged master. The merged master
contains the name of the new master registry file and the names of the site directories
that were in each of the original master registry files. The other master registry file (Le.,
the file that is not the merged master) is backed up and then deleted.
The :MRGRGY command completes in four phases:
Phase
Description
1
:MRGRGY creates the new merged PPO and account files and saves
them in temporary files. Some .bak files are changed, but no changes
are made to the original PPO and account files. If Phase 1 fails
because :MRGRGY detects duplicate entries in the PPO and account
files, fix the problem and rerun :MRGRGY. If Phase 1 fails due to a
network problem, rerun :MRGRGY.
2
:MRGRGY saves the merged PPO and account files in the site
directories listed in the first master registry file. If Phase 2 fails due to
a network problem, rerun :MRGRGY.
3
:MRGRGY creates the merged master registry file and saves it in the
first master registry file. :MRGRGY deletes the second master registry
file. If Phase 3 fails due to a network problem, recreate the original
master registry files from your backup copies. Then rerun :MRGRGY.
4
:MRGRGY performs a SALRGY to copy the merged PPO and account
files to all site directories in the merged master registry. (Some sites
already have these files; they will get new copies.) If Phase 4 fails due
to a network problem, run SALRGY.
Before you use MRGRGY, use CMPPO and CMACCT to check for all name and account
collisions that would prevent MRGRGY from running to completion.
:MRGRGY is for use in a DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet. For more information on merging
registries, see Managing DO!",fAIN Internet8.
Shell Command8
4-196
(~
I
\ ...
MRGRGY (MERGE_REGISTRIES)
o
ARGUMENTS
rgyl_path
(required)
Specify the master registry file of one of the registries to be
merged; this file will become the new, merged registry's master
file.
The master registry file may be specified by its pathname,
by a node's copy of the
master registry file U/node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY}, or simply
by a node entry directory U/node}.
If a node's
/REGISTRY/REGISTRY file or a node entry directory is
specified, the / /node/REGISTRY/REGISTRY file is used to
locate the registry's master file.
U/node/REGISTRY/RGY _MASTER},
rgy2_path
o
(required)
Specify the master registry file of the other registry to be
merged.
EXAMPLES
The following command merges two registries.
The
/ / alpha/registry /rgy _ master and / /beta/registry /rgy _ master.
registry
masters
are
$ mrgrgy //alpha/registry/rgy_master //beta/registry/rgy_master
o
Phase 1:
Merging the person files
Merge completed
Merging the project files
Merge completed
o
Merging the org files
Merge completed
Merging the full names files
Merge completed
Merging the account files
Merge completed
o
4-197
Shell Commands
MRGRGY (MERGE _ REGISTRIES)
Phase 2:
Merged person file saved in registry //alpha/registry/rgy_master's sites
Merged project file saved in registry //alpha/registry/rgy_master's sites
Merged org file saved in registry //alpha/registry/rgy_master's sites
Merged full names file saved in registry //alpha/registry/rgy_master's
sites
Merged account file saved in registry //alpha/registry/rgy_master's sites
Phase 3:
Creating the new registry's master file in "//alpha/registry/rgy_master"
New master file completed
Phase 4:
Merged person file saved in all new registry's sites
Merged project file saved in all new registry's sites
Merged org file saved in all new registry's sites
Merged full names file saved in all new registry's sites
Merged account file saved in all new registry's sites
$
Shell Commands
c
MTVOL (MOUNT _ VOLillvIE)
o
MTVOL (MOUNT_VOLUME) -- Mount a logical volume.
FORMAT
MTVOL disk_ type [unit] [log_vol_number] [pathname] [options]
A logical volume is a named storage area on a disk. MTVOL mounts a logical volume,
making the files and directories it contains accessible. Up to eight volumes (both physical
and logical) may be mounted on a node at any time. Of the eight, no more than five of
those volumes may be logical.
Before a new physical volume can be mounted for the first time, you must initialize it.
See the INVOL (INITIALIZE_VOLUME) command description for details.
o
ARGUMENTS
disk_type
(required)
unit
(optional)
o
Specify the type of disk on which the volume being mounted
resides. Valid disk types are: W (Winchester), S (Storage
Module), or F (Floppy).
Specify disk unit number (0 or 1). If you use this argument, the
unit number must follow the disk _ type ID immediately: no
blanks in between. For example, II SIll denotes storage module
unit 1.
Default if omitted: 0
log_ vol_number
(optional)
o
Specify the disk volume number. This is the same number that
you assigned when you formatted the disk using INVOL. The
first logical volume is numbered 1, the second 2, and so forth.
Default if omitted: 1
pathname
(optional)
Specify the name of the volume entry directory. This is the
logical volume's top-level directory. Specify this pathname only
if the entry directory is not already cataloged in the naming tree.
If the pathname you choose already exists, an error will result.
Logical volume entry directories may appear anywhere in the
naming tree, with one exception: if a logical volume entry
directory is also the node's entry (top-level) directory, it must
appear just below the network root directory Uj).
o
If you omit the pathname argument, MTVOL assumes that the
entry directory already exists, and searches the naming tree for
it. If it finds the entry directory, MTVOL mounts the volume
and prints the full entry directory pathname.
4-199
Shell Commands
MTVOL (MOUNT _ VOLUME)
If MTVOL does not find the entry directory, it prints an error
message, and does not mount the volume. The search may fail
for any of the following reasons:
• The entry directory has never been cataloged.
• The entry directory was uncataloged when the
volume was last dismounted.
• The entry directory pathname exists on another node,
for which directory information IS currently
unavailable.
An unsuccessful search does not mean that you cannot mount the
volume.
It simply means that the volume entry directory
pathname does not exist on your node. To mount the volume,
issue the MTVOL command and supply an entry directory
pathname.
Even if the MTVOL finds the entry directory pathname, the
mount may fail if the volume is corrupt for some reason and
needs salvaging. In this case, MTVOL asks for permission to
mount the volume. You should usually respond "no" to this
request, then run the volume salvaging routine SALVOL. Once
the volume has been salvaged, you may try to mount it again. If
you mount a corrupt volume without salvaging it first, damage
to files in that volume may result.
Default if omitted: see above
(\
'-.. ......./
c
OPTIONS
-F
Force -- Mount the volume whether or not it needs salvaging,
and do not ask for permission.
-NQ
No query -- Suppress query if a volume needs salvaging.
Instead, mount the volume ONLY if it does not need salvaging.
-PR
Protect -- Mount the volume with write protection.
attempts to write on the volume will fail.
Any
c
CAUTION:
Before removing a floppy disk volume mounted with MTVOL, you MUST use
DMTVOL to dismount it. Failure to dismount the volume could result in lost or
corrupt information.
EXAMPLES
$ mtvol f /masterfloppy
Mount floppy and make a new entry directory.
$ dmtvol f
Dismount it.
$ mtvol f
Remount it using the new entry directory.
Volume mounted, entry directory is "/masterfloppy"
$
(~
Shell Commands
4-200
MVF (MOVE_FILE)
o
MVF (MOVE_FILE) -- Move a file.
FORMAT
MVF source [destination] ..• [options]
MVF moves a file to a different location in the naming tree. Its effect is identical to
copy source to destination
delete the source
$ CPF source destination
$ DLF source
MVF always retains the source ACL on objects moved.
o
ARGUMENTS
source
(required)
Specify name of file to be moved. Wildcarding is permitted.
destination
(optional)
o
Specify new file location. This pathname may be a derived
name. If 'destination' is a directory, the command moves the
source file into that directory. Otherwise it creates the new file
using the name specified.
Default if omitted: copy source to current working directory
Multiple source/target pairs and wildcarding are permitted.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
o
o
-0
(D)
Create the target file. If the target file already exists, an error
will result.
-R
Replace target file with source file. Use this option if the target
file already exists. If the file does not exist, this option works
like -C.
-DU
Delete when unlocked. This option is useful with -R. If the
object to be replaced is locked when MVF is invoked, the replace
operation will be performed when the object is unlocked.
-F
Force deletion of destination object if you have 'p' (protect)
rights, even if you do not have 'd' (delete) rights.
-LF
List files moved.
-LDL
List files deleted by -R option.
-OHN
Change the name of an existing destination file if required.
This option modifies the meaning of -C and -R. If -C is
4-201
Shell Commands
MVF (MOVE_FILE)
specified, this option causes any existing object with the
destination pathname to be renamed prior to the move. If -R is
specified, the destination object is renamed if it is in use and
cannot be deleted.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ mvf //anger/sam/letter //mary -r
Move the file "letter" from the
directory HI/anger/sam" to the
directory HI/mary" and replace
the current file.
c
c
c'
Shell Commands
4-202
--------
_
_....... ... _...._--
~~~~~--.-.--
---
ND (NAMING _DIRECTORY)
o
ND (NAMING_DIRECTORY) "'- Set or display naming directory.
FORMAT
ND [pathname]
The ND command sets or displays the name of the naming directory. The naming
directory is provided so that you may use a tilde (,....,) as a shorthand feature in pathname
specifications. It is also important since the system checks its COM subdirectory
(,....,COM) as a part of the default command search operation. The naming directory is
set to the login home directory at login.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(optional)
Specify directory name to be used as the naming directory. ND
also accepts the command line parser arguments II_II and II *II. If
you specify a hyphen (-), ND looks to standard input for the
directory name. An asterisk (*) followed by the name of a file
directs ND to look inside that file for the new naming directory
name.
Default if omitted: display the name of the current naming
directory.
EXAMPLES
$ nd /paul/links
Set naming directory to II/paul/links
ll
•
After execution of this command, you can use a tilde (,-......-) in place of '/paul/links' at the
beginning of any pathname.
Thus II '-"""-sausage II would be the same as
.. /paul/links/sausage ll •
o
o
4-203
Shell Commands
NETMAIN (NETWORK_MAINTENANOE)
NETMAIN (NETWORK_MAINTENANCE) -- Analyze network maintenance stats.
FORMAT
NETMAIN [options]
NETMAIN is a highly interactive, menu-driven program that lets you control the
NETMAIN SRVR network maintenance server and analyze the data that
NETMAIN _ SRVR produces. NETMAIN provides detailed help from its menus. See
Administering Your DOMAIN System for a complete description of NETMAIN's
features, instructions about using its menus, and details about interpreting its output.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
-W[HELP]
(D)
-WC[MD]
-NW
Make sure window is large enough to display command menus
and interactive help.
c
Set window size smaller for command menus only. If you later
decide that you want to see the helps, grow the window
manually with or OTRL/G.
Do not change window size.
EXAMPLES
1. $ netmain
Run NETMAIN in a window large enough to
display command menus and interactive help.
2. $ netmain -wc
Run NETMAIN in a window large enough (but
no larger) to display the command menus.
c
Shell Oommands
4-204
NETMAIN _ CIDpathname ll expression.
o
If you create a new file containing the overstruck text, OS automatically sets the file's
carriage control flag so that printers we supply will interpret the file correctly. If you use
OS in a pipeline, however, the flag is not set (since output goes to standard output). In
this case, you must use the -FTN option on the PRF command for the file to be printed
correctly. See examples 2 and 3 below.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
o
Specify file to be converted. Multiple pathnames are permitted,
separated by blanks. All output is concatenated, however.
Default if omitted: read standard input
EXAMPLES
Convert the file "mary" and
write to standard output.
1. $ os mary
$
2. $ fmt letter
o
I os >letter.overstruck
$ prf letter.os
$
-npag
3. $ fmt letter I os I prf -npag -ftn
$
4. $ fmt letter I prf -npag -pr spin
$
Format the file "letter", pipe
output to OS, and write the
results into "letter.os." This
file is then printed on the
default printer.
Format the file "letter" and
pipe it directly to the line
printer. Note the use of
"-ftn" to ensure that proper
carriage control is used.
Format "letter" and print it
on a Spinwriter printer.
Since Spinwriters use ASCII
carriage control, OS and the
-FTN option on PRF are not
needed.
o
4-215
Shell Commands
PAGF (PAGINATE_FILE)
PAGF (PAGINATE_FILE) -- Paginate a file.
FORMAT
PAGF [options] '[pathname ...]
P AGF paginates the named files to standard output. Each file is printed as a sequence of
pages. Each page is 66 lines long by default, including a 6-line header and 3-line footer.
The header includes the file name, the date and time, and the page number.
OPTIONS
-L n
Set the page length to 'n' lines. The default page length is 66
lines.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
c
Specify file to be formatted. Multiple pathnames are permitted
separated by blanks.
Default if omitted: read standard input
EXAMPLES
$ pagf -L 20 mary >mary.short
Paginate the file "mary" into pages
20 lines long and write them to
"mary. short" .
c
('
~-
Shell Commands
4-216
--------
--------------------
----------------------
PPRI (PROCESS _PRIORITY)
o
PPRI (PROCESS_PRIORITY) -- Set or display process priority.
FORMAT
PPRI [process_name ... I-UID uid] [options]
The process priority is an integer ranging from 1 (low) to 16 (high). When the operating
system decides which process to run next, it chooses the process that currently has the
highest priority. AB a process executes, its priority increases as it waits for events (such
as keyboard input) and decreases as it computes for long periods without waiting. By
default, the priority is bounded by the range 3 through 14 when a process is created.
The PPRI command lets you change these bounds to any other numbers in the range of 1
to 16.
o
A forked process inherits the priority settings of its parent process.
ARGUMENTS
process _ name ...
(optional)
o
o
Specify name of process whose priority is to be set or displayed.
Multiple names and wildcarding are permitted. If the process
does not have a name, use the -UID option (below).
Default if omitted: use current process.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the current priority bounds are displayed.
-LO n
Set priority lower boundary. 'n' must be in the range 1-16
inclusive. If omitted, the lower boundary is set to 3.
-HIn
Set priority upper boundary. 'n' must be in the range 1-16
inclusive. If omitted, the upper boundary is set to 14.
-U[ID] uid
Specify the UID of an unnamed process whose priority is to be
set or displayed.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
Display defaults for current process
1. $ ppri
MY SHELL: minimum_priority = 3, maximum priority = 14
o
2. $ ppri process_7 -10 1 -hi 4
Restrict process_7 to low priorities
3. $ ppri -10 12 -hi 12
Current process will always have
priority 12
4-217
Shell Commands
PRF (PRINT _FILE)
PRF (PRINT _FILE) -- Queue a file for printing.
c
FORMAT
PRF [pathname ... ] [options]
PRF queues a file for printing. The file must be an ASCII stream (i.e., text) file, a
graphics metafile (GMF), or a GPR bitmap object. After successfully queueing a file,
PRF displays a message containing the full pathname of the file that you queued.
You can execute PRF once for each file that you want to print (specifying all the
necessary options every time), or you can enter PRF's interactive mode and hand files to
the program continuously. See the examples below.
Files queued by PRF are physically printed using PRSVR (PRINT _SERVER).
When you invoke PRF, it first sets all options to their default states (as described below).
Next, it looks for a PRF configuration file called ",USER_DATA/PRF.DB unless you have
·invoked PRF with the -NDB option (described below). If PRF locates a configuration
file, it executes the options contained in the file to configure the current session. Finally,
it proceeds to process any options on the command line or in the interactive session.
c
A menu-based version of the PRF command is also available. See the PRFD command
description for more information.
A Word About Printronix Carriage Control
The Printronix line printer that we supply can interpret two kinds of carriage control:
ASCII (the default for DOMAIN files) and FORTRAN. In files with ASCII carriage
control, the NEWLINE and FORM FEED characters have special meanings. NEWLINE
terminates a line. FORM FEED causes a page eject if it is the only character in a record.
In any other position, FORM FEED causes unpredictable results.
If a file has FORTRAN carriage control (which consists of special characters in ·the first
column of every line in the file), PRF works one of two ways. If the file has been
produced by the OS (OVERSTRIKE) command or by one of your own programs that
explicitly sets the file's FORTRAN carriage control flag, PRF automatically treats every
record as a line, and interprets the first character in the record as a carriage control
character with its standard FORTRAN meaning (i.e., '1' signals a form feed, '+' signals
a carriage return without a line feed, etc.). Within a program, you can set the carriage
control output flag by calling STREAM_ $REDEFINE. To generate a file with FORTRAN
carriage control from a file formatted with FMT, use the OS command.
c
If you know that the file has FORTRAN carriage control, but aren't sure whether or not
the file's carriage control flag has been properly set, specify -FTN ON (below) to force
use of this feature.
c
Shell Commands
4-218
------~--~~~~~~~~-
PRF (PRINT _ FILE)
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify the file to be printed.
Multiple pathnames and
pathname wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: read standard input.
OPTIONS
The following options may appear on the Shell command line or in PRF interactive mode as
noted below. In addition, you may place one or more options in a configuration file (see
-CONFIG). In that case, create the file with one option per line without the prefixed
hyphens (-). See Example 3 below.
o
Many options described below have default values that are "specified in the PRSVR
configuration file. II This is a file established by your System Administrator for each printer
in the network. If you omit one of these options, your file will be printed using the value
found in that configuration file. For example, omission of the -BANNER option may cause
your file to be printed with a banner page, or without it, depending on the default
established for the printer in question by its configuration file. For complete details about
the contents of the print server configuration file, including default settings, see
Administering Your DOMAIN System.
If no options are specified, the file(s) are printed using ASCII carriage control, with
pagination enabled, on the default printer (as established by PRSVR).
o
The following options apply to all file types.
-INTER [ACTIVE]
Enter interactive mode.
o
-SEA[RCH_DIR] {ONIOFF}
Search through all the directories of all the active processes on
your node for the file(s) to be printed. This option is most useful
in interactive mode, when the working directory of the PRF
process may be different from the working directory of the file to
be printed. This option is OFF by default.
-COP[IES] n
Print multiple copies of the file, where 'n' is the requested
number of copies. If -COP[IES] is specified, 'n' is required .. If
this option is omitted, one copy is printed by default.
-PR[INTER] name
Specify the printer 'name' for printing the file. This option is
useful only if more than one printer is in use on the network, or
if a printer has been assigned a nonstandard name with the
II PRINTER _ NAME II configuration directive in the PRSVR
command. If you omit this option, PRF uses the default printer
name, IIPII. Note that liP" is also the default printer name used
by the PRINT _ SERVER.
o
-S[ITE] entry _ dir
Specify print queue (/SYSjPRINT) on alternate node by giving
that node's entry directory name. This option allows you to
4-219
Shell Commands
PRF (PRINT _ FILE)
maintain more than one printer queue directory. You may want
to maintain separate queues for different organizations, or you
may want two queues to provide redundancy in case of node
failure.
-C[OPY]
(D)
Place a copy of the print file in the /SYS /PRINT /SPOOLER
directory.
-NC[OPY]
-D[ELETE]
Do not copy the print file into the /SYS/PRINT/SPOOLER
directory. In this case, the print server uses the file itself rather
than a duplicate. This option is only available with print servers
running under SR9.5. If this option is specified, then -ND
becomes default, and the file is NOT deleted unless -D is
explicitly specified as well.
(D)
Specify that the print file is deleted when the print server
finished printing it.
-ND[ELETE]
-USER[_r~AME]
IS
Do not delete the print file when the print server is finished
printing it. This becomes default if -NC is specified.
name
Specify user name that will appear on the banner page of the
printed file. The alarm facility of PRF also uses this name to
determine who should be notified when printing is complete (see
-SIG below). This means that this name must be a valid login
name (unless you don't care about sending an alarm). If this
option is omitted, the current login name is used.
-SIG[NAL] {ALARMIOFF}
Request an alarm server signal when the file has finished
printing. The default is OFF.
-BAN [NER] [ONIOFF]
Enable/disable banner page. The default is specified in the
PRSVR configuration file. If neither ON nor OFF is specified,
ON is assumed.
-CONFIG[_FILE] [pathname]
Specify a file containing further PRF options, one per line. Do
not use prefixed hyphens (-) with the option names in the
configuration file. If 'pathname' is omitted, PRF will execute
the configuration file r-vUSER_DATA/PRF.DB.
-NDB
Suppress processing of the configuration file.
-TEXT
Specify text mode for printing ASCII files. This is the default
print mode.
-PLOT
Specify plot mode. Include this option to print bitmap files
created by a graphics metafile (GMF) manager or GPR, or the
CPSCR (COPY _SCREEN) command.
-TRANSP ARENT
Specify that when the file is printed, the records of the file are to
Shell Commands
4-220
~
I
~ .../
PRF (PRINT _ FILE)
o
be passed directly to the printer driver routine with no
processing by the print server.
- PAPER _ SIZE {AlB ILEGAL IA3IA4IA5IB4IB5}
Select the paper size. You must specify one of the following size
codes:
Code
A
B
LEGAL
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
o
Size in inches (mm)
------------------8.50
11.00
8.50
11.69
8.27
5.38
9.84
5.93
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
11.00
17.00
14.00
16.54
11. 69
8.27
13.90
9.89
(297mm
(210mm
(137mm
(257mm
(182mm
x
x
x
x
x
420mm)
297mm)
210mm)
364mm)
257mm)
This option is only available for the DOMAIN/LASER26 and
APPLE LASERWRITER printers.
PRF assumes that the
correct size of paper is in the printer's paper tray. Therefore,
you must check the paper tray before printing. The default
paper size is specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
The following options apply to text files only.
-NPAG
o
-MARGINS [ONIOFF]
Enable/ disable margins generated by PRF. If this option is
specified without ON nor OFF, ON is assumed. The default is
'ON'.
-TOP
o
Disable the headers and margins generated by PRF.
n
Specify page top margin, in inches. The default is a value
specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
-BOT[TOM] n
Specify page bottom margin, in inches. The default is a value
specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
-RIGHT n
Specify page right margin, in inches. The default is 0 inches.
-LEFT n
Specify page left margin, in inches. The default is 0 inches.
-HEADERS [ONIOFF]
Enable/disable page headers and footers generated by PRF. If
this option is specified without ON nor OFF, ON is assumed.
The default is specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
- HEAD [_ STRIN G] I-string/ c-string/ r-string
o
Specify contents of left, center, and right components of the page
header generated by PRF. Components may be empty strings.
The following special characters return the values indicated when
they appear in the header strings.
4-221
Shell Commands
PRF (PRINT _ FILE)
= escape character
= current page number with 1 leading and
1 trailing space
% = current date
= filename
&; = filename's last time,date modified
insert a space in text string (literal
* = are
not allowed)
c
@
#
spaces
Example: -HEAD !/Page#/% will produce a header with the
filename in the left component, the string "Page" followed by
the current page number in the center component, and the
current date in the right component. The default header IS a
string specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
-FOOT[_ STRING] l-string/ c-string/r-string
Specify contents of page footers. The format is the same as for
-HEAD above. There is no default footer.
('"
-FTN [ONIOFF]
Enable/disable FORTRAN carriage control. -FTN ON causes
the PRINT SERVER to use FORTRAN forms control even if
the file does not have the FORTRAN carriage control flag. Use
of this optIon will cause PRF to interpret the first character of
each line as a FORTRAN carriage control character (and not
print it). This can be unfortunate if the file has ASCII carriage
control, so be careful. -FTN OFF causes the PRINT _ SERVER
to print the contents of column one rather than trying to
interpret it as FORTRAN forms control. If this option is
specified without ON nor OFF, ON is assumed. The default is
'OFF'.
~----./
-WRAP [ONIOFF]
Enable/disable automatic line wrapping. When enabled, PRF
will wrap any lines that exceed the right margin onto the next
line. When disabled, PRF truncates lines that exceed the right
margin. If this option is specified without ON nor OFF, ON is
assumed. The default is 'OFF'.
The following options are for use with printers supporting variable font and pitch sizes.
-PITCH n
Set the pitch (characters/inch) at which you wish the document
to be printed. The following pitch settings are available on the
printers indicated.
Printronix
Spinwriter
Imagen
GE
Versatec
LaserWriter
Laser26
-POINT n
Shell Commands
10
12
8.5, 10, 12, 15, 17.1
10, 12, 13.1, 16.7
12
1 to 100
1 to 100
Set the point size for the font to be used. This is a real number
in units of a point which is 1/72 inch.
4-222
c
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----
PRF (PRINT _FILE)
o
-WEIGHT value
Set the weight of the font to be used. This option is only valid
for the GE printer type. Possible values are 'light', 'medium',
and 'bold'. The default is 'medium'.
-LQ [ONIOFF]
Specify that the document is to be printed in 'letter quality'
(ON) or in 'draft' (OFF) mode. This option is only valid for the
GE printer type. If this option is specified without ON nor
OFF, ON is assumed. The default is 'OFF'.
The following options apply to plot files.
-RES[OLUTION] n
o
o
o
Specify resolution of output plot in dots per inch. If you specify
a resolution not available on the particular printer, the file is
printed at the closest available resolution. The default resolution
is specified in the PRSVR configuration file.
-WHITE[_SPACE] n
Specify amount of white space (in inches) to appear between
multiple plots in one file. The default is three inches.
-BW[_REV] [ONIOFF]
Enable/ disable black and white reversal for bitmaps. If this
option is specified without ON nor OFF, ON is assumed. The
default is 'OFF'.
-MAGN[IFICATION] n
Specify bitmap magnification value.
range -1 to 16.
'n' is an integer in the
-1
selects auto-scaling to magnify the bitmap to
fill the available page space.
o
selects 'one-to-one' scaling between the display
and the printer for GMF bitmaps. (For GPR
bitmaps, this translates to magnification 1.)
1-16
selects magnification by that amount.
Portions of the magnified bitmap that exceed
the printer page boundaries are clipped.
The default is
o.
The following options apply only for files sent to printers that contain the PostScript
interpreter, such as the DOMAIN/LASER26 and APPLE LASERWRITER printers.
o
-POST[SCRIPT] [ONIOFF]
Enable/ disable PostScript interpretation. When enabled, the
data is passed through the PostScript interpreter.
When
disabled, the data is printed as text, plot, or transparent data. If
this option is specified without ON nor OFF, ON is assumed.
The default is 'OFF'.
4-223
Shell Commands
PRF (PRINT _FILE)
-COL[UMNS] {112}
Specify single or double column printing.
single column.
-LPI
n
The default state is
Specify the line spacing factor. 'n' is an integer indicating the
number of lines per inch. The default state is six lines per inch.
-ORIENT[ATION] {PORT[RAIT]ILAND[SCAPE]}
Select the page orientation. PORTRAIT specifies that the text
or x-axis of the bitmap is printed parallel to the short edge of
the paper. LANDSCAPE specifies that the text or x-axis of the
bitmap is printed parallel to the long edge of the paper and
perpendicular to the short leading edge. The default state is
PORTRAIT.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
c
COMMANDS
Once PRF has been invoked in interactive mode (see -INTER above), it accepts the
following interactive commands at the "PRF> II prompt (in addition to the options
already discussed).
P[RINT] pathname
Queue the specified file for printing.
Q[UIT]
Quit interactive mode and return to the Shell.
SH[ELL]
Create a shell command line. This command allows you to
issue Shell commands without leaving PRF interactive
mode. When you have finished entering Shell commands,
type OTRL/Z. This will return you to PRF interactive
mode.
Your previous PRF option settings remain
undisturbed by the intervening Shell commands.
INIT[IALIZE]
Reset PRF parameters to their default values.
R[EAD] [printer]
List entries in the queue for the specified printer at the
current site (as specified by -S). If 'printer' is omitted,
then the contents of the queue (determined by the current
setting of -PR) are listed.
WD [pathname]
Execute the Shell command WD (WORKING_DIRECTORY) to
set or display the working directory.
GET option
Display the value of the PRF option specified. Use this
command to show the settings of the various PRF
parameters.
CAN[ CEL ] [queued _ filename]
Cancel printing of the specified file at the current site (as
specified by -8). Note that you must specify the pathname
which PRF assigns when the file is queued (which may
Shell Commands
4-224
c
("
'",-_/
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PRF (PRINT _ FILE)
o
differ from the name of your original file). Use the READ
command to display the names of currently queued files. If
the filename is omitted, the last file to be queued by this
process is cancelled. This command is only effective for
files which have not yet physically begun to print.
EXAMPLES
1. $ prf mary -npag -ftn
1//NODE1/MY_DIR/MARY" queued for printing.
$
o
Queue "mary"; suppress
pagination; force
FORTRAN carriage
2. $ prf filex -s //tape
1//NODE1/MY_DIR/TEST_FILE.PAS" queued for printing at site //TAPE.
$
Queue "filex" to the
printer queue on the
node called //tape.
3. Configuration File: the following commands might appear in the default
PRF configuration file -USER_DATA/PRF.DB.
PR ge
SITE //rye
FOOT %/my_file/&
o
o
4. Sample interactive session:
$ PRF -INTER
PRF> get pr
pr = p
PRF> -pr cx
PRF> get pr
pr = cx
PRF> -pitch 20
PRF> print test file.pas
"//NODE1/MY_DIR!TEST_FILE.PASI queued for printing.
PRF> q
$
5. Running PRF from an icon:
If you would like to run PRF interactively in a process devoted to it,
you might place the following command in your -USER_DATA/STARTUP_DM
file:
cp -i -c 'P' /com/prf -inter -n print_file
This will create a PRF process and turn its window into an icon using the
print icon character 'in (/SYS/DM/FONTS/ICONS). Issue the DM command ICON
to change the icon window into its full-size format.
o
4-225
Shell Commands
PRFD (PRF _DISPLAY)
PRFD (PRF _DISPLAY) -- Invoke menu-based PRF.
FORMAT
PRFD
PRFD invokes the menu-based version of the PRF (PRINT _FILE) command. This
interactive version runs a graphics interface inside the process window in which PRFD
was invoked. You control the operation of PRFD by pointing the cursor at a desired
menu item and pressing (if you have a mouse) or or the space bar if you
do not have a mouse. Internal help is available by pointing at a menu item and pressing
the key (RBS).
PRFD requires no arguments or options on the Shell command line. To exit PRFD and
return to the Shell, select the "QUIT" menu item.
PRFD performs exactly the same functions as the command-line based PRF.
PRF command description for complete information on those various functions.
See the
c
(
'
'-- _.
..
c
Shell Commands
4-226
.. _-.
__ ._... _ - - - - - - - _.. _
...
_....._-_._._----_ .•
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -....- - - - - - - - - - - . - - - .. - - . - - - - -
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK)
o
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK) -- Probe network and display error statistics.
FORMAT
PROBENET [options]
This command broadcasts packets to the diagnostic socket in all nodes, then requests
error counts indicating the status the broadcast was received with. It compiles counts
from every node in the topology list and reports them to standard output.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
o
Use one of the following three options to specify the list of nodes to display.
(D)
-A
-T pathname
o
-N node
Probe all nodes responding to an LCNODE command. If the
network is completely corrupted so that messages cannot make a
complete pass, use one of the other two options to specify
precisely which nodes to test.
Probe the nodes listed in the topology file indicated. The file
must contain one hexadecimal node ID per line. Any text
following a space after the node ID is ignored. Comment lines
may be inserted if they are prefixed with a '#' or 'C.
id ...
Probe the node(s) specified by the indicated hexadecimal node
ID(s). A good choice of nodes to test is a set evenly spaced
around the network.
Use the following options to specify which test to run.
o
-S n
(D)
-R [n]
Specify the total number of packets to be sent to each node.
The default number of packets is 10. If 0 is specified for 'n', no
test messages are sent, but statistics from each node will be
collected.
Repeat PROBENET cycle every 'n' seconds. If 'n' is omitted,
the cycle is repeated every 10 seconds. When is
typed at the input window, the send cycle is terminated
immediately and the statistics are gathered and reported.
Use the following options to specify which packets are sent.
-D data file
-LEN n
o
Specifies that the packets will be taken out of the specified data
file instead of the standard built-in data pattern.
(D)
Specify the length (in bytes) of the data portion of the test
packet, in bytes. The default length is 1024 bytes.
Use the following options to control the level of detail in the statistics report.
-L
Print long (detailed) error counts if there were any errors (i.e.,
at least one XMIT ERRS or RCV ERRS).
4-227
Shell Commands
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK)
-ERR
Print header for each test, but only statistics for nodes which
returned errors (XMIT and/or ROV ERRS).
-MON fail
c
lim
Print header for each pass, but only statistics on passes whose
total failure count equal or exceed the 'fail_lim' value.
- SENS threshold
Open a window pane and select some output lines to append to
this pane. The nodes selected are the ones whose error count
exceed a five node running average error count by the specified
threshold value. Also, all nodes with modem errors are appended
to this pane. The use of this secondary output is to do some data
reduction and pick the nodes at or near points of data corruption
in the network. The window pane is also stored in a named pad
file: PROBENET.PANE
c'
REPORTED STATISTICS
The following statistics are printed for each node:
ATTElviPT
Number of probenet packets received.
ERRS
Number of probenet packets received with errors. An increase in this
count over previous nodes narrows the network problem between this and
the previously displayed node.
MODEM ERRS
Number of transmit or receive modem errors encountered by the node.
BIPH
Number of transmit or receive biphase errors encountered by the node.
An increase in this count over previous nodes narrows the network
problem between this and the preceeding node, independent of probenet
display.
ESB
Number of transmit or receive elastic store buffer errors encountered by
the node.
TOKENS
Number of tokens inserted by this node. This statistic does not localize
any problem.
EXAMPLES
1. $probenet
{Probe the entire network once. No errors detected.}
There are 4 nodes in the test.
Broadcasting 10 1024-byte packets. 85/02/20 21:16:52 # failures
0
Last Biph hardware failure detected by node 676 on 85/02/20 at 19:15
=
NODE
NAME
-----------584
21
4A
3536
*diskless
OS
HUBRIS
*diskless
ATTEMPT ERRS
------ -----10
0
0
10
10
0
0
10
MODEM
ERRS
BIPH
ESB
TOKENS=
0
-----0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Self
C...
Shell Commands
4-228
,-
-
-----------------------
PROBENET (PROBE_NETWORK)
o
2. $ probenet -t node list -s 14400 -r 3600 -d data e3
{Probes network and displays nodes specified in file "node list".
This node broadcasts 14400 packets in 3600 seconds. i.e. four
packets per second. The packet data comes out of file II data_ e3" .}
There are
5 nodes in the test.
Broadcasting 14400 1024-byte packets (page 0) over 3600 seconds.
85/02/20 21:58:19 # failures = 100
Last Biph hardware failure detected by node 506 on 85/02/20 at 21:50
NODE
o
1967
15F5
2255
3FD
2B69
NAME
-----------GTX
SWI
BIRDIE
FLASH
STANG
ATTEMPT
ERRS
MODEM
ERRS
BIPH
ESB
------ -----14386
14386
14384
14386
14385
TOKENS=
3
------
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Self
Broadcasting 14400 1024-byte packets (page 0) over 3600 seconds.
85/02/20 21:58:41 # failures = 100
Last Biph hardware failure detected by node 506 on 85/02/20 at 21:50
NODE
1967
15F5
2255
3FD
2B69
o
{
NAME
-----------GTX
SWI
BIRDIE
FLASH
STANG
ATTEMPT
ERRS
-----14383
14383
14381
14383
14382
MODEM
ERRS
BIPH
ESB
0
0
0
4
4
0
0
0
4
0
TOKENS=
3
------
------
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Self
Above example shows a problem between node 3FD and its predecessor
in the network. }
o
o
4-229
Shell Commands
PRSVR (PRINT _SERVER)
PRSVR (PRINT_SERVER) -- Start the Print Server.
FORMAT
PRSVR [config_file_name] [options] [&]
PRSVR executes the print server program, which prints files submitted to the print queue
with PRF (PRINT _FILE). You only need to execute thi8 command when you 8tart the
node connected to the printer. Do not execute the command at other node8: thi8 will
caU8e print file8 to be 108t.
The print server must run independently of user login, or it will stop when you log out.
To start the print server, include this command line
OPS /OOM/PRSVR [pathname]
in the printer node's STARTUP file.
PRSVR first performs some internal initialization, then, after about ten seconds, prints
an introductory message on the printer.
It then scans the print queue
(fSYSjPRINT j QUEUE) , and if it finds a file intended for it, prints the file. After printing all
the files in the queue, it checks the queue for more files every 10 seconds.
For complete details about user-supplied device drivers for auxiliary devices and the
contents of the print server configuration file, see Admini8tering Your DOMAIN
SY8tem.
('-
.•..
/
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify printer configuration file.
Default if omitted: use file PRINTER CONFIG.DATA.
&
(optional)
Oreate separate Shell process in which to run the print server .
.This process is created without the normal pads or windows,
thus running invisibly in the background. When the print server
is started in this fashion, it stops automatically at logout. To
stop this background process before logout, use the SIGP
(SIGNAL _ PROCESS) command.
OPTIONS
-N name
Specify a name for the print server process. If this option is not
specified, the process is named PRINT _SERVER.printername.
'~'
(
Shell Command8
4-230
,-----,./
PST (PROOESS_STATUS)
o
PST (PROCESS_STATUS)
--< List process internal state information.
FORMAT
PST [options]
PST lists internal state information for all processes in the system by name or UID.
OPTIONS
-R[EPEAT] n
o
-N[ODE] node_spec
Specify remote node whose process statistics are to be listed. See
the section on node specifications in Ohapter 3 for more
information.
-UN
o
o
Repeat every n seconds. If you include this option, the first
pass displays the total time elapsed since process creation.
Subsequent passes display changes from the previous pass, as
shown in the first example below.
Display DOMAIN/IX process IDs.
-PA[GING]
Display process paging information. The paging data presented
is private page faults, global page faults, disk paging I/O, and
network paging I/O.
-0
Display only brief information on level 2 (user) processes. This
output also suppresses the header lines and the processor time
total. See Example 5 below.
-TY[PE]
Shows whether each process is a USER process (stops at logout),
a SERVER process (started via -OPS), or an AEGIS process
(internal to the operating system).
EXAMPLES
1. $ pst -r 20
Processor 1PRIORITY 1 Program 1State 1
Time (sec) Imn/cu/mxl Counter 1
1
Process
Name
273.345 16/16/16
18088 Wait display_manager
441.379 1/15/16 Ready process_l
68.086 1/16/16
17E90 Wait digital_clock
7.531 1/14/16
17E90 Wait alarmer
0.715 1/15/16
17C30 Wait mbx_helper
0.715 1/15/16
17F78 Wait mail
0.715 1/16/16
17F78 Wait shell
----------1
792.489
o
4-231
Shell Commands
PST (PROCESS_STATUS)
Processor IPRIORITYI Program 1State 1
Time (sec) Imn/cu/mxl Counter 1
1
0.262 16/16/16
18088
0.262 1/16/16
0.262 1/16/16
17E90
0.000 1/14/16
17E90
0.000 1/16/16
17C30
0.000 1/16/16
17F78
0.000 1/16/16
17F78
Ready
Ready
Wait
Wait
Wait
Wait
Wait
Process
Name
display_manager
process_l
digital_clock
alarmer
mbx_helper
mail
shell
----------1
0.786
2. $ pst -n //eve
Display stats of node -//eve A •
Processor 1PRIORITY 1 Program 1State 1
Time (sec) 1mn/cu/mx 1 Counter 1
1
1016.261 16/16/16
7.269 1/ 2/16
4.385 1/15/16
10.939 1/16/16
----------1
Process
Name
''-.. .. /
18088 Wait display_manager
17C30 Wait netman
17C30 Wait rnbx_helper
17F78 Wait server_process_manager
1038.855
3. $ pst -un
Processor 1PRIORITY 1 ProgramlStatelUNIX INFORMATION 1
Time (sec) Imn/cu/mxl Counter 1
1 PID 1 PPIDI PGIDI
1016.261 16/16/16
7.269 1/ 2/16
4.385 1/16/16
10.939 1/15/16
----------1
o
18088 Wait
17C30 Wait
17C30 Wait
17F78 Wait
23
24
26
1
23
24
26
Process
Name
display_manager
netman
mbx_helper
server_process_manager
1038.855
4. $ pst -pa
Processor 1PRIORITY 1 Program 1State 1Private 1 GloballD I S KI N E TI Process
Time (sec) Imn/cu/mxl Counter 1
1 Faults 1 FaultslPage IOIPageIOI Name
288.549
444.001
7.793.
0.715
1.502
0.715
16/16/16
18088
Wait
1/15/16 Ready
1/15/16
17E90 Wait
1/15/16
17C30 Wait
1/16/16
17F78 Wait
1/16/16
17F78 Wait
----------1
2168
6284
279
36
104
44
Shell Commands
16/16/16
3/13/14
3/13/14
3/ 6/14
3/10/14
0 4180 display_manager
0 11097 process_l
0
436 alarmer
0
84 mbx_helper
0
175 mail
0
74 shell
1-------1------1-----1-----1
9039
815.296
5. $ pst -c
1433.801
20.293
4.658
69.609
37.487
783
1557
120
6
51
22
lF6A2
lF192
lF192
475BE8
lF352
Wait
Wait
Wait
Ready
Wait
4-232
2565
0
display_manager
netman
mbx_helper
base shell
alarm server
16197
c
--
---------------------- --------------
----------------------------------
PST (PROCESS_STATUS)
o
6. $ pst. -t.y
Node:
Time:
BADl
Monday, August. 26, 1985
Processor I PRIORITY I
Time (sec) I mn/cu/mx I
563587.995
4189.242
15597.507
958.367
4.633
215.347
658.725
933.019
370.728
-- -- --- -- -16/16/16
3/ 3/14
3/14/14
3/14/14
3/13/14
3/ 9/14
3/ 3/14
2:23:06 pm (EDT)
Program I St.at.e I
Count.er I
I
---------------
lF6A2
lF602
lF192
lF602
lF44A
lF602
Wait.
Wait.
Wait.
Wait.
Wait.
Ready
Wait.
Type
Process Name
aegis
aegis
user
user
server
user
user
user
user
display_manager
process_31
mbx_helper
alarm server
clock
process 34
process_36
----------586515.828
0
o
o
o
4-233
Shell Commands
RBAK (READ _BAOKUP)
RBAK (READ _BACKUP) -- Restore or index a magnetic media backup file.
FORMAT
RBAK {pathname [-AS disk_pathname] .••
I -ALL}
[options]
RBAK restores a magnetic media backup file which was written with WBAK
(WRITE_BACKUP). Use WBAK and RBAK to backup disks and to transfer information
between separate DOMAIN installations. (Use the RWMT (READ_WRITE_MAGTAPE)
command to transfer information to and from non-DOMAIN installations.)
RBAK operates in either "index" or "interchange" mode. To restore objects to disk, use
interchange mode (-INT). To list object names on standard output, without restoring
any information to disk, use index mode (-INDEX).
When using RBAK, please note the following:
• RBAK must be run on the node which is connected to the tape or floppy drive
unit. You may accomplish this either by physically typing the RBAK
command on the host node, or by running RBAK in a process on the host
node created from your own remote node using the ORP CREATE_PROCESS
command.
• There is no special tape mounting command. Simply mount the tape on the
tape drive and execute RBAK.
• Only one tape unit can be connected to any'node.
• The directories on disk must have delete access to be replaced by directories
from the backup media. The disk directories must have append access for
files to be added from the backup media.
• Files on disk must have delete access to be replaced by files from the backup
media.
• Locked objects cannot be restored from backup media.
(LOCK_ OBJECT) command.
See the LKOB
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Shell Commands
Specify name of object to be indexed or restored to disk. This
may be a directory, file, or link. If the object is being restored,
the new disk object will have the same name. If you wish the
disk file to be saved under a different name, use -AS (below).
Multiple pathnames are permitted; however, wildcarding is not
supported.
4-234
RBAK (READ _BAOKUP)
o
Default if omitted: must use -ALL.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
Backup File Identifiers
One of the following options is required.
-F file
no
Read the backup file with the file number specified.
assigned this number with WBAK.
-F CUR
-FID file
o
You
Begin reading at current posit,ion on the backup media.
id
Read the backup file name specified. You assigned this name
using WBAK.
Mode Control
-INT
(D)
-INDEX
Select "interchange" mode. Backup files are restored to disk.
Select II index II mode. Backup file names are listed on standard
output; no information is restored to disk.
Catalog Control
o
-ALL
Restore or index all the objects in the backup file specified.
This option is required if you do not use the 'pathname'
argument to indicate a particular object to be indexed or'
restored.
- AS pathnamel
Restore the object specified and assign a different disk pathname
('pathnamel '). This option is only valid when used with the
'pathname' argument on the RBAK command line.
o
o
-CR
(D)
Specify create mode. RBAK does not restore objects if their
names already exist on disk. It prints an error message if a
name exists on both disk and backup media, and continues.
-R
Specify replace mode. RBAK deletes the existing disk object,
and replaces it with the object read from backup media.
-FORCE
Force object deletion if you have owner rights, even if you don't
have delete rights.
-DU
Delete when unlocked. If the object to be deleted is locked when
RBAK is invoked, the delete operation will be performed when
the object is unlocked.
-MS
Specify merge-source mode. Similar to replace mode. If an
object already exists on disk, RBAK deletes the disk version and
restores the backup media version (the source). However, if the
object is a directory, RBAK merges the backup media directory's
contents with the disk directory.
4-235
Shell Commands
RBAK (READ _BACKUP)
- PR pathname ...
Preserve specified objects on the disk. Multiple pathnames and
wildcarding are permitted. If the objects exist on disk, they will
NOT be overwritten by backup media verSIOns. This option
must be used with the -MS option.
-MD
Specify merge-destination mode. Similar to create mode. If an
object already exists on disk (the destination) RBAK does not
restore the backup media version, and retains the disk version.
However, if the object is a directory RBAK merges the backup
media directory's contents with the disk directory.
Label Oontrol
-SLA
(D)
-NSLA
Display the backup media file label on standard output.
Do not display the backup media file label.
Listing Oontrol
You may include the -L option, or any combination of -LD, -LF and -LL.
-L
Write all the file, directory, and link names to standard output.
-LD
Write all directory names to standard output.
-LF
Write all filenames to standard output.
-LL
Write alllinknames to standard output.
Backup Device Oontrol
-ANYS
Force RBAK to accept any section of the backup file. When a
backup file spans multiple backup media volumes, RBAK
normally begins with the backup media volume containing the
backup file's first section, and proceeds to the backup media
volume containing the second section, and so on. If you know
which backup media volume contains the object you want to
restore or index, use this option. This lets RBAK start at any
section of the backup file.
-REO
Force previous volume to be reopened, and suppress reading of
backup media volume label. Use only when backup media has
not been repositioned since last WBAK or RBAK.
-DEV d[unit]
Specify device type and unit number. 'd' must be either 'M'
(for reel-to-reel magnetic tape), 'CT' (for cartridge tape), or 'F'
(for floppy), depending on which drive is being used. 'unit' is an
integer (0-3). Both are required for reel-to-reel tapes (Le., -DEV
M2). A unit number is NOT required for floppy disks and
cartridge tapes (i.e., -DEV F). If this option is omitted, RBAK
assumes device MO.
CAUTION:
Shell Oommands
Floppy disk support for this command is limited.
In particular, error detection during reads and
4-236
("
\
C"
./'
.•.•.•
_.._. - - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - . - - - RBAK (READ _BACKUP)
writes is poor. DO NOT use this command with
floppy disks when the data being placed on the
floppy disks are critical and unrecoverable.
o
-RETEN
Retension the cartridge tape (unwind to the end, then rewind).
This can be helpful if you have encountered cartridge tape
reading errors. Retensioning requires about 1.5 minutes to
complete.
-NRETEN
(D)
-REWIND
o
Do not retension the cartridge tape.
Rewind the cartridge tape after reading or indexing. If this
option is omitted, the cartridge tape is left positioned to the next
tape file. This option is valid ONLY for the cartridge tape;
reel-to-reel tapes get rewound automatically when removed from
the drive.
ACL Control
(D)
-DACL
-SACL
Assign the destination directory's default ACL to the object
being restored.
Retain the restored object's orginal ACL.
DTM/D1U Control
o
-PDT
Preserve the
used.
object'~
original date-time modified and date-time
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
o
$ rbak -f 1 fred/soup
$ rbak -f
1
Read "fred/soup" in backup file 1 and restore it
to disk. "Fred/soup" may be a directory. file.
or link.
fred/soup -as //node5/noodle
$ rbak -dev ct -rewind
Restore "fred/soUp" and place
it in "noodle" on node5.
Rewind the cartridge tape prior to removing it
from the tape unit.
DIAGNOSTICS
I/O Errors
o
When RBAK encounters an I/O error, it attempts the operation again, for a total of five times.
Mter the fifth attempt fails, RBAK prints out an error message describing which type of error
occurred. If the error happened during an attempt to read from a tape, RBAK skips the tape
block which it could not read, and tries to read the next one. (Note that a tape block is 8 Kb
4-237
Shell Commands
RBAK (READ _BAOKUP)
long.) If it again fails, after five tries, it skips that block and tries the next. This process will
continue for a total of twenty consecutive failed blocks, at which time RBAK aborts.
tape rewind error
An I/O error occurred.
c
tape write-filemark error
An 1/0 error occurred.
tape space-filemark error
An 110 error occurred.
tape space-record error
An 1/0 error occurred.
ilo recovery failed
An 110 error occurred and the tape drive could not reposition for another try.
tape ilo error
An 110 error occurred.
c
tape ilo error -- data lost
An unrecovered 110 error occurred and data was lost.
Operator Errors
first label on volume is not VOLl label
Expected a standard label, and did not find one. The tape was not written with WBAK.
c
label version number in VOLl label is not 113 11
The label format is incorrect. The tape was not written with WBAK.
wrong volume, file header is inconsistent with previous trailer
The wrong continuation tape was put on the drive. This error can occur only when a
multi-tape file is used.
magtape drive is offline
You have not put the drive on line.
c
tape is write-protected
The write enable ring is not on the tape.
file not found
The tape file specified was n,)t found.
invalid unit number
Tape unit specified is not connected. Presently, only DEV MO is supported.
pbu is not present.
No tape unit is connected to the node. RBAI( can only be run on the node connected to the
tape drive.
Shell Commands
4-238'
c
-
._ .......
__
.•...•...•
_--
-------------------
RDYM (READY _MESSAGE)
o
RDYM (READY _MESSAGE) -- Set system ready message.
FORMAT
RDYM {-ON I -OFF}
RDYM enables or inhibits the output of a system ready message to standard output after
execution of each Shell command. The message lists the CPU time required to execute the
command and the elapsed time since the last command. Both times are reported in
seconds and decimal fractions of seconds. The message appears on a line following the
echoed command line in the Shell's process transcript pad.
o
o
Turning on the ready message interactively or in a Shell script causes it to be printed
after each command of the program is executed. If the ready message is not disabled at
the end of the Shell script, it will remain in effect after the Shell script exits.
Ready message printing is enabled and disabled for levels. The level number increases
each time a Shell script or the Shell is invoked, and decreases when it exits. The times
printed in the ready message reflect the CPU and real time used since the last message at
the same level. Thus, for example, if the ready message is enabled in a Shell script, after
the last command of the program is finished, two ready messages will be printed: one
showing the time used by that command, and one showing the time used by the whole
Shell script.
If the ready message is turned on by one level, it will remain on when that level 'exits;
however, if it is disabled by a level, it will revert to its previous state when that level
exits.
By default, system ready messages are disabled at login.
OPTIONS
o
-ON
Enable message.
-OFF
Disable message.
EXAMPLES
$ rdym -on
cpu time: 750,685, real time: 5914.532.
$ bldt
AEGIS, revision 6,0, built on Friday, April 15, 1983
cpu time: 0.234, real time: 1.736.
$ rdym -off
9:26:30 am (EST).
$
o
4-239
Shell Commands
READ
READ -- Set variables equal to input values.
FORMAT
READ [options] {-TYPE type var _name ...
I variable_list}
The READ command reads input values and sets a list of variables to those values. The
values from the input line are parsed as seperate tokens (they must be seperated by
spaces), and each variable in the list is assigned the value of a token.
Use the II_P prompt II argument to instruct READ to issue a prompt. If you do not input
values for all the variables names listed as part of the READ command, READ displays a
II II prompt to request further input.
By default, the type of each variable specified in the READ command depends on the
type of each input value. You can, however, use the -TYPE argument to specify the
individual type(s) of the the variables.
c
ARGUl\1ENTS
variable list
(optional)
Specify the names of the variables that receive the input values.
Default if omitted: must specify -TYPE (below).
OPTIONS
- TYPE type var _ name ...
Specify the type of the input value(s) that can be assigned to the
particular variable name(s).
Multiple variable names are
permitted, separated by blanks. Once you specify a type in a
particular READ command, READ assigns that type to all
subsequent variable names, until you change the type
specification. Valid types are
STR [ING]
INT[EGER]
BOOL[EAN]
ENV[IRONMENT]
ANY
character strings
integer numbers
Boolean values
environment variables
any type (the default)
If the type of the input value does not match the type specified
for that variable name, READ issues an error and asks you enter
another input value. Use -TYPE ANY to restore the Shell to its
default state. In this case, it determines the proper variable type
au tomatically.
Specifying -TYPE ENV var name causes the variable to
become an environment variable. Environment variables are of
primary concern to DOMAIN/IX users; please consult the
DOMAIN/IX documentation for details about their usage.
Shell Commands
4-240
c
READ
o
-P[ROMPT] prompt
Specify a particular prompt string to request the input values.
Enclose the string in single quotes if it contains literal blanks.
-ERR[IN]
Read input from error input instead of standard input. This
option is useful for reading user input from the Shell's input pad
(where error input is normally directed) when the READ
command appears inside a pipeline, since standard input in that
case is connected to the pipe.
EXAMPLES
Consider the following command line in a Shell script:
READ -p IIEnter model and class: II model class
o
o
o
In this example, READ displays the prompt IIEnter model and class: II in the process
input window, and assigns the input values to the variables named II mode}!' and II class II ,
in that order.
The following section illustrates how the -TYPE option works.
parentheses are used to refer to the different parts of the example.)
(The numbers
$ READ -P '> ' -TYPE integer tens ones -TYPE string number
> 40 four
> 4
> forty-four
In
(1)
(2)
(3)
$
$ LVAR
integer tens = 40
integer ones = 4
string number = forty-four
$
(4)
In line (1) we define the prompt to be II> II, specify variables II tens II and II ones II of type
II integer II , and specify variable II number II of type II string II . This means that the READ
command expects its input to be three variables of types integer, integer, and string, in
that order. When we enter the non-integer value II four II , READ cannot assign this value
to variable lIones ll , and issues the error message'and prompt shown in line (2). In line (3)
READ prompts for the third input value. The LVAR command, issued in line (4),
displays the type, name, and value of the variables.
Here is a final example.
$ date I chpat '.' " I (read day month date year; readln time)
$ lvar
string time =
12:40:42 pm (EST)
integer year
1985
string month = January
string day = Wednesday
integer date = 2
$
=
o
In this example, the output from the DATE command is piped to CHPAT, which
removes the commas and then sends its output to READ and READLN where the proper
variable assignments are made.
4-241
Shell Commands
READ 0
READC -- Set variables equal to input characters.
c'
FORMAT
READC [options] variable_list
The READO command reads single characters as input, and sets a list of variables equal
to those character values. READO parses each character from the input line as a
separate token, and each variable in the list is assigned the value of a token. Use the "_p
< prompt> II argument to instruct READO to issue a prompt.
The READO command considers all input to be type "string ll •
ARGUMENTS
variable list
(required)
Specify the names of the variables that receive the input values.
c
OPTIONS
-P[ROMPT] prompt
Specify a particular prompt string to request the input values.
Enclose the string in single quotes if it contains literal blanks.
-ERR[IN]
Read input from error input instead of standard input. This
option is useful for reading user input from the Shell's input pad
(where error input is normally directed) when the READO
command appears inside a pipeline, since standard input in that
case is connected to the pipe.
(
\
'-.__ .
."
EXAMPLES
Oonsider the following sequence of commands and input:
$ readc -p "Do you want to continue? (yIn): " ans
Do you want to continue? (yIn): y
$ Ivar
string ans
y
=
In this example, READO displays the prompt liDo you want to continue? (yin): II in the
process input window, and assigns the value of the first input character ("y" in this case) to
the variable named II ans".
For more information on Shell variables, refer to the DOMAIN System User's Guide.
(~
Shell Commands
4-242
---.---
------------------------------~ .-~--~----...
~~
READLN
o
READLN -- Set a variable equal to an input value
FORMAT
READLN [options] variable_list
The READLN command reads a line of input and sets a variable to that value. Use the
"_p II argument to instruct READLN to issue a prompt. READLN accepts
multiple variable names.
The variable type is always a string.
Refer to the descriptions of the READ and READC commands for related information.
o
o
ARGUMENTS
variable list
(required)
OPTIONS
-P[ROMPT] prompt
Specify a particular prompt string to request the input value.
Enclose the string in single quotes if it contains literal blanks.
-ERR[IN]
o
Specify the name(s) of the variable(s) that receives the input
value(s). If you specify more than one variable name (separated
by blanks), READLN assigns the values of input lines to the
variables in the order that the variables were named.
Read input from error input instead of standard input. This
option is useful for reading user input from the Shell's input pad
(where error input is normally directed) when the READLN
command appears inside a pipeline, since standard input in that
case is connected to the pipe.
EXAMPLES
Consider the following command line in a Shell script:
READLN -p "Enter total here:
II
total
In this example, READLN displays the prompt "Enter total here: II in the process input
window, and assigns the value of the input line to the variable named "total."
o
4-243
Shell Commands
RETURN
RETURN -- Return from current Shell level.
c\
FORMAT
RETURN [options]
The RETURN command causes the Shell to return from its current level with the
specified status severity. See the ABTSEV command description for details about status
severity levels.
OPTIONS
Specify one of the following options to select the return severity level. All options must
be specified in UPPERCASE letters.
Default options are indicated by "(D)."
-OK
-T[RUE]
Set level to OK.
(D)
Set level to true.
-F[ALSE]
Set level to false.
-W[ARNING]
Set level to warning.
-E[RROR]
Set level to error.
-0 [UTINV]
Set level to output invalid.
-I[NTFATAL]
Set level to internal fatal error.
-P[GMFLT]
Set level to program fatal error.
-M[AX_SEVERITY]
Set level to maximum severity error.
EXAMPLES
The following lines are a portion of a Shell script:
#
# Test to see if the second parameter passed to the script is valid.
# If it is not, abort the script.
#
if eqs ~1 '-test' then
if eqs ~2 '-b' then
cpf ~3 temp.mss
else
args He?) »> ~2 «< is not a valid parameter."
return -p
endif
else
cpf ~1 temp.mss
Shell Commands
c
4-244
c
--------------------- -----
-
-----
----
- - - - - - - - ---- - - - - - -
RETURN
o
endif
o
o
o
o
4-245
Shell Commands
REVL (REVERSE_LINES)
c
REVL (REVERSE_LINES) -- Reverse each line in a file.
FORMAT
REVL [pathname ...]
REVL copies the named files to standard output, reversing the order of the characters in
every line.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify name of file containing lines to be reversed.
Default if omitted: read standard input.
EXAMPLES
1. $ revl
This command produces interesting results .
. stluser gnitseretni secudorp dnammoc sihT
*** EOF ***
Reverse a line from
standard input.
2. $ revl /sys/dict I srf I revl >rhyming_dict
$
Sort the system
dictionary by
suffixes to produce
a rhyming dictionary.
c
$
c'
c'
c"
Shell Commands
4-246
RTCHK (ROUTING _ CHECK)
o
RTCHK (ROUTING_CHECK) -- Test traffic between adjacent routers.
FORMAT
RTCHK [options]
R TCHK performs a simple test to verify that the router is able to pass packets to and
from an adjacent router. RTCHK is for use in a DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet. You must
be logged onto a routing node in order to use RTCHK.
Use the -DEVICE option to specify a network controller to test. You must give a device
type (e.g. RING, lIC) to the device option. The RTSVC program, with no command line
options, shows you which network devices your node has.
o
Older versions of RTCHK used a different command line syntax to specify the type of
network hardware checked. The old command line options still work in RTCHK version
9.5, but are no longer supported.
For more information on RTCHK, see Managing DOMAIN Internets.
OPTIONS
o
o
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
- N net.node
id
Test packet transmission to and from the specified node. The
network ID 'net' must be a network that the router touches.
Not valid if -DEVICE is specified.
-DEV[ICE] deY-name [dev-num]
Test packet transmission over a specific network device. Use the
RTSVC program to display the names (used for 'dev-name') and
controller numbers (used for 'dev-num') of the network devices
attached to your node. Not valid if -N is specified.
Specify the number of test packets to exchange with the other
router. If -S is not specified, 10 packets are exchanged.
-S n
-DAT
(D)
-NODAT
Specify that each test packet carries 1024 bytes of test data.
Omit test data from the test packets.
EXAMPLES
o
$ rtchk -n 3CE02A8.4851 -s 1000
Exchange 1000 test packets with
node 4851 on network 3CE02A8.
The router must be attached to
that network.
$ rtchk -nodat
Exchange 10 short test packets
with the other node attached to
the IIC or T1 connection.
4-247
Shell Commands
RTCHK (ROUTING _ CHECK)
$ rtchk -dev iic -s 100
Exchange 100 test packets with
the other node on the IIC or
Tl network.
c
c'
c
Shell Commands
4-248
RTSTAT (ROUTING_STATISTICS)
o
RTSTAT (ROUTING_STATISTICS) -- Display internet router information.
FORMAT
RTSTAT [options]
RTSTAT shows the behavior of an internet router at each of its network ports.
RTSTAT is most useful in a DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet. It can, hewever, provide
information about non-routing nodes as well as routing nodes.
For more information on RTSTAT, see Managing DOMAIN Internets.
OPTIONS
o
-DEV
Report device-specific statistics for each port.
-NET [net_id •.. ]
Report counts of references to each network specified. The
reference counts for each network are roughly proportional to the
number of packets transmitted towards the network, but may be
somwhat higher. -NET with no arguments uses the list of visible
networks.
o
-R [n]
Repeat every 'n:' seconds. If 'n'
seconds.
IS
omitted, repeat every 10
-N node_spec •..
Report statistics for each node in the list.
See the section on node specifications in Chapter 3 for more
If this option is omitted, RTSTAT reports
information.
statistics for the local node only.
o
-DESC[RIBE]
Print a description, several lines long, of each statistic. The
description appears only once for each statistic, the first time it
is printed with a non-zero value.
EXAMPLES
1.
$ rtstat
1232.3D9
pkts routed:
misrouted:
110024
o
queue oflo:
rt too far:
o
14
RING
pkts sent:
73278
pkts rcvd:
72434
IIC
pkts sent:
67830
pkts rcvd:
61077
o
4-249
Shell Commands
RTSTAT (ROUTING _STATISTICS)
2. $ rtstat -net
--------------------------------------------------------------pkts routed:
misrouted:
110024
0
queue oflo:
rt too far:
RING
pkts sent:
towards net:
73278
1232
pkts rcvd:
ref cnt:
72434
74540
IIC
pkts sent:
towards net:
towards net:
towards net:
67830
1234
1231
1233
pkts rcvd:
ref cnt:
ref cnt:
ref cnt:
61077
53532
9193
5105
1232.309
0
14
o
o
Shell Commands
4-250
RTSVO (ROUTING_SERVIOE)
o
RTSVC (ROUTING_SERVICE) -- Set or display internet routing service.
FORMAT
RTSVC [-DEVICE deY-name [dey-number] [options))
RTSVO displays or alters the characteristics of a network port. RTSVO is for use in a
DOMAIN/BRIDGE internet. You must be logged onto the node you wish to control in
order to use RTSVO.
For complete information on RTSVO, see Managing DOMAIN Internets.
OPTIONS
o
If no options are specified, RTSVO displays the characteristics of every active network. If
you specify any other options, you must specify the type of network controller using a
-DEVIOE command line option.
You may use only one -DEVIOE option on any command line:
o
-DEV[ICE] deY-name [dey-number]
Specify the network device type: RING, 110, or USER (for
EtherBridge routers). The device number applies only to USER
devices. You may use the name ETHERBRIDGE in place of
USER if you prefer. The dev-number option applies only to
USER networks, and is required. Find the device number by
using RTSVO without command line options (as shown in the
examples).
Earlier versions of the RTSVO command used a different command line syntax for
specifying network devices. The old command lines still work, but you should start using
the new -DEVIOE command lines as soon as possible. Future versions of RTSVO will not
accept the older command lines.
o
This option changes the network ID of any network port:
-NET net
id
Assign the port a hexadecimal network ID number.
Only one of the following options may be specified at a time.
-ROUTE
Allow routing service to or from the port.
-NOROUTE
Allow normal AEGIS requests but no routing service.
-OFF
No AEGIS requests or routing service allowed.
-USER nn
Set an EtherBridge network. The value is not changed until the
routing node is rebooted or the routing process is stopped and
restarted.
o
4-251
Shell Commands
RTSVO (ROUTING_SERVIOE)
EXAMPLES
$ rtsvc -device iic -net 007302ED -route
Assign a network ID to the
Interphase controller and
allow internet routing at
that port.
$ rtsvc -dev ring -noroute
Stop internet routing through
the ring port. but allow normal
AEGIS requests for paging. file
service. etc. Do not change the
node's network ID.
$ rtsvc
Display the networks attached
to this node.
Controller
==================
RING
USER
46
Net ID
========
76AO
768C
Service offered
====================
Own traffic only
Port not open
The node in the last example touches two network: a Domain ring and an Ethernet, via the
Etherbridge product. You need the device number information (1146 II) from this display in
order to turn on routing at the EtherBridge network. Use the device number as shown here:
$ rtsvc -dev user 46 -route
Shell Commands
"46" is the device number.
4-252
c
._-
-------_.-.-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RWMT (READ_ WRITE_IvIAGTAPE)
o
RWMT (READ_ 'VRITE_MAGTAPE) -- Read/write foreign magtapes.
FORMAT
RWMT mode _ control [pathname ...] [options]
RWMT reads tapes from non-DOIvIAIN installations and writes tapes which can be read
by non-DOIvIAIN installations. RWMT can read and write unlabeled tapes, as well as
ANSI level 1-4 labeled tapes.
For information on reading and writing tapes intended for exchange with other DOIvIAIN
installations, see the RBAI( (READ _BACKUP) and WBAI( (WRITE_BACKUP) commands.
When using RWMT, please be aware of the following:
o
• RWMT must be run on the node which is connected to the tape unit. You
may accomplish this either by physically typing the RWMT command on the
host node, or by running RWMT in a process on the host node created from
your own remote node using the ORP (CREATE_PROCESS) command .
• Only one tape unit can be connected to any node.
o
o
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify name of file to be read from or written to tape. This
argument is only valid with the -R and -W mode control options
(below). Multiple pathnames are permitted. Wildcarding IS
permitted for write (-W) operations only.
Default if omitted: read pathnames from standard input.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
Mode control
One of the following mode control options must be specified. If you omit it, RWMT will
prompt you for it. You may have RWMT prompt for all necessary options by using the -P
option.
-L[ABEL]
o
Write ANSI X3.27-1978 volume label on a tape. This option
causes RWMT to write an ANSI volume label and dummy file on
the magtape volume. An optional owner and volume ID, which
are stored in the volume label, may be specified (see -VID and
-OWN below). This is the way to initialize a labeled tape; if any
information existed on the tape, it is erased by this labeling
operation.
4-253
Shell Commands
RWMT (READ_ WRITE_MAGTAPE)
If you are labeling a tape, then the following two options may
also be used.
- VID vol id
Specify a 1-6 character volume ID for use
when labeling a volume. This option is only
valid when used with the -L mode control
option (above). The default volume ID is ' ,
(blank).
-OWN owner id
Specify a 1-14 character owner ID for use
when labeling a volume. This option is only
valid when used with the -L mode control
option (above). The default owner ID is "
(blank).
-I[NDEX]
List objects on an ANSI-labeled physical tape volume. -INDEX
produces a listing of all files or file sections on an ANSI-labeled
physical tape volume. The contents of the physical volume
(VOL 1) label and all file header labels are written to standard
output.
-W[RITE]
Specify one or more disk files ('pathname' argument) to be
written to tape. The default format is ANSI labeled, ASCII,
fixed-length records of 80 bytes each, and 80-byte blocks. If
desired, any of these parameters can be changed using the
options described below. If more than one pathname is specified,
the disk files are written to sequential tape files. Tapes written
by RWMT are always in accordance with ANSI level 4 format.
Before writing a labeled file, the tape volume itself must be
labeled with the -LABEL mode control option (above).
-R[EAD]
Specify one or more tape files to be read from tape and stored
on disk. READ reads one or more tape files and writes them to
disk using the specified pathnames ('pathname' argument). The
default tape file format is the same as that for the WRITE
option. If the tape is labeled under ANSI level 2, 3, or 4, the file
format (block length, record length, and record format) is read
from the tape. If the tape is unlabeled, or labeled with ANSI
levell, you must specify the tape format using the options
below. If more than one pathname is specified, adjacent tape
files are read and stored under the specified pathnames.
C
Label Control
-ANSI
(D)
-UNLAB
Specify that the tape is labeled
X3.27-1978, levell, 2, 3, or 4.
III
conformance to ANSI
Specify that the tape is unlabeled.
Tape Format
-Ase
Shell Commands
(D)
Specify that all tape file contents are in ASCII characters.
4-254
CI
- - - - -..- - . - . - - - - - - - -
----
.-
-----------
RWMT (READ_ WRITE_MAGTAPE)
o
-EBC
Specify that all tape file contents (except labels) are in EBCDIC
characters.
-RAW
Specify that all tape file data is to be treated in raw form (see
example 5).
(D)
-NPAR
o
-PAR
Specify that parity bits should be forced off when reading data
from tape and forced on when writing data to tape.
-RL reclen
Specify the maximum length, in bytes, of a record in the tape
file. This option is only valid when used with either the -R or -W
mode control options (above). It is unnecesary when reading an
ANSI ltwel 2, 3, or 4 file. The default record length is 80 bytes.
- BL blocklen
Specify the length, in bytes, of a physical tape block. This
option is only valid when used with either the -R or -W mode
control options (above). It is unnecesary when reading an ANSI
level 2, 3, or 4 file. The default block length is 80 bytes.
-BF blockfac
Specify a blocking factor -- the number of records to store into
or read from a physical tape block. This is an alternative to the
-BL option, since the record length multiplied by the blocking
factor yields the block length. This option is only valid when
used with either the -R or -W mode control options (above).
Using this option is only meaningful if your tape has fixed-length
records. This option is unnecesary when reading an ANSI level
2, 3, or 4 file. The default blocking factor is 1.
-RF format
Specify record format. Valid values for 'format' are "F"
(fixed-length records and blocks); II D II (variable-length records
(this is ANSI 'D' format)); "S" (spanned records); or "U"
(undefined record format). The default format is "F." Note that
if you are writing a cartridge tape, only 512 byte blocks may be
written; D, S, and U formats are not supported.
o
o
Tape File Identifiers
-FID file
o
Specify no disturbance of parity bits when reading or writing
data.
id
Specify a 1-17 character file ID to be written in the file header
label for use when writing a file to a labeled volume. This
option is only valid when used with the -W mode control option
(above). If this option is omitted, the name of the file being
written is used.
-F [position]
Specify the file position for -R or -W operations. Valid values
for 'position' are II CUR, II "END, II or a nonzero integer value. A
position of II CUR II selects the current tape position; the tape
must have been previously read or written by R\VMT and its
position must not have been disturbed. This option is only valid
when used with either the -R or -W mode control options
(above).
4-255
Shell Commands
RWMT (READ_ WRITE_MAGTAPE)
A position of "END" selects the end of the tape file set. This
option is valid only when used with the -W mode control option,
and causes RWMT to append the specified disk file ('pathname'
argument) to the very end of the tape file set.
A position specified by a nonzero integer value selects the file at
that absolute position in the tape volume. This option is only
valid when used with either the -R or -W mode control options
(above). If multiple 'pathname' arguments are supplied, the
value of 'position' is incremented by one after each file has been
read or written.
The default value for 'position' is 1.
Backup Device Control
-DEV d[unit]
Specify device type and unit number. 'd' must be either 'M'
(for reel-to-reel magnetic tape), 'CT' (for cartridge tape), or 'F'
(for fl '
Change the current SherI's primary
prompt to "Input>". Note the use
of quotes to preserve the trailing
blank.
2. $ set -eon -xon -von
Enable variable evaluation, command
examination, and verification.
u
4-271
Shell Commands
SETVAR (SET _ VARIABLE) -- Set the value of a variable
SETVAR
(SET_VARIABLE) --
Set the value of a variable
FORMAT
SETVAR [options] {[-TYPE type] var_name value ...
I variable_list}
The SETVAR command takes pairs of arguments, which may be preceded by an optional
type-specifier (-TYPE type).
By default, the type of each variable specified in the SETVAR command depends on the
type of each input value. You can, however, use the -TYPE argument to specify the
individual type(s) of the the variables.
Note: if a value is not of the type specified by the -TYPE argument, an error will result.
For more information on variables, refer to the DOMAIN System User's Guide.
ARGUMENTS
variable list
(optional)
Specify the names of the variables that receive the input values.
Default if omitted: must specify -TYPE (belo'v).
("
\. ....
OPTIONS
-TYPE type var _name ...
Specify the type of the input value(s) that can be assigned to the
particular variable name(s).
Multiple variable names are
permitted, separated by blanks. Once you specify a type in a
particular SETVAR command, SETVAR assigns that type to all
subsequent variable names, until you change the type
specification. Valid types are:
STR[ING]
INT[EGER]
BOOL[EAN]
ENV [IRONMENT]
ANY
character strings
integer numbers
Boolean values
environment variables
any type (the default)
If the type of the input value does not match the type specified
for that variable name, SETVAR issues an error and asks you
enter another input value. Use -TYPE ANY to restore the Shell
to its default state. In this case, it determines the proper
variable type automatically.
Specifying -TYPE ENV var _ name causes the variable to
become an environment variable. Environment variables are of
primary concern to DOMAIN/IX users; please consult the
DOMAIN/IX documentation for details about their usage.
Shell Commands
4-272
/'
SETVAR (SET _ VARIABLE) -- Set the value of a variable
o
EXAMPLES
In the first example, we will create several variables using SETVAR and then list them
using the LVAR command.
$ setvar i 1
$ setvar b true
$ setvar sl string
$ setvar -type string s2 true
$ lvar i b sl s2
integer i = 1
boolean b = true
string sl = string
string s2 = true
#
#
#
#
an integer
a boolean
a string
a boolean forced into a string
In this example, we will set several variables of different types and then list them.
o
$ setvar -type int i1 1 i2 2 -type str sl 3 s2 4 -type any i3 1
$ lvar i1 i2 sl s2 i3
integer i1 = 1
integer i2 = 2
string sl = 3
string s2
4
integer i3
1
=
=
The following is an error message example. In this case, we are trying to set an integer to a
string.
o
$ setvar -type int z ten
?(sh) semantic error - 'ten' is not an integer.
o
o
4-273
Shell Commands
SH (SHELL)
SH (SHELL) -- Invoke a Shell (command line interpreter).
FORMAT
SH [options] [pathname [arg ... ]]
SH is the command line interpreter. It reads lines from standard input or from shell
scripts; interprets them, finding the commands to which they refer and the arguments for
the commands; and then invokes the commands. These commands provide all the
traditional features of most computing systems: copying and deleting files, compiling and
binding user programs, displaying system status, etc. Generally speaking, they do NOT
create or control processes, windows, or other components of the display screen. (Those
functions are provided by the Display Manager.) For general information about the
Shell, see Ohapter 3. The DOMAIN System User's Guide also includes information on
the Shell, particularly the method that it uses to process input and the programming
features available in scripts.
Normally, at least one process is running the Shell all the time. When you give the
command SH, you generate a separate, subordinate Shell running within the current
process. This Shell can carryon separate operations, and can execute special programs
and scripts containing command lines. One of these scripts may be a startup script; see
the -START option below for more information.
c
Note: The SH command does not create a new process, only a subordinate Shell running
in the current process. To start a process (which may then run a Shell or any other
program), use the DM command OP (CREATE_PROCESS).
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file containing a Shell script to be executed. Each line in
the file will be interpreted as a Shell command.
Default if omitted: read standard input.
args
(optional)
Specify any arguments to be passed to the program in file
'pathname'. Arguments are substituted for An expressions in the
program: argl for AI, arg2 for A2, etc. A* can be used to specify
all of the arguments at once. (See the DOMAIN System User's
Guide for details on passing arguments to Shell commands.) See
example 1 below.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed.
OPTIONS
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
-B[ON]
Shell Commands
Send the output of a background process (created with the &
parsing operator) to the display. The output of the background
process is displayed in the transcript pad of the Shell where it
4-274
c
SH (SHELL)
o
was invoked. If you do not specify -B, the output of the
background process is sent to /DEV /NULL.
-BOFF
(D)
Do not display output from a background process.
-NB[ON]
(D)
Same as -BOFF.
-C[OMMAND] argl ..•
Execute the following argument(s) as a Shell command, exactly
as if it had been read as an input line. If any argument contains
explicit blanks, enclose it in quotes. The Shell passes all text
following -0 to 'argl' as arguments, so if you want to specify
other options to the SH command itself, they must precede -0.
If 'argl' is the name of a Shell script, note that the script creates
a new Shell level for execution (just as if you had invoked it at
the $ prompt).
Thus activities in the script that are
level-dependent (such as assigning values to Shell variables) do
NOT propogate upward when the script exits. This is in contrast
to the -START option and the Shell command SOUROE, which
execute scripts at the current Shell level.
o
-E[ON]
o
o
Enable evaluation of variables outside of expressions. If -E is
specified, the Shell always evaluates variables, regardless of the
context in which they appear. If -E is not specified, variables are
evaluated
only
inside variable
expression· delimeters,
(( expression)); otherwise, the Shell treats the "'var name
expressions as strings and they are not evaluated.
-EOFF
(D)
Evaluate variables only inside expressions.
-NE[ON]
(D)
Same as -EOFF.
-F[IRST]
Do not exit after executing the command given by the -0
option. This option is valid only if -0 has been specified, and
must precede -0 on the command line.
-I[NTER]
Behave as though input is being entered interactively: prompt
for each input line, and do not exit on errors or quit faults (DQ
or OTRL/Q from keyboard). Normally, the Shell only executes
interactively if its input comes from a pad or SIO line .. Use of
this option forces prompting.
-S[CRIPT]
(D)
-NI[NTER]
(D)
Behave as though executing a Shell script: do not prompt and
abort on error. A Shell normally will not quit; any error or quit
command is assumed to apply only to the last command given to
the Shell.
Same as -So
-N[EXECUTE]
Interpret each command line only; suppress execution.
o
-EX[ECUTE] (D)
Interpret each command line and execute it.
4-275
Shell Commands
SH (SHELL)
-P[ROMPT]l prompt_string
Define the prompt string for the Shell created with SH.
-P[ROMPT]2 subprompt_string
Define the subpromt string for the Shell created with SH. (The
subprompt appears when you continue a Shell command over
more than one line).
-START [file]
. Execute the specified script after the Shell is created. If 'file' is
not specified, the Shell searches the login home directory for a
file called USER_DATAjSHjSTARTUP and executes it if it exists.
No error occurs if that file does not exist.
Note that the script is executed at the current Shell level, so that
level-dependent activities (such as assigning values to Shell
variables) persist when the script exits. This is in contrast to the
-0 option, which executes scripts at the next lower Shell level.
This option is a default if SH is the first program invoked in a
new process (i.e., OP /OOM/SH). It is not a default at any
other time (i.e., when you type SH at the dollar sign or call it
from a script).
-NSTART
Disable startup file execution.
-V[ON]
Display each line of text in the transcript pad as it is read by
the Shell program.
-VOFF
(D)
Disable input verification.
-NV[ON]
(D)
Same as -VOFF.
-X[ON]
("
\.
Display each command in the transcript pad immediately before
execution. Each command is given in full, with its complete
pathname and with the values of arguments inserted.
-XOFF
(D)
Disable input examination.
-NX[ON]
(D)
Same as -XOFF.
c
EXAMPLES
1. $ sh program-name arg1 arg2 ...
The Shell executes the commands
in the file 'program-name'. and
substitutes the arguments ('argn')
for character sequences ~n in the
program file.
2. $ sh -n my_script
Interpret each line in 'my_script'.
but do not execute anything.
c
Shell Commands
4-276
SH (SHELL)
o
SUMMARY OF INTERNAL SHELL COMMANDS
The Shell has four types of commands:
External Commands
These are programs that reside on your disk. They are invoked when you
type in their pathname or, if their directories are included in your
command search rules, when you type their leafname.
Internal Commands
These are built-in Shell commands (see below). The Shell always looks
for these first.
o
Control Structures
These are programming constructs that allow you to control the flow of
control in a Shell script. Note: Since these structures are legal anywhere
on the command line, you must enclose them in quotes when using the
HELP command (Le., HELP 'IF').
Expressions
These are delimited by '((' and '))'. Inside of these double parentheses
you can set variables, compare values and perform other standard
integer, string or boolean operations.
The assignment operation
(VARIABLE := VALUE) is a special case that does not have to be
enclosed in double parentheses.
Any of these commands can have their output redirected or may be invoked in the
background using the Shells parsing operators (>, > >, >?, > >? <, < <, , <=, >=, <>, +, =, *, /, MOD, **, (,),
NOT
o
4-277
Shell Commands
SH8 (INVOKE _ 8-BIT _ SHELL)
SH8 (INVOKE_8-BIT _SHELL) -- Invoke 8-bit shell.
FORMAT
SH8 [font]
The sh8 program provides a shell with support for output of 8-bit characters. The
standard output stream is extended through the use of a type manager to interpret
characters above ASOII 128 as referring to characters in an additional font file. A new
shell is then invoked by sh8 which uses this stream. The value of the SHELL
environment variable is used to determine which shell to invoke.
In order for sh8 to work, there must exist in /sys/dm/fonts two font files, name (ASOII
32 to 126 decimal), name.a (ASOII 160 to 254). The name.b file (ASOII 128 to 159) is
optional, as it is used to print out the control characters in the high 128 range (ASOII
128 - 159). If the program has no need to print these characters, the name.b file need not
exist.
ARGUMENTS
font
(optional)
The sh8 default font is courier12. Thus, if sh8 is invoked with
no arguments, the files courier12, courier12.a, and (optionally)
courier12.b must exist in /sys/dm/fonts.
Optionally, a font name may be given as the first (and only) argument to sh8.
The command sh8 helvetica16 would use /sys/dm/fonts/helvetica16 as the low 128
characters, and /sys/dm/fonts/helvetica16.a as the high 128 characters.
c
Shell Commands
4-277.1
o
o
o
SHUTSPM
SHUTSPM -- Shut down SPM on a node.
FORMAT
SHUTSPM
When the SPM runs in place of the DM, it waits on the eventcount file
'NODE_DATA/SPMSHUT_EO. SHUTSPM advances this eventcount, causing the
SPM to perform an orderly shutdown of the node.
To shut down the SPM with SHUTSPM, create a remote process (via the ORP command)
on the target node and type 'SHUTSPM'.
Normally, only system administrators may shut down the SPM using this command.
This is because SPM creates the 'NODE_DATA/SPMSHUT _EO file with the following
AOL (provided the default file AOL ~or 'NODE_DATA gives all rights to %.%.%.%):
Subject ID
Access Rights
%.sys admin.%
pgndwrx
---d-r-
%.%.%~%
ThisAOL limits SHUTSPM shutdown to accounts with the 'sys _ admin' project name,
but permits any account to delete the SPMSHUT _EO file whenever SPM is not using it.
If, however, the default file AOL for 'NODE_DATA has been changed, SPM creates the
eventcount file using that default AOL. Note that an SID must have at least 'r' and 'w'
rights to shutdown SPM.
If the SPMSHUT _EO file already exists when SPM starts up, SPM does not
AOL.
chang~
its
To prevent SPM from responding to the SHUTSPM command, add the following line to
the 'NODE_DATA/STARTUP.SPM file:
NO
SHUTSPM
I\......
EXAMPLES
$ crp -on lfb -login sys_admin
Create remote process on .server node lfb
and log in with the system administrator
account.
$ shutspm
Shut down the SPM on server node lib.
Shell Gommand8
.~-~-.---------~
..
-.-.--
4-278
._---------------
.--.--.-.~~~-----
SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS)
o
SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS) -- Signal a Process.
FORMAT
SIGP [process_name ... ] [options]
SIGP causes a quit or stop fault in a process. This is particularly useful for stopping
background processes such as those created by the CPO (CREATE_PROCESS_ONLY) and
CPS (CREATE_PROCESS_SERVER) Display Manager commands.
You
discover which processes
(PROCESS _STATUS) command.
o
may
are
currently
active
by
using
the
PST
ARGUMENTS
process _ name
(optional)
Specify name of process to be signalled. Multiple process names
and wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: -UID required (below)
OPTIONS
c~
o
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
-Q[UIT]
(D)
Cause a quit fault in the process (like the Display Manager
command DQ (CTRL/Q)). Executing programs halt, but the
process remains active.
-S[TOP]
Ask the entire process to stop cleanly (closing streams, etc.).
-B[LAST]
Stop the process in the nucleus (don't go to user mode). This
brings everything to a halt without letting the system attempt to
clean up.
- UID high low
- UID high.low
-L
Stop the process with the given UID.
indicate the two halves of the UID.
II high II and IIlow"
List processes signaled.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
o
1. $ sigp process_7 -quit
$
Generate a quit fault in process_7,
which will halt the program currently
running there, but leave process_7
itself active.
4-279
-_
...
_--_.__... _..... _........
.. ... _._--_._---_.---------
Shell Commands
SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS)
2. $ sigp process_7 -stop -L
"process 7" stopped.
$
-
Stop process_7 completely.
~,
'\..._--_/
(
~
('
'----
Shell Commands
--------------------
---
4-280
SIORF (SIO _RECEIVE _FILE)
o
SIORF (SIO _RECEIVE_FILE) -- Receive a tile from a remote host.
FORMAT
SIORF [options] [pathname ••. ] [*]
SIORF accepts remote host transmissions from the appropriate SIO line, decodes them
according to the proper protocol, and writes them to the file you specify.
Arguments and options may appear in any order and are processed and take effect as
encountered. This means options must be specified before the file(s) for which they are
intended.
o
You do not need to use the TCTL command to set the sync and insync parameters of the
SIO line when receiving a non-ASCII file. SIOTF and SIORF recognize the types of the
files being transferred and set these parameters correctly.
The
transmission
(SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE)
protocols used by SIORF
commmand description.
are
described
III
the
SIOTF
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(optional)
Specify name of file to receive the transmission. If you omit
filename, SIORF waits for the host to specify a receive file.
you want the transmissio~ written to standard output, use
II * II
option.)
SIORF terminates when it receives
end-of-transmission (EOT) signal, unless you include the
option.
the
(If
the
an
-F
Default if omitted: see above
o
o
OPTIONS
-L n
Specify SIO line being used for the transmission.
SIO line is 1.
-N
Select the Nibble protocol. (See II Protocols II following the
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE) command description.)
-F
Cause SIORF
until it receives
from the node.
cause SIORF to
-OBJ
OBSOLETE OPTION. At SR9.5, SIORF automatically detects
binary objects and receives them properly. Prior configuration of
the SIO line (via the TCTL command) is no longer necessary.
The default
to monitor the SIO line for host transmissions
an error message over the SIO line or CTRL-Q
When you include this option, EaT does not
terminate.
-R
Replace file(s) if they already exist.
-AE
Abort on error. Otherwise, transmission continues until EOT.
4-281
Shell Commands
SIORF (SIO _RECEIVE _FILE)
-x host
file
Request a remote host file to be transmitted. This presumes a
host counterpart of SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE) is active.
Receive transmission to standard output. This option is valid
only if the 'pathname' argument is omitted.
EXAMPLES
1. $ siorf -L 2 -r prog.bin
Create (or replace) a binary
file PROG.BIN with the data
received over SIO line 2;
presumably being sent by an
SIOTF counterpart.
2. $ siorf -r -f
Receive files over SIO line 1
whose names are specified by
the transmission side (host
or DOMAIN node). Existing
files are replaced if needed.
SIORF remains active "forever"
until CTRL/Q or error occurs.
3. $ siorf -x ask file /eng/new_copy
Shell Commands
4-282
Request file ASK_FILE to be
sent over SIO line 1 and write
data received to /ENG/NEW_COPY.
Presumes the other side is
running SIOTF or equivalent
in "forever" mode.
("
\..•.. - ../
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE)
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE) -- Transmit a file to a remote host.
FORMAT
SIOTF [options] [pathname ...] [*]
SIOTF sends the DOMAIN file(s) you specify to a remote computer (lihosV') using the
appropriate SIO line and protocol.
Arguments and options may appear in any order and are processed and take effect as
encountered. This means options must be specified be/ore the file(s) for which they are
intended.
o
You do not need to use the TCTL command to set the sync and insync parameters of the
SIO line when receiving a non-ASCII file. SIOTF and SIORF recognize the types of the
files being transferred and set these parameters correctly.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
o
Default if omitted: must use
II
*
II
OPTIONS
-L n
o
Specify name of file to be transmitted. If you wish to transmit
data from standard input, use the II * II option.
Specify SIO line to be used for transmission. The default SIO
line is 1.
-N
Select the Nibble protocol. (See the II Protocols II section below.)
-F
Cause SIOTF to continue monitoring the SIO line for
transmission requests from the remote host rather than
terminating when transmission is complete.
-OBJ
OBSOLETE OPTION. At SR9.5, SIOTF automatically detects
binary objects and transmits them properly. Prior configuration
of the SIO line (via the TCTL command) is no longer necessary.
Abort on error rather than attempting to continue.
-AE
-x host
*
file
Pass a filename to the remote host. The host can use this name
for the next file it receives from the node. This presumes a host
counterpart to SIORF (SIO _RECEIVE_FILE) is active.
Read from standard input and send standard input to the
remote host. Signal end of data with an end-of-file (CTRL/Z).
o
4-283
Shell Commands
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE)
EXAMPLES
1. $ siotf -f
Wait for file requests over SID
line 1 and transmit them.
2. $ siotf -L 2 prog1.bin prog2.bin
Transmit file PROG1.BIN, then
transmit file PROG2.BIN over
SID line 2.
3. $ siotf -x tell file /eng/notes
Send the name 'tell_file', then
transmit the file /ENG/NOTES.
Presumably the receiving side
is in "forever" mode (-F) and
thus waiting for instructions.
PROTOCOLS
To permit binary and ASCII file transmissions, we have implemented two protocols: Plain
and Nibbled.
Plain
Plain protocol is the default. It assumes that the host operating system can transmit and
receive all 256 bit patterns, so there is no need to use escapes or to nibble at the ASCII or
binary files. Even if the host can handle only the ASCII character set, you should use the
plain protocol for transmitting ASCII files. The format of this protocol is:
STX type COUNT ... data ... CHECKSUM CR
where:
STX
is the standard ASCII STX (02).
type
is a small ASCII letter that identifies the record type as follows:
a ACK
d DATA
P PARTIAL
e EOF
t TYPE
h HELLO
x NAME
z EDT
g ANSWER HELLO
n NAK
? ERROR MESSAGE
COUNT
is the number of data bytes in the record (not to exceed 255), nibbled and
transmitted as two ASCII bytes (@ and the capital letters A through 0).
CHECKSUM
is a 1-byte calculated checksum, nibbled and transmitted as two ASCII
bytes.
CR
is a standard ASCII carriage return.
The II VI and II p II types are provided primarily for file transfers occuring between DOMAIN
nodes. "t" informs SIORF of the type of file being transmitted. In this case, the "data"
field consists of a single character that identifies the type of file as follows:
Shell Commands
4-284
---------- -
-----------------------------
------
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE)
o
"u":
"0":
"m":
"r":
UASC file (normal ASCII text file)
DOMAIN object file
non-streams file, accessed though the mapping primitives
streams record file
If you are transmitting a streams record file (type IIr" above), the protocol now offers the
"p" message type, which SIOTF uses to transmit partial records to SIORF. SIOTF can
transmit at most 255 bytes at a time. If a record is larger than 255 bytes, transmission
occurs in 255-byte pieces; all but the last piece will have the IIp" type message. SIOTF
transmits the last piece using the normal II d II type message so that SIORF will recognize it
as the end of the record.
Nibbled
o
o
If the host cannot send or receive anything but ASCII characters, use Nibbled protocol to
transmit non-ASCII data. Transmitted records use a record format identical to that of
Plain protocol, except that '"'-'S replaces the STX byte. For SIOTF, each byte from the file
is nibbled into two ASCII characters (@ or A through 0). For SIORF, the low four bits of
each two bytes received are concatenated; this protocol checks the ASCII range of the
received bytes. A byte out of range causes SIORF to send the host an NAK signal. A byte
out of range in five consecutive records causes SIORF to issue an error message, and
terminate. The count field of nibbled records contains the original count (i.e., the number
data bytes before nibbling). To select the Nibbled protocol, use the -N option with SIORF
or SIOTF.
When you execute SIORF, it issues the HELLO record to signal that it is there, and to clear
any transmission that may have preceded your command. It expects to receive the
ANSWER_HELLO response. SIOTF also does this before it begins transmitting records.
SIORF acknowledges each remote host transmission. SIOTF waits for the host to
acknowledge each transmission. These acknowledgements have the format:
STX a CR
o
(or)
STX n CR
STX is either STX or '"'-'S, and a and n are the small letters a (ACK) and n (NAK). The
programs recover from a NAK by retransmitting the record in question. After ten
consecutive unsuccessful retries, the programs will issue an error message and abort. All
messages must be acknowledged, including error messages.
END-OF-FILE is signalled by a record of this format:
STX e CR
where e must be the small letter e. Host programs should acknowledge the EOF signal.
END-OF-TRANSMISSION is signalled by a record of this format:
STX z CR
o
where z must be the small letter z. Host programs should ACK the EOT signal. If the
programs do not receive transmissions or ACKs for 60 seconds, they issue time-out error
messages and terminate.
4-285
Shell Commands
SIOTF (SIO _ TRANSMIT _FILE)
NOTES
SIOTF opens a stream to its SIO line in COOKed mode, SIORF opens the stream in RAW
mode. Both programs synchronize with host XON/XOFF (CTRL/Q, CTRL/S) signals.
c
If you specify a DOMAIN file that cannot be opened, the programs issue an error message.
If a file specified by a record received from the host cannot be opened (or created), the
programs will issue an error message, and transmit an error message to the host. However,
they will continue processing their parameters or (if you specified -F) waiting for host
requests.
SIOTF does not transmit EaT if you specify -F. SIORF will not terminate at EOT if you
specify -F. If you omit -F, SIORF will wait until it receives an EaT signal from the host, or
times out.
The programs accept type II? II error messages instead of ACK or NAK signals. The programs
display the error messages, and terminate (even if you specified -F). If SIORF gets an error
message while receiving a file, it aborts. -If you included -F, the programs try to remain
active as long as possible.
c:
Model programs to serve as the host-side counterparts to SIORF and SIOTF have been
supplied in jSYSjSOURCEjEMT. These are models in FORTRAN and in Pascal. The
FORTRAN subroutines that need to be modified for host-specific use are in
HOST _MODEL_SUBS1.FTN. The Pascal procedures to be modified are clearly marked in the
Pascal model programs. For a particular host environment, you may also need to modify
other areas of these models.
('
\,-
Shell Commands
4-286
,/
-
--~~------
....
--------------.-~~~~~
SOUROE
o
SOURCE -- Execute a Shell script at the current Shell level.
FORMAT
SOURCE script_name [argl. .. ]
SOUROE allows you to execute a Shell script at the current Shell leveL When you type
$ MY _SORIPT argl
your script runs in a new (subordinate) Shell level. This means that all variables are now
defined at a new level; that your script can't delete or otherwise effect variables at the
level above; that state settings like VON/BON/EON that get set in the script vanish
when the script finishes, and so forth.
o
On the other hand, typing
$ SOUROE MY _ SORIPT argl
executes the script at the current Shell level, just as though you had typed the contents of
MY _ SORIPT into the process input window (and filled in the command line arguments
yourself). If the script says 'von' then VON will be set after the script exits. If it defines
a variable, that variable will still be defined, etc.
o
ARGUMENTS
script _ name
(required)
Specify the name of the script to be executed.
argl. ..
(optional)
Specify any arguments to be passed to the script.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed.
o
c
4-287
Shell Commands
SRF (SORT _FILE)
SRF (SORT _FILE) -- Sort and/or merge text files.
FORMAT
SRF [options] [pathname ... ]
SRF sorts lines of all the named files together and writes the result on the standard
output.
The sort key is an entire line. Default ordering is alphabetic by characters as they are
represented in ASCII format (digits, then uppercase characters, then lowercase characters,
then special characters).
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify file(s) to be sorted. Multiple pathnames are permitted.
Default if omitted: read standard input
OPTIONS
Sort Key Control: one of the following
-B
-S n
-F
Omit leading blanks from keys.
Sort based on the subfield starting in column n. If this option is
omitted, sorting starts in column one.
Fold all letters to a single case.
Input Character Control: either of the following
-D
-I
Use 'dictionary' order: only letters, digits and blanks are
significant in comparisons.
Special characters (punctuation,
control characters, etc.) are ignored.
Ignore all nonprinting, nonblank characters.
Sort Mode Control: one of the following
-M
Merge only, the input files are already sorted.
-R
Reverse the sense of the sort; list output entries in reverse order.
EXAMPLES
1. $ ld -c -dtm I srf
Shell Commands
List contents of current working
directory in order of date last
modified.
4-288
c
- - - ----------------
-----
SRF (SORT _FILE)
o
2. $ ld -c -dtm I srf -r
List most recently changed files
first.
3. $ ld -c -bl I srf -r
List files by size with largest
files first.
o
o
o
o
4-289
Shell Commands
STOODE (STATUS _ OODE)
STCODE (STATUS_CODE) -- Translate status code value to text message.
C~'I
FORMAT
STCODE hex stat
code
STOODE prints the text message associated with a hexadecimal status code. This
command is useful when a user program produces a hexadecimal status code instead of
the textual message.
STOODE processes pre-defined status codes. No provision is currently made to add
user-defined status codes to the error text database.
ARGUMENTS
hex _ stat code
(required)
Specify hexadecimal status code to be translated.
c
EXAMPLES
$ stcode 80001
disk not ready (from as / disk manager)
c
Shell Commands
4-290
-------------------
- - --------
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM)
o
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM) -- Set or display subsystem attributes.
FORMAT
SUBS object [subs_name] [options]
SUBS is used to set or show protected subsystem attributes.
attributes, you must be running in that subsystem.
When setting subsystem
See the ENSUBS (ENTER_SUBSYSTEM) command for details on entering a subsystem.
ARGUMENTS
o
object
(required)
subs name
(optional)
o
o
Specify pathname of an object. The function of the object
(either a protected file or a managing program) is determined by
options described below.
Specify name of a subsystem.
The Shell will search the
directory jSYSjSUBSYS for the specified subsystem.
If this
argument is specified, the attributes of the named subsystem will
be set as directed by the options described below.
Default if omitted: display attributes of 'object.'
OPTIONS
-DATA
Set or display the name of the subsystem which manages
'object.'
-MGR
Set or display the name of the subsystem for which 'object' is a
manager. 'Object' must be an executable file (i.e., a program).
-up
Increase the privilege level of a process running in a subsystem
so that it can directly access the objects it owns.
-DOWN
Decrease the privilege level of a process; opposite of '-UP.'
-L
List subsytem attributes and/or manager fields.
default action if 'subs _ name' is not specified.
-BR
Display only the name of the subsystem. Not valid if attributes
are being set.
This is the
EXAMPLES
o
The following example illustrates the use of protected subsystems.
source program written to II manage II the subsystem.
jSYSjINSjACLM.lNS.PAS to enable proper subsystem ACL checking
DOMAIN System Call Reference.) Following that is a Shell
subsystem using the CRSUBS, ENSUBS, and SUBS commands.
4-291
First we show a Pascal
(The calls issued to
are documented in the
script that installs the
Sh.ell Commands
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM)
Pascal Source Manager
{ pse --- protected sUbsystems example program }
{ usage:
pse pse_file out file
where:
pse file
out file
protected object owned by 'PS EXAMPLE' sUbsystem
output file
The 'PSE' program is used to extract the protected data from
Objects owned by the 'PS_EXAMPLE' sUbsystem and put them in an
output file. As a trivial example, the protected data has
a sequence number in the first 8 columns of each line, which
is not logically part of the data, but which can be imagined
to be important to the integrity of the data. Extracting the
data removes the sequence number and copies the rest of the
line to the output file. If this were a real application, it
might also format and/or select the data sent to the output file.
}
program pse;
%include
%include
%include
%include
%include
type
buf t
'/sys/ins/base.ins.pas';
'/sys/ins/streams.ins.pas';
'/sys/ins/error.ins.pas';
'/sys/ins/pgm.ins.pas';
'/sys/ins/aclm.ins.pas';
=
c
array[l .. 128] of char;
var
istrid:
ostrid:
arg:
alan:
st:
sk:
buf:
bp:
bIen:
stream_$id_t;
stream_$id_t;
name_$pname_t;
integer;
status_$t;
stream_$sk_t;
buf_t;
"'buf_t;
integer32;
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
input stream 10 }
output stream 10 }
command line argument }
length of command line argument }
status code }
stream seek key }
I/O buffer }
pOinter to same }
length of I/O buffer }
begin
{ get input file name }
alen := pgm_$get_arg(l, arg, st, sizeof(arg));
i f (st. c·ode <> 0) then begin
writeln('input file name missing. ');
error_$print(st);
pgm_$set_severity(pgm_$error);
pgm_$exit
end;
{ open input file; must increase privilege to access
my own protected file ... }
aclm_$up;
{ get more privilege}
stream_$open(arg, alen, stream_$read,
stream_$no_conc_write, istrid, st);
aclm_$down;
{ decrease privilege}
if (st.code <> 0) then begin
writeln('Can"t open input file. ');
error_$print_name(st, arg, alen);
Shell Commands
4-292
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM)
pgm_$set_severity(pgm_$error);
pgm_$exit
end;
o
{ get output file name }
alen := pgm_$get_arg(2, arg, st, sizeof(arg»;
if (st. code <> 0) then begin
writelnC'output file name missing. ');
error_$printCst);
pgm_$set_severity(pgm_$error);
pgm_$exit
end;
{ create output file; DO NOT increase privilege: it would
be an error to write on one of my own protected objects
here -- I want an ordinary file }
stream $create(arg, alen, stream $overwrite,
str;am_$no_conc_write, ostrid~ st);
if Cst.code <> 0) then begin
writelnC'Can"t create output file. ');
error_$print_name(st, arg, alen);
pgm_$set_severity(pgm_$error);
pgm_$exit
end;
o
{ now just copy the file ... a real program would be more
complicated here. }
repeat
{ read a record ... }
aclm_$up;
stream_$get_rec(istrid, addr(buf), 128, bp, bIen, sk, st);
aclm_$down;
if st.code <> 0 then
{ error or EOF }
exit;
{ write a record, stripping off the sequence number.
Notice I did NOT make a check to see that the length
of the record was greater than 8 characters ... I am
confident that the rest of the SUbsystem correctly
maintains sequence numbers, and that the protected
SUbsystem mechanism makes sure that only the SUbsystem
can operate on the data. }
stream_$put_rec(ostrid, addr(bp-[9]), blen-B, sk, st);
until st.code <> 0;
o
o
{ check that we stopped becuause of EOF }
if (st.subsys
stream_$subs) and then
(st.code = stream_$end_of_file) then
pgm_$exit;
=
{ not EOF --- a real error of some sort, then }
wri teln (' I/O error: ');
error_$print(st);
pgm_$set_severityCpgm_$error);
pgm_$exit
end.
o
4-293
Shell Commands
SUBS (SUBSYSTEM)
Shell Script
# create a protected sUbsystem
crsubs ps_example
# create some data to be protected --- normally a special create
# operation would be used that guarantees data integrity
catf >ps_data «I
12346678this is some protected data
12346679next record of protected data
ensubs ps_example -v «I
subs pse ps_example -mgr
subs ps data ps example -data
edacl p;_data -d % -a %.backup r
subs -up
cpf pS_data ps_data2 -subs
subs -down
#
#
#
#
c
enter the new sUbsystem in a shell
make pse a manager of 'PS_EXAMPLE'
protect the data
now can only get at data from within
# make a copy of the data
pse pS_data out_file
# run PSE to extract the protected data
catf out file
# see the protected data
# now see how it fails if I try to make the output file a
# protected object of the 'PS_EXAMPLE' sUbsystem ...
pse pS_data pS_data2
# try to clobber pS_data2
c
c
c
c'
Shell Oommands
4-294
-------------------------
_.... _-_._----.--.- ._...
TB (TRACEBACK)
o
TB (TRACEBACK) -- Print traceback after a fault.
FORMAT
TB [process_id] [options]
TB prints a traceback after a fault. The traceback lists the names of the routines leading
from the fault back to the main program, and includes the line number at which each
routine was called. Up to 32 levels of calls can appear. If the sequence exceeds 32 calls,
the first 16 and last 16 are shown in the traceback.
NOTE:
o
There is a homonymous DM command: TB -- To bottom of window. See the
TB command description in the DM chapter for details.
ARGUMENTS
process_id
(optional)
Specify the ID of the process for which the traceback is desired.
This may be the process name (displayed by the PST
(PROCESS_STATUS) command), the process UID, or the UNIX PID
(from PST -UN).
Default if omitted: perform traceback for the current process.
o
OPTIONS
The following options are meaningful only when used for cross-proccess tracebacks (i.e.,
tracing faults in some processes other than the current one).
-ARGS
o
Print the arguments to each call mentioned in the traceback.
NOTE: At SR9.5, this option functions only for Pascal and
FORTRAN calls. It does not report arguments for C calls.
-A[LL_FRAMES]
Print all frames back to the root of the stack (i.e., through the
current program and any calling programs) rather than stopping
at the current program level.
-R[EPEAT] [n]
Repeat the traceback every 'n' seconds. Repeat every 5 seconds
if 'n' is omitted.
EXAMPLES
1. In the following example, an overflow error occurred in a floating-point
multiplication at line 25 of the routine named EXTRAPOLATE. The routine
EXTRAPOLATE was called at line 192 of the routine REFLECTION, which in turn
was called at line 19 of the main program.
o
4-295
Shell Commands
TB (TRACEBACK)
$ tb
overflow in mUltiply (from library/floating point)
In routine "EXTRAPOLATE" line 25
Called from "REFLECTION" line 192
Called from "$MAIN" line 19
$
2. Trace a fault in the process named 'mail', showing call arguments.
$ tb mail-args
In System Service "ec2_$wait"
Arguments unavailable
Called from "INPAD_$GET" line 152
1. 00938A66 -> 00938ABC
2. 00A53A1C -> 00000000
3. 00987664 -> 20750A2D
U.4. 000125BO -> 000003E8
5. 0003907C -> 00000000
Called from "STREAM_$GET_REC" line 149
1. 00987AAO -> 00000001
2. 00987650 -> 00987664 · .vd
3. 000125BO -> 000003E8
4. 00987A4C -> 00987A70 · .zp
5. 00987A50 -> 000390E8
6. 00987A54 -> 00987638 · .v8
7. 0003907C -> 00000000
Called from "GET COMMAND" line 1754
1. 00987AAO -> 00000001
2. 00987AA2 -> 00010002
3. 00039010 -> 3AOOOOOO
4. 000397DA -> 00010000
5. 000390E8 -> 0092576E · .Wn
6. 0003907C -> 00000000
Called from "EXEC STREAM" line 2413
1.
0000
2.
0001
3.
0002
4.
0003
5. 0003907C -> 00000000
Called from "MAIL" line 3146
Arguments unavailable
$
3. Trace a fault in the process named 'mail' as far down the stack
$ tb mail -a
In System Service "ec2 $wait"
Called from "INPAD_$GET" line 152
Called from "STREAM_$GET_REC" line 149
Called from "GET COMMAND" line 1754
Called from "EXEC STREAM" line 2413
Called from "MAIL" line 3146
Called from ""
Called from "PGM_$LOAD_RUN" line 451
Called from "PGM_$INVOKE_UID" line 214
Called from "PM_$INIT" line 725
$
Shell Commands
4-296
0
"'--_./"
C
C
as possible.
c
TCTL (TERMINAL_CONTROL)
o
TCTL (TERMINAL_CONTROL) -- Set or display SIO line characteristics.
FORMAT
TCTL [options]
TCTL sets or displays SIO line characteristics, which control how hardware and software
connected to those lines should behave. For example, if you wish to allow a dumb
terminal to dial into a node and communicate meaningfully with a Shell, you must
properly configure the SIO line that the terminal will use so that the node will
understand the terminal's signals. Thus TCTL controls the transmission speed (baud
rate) that connected terminals must use, and which characters typed on those terminals
delete characters or lines.
o
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the current settings of the SIO lines are displayed.
o
-DEFAULT
Set all settable options to their default values. This allows you
to quickly reset values to known states.
-LINE n
Specify the SIO line to be affected by subsequent options on this
command line. 'n' is an integer in the range 0-3. The default SIO
line is line 1 or standard input (if standard input is directed to
an SIO line).
-SPEED baud
Set the speed of the line, for both input and output. The
possible baud rates are: 50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200. The initial setting is
9600 baud. Note that 3600 baud is not supported on DN3xx
systems. Speeds for partner line(s) may occasionally need to be
forced: see -FORCE below.
o
o
-FORCE
Valid only if -SPEED is also specified. This option forces the
speed of the line specified by -LINE to be set to the correct speed
(specified by -SPEED). If the line has a "partner line" that is
currently set to some other (incompatible) speed, -FORCE will
reset the partner line's speed to 9600 baud. See example 4
For more information about partner lines, see the
below.
SIO _ $CONTROL description in Programming with General
System Calls.
-NLD [n]
Set NEWLINE delay. This is the number of milliseconds
required following the output of a line feed (NEWLINE). If 'n' is
omitted or not set, 20 milliseconds is the default.
-ERASE char
Set the erase character. This option is valid only when data is
4-297
Shell Commands
TCTL (TERMINAL_CONTROL)
being passed to the SIO line in "cooked" mode. 'char' may be
any character or a one-byte hexadecimal value. Some characters
may require quoting in the Shell. The erase character is initially
set to BACKSPACE (08 hex).
-KILL char
Set the kill character. This option is valid only when data is
being passed to the SIO line in "cooked" mode. The kill
character is initially set to CTRL/X.
-EOF char
Set the end-of file character. The EOF character is initially set
to CTRL/Z.
'--.- .
-QUITCHR char
Set the quit character.
CTRL/].
The quit character is initially set to
-INTCHR char
This is used primarily by
Set the interrupt character.
DOMAIN/IX. The interrupt character is initially CTRL/C.
-SUSPCHR char
Set the suspend character.
This is used primarily by
DOMAIN/IX. The suspend character is initially CTRL/P.
-[NO]RAW
Turn raw mode on or off. In raw mode, full 8-bit bytes are
transmitted in both directions, without any interpretation. The
initial setting is -NORAW.
-[NO]ECHO
Turn the echoing of input characters over the SIO line on or off.
The initial setting is ECHO.
-[NO]SYNC
The terminal normally sends CTRL/S (XON) when its input
buffer begins to fill, and CTRL/Q (XOFF). when the buffer
begins to empty, to synchronize it with a high-speed data source.
This option enables or disables that behavior (it is initially
enabled). -SYNC implies -NORTS _ENABLE.
-[NO]CVT_NL
Enable or disable conversion of LF to CR-LF on output.
CVT _NL causes NEWLINEs (LF) to be transmitted as CR-LF
sequences. This option is valid only when data is being passed to
the SIO line in "cooked" mode.
The initial setting is
-NOCVT _NL: NOTE: EMT always puts the SIO line in "raw"
mode, so -CVT _ NL has no effect in that instance. Use the
OUTTERM command within EMT.
-[NO]CVTRAW _NL
Similar to -CVT _ NL, but applies only to raw mode.
-[NO]INSYNC
Enable or disable reacting to CTRL/S and CTRL/Q when
received by node. -INSYNC causes transmissions to halt when
CTRL/S is received and resume when CTRL/Q is received. The
initial setting is -NOINSYNC.
Shell Commands
4-298
c
-------------------------_._
......_-.
__ ._._-- ..__ .. _.................--.-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TCTL (TERMINAL_CONTROL)
o
-PARITY state
Select parity checking state. Valid states are:
NONE
EVEN
ODD
don't send or check parity bit
send and check even parity
send and check odd parity
The initial state is NONE.
-BPC
-STOP
0
0
Set number of bits per character. 'n' is an integer in the range
5-8. The initial number of bits per character is 8.
n
n
Set number of stop bits.
number of stop bits is 1.
'n' may be 1, 1.5, or 2. The initial
-[NO]QUIT
Enable/ disable quits for the current process. The initial setting
is -NO QUIT.
-[NO]INT
Enable/ disable interrupts for the current process.
setting is -NOINT.
-[NO]SUSP
Enable/disable suspend faults for the current process.
initial setting is -NOSUSP.
-[NO]RTS
Enable/ disable the request-to-send line.
-RTS.
Note that you. may NOT
-RTS _ENABLE is specified.
-[NO]DTR
Enable/ disable the data-terminal-ready line. The initial setting
is -DTR. Note that -DTR is not valid if -LINE 3 is specified.
The initial
The
The initial setting is
use this option if
-[NO]DCD_ENABLE
Enable/ disable standard handling of carrier detect. The initial
setting is -NOD CD _ENABLE.
-[NO]CTS_ENABLE
o
Enable/disable standard handling of clear-to-send.
setting is -NOCTS _ENABLE.
The initial
-[NO]RTS_ENABLE
Enable/ disable RTS flow control.
The initial setting
-NORTS ENABLE. Enable implies -NOSYNC.
IS
-[NO]BP _ENABLE
Enable/disable processing of bit-pad input (from a graphics
tablet) on the SIO line. When enabled, data received on this line
is not delivered through STREAM_ $GET _REe, but is accumulated
by the interrupt routine, and passed to the display driver a point
at a time, much as with the touchpad. This processing has the
additional property that subsequent points within +/-1 in both
the X and Y dimensions are ignored. The initial setting is
-NOBP ENABLE.
o
4-299
._... ....- ......
"
,,"_
...
_-_
....... _
---------
Shell Commands
TCTL (TERMINAL_CONTROL)
-ERROR state
Select error reporting state. Valid states are:
[NO] FRAMING
[NO] PARITY
[NO]OCO CHANGE
[NO]CTS=CHANGE
enable/disable
enable/disable
enable/disable
enable/disable
reported framing errors
reported parity errors
report on OCD line
report on CTS line
Only FRAMING is initially enabled.
EXAMPLES
1. $ tctl
Status of Line 1:
Erase (character delete) character: 08
Kill (line delete) character: 18 (hex)
End of file character: 1A (hex)
Quit character: 10 (hex)
Interrupt character: 03 (hex)
Suspend character: 10 (hex)
New line delay: 0
Speed: 9600
Raw: FALSE,
Echo: TRUE,
CvtRaw_NL: FALSE,
Host_Sync: TRUE,
RTS: TRUE,
OTR: TRUE,
CTS: FALSE,
Quit_Enable: FALSE,
Susp_Enable: FALSE, OCD_Enable: FALSE,
BP enable: FALSE
RTS enable: FALSE
Eight bits per character, Parity: None,
Errors enabled: FRAMING
Oisplay current
settings.
(hex)
Cvt NL: TRUE
Input_Sync: FALSE
OCO: FALSE
Int Enable: FALSE
CTS enable: FALSE
One stop bit
2. $ tctl -line 2 -quitchar OFE -insync -speed 300
3. $ tctl -parity odd -quitchar
'#'
-kill
c
Set quit character to
hex FE, enable input
synchronization, set
speed to 300 baud on
SIO line 2.
Set parity to odd,
quit character to #
(quoted because #
normally begins a
comment in the Shell),
and kill character
to ! on line 1.
4. $ tctl -line 2 -speed 50
?(tctl) Speed requested is incompatible with current speed
of partner line 1. Resubmit command with -FORCE
if permissable to reset partner line to 9600 baud.
$ tctl -line 2 -speed 50 -force
?(tctl) Warning: Speed of ,partner line has been reset to 9600 baud.
c
Shell Commands
4-300
TEE
o
TEE -- Copy input to output and to named files.
FORMAT
TEE pathname •..
TEE copies its standard input to standard output and to the named files. It is useful for
saving the data being transmitted through a pipeline.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
o
Specify name of file to receive output. Multiple pathnames are
permitted.
EXAMPLES
$ FMT mary I TEE mary. clean I as >mary.overstruck
o
This command line causes the file mary to be formatted with FMT. The formatted text is
written to the file mary. clean and also piped to the as command to produce overstruck
output (for a line printer) redirected into the file mary.overstruck. Thus, you end up with
two output files: one with ASCII carriage control (mary.clean) and one with FORTRAN
carriage control (mary.overstruck).
o
o
4-301
_. __ ._---.--_... __ ....... _-.-._----_.... _ - - - - - - - -
Shell Commands
TLC (TRANSLITERATE_ CHARACTERS)
TLC (TRANSLITERATE_CHARACTERS) -- Replace characters.
FORMAT
TLC from-chars [to-chars]
TLC copies standard input to standard output, substituting or deleting selected
characters. Each input character found in 'from-chars' is replaced by the corresponding
character of 'to-chars'.
TLC differs from ClIPAT (CHANGE_PATTERN) in that it deals only with single characters
or ranges of characters, whereas ClIPAT deals with character strings. For example,
$ tIc xy yx
changes all x's into y's and all y's into x's, whereas
$ chpat xy yx
changes all the patterns "xy " into "yx".
ARGUMENTS
from-chars
(required)
to-chars
(optional)
Specify existing character(s) to be replaced. You may specify a
range of characters by separating the extremes with a dash. For
example, a-z stands for the list of lowercase letters. 'from-chars'
may contain a maximum of 100 characters.
Specify replacement characters. You may specify a range of
characters by separating the extremes with a dash. For example,
a-z stands for the list of lowercase letters. 'to-chars' may contain
a maximum of 100 characters.
If 'from-chars' and 'to-chars' contain an equal number of
characters, TLC translates the first character in 'from-chars' to
the first character in 'to-chars', and so forth.
c
c
If 'from-chars' contains more characters ~han 'to-chars', TLC
repeats the last character in 'to-chars' until 'to-chars' is as long
as 'from-chars'. However, in the output, adjacent repetitions of
the last character appear as one character. (See' example 2
below.)
If 'to-chars' contains more characters than 'from-chars', the
extra characters are ignored.
Default if omitted: delete all occurrences of characters in the
'from-chars' list.
Shell Commands
4-302
c
TLC (TRANSLITERATE _ CHARACTERS)
o
EXAMPLES
The following examples show TLC's operation using standard input and output. The first
line following the command line is an echo of standard input. The next line IS the TLC
results, then another line of input, then more results, and so forth.
1. $ TLC te zq
Now is the time
No\( is zhq zimq
*** EOF ***
$
o
2. $ TLC abc zq
Now is the time for all good men and boys to come to the aid
Now is the time for zll good men znd qoys to qome to the zid
abcaccbaa
Note that mUltiple occurrences of "a"
zqzqzz
are replaced·by HZ" one for one. but
aaaaa
multiple occurrences of "b" and "c"
zzzzz
are replaced with a single "qUo since
bbbbb
the 'from-char' list is longer than
q
the 'to-char' list.
ccccc
q
***
o
EOF
***
3. TLC A-Z a-z mary.lc
This command changes all uppercase
letters in the input file "mary. caps"
to lowercase and writes the results
to the file "mary.lc". Lowercase
characters already in "mary. caps"
remain unchanged.
o
o
4-303
Shell Commands
TPM (TOUCH_PAD_MODE) -- Set/display touchpad and mouse characteristics.
FORMAT
TPM [options]
TPM allows you to define characteristics for the touchpad and mouse. The touchpad
operates in one of three modes: absolute, relative, and absolute/relative. The mode of
operation establishes how movements of your finger on the touchpad affect the position
of the cursor on the screen. The three modes differ primarily in how the cursor moves
when you lift your finger from the touchpad and then replace it. The subsections below
describe the three operational modes, as well as the other options.
The mouse operates in relative mode only. .
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, TPM displays the current touchpad characteristics.
Default options are indicated by II (D). II
-A
(D)
Select absolute mode.
-R
Select relative mode.
-AR
Select absolute/relative mode.
-RERANGE
Set prescaling factors for touchpad data.
(
'-........
-S x y
Set scaling factors for x and y. Values must be in raster units,
and can range from 1 to 1024. The default scaling factors are
799 for x and 1023 for y (portrait displays); and 1023 for x and
799 for y (landscape displays).
-0 x y
Set x and y as the origin for absolute mode. Values must be in
raster units, and can range from to 1023. The default origin is
0,0.
-H n
Set the hysteresis box size. The value must be in raster units,
and can range from to 1023. The default is 5.
°
°
Absolute Mode
In absolute mode, using the default scale and origin, the touchpad approximates the screen, so
that the top left edge of the touchpad represents cursor positions at the top left edge of the
screen. Absolute mode is the default setting. When you place your finger on the touchpad, the
cursor jumps to a corresponding position on the screen. Moving your finger across the touchpad
moves the cursor across the screen in the same direction.
For example, moving your finger from the top of the touchpad to the bottom moves the cursor
Shell Commands
4-304
c'
o
from top to bottom on the screen. If you lift your finger from the touchpad, and later touch the
pad again, the cursor jumps to a new position on the screen corresponding to the new finger
position.
Absolute mode has no meaning if you are using a mouse.
Relative Mode
In relative mode, cursor movements correspond only to finger movements across the touchpad.
The cursor does not move when you first place your finger on the touchpad. This differs from
absolute mode, where the cursor jumps to a new position when you lift your finger and then
replace it. In effect, relative mode causes the touchpad to correspond to different areas of the
screen, relative to the current cursor position.
o
o
This is the only meaningful mode for a mouse: all movement begins from the current cursor
position.
Relative mode is typically used with scale factors less than the defaults. Smaller scale factors
mean that the touchpad maps to a smaller area of the screen. For example, scale factors of 200
by 256 specify one-sixteenth of a portrait display's screen area. With small scale factors, relative
mode allows fine resolution of the cursor position within a small area.
To reach distant areas on the screen, you can use several II strokes II on the touchpad or mouse,
each stroke moving the cursor closer to its final destination. To assist you in making large
movements in relative mode without having to use too many strokes, the speed of cursor
movement is artificially accelerated in relation to the speed of finger or mouse movement. Thus,
a quick motion will move the cursor farther than a slow, deliberate motion which covers the same
distance.
Absolute/Relative Mode
o
Absolute/relative mode is a combination of absolute and relative modes. It has no meaning for
the mouse. In this mode, the first position of your finger on the touchpad establishes the first
position of the cursor, as in absolute mode. Moving your finger across the touchpad moves the
cursor across the screen. As in relative mode, the scale is typically smaller than the whole screen.
Unlike absolute and relative modes, however, the effect of lifting your finger from the touchpad
depends on how long you break contact. If you lift and replace your finger quickly -- within a
half second -- the cursor does not move, and the effect is the same as relative mode. If you break
contact for more than a half second, however, the cursor jumps to a new absolute position when
you put your finger on the touchpad again.
Absolute/relative mode is useful for IIjumping ll the cursor from one place to another, then
carefully positioning it in the new area. For example, this mode is commonly used to move the
cursor III a jump from one window to another, and then point to a character in the second
window.
o
4-305
..._._..........
__._..._-----_ ..._.......... _......................... -
._---
Shell Commands
TPM (TOUCH_PAD _MODE)
Prescaling the Totlchpad
Raw touchpad data vary slightly from one touchpad to another. Prescaling is, in essence,
calibration of the touchpad. Every time you start the node, the touchpad manager prescales the
data to determine an exact range for the device.
To prescale, the touchpad manager observes the first thousand points of touchpad data (about 30
seconds of use). During this time, you should try to touch all four edges of the touchpad to
ensure that the observed data constitute an accurate sample. Based on the observed data, the
touchpad manager computes a prescaling factor which, when applied to the data, brings all points
into the range from -.05 to 1.05. This range corresponds to the edges of the screen, plus an
overlap of 5%, when multiplied by the default scaling factors. Because of the overlap, you need
not touch the internal frame (under the conductive material) to move the cursor to the edge of
the screen.
The -RERANGE option invokes prescaling. This option is useful if the first 30 seconds of use did
not include the entire range of the touchpad. It is also handy if you change keyboards on a node,
and therefore need to reset the prescaling factors without restarting the node.
c
Scale Factors
The touchpad manager translates, or scales, the data into raster units, which the Display
Manager understands. Scale factors, specified with the -S option, are applied to the prescaled
touchpad data to translate it to raster units for the Display Manager.
The scale factors are multiplied by the prescaled data. The default scale factors are 800 for x and
1024 for y (portrait displays); and 1024 for x and 800 for y (landscape displays). Applying these
factors to prescaled data results in numbers from approximately 0 to 799 (for x) and 0 to 1023
(for y) for portrait displays, and vice versa for landscape displays. (Note that the prescaled data
allow a 5% overlap, as mentioned in the preceding subsection.)
The default scale factors provide for touchpad data corresponding to the whole screen. Smaller
scale factors ~educe the area to which the touchpad maps, thereby allowing you to more finely
tune the cursor position. This also applies to mouse movement, allowing changes in the apparent
motion sensitivity of the device.
Setting the Origin
The origin is the point denoted by the upper left corner of the touchpad, in absolute and
absolute/relative mode. In relative mode, the origin has no meaning. By default, the touchpad
origin corresponds to the upper left corner of the screen, that is, the point 0,0 in raster units. By
changing the origin, you can use the touchpad (in absolute mode) to correspond to a portion of
the screen.
This feature is useful for applications that need to move the cursor within a fixed window, rather
than across the whole screen. For example, a program that displays a menu in one window might
set the origin to the upper left corner of the menu window. Consequently, the touchpad maps
onto the menu window instead of the entire screen.
Shell Commands
4-306
c
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ . _ - - - - --
"--_._-
..
--.-.-.--
o
Hysteresis
The hysteresis value defines the dimensions of a II box II around your finger position on the
touchpad or the current position of the mouse. Movement within the box does not change the
position of the cursor on the screen.
Specify the hysteresis value in raster units. The touchpad manager compares the value to the
difference between the current and previous finger positions on the touchpad or the current and
previous positions of the mouse. If the difference is less than the hysteresis value, the cursor does
not move. If the difference is greater than the hysteresis value, the hysteresis value is subtracted
from the difference and the cursor moves the resulting distance. The default hysteresis value is
five.
o
o
EXAMPLES
$ TPM
Mode: absolute
Xscale: 1024. Yscale: 800
Hysteresis: 5
Origin: O. 0
Display current characteristics
$ TPM -ar -s 400 512
Set characteristics to absolute/relative
mode with half the default scaling
sensitivity (portrait display).
o
o
4-307
Shell Commands
TZ (TIMEZONE)
TZ (TIMEZONE) -- Set or display system time zone.
FORMAT
TZ sets the system time zone to a known time zone or to an offset from Coordinate
Universal Time (UTC).
To set the actual time registered by the nodes's internal clock, use the CALENDAR
command. See the CALENDAR command description for more information.
ARGUMENTS
If no arguments are specified, TZ displays the current setting.
tz name
(optional)
Specify new time zone. Valid names are: .
Name
EDT
EST
CDT
CST
MDT
MST
PDT
PST
GMT
UTC
c
Time Zone
Eastern Daylight Time
Eastern Standard Time
Central Daylight Time
Central Standard Time
Mountain Daylight Time
Mountain Standard Time
Pacific Daylight Time
Pacific Standard Time
Greenwich Mean Time
Coordinated Universal Time
('
"-...
Default if omitted: use 'utc _ delta' argument
ute delta
(optional)
Specify positive or negative offset from UTC. The plus sign is
optional for positive offsets. Format for offset is hh:mm (e.g.,
-10:00 for ten hours earlier than (west of) Coordinated Universal
Time). Only whole or half hour offsets may be specified. Other
fractional offsets produce an error message.
Default if omitted: use 'tz _name' argument
new tz
(optional)
Specify new time zone name to be assigned to the zone indicated
by the 'utc _ delta' argument. Use this argument to create time
zones that are not included in the list above.
Default if omitted: no name assigned
c
Shell Commands
4-308
TZ (TIMEZONE)
EXAMPLES
$
TZ
Timezone:
EST
Delta from UTC: -5:00
Display current time zone.
$
TZ pdt
Set time zone to Pacific Daylight Time
$
TZ 4:30 gst
Create (and set) a time zone named GST
that is four and a half hours later
than (east of) Coordinated Universal
Time.
o
o
o
o
4-309
Shell Commands
UCTNODE (UNCATALOG_NODE)
UCTNODE (UNCATALOG_NODE) -- Uncatalog a node.
FORMAT
UCTNODE pathname ••• [options]
UCTNODE removes the specified entry directory name from the local copy of the
network root directory. Mter the name is removed, objects cataloged under that node's
entry directory are no longer accessible to you or other nodes on the network.
If you use the ·ROOT option, the nodename is also removed from the network's
replicated root directory.
Node entry directories are created with the CTNODE (CATALOG_NODE) command.
c
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
Specify node entry directory name to be uncataloged. Multiple
pathnames and wildcarding are permitted.
OPTIONS
-L
-ROOT
List directory names as they are uncataloged.
Uncatalog the node in the network root as well as in the the
local root directory.
c
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ uctnode als node
Uncatalog the node with the entry
directory name specified.
c
Shell Commands
4-310
UCTOB (UNCATALOG _ OBJECT)
o
UCTOB (UNCATALOG_OBJECT)
deleting the associated object.
--
Uncatalog the specified pathname, without
FORMAT
UCTOB pathname ... [options]
UCTOB removes the specified pathname from the name space. The object associated
with the pathname is not affected. This command is primarily intended for system-level
debugging use.
ARGUMENTS
o
pathname
(required)
Specify name of object to be uncataloged. The object itself is
not affected. Multiple objects and wildcarding are permitted.
OPTIONS
-BR
o
Suppress listing of names and UIDs of objects as they are
uncataloged. These are reported unless this option is specified.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
EXAMPLES
$ uctob testfile
Uncatalog "testfile".
"testfile" uid is 16791COC.40000074.
$
o
o
4-311
- - - _ .... _..... _...
_--_............. _
.... _.................
Shell Commands
ULKOB (UNLOCK_ OBJECT)
ULKOB (UNLOCK_OBJECT) -- Unlock an object.
FORMAT
ULKOB [pathname ..•] [options]
The ULKOB command unlocks objects residing on, or locked by processes running on,
the current Il:ode. You may not unlock objects on remote nodes unless you locked them
(see -F below). This command can be used when a program terminates abnormally,
leaving objects locked, or to unlock objects previously locked with the LKOB
(LOCK_ OBJECT) command.
To obtain a list of your node's locked objects, use the LLKOB (LIST _LOCKED _ OBJECTS)
command.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify name of object to be unlocked. Multiple pathnames and
wildcarding are permitted.
Default if omitted: -U option must be specified
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the object is unlocked for all lock modes.
-R
Unlock an object that was locked for read mode; the lock must
be owned by this process.
-w
Unlock an object that was locked for write mode; the lock must
be owned by this process.
-I
Unlock an object that was locked for reading with intent to
write; the lock must be owned by this process.
-F
-L
-U uid •.•
Forcibly unlock an object. It may have been locked for any
mode and the lock may be owned by any process. The object
must reside on the current node, however, or must have been
locked by the current node. In other words, you cannot unlock
objects on a remote node unless you locked them.
List the name of each object as it is unlocked.
Specify the UID of the object(s) to unlock. Multiple UIDs are
permitted. If the 'pathname argument is omitted, then this
option is required.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
Shell Oommands
4-312
~~~~--
-
--.--------~~
--
(
\.~. -
.
ULKOB (UNLOCK_ OBJECT)
o
EXAMPLES
$ ULKOB mary -f
Forcibly unlock the file "mary" for any mode.
$ ULKOB -uid lC1A9E2F.20000246 lC1A9E42.50000246
Unlock the two objects with the specified UIDs.
o
o
o
o
4-313
Shell Commands
UMASK
UMASK -- Set DOMAIN/IX file-creation mode mask.
C
~
.. - ",,/
FORMAT
UMASK [nnn]
UMASK sets or displays your DOMAIN/IX file-creation mode mask. This is an internal
Shell command.
ARGUMENTS
nnn
(optional)
Specify the read/write/execute permISSIons for owner, group,
and others, respectively. The value of each specified octal digit
is subtracted from the corresponding II digit II specified by the
system for the creation of a file. Refer to the DOMAIN/IX
description of creat(2) for more information about file creation.
Also see chmod(l) and umask(2) for further discussion of file
permissions.
Default if omitted: display current mask value.
EXAMPLES
To remove write permission of the group and others, execute the following command.
$ umask 022
c
Files normally created with mode 777 become mode 755; files created with mode 666
become mode 644.
c
l,-,''
Shell Commands
4-314
VCTL (VT100 _ CONTROL)
o
VCTL
(VT100_CONTROL) --
Set/display VT100 terminal characteristics.
FORMAT
VCTL [options]
VCTL allows you to set or display information about how the VT100 terminal emulator
driver handles input from the keyboard (for example, whether or not it echoes characters,
or how it interprets key sequences typed at the keyboard).
This command is valid only if you have the VT100 terminal emulation software package
running on your node. In addition, VCTL can only be run in a window where the VT100
emulator is already running.
o
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, the current VT100 settings are displayed.
-DEFAULT
Set all options to their default values.
quickly reset values to known states.
This allows you to
-[NO]CVT_IN~NL
Convert a newline (linefeed) to a carriage return on input. The
initial setting is -NOCVT _IN ....;.:LINE.
o
-[NO]CVT _IN _ CR
Convert a carriage return to a newline on input.
setting is -CVT _ IN _ CR.
The initial
-[NO]CVT_OUT_NL
Convert a newline to carriage return, newline on output.
initial setting is -CVT _ OUT _ NL.
o
The
-[NO]CVT_OUT_CR
-[NO]ECHO
Convert a carriage return to a newline on output
setting is -NOCVT _ OUT _ CR.
The initial
Turn the echoing of input characters on or off.
setting is ECHO.
The initial
-[NO]ECHO_CTL
Turn the echoing of control characters (such as CTRLjZ) on or
off. The initial setting is NOECHO _ CTL.
-[NO]ECHO _ERASE
If ECHO is on, controls whether characters are visibly erased
from the screen when the erase character is typed.
The
combination of ECHO and NOECHO _ERASE causes the erase
character to be echoed until all characters on a line are erased.
The initial setting is -ECHO _ERASE.
o
4-315
Shell Commands
VOTL (VT100_00NTROL)
-[NO]RAW
If RAW is on, a program reading from the keyboard in the
VT100 will receive each character as it is typed. If RAW is off,
such a program will block until a full line has been typed. A full
line is a sequence of characters ending in a newline character. In
other words, in non-raw mode, a program blocks until a carriage
return or line feed is typed.
-[NO]ECHO _KILL
If EOHO is on, controls whether a line is visibly erased from the
screen when the line kill character is typed. The combination of
EOHO and NOEOHO KILL causes the kill character to be
echoed and a new line to be displayed. The initial setting is
-EOHO KILL.
-EOF char
Set the end-of-file character. The EOF character is initially set
to OTRL/Z.
-ERASE char
Set the erase character. This option is valid only when data is
being passed to the terminal emulator in .. cooked" mode. The
'char' can be any character or one-byte hexadecimal value.
Some characters may require quoting in the Shell. The erase
.character is initially set to BACKSPACE (08 hex).
-INTR char
Set the interrupt character, which sends an interrupt fault to
the process group of the terminal emulator. The interrupt
character is initially set to CTRL/C.
-KILL char
Set the kill character. This option is valid only when data is
being passed to the emulator in "cooked mode ll • The kill
character is initially set to CTRL/X.
-QUIT char
Set the quit character.
CTRL/Q.
-SUSP char
Set the suspend character. The suspend character is initially set
to hex FF, which is equivalent to its being disabled.
The quit character is initially set to
-[NO]ENABLE_SIGS
If ENABLE _ SIGS is on then the fault-generating characters
(interrupt, quit, suspend) have their special meaning.
If
ENABLE SIGS is off then these characters are not treated
specially.
EOL char
Set the extra break character. The EOL character is initially
set to hex FF, which is equivalent to its being disabled. If it is
enabled, the EOL character behaves like < return> in that any
program reading from the keyboard will immediately wake up
and read whatever has been typed so far, including the EOL
character itself.
c
4-316
Shell Commands
....
-~-
... ---~--
._---_.
VCTL (VT100 _ CONTROL)
o
o
EXAMPLES
1. $ vctl
Display current settings.
Erase (character delete) character: "~H" (08 hex)
Kill (line delete) character: "~U" (15 hex)
End of file character: "-Z" (lA hex)
Interrupt character: "-C" (03 hex)
Quit character: "-Q" (11 hex)
Extra break character: FF (hex)
Suspend character: FF (hex)
Echo Erase: TRUE
Raw: FALSE,
Echo: TRUE,
Cvt_In_CR: TRUE
Echo_Kill: TRUE,
Echo_Ctl: FALSE,
Cvt_Out_CR: FALSE
Cvt_In_NL: FALSE,
Cvt_Out_NL: TRUE,
Enable Sigs: TRUE
$
2. $ vctl -quit OFE -cvt out cr
Set quit character to hex FE,
enable cqnversion of output
newlines to carriage returns.
o
o
o
4-316.1
Shell Command8
c
~~-----....
-
VOFF
o
VOFF -- Deactivate the Shell's -V flag.
FORMAT
VOFF
VOFF turns off the Shell's -v (VerifY) flag, which is turned on by the VON command or
the -V option on the SH command line. When the flag is off, command lines are not
displayed when they are read by the Shell. Verification is off by default.
VOFF requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
4-317
Shell Commands
VON
c::
VON -- Activate the Shell's -V flag.
FORMAT
VON
VON turns on input verification . .Ai:, commands are executed, or comments processed,
they are written to the error output stream of the Shell. In Shell scripts, VON can be
used to show the progress being made by the script.
If VON is turned on in a shell script, it remains on until that shell script exits, or until
over-ridden by aVOFF in a nested shell script. When a shell script exits, the state of
input verification is returned to the state in effect just before the script was invoked.
VON requires no arguments or options.
r
.-.~/
c
c
c
Shell Commands
4-318
VSIZE (VT100 _ SIZE)
o
VSIZE (VT100_SIZE) -- Set/display VT100 window settings.
FORMAT
VSIZE [options]
The VSIZE command allows you to set the dimensions of the VT100 emulator window
pane. This command is only valid from within the VT100 emulator (which is invoked
with the VT100 command); attempting to use it directly from the Shell causes an error.
OPTIONS
If no options are specified, VSIZE displays the current window. pane settings.
o
o
-L n
Specify the height of the window pane in lines. If this option is
omitted, the height remains unchanged.
-0 n
Specify the width of the window in columns. If this option is
omitted, the width remains unchanged.
-STD
Set the height of the window to 24 lines and the width to 80
columns (same as saying -1 24 -c 80).
EXAMPLES
$ vt100
Invoke VT100 emulator.
$ vsize
Display current settings.
Screen size is 18 lines by 70 columns.
$ vsize -c 60
Change the width.
Old screen size is 18 lines by 70 columns.
New screen size is 18 lines by 60 columns.
Exit the emulator and return
$ *** EOF ***
to the Shell.
$
o
o
4-319
Shell Commands
VT100
VT100 -- VT100 terminal emulator.
FORMAT
VT100 [options] [pathname [arg1 arg2 ••• ]]
The VT100 command creates a window running the VT100 terminal emulator and starts
up a Shell within the window. This command is valid only if you have the VT100
terminal emulation software package running on your node.
The VT100 terminal emulation package is intended for use with two types of programs.
When used in conjunction with remote communications packages such as DOMAIN
TOP /IP or X.25, the VT100 terminal emulator allows you to interact with the remote
system as if you were logged into a VT100 connected to that system. Using the VT100
terminal emulator with programs that take advantage of VT100 special features allows
you to run these programs on a DOMAIN node without having to tailor them to the
DOMAIN environment.
~
,_.,
... ,,;
The VT100 terminal emulation package consists of:
• The terminal emulation software, which performs the functions of a VT100
terminal, such as handling VT100-type escape sequences. The terminal
emulator redirects the handling of keyboard input and screen output to
stream manager operations. The terminal emulator is invoked within a DM
window by the VT100 Shell command .
• The terminal emulator driver, which performs keyboard input functions such
as erasing or echoing characters. The VOTL Shell command allows you to set
and display the VT100 terminal characteristics controlled by the terminal
emulator driver.
ARGUMENTS
If any options are specified, they must precede the argument(s).
pathname [arg1 arg2 ••. ]
(optional)
Specify the name of a command or program for the Shell in the
VT100 window to invoke. You must give the full pathname; for
example, /com/ld. Arg1, arg2, ... are valid arguments to the
selected command (or program):
for example, /com/ld
/ /my _node/my _home_dir.
Default if omitted: invoke /com/sh
OPTIONS
If any options are specified, they must precede the argument(s). Once VT100 is running,
you may change the window size with the VSIZE (VT100_SIZE) command.
-STD
Shell Oommands
Set up a VT100 window that is 24 lines by 80 columns (the
standard size of a VT100 screen).
4-320
c
VT100
-LINES n
o
Set up a VT100 window with the number of lines specified by
'n'. The number of lines cannot be greater than the number of
lines in the DM window running the VT100 emulator.
-COLUMNS n
Set up a VT100 window with the number of columns specified by
'n'. The number of columns cannot exceed the number of
columns of the DM window running the VT100 emulator.
EXAMPLES
o
1.
$ VT100
2.
$ VT100 /COM/TELNET hostname
Open a connection to the remote system
specified by 'hostname' and create a window
running the VT100 emulator.
Create a window running the VT100 emulator
and start a shell running within the window.
vrl00 Keyboard Layout
The table below shows how the keys on a DOMAIN low-profile or 880 keyboard map to the keys
of a VT100. This presupposes that you are running the VT100 Keyboard Emulation package on
your node. Note that the VT100 definitions for the , , and keys supercede
the usual EMT definitions for these keys.
o
o
DOMAIN key
vrl00 keypad
SHIFT/
SHIFT/
SHIFT/
SHIFT/
<7>
<8>
<9>
<->
CTRL/
CTRL/
CTRL/
CTRL/
SHIFT/
<4>
<5>
<6>
<.>
<1>
<2>
<3>
SHIFT/
CTRL/
CTRL/
<0>
<.>
o
4-321
Shell Commands
WBAK (WRITE_BAOKUP)
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP) -- Create a magnetic media backup file.
FORMAT
WBAK pathname ••• -F file_no [options] [-]
WBAI( writes one or more objects to a magnetic media backup file. These objects may
be directory trees, files, or links. For each object, the information saved includes the
name, object data, and attributes associated with the object, such as the access control
list. This lets you reconstruct files, the directory tree, or any portion of the tree using the
RBAI( (READ _BACKUP) command.
The WBAK and RBAK commands are intended both for disk backup and for
interchanging information between separate DOMAIN installations. Use the RWMT
(READ_ WRITE_MAGTAPE) command to read and write magnetic media which are used for
interchanging information with non-DOMAIN installations.
Tape Structure
WBAK writes the contents of the objects you specify to a single "backup file". Note that
a backup file may be an ANSI standard tape file or diskette, and may contain many
DOMAIN files, directories, and links. A backup file is a logically (and, if contained on
one physical volume, physically) contiguous area of magnetic media surrounded by ANSI
IIfile header" and "end of file" labels. One physical backup volume may contain one or
more backup files. A single backup file may, however, span multiple magnetic media
volumes.
The collection of backup files on one or more associated physical magnetic media volumes
is called a II file set". The first backup file on the first physical magnetic media volume
in a file set is numbered II 1" . Subsequent backup files in this file set are numbered in
ascending order from 112".
Backup Modes
If you are backing up directory trees, WBAK can operate in one of three modes: II full II
backup, "incremental" backup, or "dtm relative II backup. In full backup mode, all files,
directories, and links are written to the backup file. When doing a full backup, objects in
use do not get backed up. In incremental backup mode, all files are saved which were
modified since the last full or incremental backup (when the backup history file was
updated). In dtm relative mode, all files which were most recently modified either before
or after the specified time are written to the tape.
Backup History
WBAK records all times that a directory has been backed up in a file called
BACKUP _HISTORY. This file is updated in all directories named on the command line with
the 'pathname' argument; it is not updated in directories contained within (subordinate
to) those named directories. If no directory is named on the command line, then no
BACKUP HISTORY file is made. The information written to this file includes the date and
time of the backup (in Ooordinate Universal Time (UTO)), the backup mode, and, if you
have specified a dtm. relative backup, the date and time to which the backup is relative.
Shell Commands
4-322
c
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
o
WBAK uses this file in incremental backup mode to determine the date and time of the
last full or incremental backup. This file is a standard text file and may be read in the
same way as any text file; you should not, however, change it except possibly to delete
old entries from the beginning of the file if it becomes too large. The automatic update
of the history file can be suppressed by using the -NHIST command option.
File Identification on Tape
Associated with a backup file is a II file id II (-FID option). This is a 1 through 17
character user-assigned name which can be used in place of the file number to identify
the backup file. This name is stored in the file header label and is printed (by default)
by RBAK when the contents of a backup file are indexed (listed) or restored.
Full Di8k Backup
o
An entire disk can be backed up by specifying the entry directory name as the pathname
(example 2). It takes approximately 25 minutes to perform a full backup on a local 33
megabyte Winchester disk; 50 minutes for a remote disk.
Backup Verification
Use RBAK with the -INDEX option to list a single backup file. For an index of all
backup files on one physical tape volume, use RWMT with the -INDEX option.
When using WBAK, please note the following:
o
o
• Directories must allow list access in order to be backed up.
• Files must allow read access in order to be backed up.
• Objects locked for writing by another process cannot be backed up.
• WBAK must be run on the node which is connected to the tape or floppy
unit. You may accomplish this either by physically typing the WBAK
command on the host node, or by running WBAK in a process on the host
node created from your own remote node using the CRP CREATE_PROCESS
command.
• Only one tape unit can be connected to any node.
• There are no special tape mounting commands.
the tape drive and execute WBAK.
.
Simply mount
the tape on
,
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
o
Specify the name of the object to be written to backup media.
This may be a directory, file, or link. If it is a file, then the file
is written as specified. If it is a link, then the link is resolved
and the resolution object is written to backup media. If it is a
4-323
Shell Command8
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
directory, all subordinate files and subdirectories in the tree are
written. Note that the pathname specified reflects the way the
directory is stored on the backup media, and that the same name
must be used when reading files using pathnames in RBAK.
Multiple pathnames and wildcarding are permitted. If you omit
this argument,. WBAK will prompt you for it. You may specify
a hyphen (-) as an argument to direct WBAK to standard input
for further arguments and options.
c
OPTIONS
The -F option is required, as it specifies where on the backup media the new file is to be
written. If you omit it, WBAK will prompt you for it.
Default options are indicated by II(D).II
Tape File Identifiers
-FID file
id
Specify a 1-17 character file ID to be written in the file header
label for use when writing a file to a labeled volume. If this
option is omitted, the file is not named and can only be restored
by the file number.
-F [position]
Specify the file position for the write operation. Valid values
for 'position' are II CUR II , II END II , or a nonzero integer. A
position of II CUR II specifies that the file should be written at the
current position on the backup media; the media must have been
previously written by WBAK and its position must not have
been disturbed.
A position of "END" specifies that the file should be written at
the end of the backup media file set. This causes WBAK to
append the specified disk file ('pathname' argument) to the very
end of the file set.
A position specified by a nonzero integer value causes the file to
be written at that absolute position in the backup media volume.
If multiple 'pathname' arguments are supplied, the value of
'position' is incremented by one after each file has been written.
The default value for 'position' is 1.
Mode Control
The object specified by the 'pathname' argument must be a directory for either -FULL or
-INCR to have meaning.
-FULL
(D)
Specify a full backup; save all files in specified trees.
-INCR
Specify an incremental backup; save files which were modified
since the last backup recorded in the BACKUP _HISTORY file
stored in the 'pathname' directory.
-AF dtm
Save all files modified after the given date and time; dtm is in
the form "yy/mm/dd.hh:mm". The date defaults to today, and
the time to midnight if either of those are omitted from dtm.
Shell Commands
4-324
C:
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
-BEF dtm
0
Save all files last modified before the given date and time.
Label Control
-WLA
(D)
-NWLA
Suppress writing of the backup media volume label.
-OWN id
Specify backup media volume owner (1-14 character name).
This option is only meaningful when used with the -WLA option.
-VID vol
Specify a 1-6 character volume ID for use when labeling a
volume. This option is only meaningful when the backup file
number is 1. The default volume ID is ' , (blank).
id
-SLA
o
Write the backup media volume label if the backup file number
is 1.
(D)
-NSLA
Display the label information written for this backup file on
standard output.
Suppress output of label information.
Listing Control
You may include the -L option, or any combination of -LD, -LF, AND -LL.
-L
o
Write the names of all files, directories, and links saved to
standard output.
-LF
Write the names of all files saved to standard output.
-LD
Write the names of all directories saved to standard output.
-LL
Write the names of all links saved to standard output.
Backup Device Control
-DEV d[unit]
o
Specify device type and unit number. 'd' must be either 'M'
(for reel-to-reel magnetic tape), 'CT' (for cartridge tape), or 'F'
(for floppy), depending on which drive is being used. 'unit' is an
integer (0-3). Both are required for reel-to-reel tapes (Le., -DEV
M2). A unit number is NOT required for floppy disks and
cartridge tapes (i.e., -DEV F). If this option is omitted, RBAK
assumes device MO.
CAUTION:
-REO
Floppy disk support for this command is limited.
In particular, error detection during reads and
writes is poor. DO NOT use this command with
floppy disks when the data being placed on the
floppy disks are critical and unrecoverable.
Force previous backup media volume to be reopened, and
suppress reading of backup media volume label. Use only when
backup media has not been repositioned since last WBAK or
RBAK.
o
4-325
Shell Commands
WBAI( (WRITE_BACKUP)
Special Cartridge Tape Control Options
-RETEN
-NRETEN
-NO
c'
Retension the cartridge ·.tape (unwind to the end, then rewind).
This can be helpful if you have encountered cartridge tape
reading errors. Retensioning requires about 1.5 minutes to
complete.
(D)
Do not retension the cartridge tape.
EOT
Suppress the writing of two tape marks at the end of the tape
file, which are the standard signal for end of tape. The cartridge
can't position between the two tapemarks to be ready for a
successive call to WBAK (as it does on magtape),without
rewinding the tape and searching forward, so this option speeds
up multiple invocations of WBAK. It SHOULD NOT be used
on the LAST invocation of WBAK. Also, '-F CUR' should be
used on all WBAK invocations in a series except the first one.
-SYSBOOT
Permit use of a bootable tape that has a special boot program
at the beginning. This option causes WBAK to skip over the
first file on the tape. This option is only necessary when the
first file on the tape is being written ('-F 1').
Miscellaneous Control Options
-NHI
Suppress update of the backup history file.
- (hyphen)
Read standard input for further arguments or options; input is
accepted until WBAK receives an EOF (CTRL/Z by default).
-PDTU
Preserves the last date/time-used information on objects. After
each object is backed up on tape, the date/time-used information
is reset to the value it had before the backup.
This command uses the command line parser, and so also accepts the standard command
options listed in the description of the command line parser in Chapter 3.
r'"'·
EXAMPLES
{
I
\... .. ~,
1. $ wbak //mask/wby -f 1 -af 81/11/19.12.00 -fid wby -L
This command writes the directory / /MASK/WBY to tape. The directory is written out to
tape file one, and the file ID "wby" is written to the file's label. Disk files from directory
WBY are written to the tape only if they have been modified since noon on November 19,
1981. The label and the names of the files written to tape are printed to standard output.
When this command is executed, WBAK writes the following information to standard
output:
Label:
File
File
File
Date
number:
section:
ID:
written:
1
1
c
wby
1981/11/20 10:47:58 EST
4-326
Shell Commands
_ _ _ _ _ ... ___ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ .J _ _ _ ._ ..
~-----
....- - - - - . - - - . -
- - - - - _....-
..
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
o
Starting write:
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(dir)
"//mask/wby/among" written
"//mask/wby/sch001 11 written
"//mask/wby/chi1dren" written
"//mask/wby/backup_history" written
"//mask/wby/II written.
Write complete.
2. $ wbak -f 1 -own "john doe" -yid lIyo1bk2" -fid "node 27 backup
II
//gooey
This command backs up the entire contents of the node whose entry directory name is
"gooey". Note that the file ID is specified as "node 27 backupll to make it easy to identify
when you want to reload it, and that the command assigns volume and owner IDs.
When this command is executed, WBAK writes the following information to standard
output:
o
Label:
Volume IO:
Owner IO:
File number:
File· section:
File: IO:
File written:
VOLBK2
john doe
1
1
n 27 backup
1983/02/17 18:00:39 EST
Starting write:
o
Write complete.
3. $ wbak -f 1 -own "john doe" -yid IIYo1bkP ug/[a-f]?*_examp1e -1
This command uses wildcards to match only those files in the "ug" subdirector~ of the
current working directory whose names begin with the letters "a" through IIfll and end with
II _ example II •
When this command is executed, WBAK writes the following information to standard
output:
Label:
Volume IO:
Owner IO:
File number:
File section:
File IO:
File written:
VOLEK1
john doe
1
1
(no IO specified)
1983/02/17 17:58:52 EST
Starting write:
o
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
(file)
lug/cmf_examp1e" written.
"ug/cmt examp1e" written.
lIug/cpb~ot example" written.
"ug/cpf_example" written.
"ug/cpt_example" written.
"ug/fpat_example u written.
"ug/fppmask_example" written.
4-327
....
------------
Shell Commands
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
(file) "ug/fst_example" written.
Write complete.
DIAGNOSTICS
I/O Error8
When WBAK has an I/O error, it attempts the operation again, for a total of five times.
After the fourth retry fails, WBAK prints out an error message describing which type of
error occurred. If the error was during an attempt to write to a tape, WBAK skips the tape
block which caused the error, and tries to write the same data in the next block. Note that
no data is lost, but RBAK will return an I/O error when it tries to read that block. If the
write attempt again fails, after five tries, WBAK skips that block and tries the next. This
process will continue for a total of twenty consecutive failed blocks, at which time WBAK
aborts.
tape rewind error
An I/O error occurred.
tape write-filemark error
.
An I/O error occurred.
tape space-filemark error
An I/O error occurred.
tape space-record error
An I/O error occurred.
('
',.._..-'
i/o recovery failed
An I/O error occurred and the tape drive could not reposition for another try.
tape i/o error
An I/O error occurred.
Operator Error8
first label on volume is not VOLl label
Expected a standard label, and did not find one.
label version number in VOLl label is not
The label format is incorrect.
113
11
a HDRllabel is missing where one is required
A file on the tape does not begin with the correct format.
wrong volume, file header is inconsistent with previous trailer
The wrong continuation tape was put on the drive. This is an operator error which can
occur when a multi-tape volume is used.
magtape drive is offline
You have not put the drive on line.
C'
tape is write-protected
The write enable ring is not on the tape.
Shell Command8
4-328
- - - - - - _ ....-_
.....
_-------
WBAK (WRITE_BACKUP)
o
file not found
The tape file specified was not found.
invalid unit number
Tape unit specified is not connected. Presently, only DEV 0 is supported.
pbu is not present.
No tape unit is connected to the node. WBAK can only be run on the node connected to
the tape drive.
o
o
o
o
4-329
Shell Commands
WD (WORKING_DIRECTORY)
WD (WORKING _DIRECTORY) -- Set or display the current working directory.
FORMAT
c
WD [pathname]
WD sets the working directory for the current process to the specified directory. The
working directory is where the system looks for objects when you don't explicitly specify
a directory as a part of a pathname.
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(optional)
Specify new working directory. This may be a derived name,
but must point to a directory or link to a directory. Specifying a
file will cause an error. WD also accepts the command line
parser arguments "_II and II * II • If you specify a hyphen (-), WD
looks to standard input for the directory name. An asterisk (*)
followed by the name of a file directs WD to look inside that file
for the new working directory name.
Default if omitted: display current working directory.
EXAMPLES
1. $ wd //fred/jtj
$ wd
//fred/jtj
$ wd stuff/revised
$ wd
//fred/jtj/stuff/revised
Set new working directory.
Display the new setting.
2. $ wd -
Direct input to standard input for new
directory name.
Signal end of input with CTRL/Z.
//frodo/my_stuff
*** EOF ***
$
3. $ wd *newdir
$
Set working directory with derived name.
Display the new setting.
Direct input to a file named "newdir"
that holds the name of the new working
directory.
c
Shell Commands
4-330
WHILE
o
WHILE -- Execute a WHILE loop.
FORMAT
WHILE condition DO command ..• ENDDO
WHILE executes a command (or commands) as long as the results of a Boolean test are
true. You can extend the WHILE command over several lines if you use it interactively
or in a Shell script. When you use WHILE interactively, and extend the command over
more than one line, the Shell prompts you for each new lin~ of the command with the
$_ prompt.
ARGUMENTS
o
o
condition
(required)
Specify a command or program to execute and test for truth, or
specify a variable expression or Boolean variable to test for
truth.
II Truth II
usually means that the command executes
successfully (without any errors), or that a Shell variable
expression or Boolean is "true". (Specifically, this argument is
evaluated TRUE if it returns an abort severity level of 0 (zero).)
Refer to the DOMAIN System
information on Shell variables.
command ...
(required)
User's
Guide for
more
Specify the command(s) or program(s) to execute if 'condition'
returns TRUE.
EXAMPLES
o
1. $ eon
$ K := 3
$ WHILE «~K > 0))
$_ DO args «~k)); k
$_ ENDDO
=3
)
(body of WHILE
)
(set var
~k
- 1
K
(output of WHILE)
3
2
1
$
o
4-331
Shell Commands
XDMO (EXEOUTE _DM_ OOMMAND)
XDMC
(EXECUTE_DM_ COMMAND) --
c
Execute a DM command from the Shell.
FORMAT
XDMC dm_command [args ...]
XDMO allows you to invoke Display Manager commands from the command Shell or
from within a Shell script. This is similar to pressing the < OMD > key on the keyboard
and then typing the DM command in the DM input window, which is the usual way to
perform DM operations.
ARGUMENTS
dm_command
(required)
args ...
(optional)
Specify the Display Manager command to be executed.
Ohapter 2 for DM command descriptions.
See
c
Specify any arguments to be passed to the DM command.
These are sent directly to the DM without further processing by
the command Shell.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed
c
EXAMPLES
1. $ xdmc dq
Cause the OM to send a quit fault to the
current process. This is analagous to
the SIGP (SIGNAL_PROCESS) Shell command,
with the following important difference.
Whereas SIGP accepts an argument designating
which process to fault, this example will
send a fault to Whatever process (if any)
is pointed to by the current cursor position.
2. $ xdmc cp /com/sh
Cause the OM to create a new process and
invoke the Shell. This is the same as
pressing the key.
Shell Commands
4-332
._------------.
__
.... _..
_--
XOFF
o
XOFF -- Deactivate the Shell's -X flag.
FORMAT
XOFF
XOFF turns off the Shell's -X (execution trace) flag, which is turned on by the XON
command or by the -X option on the SH command. When the flag is off, command lines
are not displayed before execution. The flag is off by default.
XOFF requires no arguments or options.
o
o
o
o
4-333
Shell Commands
XON
c
XON -- Activate the Shell's -X flag.
FORMAT
XON
XON turns on execution tracing. Just before each command is executed, its full pathname
and arguments are written to the error output stream of the Shell. In Shell scripts, XON
can be used to show the progress being made by the script, and can help debug Shell
scripts by showing the actual arguments being passed to commands, after all Shell
processing on them is complete.
By default, execution tracing is off when a Shell is invoked.
If XON is turned on in a Shell script, it remains on until that Shell script exits, or until
over-ridden by a XOFF in a nested Shell script. When a Shell script exits, the state of
execution tracing is returned to the state in effect just before the script was invoked.
XON requires no arguments or options.
c
Shell Commands
4-334
XSUBS (EXEOUTE _ SUBSYSTEM)
c
XSUBS (EXECUTE_SUBSYSTEM) -- Run Shell script subsystem manager.
FORMAT
XSUBS pathname [args ...]
Once a protected subsystem, a subsystem manager(s), and a subsystem data object(s)
exist, any user can execute the manager program. To run a binary manager program,
you simply execute the program. To run a Shell script manager program, you must use
the XSUBS command. Note that in order to see the name of a subsystem created on
another node, you must copy the file /SYS/SYBSYS/Subsystem_name to your node. If
you do not copy this file, you can use the subsystem managers to operate on the objects,
but when you ask to display the name of the subsystem,you will get an error message
like the following:
o
$ subs //fred/jtj/com/top_secret
?(subs) Can't show sUbsystem manager type for "//fred/jtj/com/top_secret"
- sUbsystem name not found (US/aclm)
$
ARGUMENTS
pathname
(required)
o
args ...
(optional)
Specify Shell script containing the subsystem manager to be
executed. Note that this script must contain the commands
SUBS -UP and SUBS -DOWN in order to enter and exit the
subsystem.
Specify arguments to be passed to the Shell script.
Default if omitted: no arguments passed
o
EXAMPLES
Suppose you have an append-only list that you wish to protect. Anyone can read the list,
and append to the list, but no one can overwrite previously existing contents. Assume that
the subsystem 'append_only' already exists. Then the 'APP' Shell script, which appends
standard input to an append-only file, would look like this:
APP --- append to an append_only file
SUBS-UP
CATF » . . . 1
# append to the file passed as first argument
SUBS -DOWN
#
To make APP a manager of the 'append_ only' subsystem, do
ENSUBS append_only
SUBS APP append_only -MGR
***
o
EOF
#
enter sUbsystem
****
4-335
-_ _._----
....._..........._-_ .... ..
Shell Commands
XSUBS (EXECUTE _ SUBSYSTEM)
A run of APP would look like this:
aofile
# execute
this is the stuff that is appended
*** EOF ***
XSUBS APP
APP
on 'aofile'
'\,... _.... "
C ~·
/
Shell Commands
4-336
o
Index
B
A
o
o
o
AA 2-2
Abort severity 4-2. 4-229
Abort text search 2-3. 2-66
ABRT 2-3
Absolute mode 4-277
Absolute/relative mode 4-278
ABTSEV 4-2
Access control 4-4. 4-88.
4-238
Access rights 4-92
Accounts 4-85
Acknowledge DM alarms 2-2.
2-6
ACL 4-4
ACLs
display or copy 4-4
edit 4-88
explained 4-91
salvage 4-238
AD 2-4
Add to a window group 2-87
Address space. list 4~ 160
AL 2-5
Alarm server 4-245
Alarms
acknowledge 2-2
pop window 2-6
send 4-245
Analyze network performance
4-190. 4-193. 4-213
AP 2-6
AR 2-7
ARCF 4-7
Archive files 4-7
ARGS 4-9
Arrow keys
move down one line 2-4
move left one character
2-5
move right one character
2-7
move up one line 2-9
set scale factors 2-8
AS 2-8
ASCII carriage control 4-202.
4-205
Assign user input to variables
4-225. 4-227. 4-228
AU 2-9
Autohold mode. window 2-81
Background color. display
2-10
Background process output
4-17. 4-18
Backup history 4-294
Badspots. described D-1
BGC 2-10
See also INV
BIND 4-10
Bind object modules 4-10
BLDT 4-16
BOFF 4-17
BON 4-18
Boot Shell 2-36
C
CALENDAR 4-19. A-I
Cancel ECHOing 2-66
Cancel text search 2-3. 2-66
Carriage control 4-202. 4-205
CASE 2-11
change in text 2-11.
4-275
CASE construct 4-243
Case sensitivity 2-63
Catalog a node 4-55
Catalog an object 4-58
Catalog uncatalogued objects
4-126
Catenate files 4-20
CATF 4-20
CC 2-12
CDM
CE 2-13
Change
case of text 2-11. 4-275
home directory 2-47. 4-21
icon into window 2-39
object name 4-22
password 2-46. 4-24
window into icon 2-39
window position 2-91. \
2-92
window size 2-85. 2-86
Check for file existence 4-121
Check internet router 4-230.1
Check variable existence
4-122
Index-l
CHHDIR 4-21
CHN 4-22
CHPASS 4-24
CHPAT 4-25
Close a pad 2-82
Close a window 2-82
CMACCT 4-27.1
CMDF 2-14
CMF 4-28
CMPPO 4-29.1
CMS 2-15
CMSRF 4-30
CMT 4-31
Command line interpreter
4-250
Command line parser 3-4
standard command options
3-6
Command search rules 4-53
Compare
account files 4-27.1
directory trees 4-31
files 4-28, 4-30
PPO files 4-29.1
strings for equality 4-117
Conditional statement 4-155,
4-243
Continue a process 2-23
Conventions
in this manual 2
Convert file types 4-59
Coordinates
X/V 1-2
Copy
directory tree 4-39
display image 2-97
entire display 4-38
file 4-34
link 4-36
system boot file 4-33
text to paste buffer 2-95
window 2-12
Count strings in a file 4-128
CP 2-16
CPB 2-18
CPBOOT 4-33
CPF 4-34
CPL 4-36
CPO 2-20
CPS 2-21
CPSCR 4-38
CPT 4-39
CPU time, show 4-224
CRD 4-42
Create
directory 4-42
edit pad 2-13
file (zero-length) 4-44
link 4-45
local registry 4-49
network registry 4-49
paste buffer 2-18
protected subsystem 4-51
read-only edit pad 2-22
remote process 4-46
type object 4-5.1.2
types 4-51.1
user account 4-85
user change request 4-52
window group 2-87
window to transcript pad
4-48
Create a process 2-16
background 2-20
server 2-21
CREFS 4-43
CRF 4-44
CRL 4-45
Cross-reference text strings
4-43
CRP 4-46
CRPAD 4-48
CRRGY 4-49
CRSUBS 4-51
CRTY 4-51.1
CRTYOBJ· 4-51.2
CRUCR 4-52
CSR 4-53
CTNODE 4-55
CTOB 4-58
Current date and time 4-61
Cursor movement
move down one line 2-4
move left one character
2-5
move right one character
2-7
move up one line 2-9
Cut and paste
copy image 2-97
copy text 2-95
cut text 2-96
paste text 2-98
Cut text to paste buffer 2-96
CV 2-22
CVT_REC_UASC 4-59·
Index-2
---------------,-------------------~
o
o
o
o
o
DATE 4-61
DC 2-23
DCALC 4-62
DEBUG 4-65
Debug high level programs
4-65
Declare keyboard type 2-43
Define user names 4-102
Defining keys 2-44
Defining points and regions
1-1
Delete
character under cursor
2-28
directory 4-72
duplicate lines from file
4-69
file 4-70
link 4-71
preceding character 2-29
types 4-72.1
variables 4-73
window from window group
2-88
Desk calculator functions 4-62
Directory
copy 4-39
create 4-42
delete 4-72
list contents 4-167
naming 4-189
salvage 4-239
working 4-302
Disks
dismount 4-74
initialize 4-157, D-l
mount 4-185
salvage 4-241, E-l
Dismount a volume 4-74
Display
refresh 2-59
set background color 2-10
Display process status 4-76,
4-217
DLDUPL 4-69
DLF 4-70
DLL 4-71
DLT 4-72
DLTY 4-72.1
DLVAR 4':'73
DM commands from a Shell
4-304
DM messages 2-49
DMTVOL 4-74
Documentation conventions 2
DQ 2-24
DR 2-25
DS 2-26
DSPST 4-76
Dumb terminal emulator
4-108
E
ECHO 2-27
Echo command line arguments
4-9
ED 2-28, 4-78
EDACCT 4-85
EDACL 4-88
EDFONT 4-96, C-l
EDIP 4-96.1
Edit
file (DM) 2-13
file (Shell) 4-78
font 4-96, 4-201, B-1,
C-l
IP_HELPER 4-96.1
magtape descriptor file
4-97
network root directory
4-99
stream 4-105
EDMTDESC 4-97
EDNS 4-99
EDPPO 4-102
EDSTR 4-105
EE 2-29
EEF 2-30
EI 2-31
Elapsed time, show 4-224
EM3270 4-107
EMT 4-108
Emulate 3270 terminal 4-107
Emulate dumb terminal 4-108
EN 2-32
End-of-file marks 2-30
ENSUBS 4-114
Enter a protected subsystem
4-114
ENV 2-33
Environment variables 2-33,
4-124
EOF marks 2-30
EOFF 4-115
EON 4-116
EQS 4-117
ER 2-34
Erase marks 2-15
ES 2-35
Index-3
ESA 4-118
EX 2-36
Execute DM script 2-14
EXFLD 4-119
EXISTF 4-121
EXISTVAR 4-122
EXIT 4-123
Exit DM to Boot Shell 2-36
Exit from a loop 4-123
Expand macro definitions
4-181
EXPORT 4-124
External symbol address
4-118
Extract fields of data 4-119
F
Fault status 4-147
File existence test 4-121
File length 4-128
File protection 4-4, 4-88,
4-238
Find blocks of text 4-142
Find spelling errors 4-145
Find text strings 1-2, 4-139,
4-142
FIND_ORPHANS 4-126
FL 2-37
FLEN 4-128
Floating-point error mask
4-144
Floppy disks
read backup 4-219
write backup 4-294
FMC 4-129
FMT 4-130
Fonts
described B-1
edit 4-96, 4-201, B-1,
C-l
load 2-37
FOR 4-137
FOR loop 4-137
Format
multiple columns 4-129
text file 4-130
FORTRAN carriage control
4-202, 4-205
FPAT 4-139
FPATB 4-142
FPPMASK 4-144
Free disk blocks, list 4-180
FSERR 4-145
FST 4-147
G
GM 2-38
Grow a window 2-85, 2-86
H
HELP 4-148
for Shell scripts 4-149
Histogram, program counter
4-151
HLPVER 4-149
Hold mode, window 2-89
Home directory 4-21
HPC 4-151
Hysteresis 4-280
ICON 2-39
Icon default positions 2-40
Icons
create 2-39
set default positions 2-40
IDF 2-40
IF 4-155
Initialize a disk volume 4-157,
D-l
INLIB 4-156
Insert characters 2-35
Insert mode 2-31
Install
types 4-156.1,4-156.2
user libraries 4-156
Interrupt a process 2-26
INTM 4-156.1
INTY 4-156.2
INV 2-42
See also BGC
Invisible windows 2-90
INVOL 4-157, D-l
IP_HELPER 4-96.1
ITEST 4-157.1
Index-4
0/
_.."""
o
K
KBO 2-43
KO 2-44
Key names
standard 1-8
Key naming conventions 1-8
Keyboards
880 map 1-9
declare type 2-43
low-profile map 1-9
Keys, defining 2-44
L
o
o
o
L 2-46
LAMF 4-158
Laminate files 4-158
Language level debugger 4-65
LAS 4-160
LBR 4-162
LCM
LCNET 4-164.1
LCNOOE 4-165
LO 4-167
Librarian utility 4-162
Libraries, install user 4-156
Line mode editor 4-78
Link
copy 4-36
create 4-45
delete 4-71
List
address space 4-160
connected networks
4-164.1
connected nodes 4-165
directory contents 4-167
installed types 4-176
locked objects 4-171
network registry sites
4-175
open streams 4-174
users logged in 4-177
variables 4-179
volume free space 4-180
LKOB 4-170
LLKOB 4-171
LO 2-48
Load a font 2-37
Locate blocks of text 4-142
Locate spelling errors 4-145
Locate text strings 1-2,
4-139, 4-142
Lock an object 4-170
Locked objects
list 4-171
lock 4-170
unlock 4-285
Log in to a node 2-46
Log in to a process 4-172
Log off a node 2-48
Log out 2-48
Logical volumes, described
0-1
Login 4-172
list users 4-177
to a node 2-46
to a process 4-172
Loops
exit from 4-123
FOR 4-137
return to top 4-197
WHILE 4-303
LOPSTR 4-174
LRGY 4-175
LTY 4-176
LUSR 4-177
LVAR 4-179
LVOLFS 4-180
M
MACRO 4-181
Magnetic tape descriptor file
4-97
Marks 2-25, 2-38, 2-57
erase 2~15
go to 2-38
place 2-25
replace 2-57
Merge files 4-262
Merge registries 4-184.1
Messages, DM 2-49
Mount a disk 4-185
Mouse characteristics 4-277
Move a file 4-187
Move a pad 2-50, 2-51,
2-53, 2-54, 2-55
'
Move a window 2-91, 2-92
Move cursor
down one line 2-4
left one character 2-5
right one character 2-7
to bottom of window 2-67
to OM window 2-68
to end of line 2-76
to front of line 2-72
to input window 2-71
Index-S
to next icon 2-75
to next tab 2-69
to next window 2-74
to previous tab 2-70
to previous window 2-73
to top of window 2-78
to window border 2-79
up one line 2-9
MRGRGY 4-184.1
MSG 2-49
MTVOL 4-185
Multiple columns 4-129
MVF 4-187
N
Naming directory 4-189
Naming server 4-99
ND 4-189
Negate a command or expression 4-198
NETMAIN 4-190
log files 4-191, 4-192
NETMAIN_CHKLOG 4-191
NETMAIN_NOTE 4-192
NETSTAT 4-193
NETSVC 4-195
Network maintenance 4-190,
4-191, 4-192
log files 4-191, 4-192
Network registry 4-85
create 4-49
list sites 4-175
salvage 4-240
Network services 4-195
Network statistics 4-193,
4-213
NEWLINE, insert 2-32
NEXT 4-197
Nibbled mode protocol 4-259
Node clock 4-19, A-I
Node specifications 3-2
Nodes, list connected 4-165
NOT 4-198
NS_HELPER 4-99
o
Object types 4-199
OBTY 4-199
OLD_EDFONT 4-201, B-1
Open streams, list 4-174
Operating system build time
4-16
Options, standard 3-6
Orphan objects 4-126
OS 4-202
Overstrike 4-202
Overstrike mode 2-31
p
Pads
close 2-82
create 2-13, 2-22
move horizontally 2-51
move to bottom 2-50
move to top 2-54
scroll by lines 2-55
scroll by pages 2-53
set read/write mode 2-58
write to a file 2-56
PAGF 4-203
Paginate a file 4-203
Password 4-24
Paste buffers 2-95, 2-96,
2-98
create 2-18
Paste text from buffer 2-98
PB 2-50
PH 2-51
Pipeline data, save 4-274
Plain mode protocol 4-258
PN 2-52
Points
defining 1-1
Pop a window 2-93
PP 2-53
PPON format 4-91, 4-102
PPRI 4-204
PRF 4-205
PRFD 4-212
Print a file 4-205, 4-212
Print server 4-216
Priority of a process 4-204
Probe network 4-213
PROBENET 4-213
Processes
continue 2-23
create 2-16
create background 2-20
create remote 4-46
create server 2-21
display status 4-76, 4-217
priority 4-204
quit 2-24
stop 2-24, 4-253
Index-6
o
o
suspend 2-26
Program counter histogram
4-151
.
Protected subsystems
create 4-51
enter 4-114
execute manager 4-307
set/display attributes
4-265
PRSVR 4-216
PST 4-217
PT 2-54
Push a window 2-93
PV 2-55
PW 2-56
Q
Quit a process 2-24
R
o
o
o
Return from current Shell level
4-229
Return to top of a loop 4-197
Reverse lines 4-230
REVL 4-230
Rights to objects 4-92
RM 2-57
RO 2-58
Routing check 4-230.1
Routing statistics 4-230.2
RS 2-59
RTCHK 4-230.1
RTSTAT 4-230.2
RTSVC 4-230.4
Rubberbanding 2-27, 2-86,
2-92
RW 2-60
RWMT 4-231
Range of text 1-4
Raw characters 2-34
RBAK 4-219
RDYM 4-224
READ 4-225
Read a backup tape 4-219
Read a file 2-22
Read a floppy disk 4-219
Read a foreign tape 4-231
Read mode 2-58
Read user input 4-225,
4-227, 4-228
READC 4-227
READLN 4-228
Ready message 4-224
Receive file from remote host
4-255
Refresh a window 2-60
Refresh screen 2-59
Regions 2-25
defining 1-2
Regular expressions 1~2, 1-4
set case sensitivity 2-63
summary 1-7
Relative mode 4-278
Remote transmissions
receive 4-255
transmit 4-257
RETURN 4-229
s
S 2-61
SALACL 4-238
SALD 4-239
SALRGY 4-240
Salvage
ACL structure 4-238
directory 4-239
disk 4-241, E-1
network registry 4-240
SALVOL 4-241, E-1
Save data in a pipeline 4-274
Save transcript pad 2~52
SC 2-63
Scrch
Screen timeout delay 4-242
Scripts
execute (DM) 2-14
Scroll mode, window 2-94
SCRTO 4-242
Search for text
abort 2-3
blocks (Shell) 4-142
in files (DM) 1-2
in files (Shell) 4-139,
4-142
SELECT 4-243
Send alarm messages 4-245
Send file to remote host 4-257
SEND_ALARM 4-245
SET 4-248
Set arrow key scale factors
2-8
Set search case sensitivity
2-63
Index-7
Set tabs 2-77
Set window color 2-42
SETVAR 4-249.1
SH 4-250
SH8
Shell
evaluate variables 4-115,
4-116
execute 4-250
execute DM command
4-304
execute script at current
level 4-261
execution trace 4-305,
4-306
handle background output
4-17, 4-18
set conditions 4-248
verify command lines
4-289, 4-290
Shell command format 3-1
Shell completion status 4-2
Shell conditions 4-248
Shell flags
- B 4-17, 4-18
-E 4-115, 4-116
-v 4-289, 4-290
-X 4-305, 4-306
Show OS version 4-16
Shrink a window 2-85, 2-86
SHUT 2-64
See also EX
Shut down system 2-64
See also EX
SID 4-91
Signal a process 4-253
SIGP 4-253
SIO line, configure 4-270
SIORF 4-255
SIOTF 4-257
SO 2-65
Sort files 4-262
SOURCE 4-261
Special characters (DM) 1-11
Special characters (Shell) 3-3
Spelling errors, find 4-145
SQ 2-66
SRF 4-262
Standard key names 1-8
Status code translation 4-264
STCODE 4-264
Stop a process 2-24, 4-253
Streams, list open 4-174
Subject identifier 4-91
SUBS 4-265
Substitute text strings 2-61,
2-65, 4-25
first occurrence only 2-65
Suspend a process 2-26
System calendar 4-19 , A-I
System ready message 4-224
c
T
Tab left 2-70
Tal? right 2-69
Tab stop settings 2-77
Tabs
move left 2-70
move right 2-69
set 2-77
Tapes
read backup 4-219
read/write foreign 4-231
write backup 4-294
TB 2-67, 4-269
TCTL 4-270
TDM 2-68
TEE 4-274
Test for file existence 4-121
Text echoing 2-27
TH 2-69
THL 2-70
TI 2-71
Time zone settings 4-281,
,~
(
\.
./
A-2
TL 2-72
TLC 4-275
TLW 2-73
TN 2-74
TNI 2-75
Touch pad characteristics
4-277
TPM 4-277
TR 2-76
Traceback from a fault 4-269
Transliterate characters 4-275
Transmit file to remote host
4-257
TS 2-77
TT 2-78
TWB 2-79
Types 4-51.1, 4-51.2,
4-72.1, 4-156.1, 4-156.2
Types, list installed 4-176
TZ 4-281
Index-8
c'
o
u
UCTNODE 4-283
UCTOB 4-284
ULKOB 4-285
Uncatalog a node 4-283
Uncatalog an object 4-284
UNDO 2-80 •
Undo DM commands 2-80
Unlock an object 4-285
User accounts 4-85
User Change Requests 4-52
User libraries 4-156
v
o
o
0
Variables
assign values from input
4-225, 4-227, 4-228
change Shell to Environment 4-124
check existence 4-122
delete 4-73
Environment 2-33, 4-124
evaluate 4-115, 4-116
list 4-179
VCTL 4-287
VOFF 4-289
Volumes
dismount 4-74
mount 4-185
VON 4-290
VSIZE 4-291
VT100 4-292
set terminal characteristics
4-287
set window pane size
4-291
terminal emulator 4-292
WGRR 2-88
WH 2-89
WHILE 4-303
WHILE loop 4-303
WI 2-90
Window boundaries 1-3, 2-84
define default 2-84
Window groups
create/add to 2-87
delete window from 2-88
Window modes
autohold 2-81
hold 2-89
scroll 2-94
visible/invisible 2-90
Windows
close 2-82
copy 2-12
copy image 2-97
create 2-13, 2-22
grow and shrink 2-85,
2-86
make icons 2-39
move 2-91, 2-92
pop/push 2-93
refresh single 2-60
set color 2-42
WM 2-91
WME 2-92
Working directory 4-302
WP 2-93
Write backup tape 4-294
Write a floppy disk 4-294
Write a foreign tape 4-231
Write edit pad to file 2-56
Write files to standard output
4-20
Write mode 2-58
WS 2-94
X
W
WA 2-81
WBAK 4-294
WC 2-82
WD 4-302
WDF 2-84
WG 2-85
WGE 2-86
WGRA 2-87
o
XIV coordinates 1-2
XC 2-95
XD 2-96
XDMC 4-304
XI 2-97
XOFF 4-305
XON 4-306
XP 2-98
XSUBS 4-307
Index-9
c
c
c
-----------------------------
o
-------
--------- ------------ -
---- --------
READER'S RESPONSE
We use readers' comments in revising and improving our documents.
Document Title: DOMAIN SY8tem Command Reference
Order No.: 002547
Revision: 04
Date of Publication: December, 1986
What is the best feature of this manual?
o
Please list any errors, omissions, or problem areas in the manual. (Identify errors by page,
section; figure, or table number wherever possible.)
What type of user are you?
o
How often do you use your system?
Nature of your work on the DOMAIN System:
Your name
o
Date
Organization
Street Address
City
State
Zip/Country
No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S. Fold on dotted lines (see reverse), tape, and mail.
o
n
S-
.,o
0'
c:
C~-~
S»
0"
co
a.
:J
2
CD
a.
:i"
CD
FOLD
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSlr"ESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 78
CHELMSFORD, MA 01824
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
APOLLO COMPUTER INC.'
Technical Publications
P.O. Box 451
Chelmsford, MA 01824
c
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------, c~
FOLD
c
o
READER'S RESPONSE
We use readers' comments in revising and improving our documents.
Document Title: DOMAIN System Command Reference.
Order No.: 002547
Revision: 04
Date of Publication: December, 1986
What is the best feature of this manual?
o
Please list any errors, omissions, or problem areas in the manual. (Identify errors by page,
section, figure, or table number wherever possible.)
What type of user are you?
o
How often do you use your system?
Nature of your work on the DOMAIN System:
Your name
o
Date
Organization
Street Address
City
State
Zip/Country
No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S. Fold on dotted lines (see reverse), tape, and mail.
o
---------
- - -
n
5-
.,0
0'
ii
I»
~I
"'--_/
0"
::J
CQ
a.
2
CD
a.
:l
CD
FOLD
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSI~~ESS
FIRST CLASS
REPLY rlaAll
PERMIT NO. 78
C
___./
e
CHELMSFORD, MA 01824
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
APOLLO COMPUTER INC.
Technical Publications
P.O. Box 451
Chelmsford, MA 01824
c
._---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------;
FOLD
- - - - -- ---
-------------------------------------------------
Instruction Sheet
C)
Insert Tabbed Divider Page:
Before Page:
DM Basics
DM Task List
DM Command Descriptions
Shell Basics
Shell Task List
Shell Command Descriptions
Index
1-1
1-13
o
o
o
o
.
_._-_.•.
__._._---_..._-_._----_ ..._ - - - -
2-1
3-1
3-9
4-1
Index-1
c.
~.-....
I
I
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.13 Paper Capture Plug-in Modify Date : 2009:08:24 12:40:31-07:00 Create Date : 2009:08:24 12:40:31-07:00 Metadata Date : 2009:08:24 12:40:31-07:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:ec105442-68a6-424a-b162-ccf9be2132f5 Instance ID : uuid:ed7249f2-b0c6-4eed-b19d-e154dbc0cf9a Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 522EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools